1

ABB OY
PSPG/BGEM

Please note that these manuals only include relevant pages for this specific project. Complete versions of the manuals can be found on the maker's homepages.

SWITCHES, PUSHBUTTONS, TERMINALS ETC.

SWITCHES AND PUSH BUTTONS SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
TERMINAL BLOCKS MANUAL WEIDMULLER
TERMINAL BLOCKS 16-35 mm² PHOENIX CONTACT

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS ETC.

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC

SIEMENS PLC
S7 300 REFERENCE MANUAL SIEMENS
S7 300 CPU 31xC and CPU 31x SIEMENS

CONTROL
BEIJER TOUCHSCREEN E1101 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

RELAYS
24 VDC RELAYS + RELAY MODULE PHOENIX CONTACT
24 VDC & 230 VAC RELAYS RELECO
 2

ABB OY
PSPG/BGEM

Please note that these manuals only include relevant pages for this specific project. Complete versions of the manuals can be found on the maker's homepages.

ENCLOSURE SYSTEMS
ASSEMBLY GUIDE TS 8 RITTAL

INDUSTRIAL SWITCHES
ETHERNET SWITCH SCALANCE SIEMENS

CONVERTERS
AC/DC-CONVERTER MSR4800W POWERNET
DC/DC-CONVERTER PHOENIX CONTACT

OTHER
GALVANIC ISOLATOR PHOENIX CONTACT
QUINT DIODE PHOENIX CONTACT
EAGLE FIREWALL HIRSCHMANN
EARTH FAULT RELAY, 24 VDC ABB
 Push Buttons and Operator Interface
Specifier’s Guide
XB5 22 mm Double Insulated

File 9001

CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Complete Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Non-Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Two Button Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Emergency Stop Operators and Yellow Contrast Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Specialty Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Pilot Lights and Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Illuminated Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Light Module Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Light Module Assemblies, Contact Blocks, Plug-In Connector Type . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Push Button Caps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Accessories and Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Schneider Electric Brands Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Push Buttons & Operator Interface - XB5 22 mm Double Insulated
General Characteristics
Components for User
Assembly ZB5-B:
1
1- Electrical Bodies
(pre-assembled)
2- Operator Heads
(pre-assembled)

Component Parts and

Accessories ZB:
3- Mounting Collar –
Standard (ZB5AZ009)
4- Contact Blocks – Screw 2
Clamp Terminal
(ZBE10•, ZBE20•)
5- Light Modules – Screw
6
Clamp Terminal (ZBV•)
for Protected LED and 8 7
Ba9 Base Lamps
6- Contact Blocks – Plug-in
16
Connector (ZBE10•)
7- Light Modules – Plug-in
4
Connector (ZBV•) for
Protected LED only
8- 2 Pin Connector and
Cables for Plug-in
Connection Electrical
Components (APE1•) 3
9- Printed Circuit Board
(PCB) Application
(Typical)
10 - Mounting Collar – PCB
Application 5
(ZB5BZ009 + 14
ZB4BZ079)
11 - Contact Blocks – PCB
Application (ZBE70•,
ZBE70•6)
13
12 - Light Modules – PCB
Application (ZBV•7) for
Protected LED only
11
13 - Legend Plates and
Holders (ZBY•, ZBZ•)
14 - Operator Head – Round
or Square (Illuminated or
Non-Illuminated)
15 - Lenses for Pilot Lights
(ZBV•) or Lenses for
Illuminated Push Buttons
(ZBW•) 9
12
16 - Labeling Software
10 15

74
© 1999 - 2000 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/00
 Push Buttons & Operator Interface - XB5 22 mm Double Insulated
General Characteristics

Environment
Protective treatment “TH”
standard version
Ambient air temperature Storage -40 to +158 °F (- 40 to +70 °C)
around the device
Operation -13 to +158 °F (- 25 to +70 °C) unless otherwise stated
Electric shock protection Conforming to IEC 60536 Class II
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 65, unless otherwise stated
IP 66, for booted push button heads
Conforming to UL 50 and CSA C22.2 No. 94 Type 1, 2, 3, 4, 4X, 12, and 13, unless otherwise stated
Resistance to 1,015 psi (70 x 105 Pa-70 bars); distance: 3.94 in (0.1 m)
high pressure cleaner Temperature: 131 °F (55 °C)
Mechanical shock protection Conforming to EN 50102 Non illuminated heads: IK 03
Illuminated heads: IK 05
Conforming to standards IEC 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC 60947-5-4,
EN 60947-1, JIS C 4520,
Marked UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 14

Product certifications UL Listed, CSA Certified Standard single contacts with screw clamp terminals: A600; Q600
Double contacts with screw clamp terminals: A600; Q600
File E164353 File LR 44087 File E164353 Contacts with “Quick-Connects”: A300; Q300
®
CCN NKCR Class 3211 03 CCN NKCR 2 Light modules with screw clamp terminals
JOYSTICK XD4-PA: A600; R300
UL Recognized, CSA Certified Standard single contacts for plug-in connector: A300; R300
Standard single contact for printed circuit board: B300; R300
BV, RINA, LROS, DNV, GL (pending) Standard single contacts and double contacts with screw clamp terminals
Terminal identification Conforming to EN 50005 and EN 50013

Characteristics of Operators and Contact Blocks

Mechanical Characteristics
Contact operation N/C or N/O Slow break
Positive operation Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 All functions incorporating a N/C contact are positive opening operation
Appendix K
Operating travel Push button Changing N/C state: 0.06 in (1.5 mm)
(to change electrical state) Changing N/O state: 0.11 in (2.6 mm)
Total travel: 0.17 in (4.3 mm)
Operating force Push button Changing N/C state: 0.79 lbf (3.5 N)
Changing N/O state: 0.85 lbf (3.8 N)
Additional contact Single N/C contact: 0.45 lbf (2 N)
(extra to change state) Single N/O contact: 0.52 lbf (2.3 N)
Double contact N/C: 0.76 lbf (3.4 N)
Double contact N/O: 1.12 lbf (5 N)
Double contact N/C + N/O: 1.03 lbf (4.6 N)
Emergency stop with N/C + N/O Standard push-pull: 10.12 lbf (45 N)
Maintained mushroom head operators Trigger action push-pull: 11.24 lbf (50 N)
Momentary mushroom head operators Standard turn to release and key release: 8.99 lbf (40 N)
Trigger action turn to release and key release: 9.89 lbf (44 N)
Operating torque Selector switches N/O contact: 1.24 lb-in (0.14 N•m)
(to change electrical state)
Additional contact (extra) N/O contact: 0.44 lb-in (0.05 N•m)
Mechanical durability Push button Momentary 5 million
(in operating cycles)
Double-headed 1 million
Push-push 500,000
to release
Selector switches Non-illuminated 3 million
Illuminated 1 million
Toggle switches 500,000
Emergency stop push button 300,000
Joystick 1 million
Standard blocks 5 million
Low power switching power blocks 500,000
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Frequency (2 to 500 Hz): 5 gn
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 All functions except mushroom head push buttons–
Half sine wave acceleration 11 ms: 50 gn
Half sine wave acceleration 18 ms: 30 gn
Mushroom head push buttons–
Half sine wave acceleration 11 ms: 10 gn

75
11/00 © 1999 - 2000 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons & Operator Interface - XB5 22 mm Double Insulated
General Characteristics

Electrical Characteristics
Cabling capacity Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Screw and captive clamp terminals
Min: 1 x 24 AWG (0.22 mm2) without cable end
1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) for linking
Max:2 x 16 AWG (1.5 mm2) with cable end
2 x 14 AWG without cable end
Cross headed screw (Pozidrive type 1) slotted for flat 4 and 5.5 mm screwdriver
Typical torque: 0.8 N•m (8.55 lb-in)
Maximum torque: 1.2 N•m (10.7 lb-in)
Contact material Silver alloy (Ag/Ni) Standard single and double blocks with screw clamp terminals
Blocks for plug-in connector
Standard blocks for printed circuit board connection
Gold flashed (Ag/Ni/Au) Low power switching contact blocks with screw clamp terminals
Low power switching contact blocks for printed circuit board connection
Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Standard blocks with screw clamp terminals: 10 A
(gG cartridge fuse conforming to IEC 60269-1)
Blocks for plug-in connector: 4 A
(gG fuse cartridge conforming to IEC 60269-1)
Standard blocks for printed circuit board connection: 4 A
(gG cartridge fuse conforming to IEC 60269-1)
Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Standard blocks (single or double) with screw clamp terminals:
Ui = 600 V, degree of pollution 3
Blocks for plug-in connector: Ui = 250 V, degree of pollution 3
Standard blocks for printed circuit board connection:
Ui = 250 V, degree of pollution 3
Rated impulse Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Standard block (single or double) with screw clamp terminals: Uimp = 6 kV
withstand voltage Blocks for plug-in connector: Uimp = 4 kV
Standard blocks for printed circuit board connection: Uimp = 4 kV
Rated operational AC supply: Standard blocks (single or double) with screw clamp terminals:
characteristics Utilization category AC-15 A600: Ue = 600 Vac and le = 1.2 A or Ue = 240 Vac and le = 3 A
Conforming to or Ue = 120 Vac and le = 6 A
IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Continuous thermal current = 10 A
Blocks for plug-in connector:
A300: Ue = 120 Vac and le = 6 A or Ue = 240 Vac and le = 3 A
Standard blocks for printed circuit board connection:
B300: Ue = 120 Vac and le = 3 A or Ue = 240 Vac and le = 1.5 A
DC supply: Standard single or double blocks with screw clamp terminals:
Utilization category DC-13 Q600: Ue = 600 Vdc and le = 0.1 A or Ue = 250 Vdc and le = 0.27 A
or Ue = 125 Vdc and le = 0.55 A
Continuous thermal current = 2.5 A
Joystick XD4-PA:
R300: Ue = 125 Vdc and le = 0.22 A or Ue = 250 Vdc and le = 0.1 A
Blocks for plug-in connector:
R300: Ue = 125 Vdc and le = 0.22 A or Ue = 250 Vdc and le = 0.1 A
Standard blocks for printed circuit board connection:
R300: Ue = 125 Vdc and le = 0.22 A or Ue = 250 Vdc and le = 0.1 A
Rated operational AC supply: Low power switching contact blocks with screw clamp terminals or for printed circuit board
characteristics Resistive load connection:
Max:24 Vac
Max:0.1 A
Electrical durability AC supply for 1 million operating cycles, utilization category Standard blocks for screw clamp terminals:
Conforming to AC-15
24 Vac 120 Vac 230 Vac
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Appendix C 4A 3A 2A
Operating rate 3600 operating
cycles/hour. Load factor: 0.5 Standard double blocks with screw clamp terminal or plug-in connector:
24 Vac 120 Vac 230 Vac
3A 1.5 A 1A
DC supply for 1 million operating cycles, utilization category Standard single blocks for screw clamp terminals:
DC-13
24 Vdc 110 Vdc
0.5 A 0.2 A
Standard double blocks with screw clamp terminal or plug-in connector:
24 Vdc 110 Vdc
0.4 A 0.15 A
Electrical reliability Failure rate
Conforming to IEC 60947-5-4
- In clean environment Standard blocks:
- at 17 V and 5 mA, λ < 10-8
- at 5 V and 1 mA, λ < 10-6
Low power switching contact blocks:
- at 5 V and 1 mA, λ < 10-8
- In dusty environment Low power switching contact blocks only: at 5 V and 1 mA, λ < 10-6

76
© 1999 - 2000 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/00
 Push Buttons & Operator Interface - XB5 22 mm Double Insulated
General Characteristics

Characteristics of Light Modules

Mechanical Characteristics
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Frequency (12 to 500 Hz): 5 gn

Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 Half sine wave acceleration 11 ms: 50 gn
Half sine wave acceleration 18 ms: 30 gn

Electrical Characteristics
Cabling capacity Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Screw and captive clamp terminals
Min: 1 x 24 AWG (0.22 mm2) without cable end
1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) for linking
Max: 2 x 16 AWG (1.5 mm2) with cable end

Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Direct supply pilot light modules (BA 9s bulbs):
Ui = 250 V, degree of pollution 3
Pilot light modules with protected LED: Ui = 250 V, degree of pollution 3
Pilot light modules with transformer: Ui = 600 V, degree of pollution 3

Rated impulse Conforming to IEC 60947-1 Direct supply pilot light modules (BA 9s bulbs): Uimp = 4 kV
withstand voltage Pilot light modules with protected LED: Uimp = 4 kV
Pilot light modules with transformer: Uimp = 6 kV

Specific Characteristics of Protected LED Light Modules Only

Voltage limits Nominal voltage 24 V: 19.2 to 30 Vdc; 21.6 to 24.6 Vac
120 V: 102 to 132 Vac
240 V: 195 to 264 Vac

Current consumption Applicable to all colors 24 Vac/Vdc supply blocks: 18 mA

120 Vac supply blocks: 14 mA
240 Vac supply blocks: 14 mA

Service life At nominal voltage and 100,000 hours

at an ambient temperature
of 77 °C (25 °C)

Surge withstand Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 2/1 kV

Resistance to fast transients Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV

Resistance to Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m

electromagnetic fields

Resistance to Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 8/6 kV

electrostatic discharges

Electromagnetic emission Conforming to EN 55011 Class B

Specific Characteristics of Hour Counters and Annunciators

Voltage limits Hour counter and annunciator ± 10% of nominal voltage

Current consumption Hour counter XB5DSB: 7 to 15 mA

XB5DSG: 8 mA
XB5DSM: 8 mA

Annunciator 5 mA

77
11/00 © 1999 - 2000 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
 Push Buttons & Operator Interface - XB5 22 mm Double Insulated
Complete Devices

Non-Illuminated Emergency Stop Mushroom Head Push Buttons, Ø 40 mm (Red)

(screw clamp terminal connections)
Type of Contact
Shape of Head Type of Push Catalog Number
N/O N/C
Trigger action
XB5AS9445 push-pull
1 1 XB5AT845 (ZB5AZ105 + ZB5AT84)

Trigger action
turn to release
1 1 XB5AS8445 (ZB5AZ105 + ZB5AS844)

Trigger action
Key release
1 1 XB5AS9445 (ZB5AZ105 + ZB5AS944)
(No. 455)

Push-pull
XB5AT42
– 1 XB5AT42 (ZB5AZ102 + ZB5AT4)

Turn to release
– 1 XB5AS542 (ZB5AZ102 + ZB5AS54)

Key release
(No. 455)
– 1 XB5AS142 (ZB5AZ102 + ZB5AS14)

XB5AS542
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches and Key Switches (screw clamp terminal connections)

Type of Type of Contact

Shape of Head Number and Type of Positions Catalog Number
Operator N/O N/C
Standard lever, 2 - maintained
black 1 – XB5AD21 (ZB5AZ101 + ZB5AD2)

3 - maintained
XB5AD33 (ZB5AZ103 + ZB5AD3)
2 –
3 - momentary to
center XB5AD53 (ZB5AZ103 + ZB5AD5)
XB5AD33
Extended lever, 2 - maintained
black 1 – XB5AJ21 (ZB5AZ101 + ZB5AJ2)

3 - maintained
XB5AJ33 (ZB5AZ103 + ZB5AJ3)
2 –
3 - momentary to
center XB5AJ53 (ZB5AZ103 + ZB5AJ5)

Key
(No. 455) XB5AG21 (ZB5AZ101 + ZB5AG2)
XB5AJ33
2 - maintained
1 – XB5AG41 (ZB5AZ101 + ZB5AG4)

2 - momentary to
left XB5AG61 (ZB5AZ101 + ZB5AG6)

XB5AG03 (ZB5AZ103 + ZB5AG0)

XB5AG33 2 – 3 - maintained
XB5AG33 (ZB5AZ103 + ZB5AG3)

The symbol indicates key withdrawal position(s).

79
11/00 © 1999 - 2000 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons & Operator Interface - XB5 22 mm Double Insulated
Complete Devices

Pilot Lights with Protected LED (screw clamp terminal connections)

Shape of Head Supply Voltage Color Catalog Number
White XB5AVB1 (ZB5AVB1 + ZB5AV013)

Green XB5AVB3 (ZB5AVB3 + ZB5AV033)

24 Vac/Vdc Red XB5AVB4 (ZB5AVB4 + ZB5AV043)

Yellow XB5AVB5 (ZB5AVB5 + ZB5AV053)

Blue XB5AVB6 (ZB5AVB6 + ZB5AV063)

White XB5AVG1 (ZB5AVG1 + ZB5AV013)

Green XB5AVG3 (ZB5AVG3 + ZB5AV033)

XB5AVB1
110-120 Vac Red XB5AVG4 (ZB5AVG4 + ZB5AV043)

Yellow XB5AVG5 (ZB5AVG5 + ZB5AV053)

Blue XB5AVG6 (ZB5AVG6 + ZB5AV063)

Pilot lights for BA 9s Bulb (screw clamp terminal connections)

Shape of Head Supply Voltage Color Catalog Number
Direct supply, for BA 9s (incandescent, LED, neon) U ≤ 250 V, 2.4 W bulb (bulb not included)

White XB5AV61 (ZB5AV6 + ZB5AV01)

XB5AV63 Green XB5AV63 (ZB5AV6 + ZB5AV03)
≤ 250 Vac/Vdc
Red XB5AV64 (ZB5AV6 + ZB5AV04)

Yellow XB5AV65 (ZB5AV6 + ZB5AV05)

Transformer type with 1.2 VA, 6 V secondary. BA 9s incandescent bulb included

White XB5AV31 (ZB5AV3 + ZB5AV01)

110-120 Vac Green XB5AV33 (ZB5AV3 + ZB5AV03)

50/60 Hz Red XB5AV34 (ZB5AV3 + ZB5AV04)
XB5AV34
Yellow XB5AV35 (ZB5AV3 + ZB5AV05)

Illuminated Push Buttons, Momentary, Flush (screw clamp terminal connections)

Type of
Contact Supply Color of
Shape of Head Description Catalog Number
Voltage Push
N/O N/C

Protected LED White XB5AW31B5 (ZB5AW0B15 + ZB5AW313)

Green XB5AW33B5 (ZB5AW0B35 + ZB5AW333)

24 Vac/Vdc Red XB5AW34B5 (ZB5AW0B45 + ZB5AW343)

XB5AW31B5
Yellow XB5AW35B5 (ZB5AW0B55 + ZB5AW353)

Blue XB5AW36B5 (ZB5AW0B65 + ZB5AW363)

1 1
White XB5AW31G5 (ZB5AW0G15 + ZB5AW313)

Green XB5AW33G5 (ZB5AW0G35 + ZB5AW333)

110-120 Vac Red XB5AW34G5 (ZB5AW0G45 + ZB5AW343)

Yellow XB5AW35G5 (ZB5AW0G55 + ZB5AW353)

Blue XB5AW36G5 (ZB5AW0G65 + ZB5AW363)

XB5AW3465 Direct supply White XB5AW3165 (ZB5AW065 + ZB5AW31)

for BA 9s
2.4 W max. bulb Green XB5AW3365 (ZB5AW065 + ZB5AW33)
1 1 ≤ 250 Vac/Vdc
Not included Red XB5AW3465 (ZB5AW065 + ZB5AW34)

Yellow XB5AW3565 (ZB5AW065 + ZB5AW35)

Transformer type White XB5AW3135 (ZB5AW035 + ZB5AW31)

1.2 VA, 6 V
secondary. 110-120 Vac Green XB5AW3335 (ZB5AW035 + ZB5AW33)
BA 9s 50/60 Hz Red XB5AW3435 (ZB5AW035 + ZB5AW34)
incandescent bulb
included Yellow XB5AW3535 (ZB5AW035 + ZB5AW35)
1 1
XB5AW3335 White XB5AW3145 (ZB5AW045 + ZB5AW31)

230-240 Vac Green XB5AW3345 (ZB5AW045 + ZB5AW33)

50/60 Hz Red XB5AW3445 (ZB5AW045 + ZB5AW34)

Yellow XB5AW3545 (ZB5AW045 + ZB5AW35)

80
© 1999 - 2000 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/00
 Push Buttons & Operator Interface - XB5 22 mm Double Insulated
Non-Illuminated Operators

Non-Illuminated Operators, Momentary - Unmarked

Shape of Head Type of Push Color of Cap Catalog Number

Flush, without color cap ■ – ZB5AA0

Flush, with set of 6 color caps 6 colors ▲ ZB5AA9

White ZB5AA1
ZB5AA0 Black ZB5AA2
Green ZB5AA3
Flush Red ZB5AA4
Yellow ZB5AA5
Blue ZB5AA6
Grey ZB5AA8
White ZB5AA18
Green ZB5AA38
ZB5AA5 Flush with transparent cap,
Red ZB5AA48
for insertion of legend ●
Yellow ZB5AA58
Blue ZB5AA68
White ZB5AL1
Black ZB5AL2
Green ZB5AL3
Extended
Red ZB5AL4
Yellow ZB5AL5

ZB5AL3 Blue ZB5AL6

White ZB5AP1
Black ZB5AP2

Booted (clear) Green ZB5AP3

Color of cap unobscured Red ZB5AP4
Yellow ZB5AP5
Blue ZB5AP6
White ZB5AP18
Green ZB5AP38
Booted (clear)
for insertion of legend ● Red ZB5AP48
ZB5AP1 Color of cap unobscured
Yellow ZB5AP58
Blue ZB5AP68
White ZB5AA14
Black ZB5AA24

Flush Plunger Green ZB5AA34

(with high guard) Red ZB5AA44
Yellow ZB5AA54
Blue ZB5AA64
White ZB5CA1
ZB5CA2
Black ZB5CA2
Green ZB5CA3
Flush
Red ZB5CA4
Yellow ZB5CA5
Blue ZB5CA6
White ZB5CL1
Black ZB5CL2
Green ZB5CL3
ZB5CA5 Extended
Red ZB5CL4
Yellow ZB5CL5
Blue ZB5CL6

■ Color cap to be ordered separately, see page 100.

▲ Six different color caps included with head (white, black, green, red, yellow, blue).
● For legend ordering information see page 99.

81
11/00 © 1999 - 2000 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons & Operator Interface - XB5 22 mm Double Insulated
Emergency Stop Operators and Yellow Contrast Plates

Mushroom Heads for Maintained Push Buttons

Shape of Head Type of Push Diameter of Head Color Catalog Number
Trigger action
Push-pull ▲
40 mm Red ZB5AT84

ZB5AS844 Trigger action 30 mm Red ZB5AS834

Turn to release ▲
40 mm Red ZB5AS844

Trigger action 30 mm Red ZB5AS934

Key release 40 mm Red ZB5AS944 ■
(No. 455) ▲
60 mm Red ZB5AS964

Push-pull Black ZB5AT24

30 mm
Red ZB5AT44

ZB5AS934 Black ZB5AT2

40 mm
Red ZB5AT4

Black ZB5AX2
60 mm
Red ZB5AX4

Turn to release Black ZB5AS42

30 mm
Red ZB5AS44

Black ZB5AS52

40 mm Red ZB5AS54

ZB5AT4 Yellow ZB5AS55

Black ZB5AS62
60 mm
Red ZB5AS64

Key release Black ZB5AS72

30 mm
(No. 455) Red ZB5AS74

Black ZB5AS12
40 mm
Red ZB5AS14 ▲

Black ZB5AS22
60 mm
ZB5AS54 Red ZB5AS24

■ Other key numbers:

- key No. 421E: add the suffix 12 to the reference.
- key No. 458A: add the suffix 10 to the reference.
- key No. 520E: add the suffix 14 to the reference.
- key No. 3131A: add the suffix 20 to the reference.
Example:
The reference for a Ø 40 mm red mushroom head for a trigger action, maintained push button, with release by key No. 421E
becomes: ZB5AS94412.
▲ Maximum number of contact blocks fitted to associated body: 4.

ZB5AS64

Circular Legends for Emergency Stop Mushroom Heads (yellow background)

Diameter Text Catalog Number
Blank ZBY9101
60 mm
EMERGENCY STOP ZBY9330
Blank ZBY8101
90 mm
EMERGENCY STOP ZBY8330

ZBY9330

84
© 1999 - 2000 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/00
 Push Buttons & Operator Interface - XB5 22 mm Double Insulated
Selector Switches

Non-Illuminated Selector Switches ■ ▲

Shape of Head Type of Operator Number and Type of Positions Catalog Number
Standard lever, black 2 - maintained
ZB5AD2
For colored lever add the
following code to the end 2 - momentary from
of the part number: right to left ZB5AD4

01 - white 3 - maintained
ZB5AD3
03 - green
ZB5AD• 04 - red 3 - momentary to center
ZB5AD5
05 - yellow
3 - momentary from
06 - blue left to center ZB5AD7
(example ZB5AD204) 3 - momentary from
ZB5AD8
right to center
Extended lever, black 2 - maintained
ZB5AJ2

2 - momentary from
right to left ZB5AJ4

3 - maintained
ZB5AJ3

3 - momentary to center
ZB5AJ5
ZB5AJ3
3 - momentary from
left to center ZB5AJ7

3 - momentary from
right to center ZB5AJ8

Non-Illuminated Key Switches ■

Shape of Head Type of Operator Number and Type of Positions ▲ Catalog Number ●
Key (No. 455)
ZB5AG2
2 - maintained
ZB5AG4

2 - momentary from
ZB5AG6
ZB5AG• right to left

ZB5AG0

ZB5AG3

3 - maintained ZB5AG5

ZB5AG9

ZB5AG09

3 - momentary from
left to center ZB5AG1

3 - momentary
to center ZB5AG7

ZB5AG8
3 - momentary from
right to center
ZB5AG08

The symbol indicates key withdrawal position(s).

■ For actuation of outside contacts only.
▲ See selector switch sequence charts on page 91.
● Other key numbers:
- key No. 421E: add the suffix 12 to the reference.
- key No. 458A: add the suffix 10 to the reference.
- key No. 520E: add the suffix 14 to the reference.
- key No. 3131A: add the suffix 20 to the reference.
Example:
The catalog number for a head with key No. 421E for a 2 position maintained, lockable selector switch, with key withdrawal from
the left-hand position, becomes: ZB5AG212.

85
11/00 © 1999 - 2000 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons & Operator Interface - XB5 22 mm Double Insulated
Contact Blocks

Contact Blocks (Mounting Base with Contact Blocks)

Type of Contact
Description Catalog Number
N/O N/C
Screw clamp terminal 1 – ZB5AZ101
ZB5AZ101 connections
– 1 ZB5AZ102
2 – ZB5AZ103
– 2 ZB5AZ104
1 1 ZB5AZ105
1 2 ZB5AZ141
Gold-Flashed 1 – ZB5AZ1016
Low Power Switching – 1 ZB5AZ1026
(5 - 24 V, 0.1 - 100 mA) 2 – ZB5AZ1036
ZB5AZ102 Dust Protected – 2 ZB5AZ1046
(IP5x per IEC 60529)
1 1 ZB5AZ1056
Quick-Connect 1 – ZB5AZ1013
(1 x 0.250" or 2 x 0.110") – 1 ZB5AZ1023
2 – ZB5AZ1033
– 2 ZB5AZ1043
1 1 ZB5AZ1053
ZBE101
Ring Tongue Compatible 1 – ZB5AZ1019
(# 8 stud, < 5.8 mm width) – 1 ZB5AZ1029

Add-On Contact Block (with screw clamp terminal connections) ■

Type of Contact
Description Catalog Number
ZBE102 N/O N/C
Standard single 1 – ZBE101
contact blocks
– 1 ZBE102
Standard double 2 – ZBE203
contact blocks
– 2 ZBE204
1 1 ZBE205

ZBE203 Special contact blocks 1 – ZBE1016

(for low power switching
– 1 ZBE1026
and dust protected) ▲

Specialty Add-On Contact Blocks

Quick-Connect 1 – ZBE1013
(1 x 0.250" or 2 x 0.110") – 1 ZBE1023

Ring Tongue Compatible 1 – ZBE1019

ZBE204 (# 8 stud, < 5.8 mm width) – 1 ZBE1029

Body/Mounting Collar
For use with Catalog Number
Electrical block (contact or light module) ZB5AZ009

Clip-on Legend Holders for Electrical Blocks (Contact Blocks and Light Modules)
(with screw clamp terminal connections)
ZB5AZ009 Identification of an XB5A control or signalling unit ZBZ001

Sheet of 50 Blank Legends

Legend holder ZBZ001 ZBY001

■ The contact blocks enable variable composition of body sub-assemblies and can be stacked to 3 rows, either: 3 rows of 3 single
ZBZ001 contacts or 1 row of 3 double contacts + 1 row of 3 single contacts (double contact blocks occupy 2 rows).
▲ Cannot stack additional contact blocks onto these blocks.

86
© 1999 - 2000 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/00
Push Buttons & Operator Interface - XB5 22 mm Double Insulated
Pilot Lights and Light Modules

Pilot Light Heads

For Use with Body
Shape of Head Comprising Light Color of Lens Catalog Number
Source Type
Protected LED only White ZB5AV013
ZB5AV053 Green ZB5AV033
Red ZB5AV043
Yellow ZB5AV053
Blue ZB5AV063
Protected LED only White ZB5AV013S
Fresnel lens Green ZB5AV033S
Red ZB5AV043S
ZB5AV01 Yellow ZB5AV053S
Blue ZB5AV063S
For BA 9s incandescent White ZB5AV01
bulb, neon or LED only Green ZB5AV03
Red ZB5AV04
Yellow ZB5AV05
Blue ZB5AV06
Clear ZB5AV07
Protected LED only White ZB5CV013
Green ZB5CV033
Red ZB5CV043
Yellow ZB5CV053
Blue ZB5CV063
ZB5CV063

Complete Bodies (Mounting Collar + Light Module for BA 9s Incandescent Bulb, Neon or LED)
Description Light Source Supply Voltage Catalog Number
Screw clamp terminal connections ▼
Direct supply BA 9s bulb 2.4 W max. ≤ 250 Vac or Vdc
ZB5AV6
Not included ■
Transformer type BA 9s incandescent 110-120 Vac, 50/60 Hz ZB5AV3
1.2 VA, 6 V secondary bulb included
ZB5AV6 230-240 Vac, 50/60 Hz ZB5AV4
400-50 Hz ZB5AV5
440-480 Vac, 60 Hz ZB5AV8
550-600 Vac, 60 Hz ZB5AV9

■ Bulb can be ordered separately, see page 101, or add voltage (24, 120) for bulb supplied.

Complete Bodies (Mounting Collar + Light Module with Protected LED)

ZB5AV3
Light Source Supply Voltage Color of Light Source Catalog Number
Screw clamp terminal connections ▼
Protected LED White ZB5AVB1
Green ZB5AVB3
24 Vac or Vdc Red ZB5AVB4
Yellow ZB5AVB5
Blue ZB5AVB6
White ZB5AVG1
ZB5AV•• Green ZB5AVG3
110-120 Vac Red ZB5AVG4
Yellow ZB5AVG5
Blue ZB5AVG6

▼ For “Quick-Connect” version, add 3 to the end of the part number (Example: ZB5AV63) (1 x 0.250" or 2 x 0.110").

88
© 1999 - 2000 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/00
 Push Buttons & Operator Interface - XB5 22 mm Double Insulated
Illuminated Operators

Heads for Momentary Illuminated Push Buttons

Shape of Head Type of Push Color Catalog Number
Only use with protected LED light modules

Flush White ZB5AW313

Green ZB5AW333

Red ZB5AW343

Yellow ZB5AW353
ZB5AW313
Blue ZB5AW363

Flush with clear boot White ZB5AW513

Green ZB5AW533

Red ZB5AW543

Yellow ZB5AW553

Blue ZB5AW563

ZB5AW363 Flush for insertion of legend White ZB5AA18

(lens supplied (not installed) Green ZB5AA38

Red ZB5AA48

Yellow ZB5AA58

Blue ZB5AA68

Extended White ZB5AW113

ZB5AW143 Green ZB5AW133

Red ZB5AW143

Yellow ZB5AW153

Blue ZB5AW163

Mushroom (40 mm) Green ZB5AW433

Red ZB5AW443

Yellow ZB5AW453

Blue ZB5AW463

Clear ZB5AW473

Flush for insertion of legend White ZB5CW313

Green ZB5CW333

Red ZB5CW343

Yellow ZB5CW353
ZB5CW113
Blue ZB5CW363

Extended White ZB5CW113

Green ZB5CW133

Red ZB5CW143

Yellow ZB5CW153

Blue ZB5CW163

Only use with light modules for a BA 9s incandescent bulb, neon or LED

Flush White ZB5AW31

Green ZB5AW33

Red ZB5AW34

Yellow ZB5AW35

Blue ZB5AW36
ZB5AW33 Clear ZB5AW37

Extended White ZB5AW11

Green ZB5AW13

Red ZB5AW14

Yellow ZB5AW15

Blue ZB5AW16

Clear ZB5AW17

89
11/00 © 1999 - 2000 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons & Operator Interface - XB5 22 mm Double Insulated
Light Module Assemblies

Complete Bodies (Mounting Collar + Single Contact Block + Light Module with Protected LED)

Type of Contact ■
Light Source Supply Voltage Color Catalog Number
N/O N/C
Screw clamp terminal connections
Protected LED 24 Vac or Vdc White ZB5AW0B11
Green ZB5AW0B31
1 – Red ZB5AW0B41
Yellow ZB5AW0B51
Blue ZB5AW0B61
White ZB5AW0B12
Green ZB5AW0B32
– 1 Red ZB5AW0B42
Yellow ZB5AW0B52
Blue ZB5AW0B62
White ZB5AW0B13
Green ZB5AW0B33
2 – Red ZB5AW0B43
Yellow ZB5AW0B53
Blue ZB5AW0B63
ZB5AW0••1 White ZB5AW0B15
Green ZB5AW0B35
1 1 Red ZB5AW0B45
Yellow ZB5AW0B55
Blue ZB5AW0B65
Protected LED 110-120 Vac White ZB5AW0G11
Green ZB5AW0G31
1 – Red ZB5AW0G41
Yellow ZB5AW0G51
Blue ZB5AW0G61
White ZB5AW0G12
Green ZB5AW0G32
– 1 Red ZB5AW0G42
Yellow ZB5AW0G52
Blue ZB5AW0G62
White ZB5AW0G13
Green ZB5AW0G33
2 – Red ZB5AW0G43
Yellow ZB5AW0G53
Blue ZB5AW0G63
White ZB5AW0G15
Green ZB5AW0G35
1 1 Red ZB5AW0G45
Yellow ZB5AW0G55
Blue ZB5AW0G65

■ Can be fitted with additional contact blocks, see below.

Contact Block and Light Module (with screw clamp terminal connections) ▲

Type of Contact ▲ Color of Light

Supply Light Source Supply Voltage Catalog Number
Source
N/O N/C
Screw clamp terminal connections

ZB5AW065 Direct supply BA 9s 1 – – ZB5AW061

2.4 W max. bulb – 1 – ZB5AW062
≤ 250 Vac or Vdc
Not included ● 2 – – ZB5AW063
1 1 – ZB5AW065
Transformer type BA 9s 110-120 Vac 1 – – ZB5AW031
1.2 VA, 6 V incandescent 50/60 Hz 1 1 – ZB5AW035
secondary bulb included 230-240 Vac 1 – – ZB5AW041
50/60 Hz 1 1 – ZB5AW045
400 Vac 1 – – ZB5AW051
50 Hz 1 1 – ZB5AW055
ZB5AW035 ▲ Can be fitted with additional contact blocks, page 93.
● Bulb can be ordered separately, page 101, or add voltage (24, 120) for bulb supplied.

92
© 1999 - 2000 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/00
Push Buttons & Operator Interface - XB5 22 mm Double Insulated
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Components

Connecting Control Units to Printed Circuit Boards (PCB) Installation Precautions:

Panel drilling
1. Minimum circuit board thickness:
Y
1.18 Ø 0.88 ± 0.02 1.18
0.063 in (1.6 mm)
30 Ø 22.4 ± 0.4 30 2. Cut-out diameter:
0.88 in ± 0.004 (22.4 mm ±0.1)
3. Orientation of body/mounting collar
ZB5AZ009: ± 2° 30'
1.57
40

4. ZBZ005 and ZBZ006 mounting screw

tightening torque: (0.6 N•m)

Head ZB5A•
Panel

B''' ± T1
Screw
ZB5AZ079

B'' ± T1
1.57

ZBE70•/ZBVB•7
40

ZBZ010
B' ± T1
Printed circuit board
B ± T1

A ± T1
2.03
A' ± T1
51.45 2.12
A" ± T1
53.85
Printed Circuit Board Drillings (viewed from electrical block side)
Y Dual Dimensions inches
mm

2
Mounting with 1 1 Two elongated holes for ZBZ005
adaptor ZBZ010.
screw access.
0.5
12.7 2 One - 0.1 inch ±0.002 (2.6 mm ±0.05)
4
diameter hole for orientation of the
Direct mounting of N/O
contact block ZBE701. ZBZ010 adaptor.
1 0.5
0.24 12.7
3 3 One - 0.07 inch ±0.002 (1.8 mm
6 0.1
3 2.54 ±0.05) diameter hole for orientation of
D''' ± T2

Direct mounting of N/C 4 contact block.

contact block ZBE702.
0.5
5 0.24 4 Two - 0.05 inch ±0.002 (1.2 mm ±
D'' ± T2

12.7
6 6 0.1 0.05) diameter holes.
5 2.54
D' ± T2

Direct mounting of three

contact blocks.
5 Two elongated holes for ZBZ006
0.5 screw access.
D ± T2

0.47 12.7
7 12 0.2
4 6 Six - 0.05 inch ±0.002 (1.2 mm ± 0.05)
5.08
Direct mounting of LED
diameter holes.
pilot lights ZBVB X
5 0.2 7 Four - 0.07 inch ±0.002 (1.8 mm ±
5.08 0.05) diameter holes.
C ± T2
C' ± T2
Dual Dimensions inches
C" ± T2 mm

General Tolerances of the Panel and Printed Circuit Board

The cumulative tolerance must not exceed 0.02 inch (0.5 mm): T1 + T2 = 0.02 inch (0.5 mm) maximum.
Related to horizontal direction XRelated to vertical direction Y
Dimensions: A on panelDimensions: B on panel
C on printed circuit boardD on printed circuit board
96
© 1999 - 2000 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/00
 Push Buttons & Operator Interface - XB5 22 mm Double Insulated
Accessories and Replacement Parts

Accessories
Description Application Color Catalog Number
ZBZ160• Metal guards Black ZBZ1602
(padlocking possible) Red ZBZ1604
Ø 40 mm Emergency stop and
mushroom head push buttons Yellow ZBZ1605

Blue ZBZ1606
ZB4SZ3 ZB5AZ31 Plastic blanking plug, round, For Ø 22 mm units
ZB5SZ3
black ■ with round heads

Plastic blanking plug, square, For Ø 22 mm units

ZB5SZ5
black ■ with square heads

Square insert To give square appearance to

ZB5AZ31
ZB5A round heads
ZB5AZ905
Mounting nut Operator ZB5AZ901

Tool For tightening screw ZB5AZ901 ZB5AZ905

Plate Anti-rotation of head ZB5AZ902

ZB5AZ902 ■ Mounting nut included with blanking plug.

Modules for AS-i Interface with Ø 22 mm Control and Signalling Units

Description Application Catalog Number
Mounted on panel, with a Harmony style push button
Profil P 7.0
4 I/O direct supply for AS-i bus XBZS43

XBZS43
BA 9s Bulbs and Associated Accessories
Description Characteristics Catalog Number
Incandescent bulbs 6 V, 1.2 W DL1CB006
DLCE••• 12 V, 2 W DL1CE012

24 V, 2 W DL1CE024

120-130 V, 2.4 W DL1CE130

Neon bulbs 120-130 V DL1CF110

DL1CF•••
230-240 V DL1CF220

Bulb extractor XBFX13

Lens cap tightening tool Illuminated push buttons with flush push ZBZ8

XBFX13 Replacement Keys for Emergency Stop Push Buttons and Selector Switches
Description Key Number Catalog Number
Set of 2 keys 455 ZBG455

421E ZBG421E

458A ZBG458A

520E ZBG520E
ZBZ8
3131A ZBG3131A

ZBG455

101
11/00 © 1999 - 2000 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons & Operator Interface - XB5 22 mm Double Insulated
Accessories and Replacement Parts

Clear Boots
Description For use with Catalog Number
Single boots Booted push buttons with circular head (neoprene) ZBP0

Booted push buttons with circular head used in food industry

ZBP0A
applications (silicone)
ZBP0 Double boots Double-headed push buttons, with or without pilot light (neoprene ZBW008

Double-headed push buttons used in food industry applications

ZBW008A
(silicone)

Lens Caps
For use with Color Catalog Number
Lens caps for protected LED light modules
Pilot lights White ZBV0113
Green ZBV0133
Red ZBV0143
Yellow ZBV0153
ZBW008
Blue ZBV0163
Illuminated push buttons with flush push White ZBW9113
Green ZBW9133
Red ZBW9143
Yellow ZBW9153
Blue ZBW9163
ZBV01•3 Illuminated push buttons with extended push White ZBW9313
Green ZBW9333
Red ZBW9343
Yellow ZBW9353
Blue ZBW9363
Circular lens caps for Ba9 light modules
Pilot lights White ZBV011
Green ZBV013
Red ZBV014
Yellow ZBV015
Blue ZBV016
Clear ZBV017
Illuminated push buttons with flush push White ZBW911
Green ZBW913
Red ZBW914
Yellow ZBW915
ZBV01• Blue ZBW916
Clear ZBW917
Illuminated push buttons with extended push White ZBW931
Green ZBW933
Red ZBW934
Yellow ZBW935
Blue ZBW936
Clear ZBW937
Square lens caps for protected LED light modules (ZB5C operators only)
Pilot lights White ZBCV0113
Green ZBCV0133
Red ZBCV0143
Yellow ZBCV0153
Blue ZBCV0163
Illuminated push buttons with flush push White ZBCW9113
Green ZBCW9133
Red ZBCW9143
Yellow ZBCW9153
Blue ZBCW9163
Illuminated push buttons with extended push White ZBCW9313
Green ZBCW9333
Red ZBCW9343
Yellow ZBCW9353
Blue ZBCW9363

102
© 1999 - 2000 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/00
 Push Buttons & Operator Interface - XB5 22 mm Double Insulated
Dimensions
Push Buttons, momentary

XB5AA•• XB5AL•• Common face view XB5AP••

1.63
41.5

1.63
41.5
0.35 e 0.53 e 1.18 0.69 e 1.18
9 2.01 0.93 13.5 2.2 30 17.5 2.36 30
51 23.6 56 60

■ Can be fitted with additional contact block.

Push buttons, momentary
Mushroom head Double-headed
XB5AC21 1.69
XB5AL•45, AL•4C5

1.85
43

47
1.52 e Ø 1.57 0.53 e 1.18
38.5 Ø 40
3.17 13.5 2.2 30 Dual Dimensions inches
80.5 mm
56
e: Panel thickness, 0.04 to 0.24 in (1 to 6 mm).
Emergency stop and mushroom head push buttons
XB5AT42, AT845 XB5AS542, AS8445 XB5AS142, AS9445 Common face view

1.69
43
1.54 e 0.87 1.54 e
1.52 e Ø 1.57
39 3.21 22 39 4.06
38.5 3.17 Ø 40
81.5 103
80.5
e: Panel thickness, 0.04 to 0.24 in (1 to 6 mm).
Selector switches
Standard lever operator Rectangular head
XB5AD XB5AJ
1.63
41.5

1.85
47

0.98 e 1.18
25 30 0.98 e 1.18
2.64
25 2.64 30
67
67

Key switches
XB5AG
1.85
47

0.87 0.83 e 1.18

Dual Dimensions inches
22 21 30 mm
3.35
85
e: Panel thickness, 0.04 to 0.24 in (1 to 6 mm)

103
11/00 © 1999 - 2000 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons & Operator Interface - XB5 22 mm Double Insulated
Dimensions
Pilot lights
Protected LED Direct supply Transformer type
XB5AVB•, AVG•, AVM• XB5AV6 XB5AV3•, AV4• Common face view

1.63
41.5
Dual Dimensions inches
mm

0.45 e 0.45 e 0.45 e 1.18

11.5 2.11 11.5 2.11 11.5 3.01 30
53.5 53.5 76.5
e: Panel thickness, 0.04 to 0.24 in (1 to 6 mm).
Illuminated push buttons
Protected LED Direct supply Transformer type
XB5AW3••5 XB5AW3•65 XB5AW3••5 Common face view

1.63
41.5
0.53 e 0.53 e 0.53 e 1.18
13.5 0.93 13.5 2.2 13.5 3.9 30
2.2
56 23.6 56 99
Double headed push buttons with pilot light Illuminated selector switches
Protected LED Protected LED
XB5AW84•5 XB5AK12••5

1.63
41.5
1.85
47

0.98 e 1.18
0.53 e 1.18 25 30
2.64
13.5 2.2 30
67
56
e: Panel thickness, 0.04 to 0.24 in (1 to 6 mm).
■ Can be fitted with additional contact block.
Support panel cut-out (suitable for mounting all types of push buttons and pilot lights)

Dual Dimensions inches

mm
1.57
40

1.18 Ø 0.88 + 0.02

0 (Ø 0.89 recommended)
30 Ø 22.3 + 00.4 (Ø 22.5 recommended)
Heads for push buttons, momentary
ZB5AA•, AA••• ZB5AL•, AL••• ZB5AA•4 Common ZB5AP••
ZB5AA•8 face view

1.1 1.28 1.22 Ø 1.12 1.44 Ø 1.16

28 32.5 31 Ø 28.5 36.5 Ø 29.5

104
© 1999 - 2000 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11/00
 Contents

Terminals, Z-Series
Terminals, Z-Series

Terminals, Z-Series Overview Z-Series D.2

Feed-through terminals D.4

Modular PE terminals D.18

Double/Multi level terminals D.30

Modular disconnect terminals D.44

Fuse terminals D.48

D
Installation terminals D.52

Pluggable standard terminals WeiCoS D.72

Modular distribution assembly system / Initiator and actuator terminals D.94

Mini terminals D.98

Terminals with electronic components D.106

Disconnect test terminals D.114

Accessories Z-Series D.116

D.1
 Overview Z-Series
Terminals, Z-Series

Z-Series / Tension clamp connection

Modular terminals with tension clamp connections –

the Z-Series – were specially designed to meet customers’
requirements:

Compact size, generous marking surfaces, integral test point,

cross-connection options within the Z-Series and to other
Weidmüller modular terminals.

D The Z-Series terminals have a wide clamping range and can

accommodate one or two cross-connection channels.

The plug-in standard cross-connections enable potentials to be

distributed over any number of terminals.

Versions

Z-Standard Z-Roof

Conductor cross-sections from
Conductor cross-sections from
0.13 to 16 mm2 0.13 to 16 mm2

Top-entry conductor insertion parallel
Length reduced by up to 36 %
with screwdriver operation
Conductor and screwdriver inserted
at an angle

Product overview
Rated cross-section 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 4 mm2 6 mm2 10 mm2 16 mm2 35 mm2
Standard Roof Standard Roof Standard Roof Standard Roof Standard Roof Standard Roof Standard Roof
Feed-through terminals
2 connections • • • • • • • • • • •
3 connections • • • • • • • • •
4 connections • • • • •
2 x 2 connections • •
PE terminals
2 connections • • • • • • • • • • •
3 connections • • • • • • • • •
4 connections • • • • •
Fuse terminal • • •
Disconnect test terminals • • •
Supply terminals • • •
N-conductor terminals • • • • • •
Double level terminal • • • • •
3-conductor/distribution terminals •
Pluggable terminals • •
Miniature block terminals •
Initiator/Actuator terminals •
Terminals with electronic components • • •

D.2
 Overview Z-Series

Terminals, Z-Series
1 The connection 2 Plug-in cross-connections 3 Easy to use

Practical connection thanks to parallel

In accordance with the Weidmüller con-
2- to 10-pole, or “continuous” for
insertion of conductor and screwdriver.
tact principle, the electrical and mechani- custom assemble.

TOP connection system
cal functions are also kept separate in the
Full rated current

No special tools required
tension clamp connection system, thus
Breakout poles for bypassing other

Integral test point.
ensuring galvanic isolation. connections.

Tension clamp made from high-quality
stainless steel for optimum contact D
forces

Copper current bar for minimum
through resistance.

The Wemid insulating material

3

Non-tracking, CTI 600
1
Thermally stable up to 120 °C

V0 flammability class to UL 94
2 2
Free from halogen and phosphor
flame-retardant substances

Clarity means reliability

4
Easy to use thanks to generous

clamping space to IEC 60947-1

Suitable for connecting conductors
from 0.08 to 35 mm2

For clamping one conductor per
clamping point to IEC 60999

4 Reliable contact Comprehensive accessories Standards and directives

Maintenance-free connection for
Test adapter, test plug The reliable contact and dependability of
reliable contact throughout the lifetime
Can be used with the Weidmüller systems are verified by:
of the terminal standard and group
Type tests to IEC 60947-7-1/-2/-3

Gas-tight contact zone markers standards

Surface of current bar treated to
End plates /
Supplementary Weidmüller test regimes
prevent oxidation partition plates
National and international approvals

Absolutely 100 % vibration-resistant.
Covers
ATEX approval

High contact forces
Reducing sleeves
T
D.3
 Feed-through terminals
Terminals, Z-Series

Standard model ZDU 4 4 mm2 ZDU 4/3 AN 4 mm2

Z-series standard ranges provide solutions for Two connections Three connections
conductor cross-sections from 0.05 to 35 mm2.

When using ATEX certified components in hazardous area ap-

plications the installation instructions and the rated data for
accessories in the technical appendix must be considered.

width x length x height with TS 35 x 7.5 mm 6 x 62 x 43.5 6 x 83.35 x 43.5

max. current / max. cond. cross-section A/mm2 41 / 6 41 / 6
max. clamping range mm2 0.13 ... 6 0.13 ... 6

Technical data IEC 60947-7-1 Ex e IIT II 2 G D IEC 60947-7-1 Ex e IIT II 2 G D

Rated data IEC UL CSA EN 60079-7 IEC UL CSA EN 60079-7
D Rated voltage V 800 600 600 550 800 600 600 550
Rated current A 32 33 35 28 32 33 35 28
Rated cross-section mm2 4 AWG 26… 10 AWG 26… 10 4 4 AWG 26… 10 AWG 26… 10 4
Rated impulse withstand voltage / Pollution severity kV/- 8 / 3 8 / 3
Gauge to IEC 60947-1 / UL94 Flammability class A4 / V-0 A4 / V-0
Approvals ar#;i? KEMA 97ATEX2521 U ar;i? KEMA 00ATEX2107 U

Clamped conductors (H05V/H07V) Rated connection further connection Rated connection further connection
Solid / stranded mm2 0.5…6 / 0.5…6 0.5…6 / 0.5…6
Flexible / Flexible with wire end ferrule mm2 0.5…6 / 0.5…4 0.5…6 / 0.5…4
Tightening torque range (clamping screw) Nm
Stripping length / Blade size mm / - 12 / 0.6 x 3.5 12 / 0.6 x 3.5

Note When using twin wire end ferrules, the rated voltage is 690 V. When using twin wire end ferrules, the rated voltage is 690 V.

Ordering data
Version Type Qty. Order No. Type Qty. Order No.
dark beige Wemid ZDU 4 100 1632050000 ZDU 4/3AN 50 7904180000
blue Wemid ZDU 4 BL 100 1632060000 ZDU 4/3AN BL 50 7904190000
Note

Accessories
Cross-connection, pluggable Type Current [A] Qty. Order No. Type Current [A] Qty. Order No.
2-pole ZQV 4/2 GE 32 60 1608950000 ZQV 4/2 GE 32 60 1608950000
3-pole ZQV 4/3 GE 32 60 1608960000 ZQV 4/3 GE 32 60 1608960000
4-pole ZQV 4/4 GE 32 60 1608970000 ZQV 4/4 GE 32 60 1608970000
10-pole ZQV 4/10 GE 32 20 1609030000 ZQV 4/10 GE 32 20 1609030000
20-/24-pole ZQV 4/20 GE 32 20 1909010000 ZQV 4/20 GE 32 20 1909010000

End plate / Partition plate width [mm] width [mm]

dark beige Wemid ZAP/TW 4 2 50 1632090000 ZAP/TW4/3AN 2 20 7904100000
blue Wemid ZAP/TW 4 BL 2 50 1632100000 ZAP/TW 4/3AN BL 2 50 7904110000
End bracket width [mm] width [mm]
dark beige Wemid ZEW 35 6 20 9540000000 ZEW 35 6 20 9540000000

Test adapter
For testing wired terminal strips Standard ZTA 2 ZDU4 25 1609060000 ZTA 2 ZDU4 25 1609060000
with spigot ZTA 2/ZA ZDU4 25 1609070000 ZTA 2/ZA ZDU4 25 1609070000
Screwdrivers
with cutting device “swifty set”
Standard SD 0.6x3.5x100 1 9008330000 SD 0.6x3.5x100 1 9008330000

Reducing sleeves
for conductors < 0.5 mm / AWG 20 ZRH 4/1 WS 1000 1636640000 ZRH 4/1 WS 1000 1636640000
for conductors < 1.0 mm / AWG 18 ZRH 4/2 1000 1636650000 ZRH 4/2 1000 1636650000
Cover
with lightning flash symbol ZAD 2/4 20 1609080000 ZAD 2/4 20 1609080000
blank

Labelling systems (see large assortment in catalogue 7)

Marking tags DEK 6 / WS 10/6 DEK 6 / WS 12/6
For detailed information on other accessories and appli-
cations see “Accessories”

D.8
 Double/Multi level terminals
Terminals, Z-Series

Standard model ZDK 2.5 2.5 mm2 ZDK 2.5 V 2.5 mm2
Z-series standard ranges provide solutions for Double level terminals Vertically cross-connected double level
conductor cross-sections from 0.05 to 35 mm2. terminal

When using ATEX certified components in hazardous area ap-

plications the installation instructions and the rated data for
accessories in the technical appendix must be considered.

width x length x height with TS 35 x 7.5 mm 5.1 x 79.5 x 54 5.1 x 79.5 x 54

max. current / max. cond. cross-section A/mm2 20 / 2.5 24 / 2.5
max. clamping range mm2 0.05 ... 2.5 0.05 ... 2.5

Technical data IEC 60947-7-1 Ex e II T II 2 G D IEC 60947-7-1 Ex e II T II 2 G D

Rated data IEC UL CSA EN 60079-7 IEC UL CSA EN 60079-7
D Rated voltage V 500 300 300 275 500 300 300 440
Rated current A 20 10 10 18 20 10 10 20
Rated cross-section mm2 2.5 AWG 30… 12 AWG 26… 12 2.5 2.5 AWG 30… 12 AWG 26… 12 2.5
Rated impulse withstand voltage / Pollution severity kV/- 6 / 3 6 / 3
Gauge to IEC 60947-1 / UL94 Flammability class A2 / V-0 A2 / V-0
Approvals ar#;i KEMA 97ATEX4677 U ar#;i KEMA 97ATEX4677 U

Clamped conductors (H05V/H07V) Rated connection further connection Rated connection further connection
Solid / stranded mm2 0.5…2.5 0.5…2.5
Flexible / Flexible with wire end ferrule mm2 0.5…2.5 / 0.5…2.5 0.5…2.5 / 0.5…2.5
Tightening torque range (clamping screw) Nm
Stripping length / Blade size mm / - 10 / 0.6 x 3.5 10 / 0.6 x 3.5

Note 2.5 mm2 flexible conductors with wire end ferrules are crimped with the 2.5 mm2 flexible conductors with wire end ferrules are crimped with the
Weidmüller PZ 6/5 crimping tool. Weidmüller PZ 6/5 crimping tool.

Ordering data
Version Type Qty. Order No. Type Qty. Order No.
dark beige Wemid ZDK 2.5 50 1674300000 ZDK 2.5V 50 1689990000
blue Wemid ZDK 2.5 BL 50 1678630000 ZDK 2.5V BL 50 1745880000
Note Component plug ZBS 1(1764540000) and ZBS 1 for LED (1764550000)
can be used.

Accessories
Cross-connection, pluggable Type Current [A] Qty. Order No. Type Current [A] Qty. Order No.
2-pole ZQV 2.5/2 24 60 1608860000 ZQV 2.5/2 24 60 1608860000
3-pole ZQV 2.5/3 24 60 1608870000 ZQV 2.5/3 24 60 1608870000
4-pole ZQV 2.5/4 24 60 1608880000 ZQV 2.5/4 24 60 1608880000
10-pole ZQV 2.5/10 24 20 1608940000 ZQV 2.5/10 24 20 1608940000
20-/24-pole ZQV 2.5/20 24 20 1908960000 ZQV 2.5/20 24 20 1908960000

End plate / Partition plate width [mm] width [mm]

dark beige Wemid ZAP/TW ZDK2.5 1.5 20 1674730000 ZAP/TW ZDK2.5 1.5 20 1674730000
blue Wemid ZAP/TW ZDK2.5 BL 1.5 20 1748800000 ZAP/TW ZDK2.5 BL 1.5 20 1748800000
End bracket width [mm] width [mm]
dark beige Wemid ZEW 35 6 20 9540000000 ZEW 35 6 20 9540000000

Test adapter
For testing wired terminal strips Standard
with spigot ZTA 4 25 1688110000 ZTA 4 25 1688110000
Screwdrivers
with cutting device “swifty set”
Standard SD 0.6x3.5x100 1 9008330000 SD 0.6x3.5x100 1 9008330000

Reducing sleeves
for conductors < 0.5 mm / AWG 20 ZRH 1.5H/1 1000 1678810000 ZRH 1.5H/1 1000 1678810000
for conductors < 1.0 mm / AWG 18 ZRH 1.5H/2 1000 1678800000 ZRH 1.5H/2 1000 1678800000
Cover
with lightning flash symbol
blank

Labelling systems (see large assortment in catalogue 7)

Marking tags DEK 5 / WS 12/5 DEK 5 / WS 10/5
For detailed information on other accessories and appli- ZVQ 2.5/15 (1720700000) connects two current bars one above the other.
cations see “Accessories”

D.32
 Modular disconnect terminals
Terminals, Z-Series

Standard model and Roof-style ZTR 2.5 2.5 mm2 ZTR 2.5/3AN 2.5 mm2
Z-series standard ranges provide solutions for Two connections Three connections
conductor cross-sections from 0.05 to 35 mm2.

When using ATEX certified components in hazardous area ap-

plications the installation instructions and the rated data for
accessories in the technical appendix must be considered.

width x length x height with TS 35 x 7.5 mm 5.1 x 59.5 x 41.5 5.1 x 79.5 x 41.5
max. current / max. cond. cross-section A/mm2 20 / 4 20 / 4
max. clamping range mm2 0.05 ... 4 0.05 ... 4

Technical data IEC 60947-7-1 / VDE 0100-537 IEC 60947-7-1 / VDE 0100-537
Rated data IEC UL CSA EN 60079-7 IEC UL CSA EN 60079-7
D Rated voltage, feed-through terminal V 500 600 600 500 600 600
Rated current A 20 20 20 20 20 20
Rated cross-section mm2 2.5 AWG 30… 12 AWG 30… 12 2.5 AWG 30… 12 AWG 26… 12
Rated impulse withstand voltage / Pollution severity kV/- 6 / 3 6 / 3
Gauge to IEC 60947-1 / UL94 Flammability class A3 / V-0 A3 / V-0
Approvals ari ari
Clamped conductors (H05V/H07V) Rated connection Rated connection
Solid / stranded mm2 0.5…4 0.5…4
Flexible / Flexible with wire end ferrule mm2 0.5…4 / 0.5…2.5 0.5…4 / 0.5…2.5
Tightening torque range (clamping screw) Nm
Stripping length / Blade size mm / - 10 / 0.6 x 3.5 10 / 0.6 x 3.5
2 clamped cables with same cross-section (H05V/H07V)
Solid / stranded mm2
Flexible / Flexible with wire end ferrule mm2

Note 2.5 mm2 flexible conductors with wire end ferrules are crimped with the 2.5 mm2 flexible conductors with wire end ferrules are crimped with the
Weidmüller PZ 6/5 crimping tool. Weidmüller PZ 6/5 crimping tool.

Ordering data
Version Type Qty. Order No. Type Qty. Order No.
dark beige Wemid ZTR 2.5 100 1831280000 ZTR 2.5/3AN 100 8731720000
blue Wemid ZTR 2.5 BL 100 8731710000 ZTR 2.5/3AN BL 100 8731730000
without disconnector, dark beige Wemid ZTR 2.5/O.TNHE 100 1831130000 ZTR 2.5/3AN/O.TNHE 100 8728450000
Note

Accessories
Cross-connection, pluggable Type Current [A] Qty. Order No. Type Current [A] Qty. Order No.
2-pole ZQV 2.5/2 24 60 1608860000 ZQV 2.5/2 24 60 1608860000
3-pole ZQV 2.5/3 24 60 1608870000 ZQV 2.5/3 24 60 1608870000
4-pole ZQV 2.5/4 24 60 1608880000 ZQV 2.5/4 24 60 1608880000
10-pole ZQV 2.5/10 24 20 1608940000 ZQV 2.5/10 24 20 1608940000
End plate / Partition plate width [mm] width [mm]
End plate dark beige Wemid ZAP/TW 1 2 50 1608740000 ZAP/TW 3 2 50 1608800000
Partition plate dark beige Wemid
End bracket width [mm] width [mm]
dark beige ZEW 35 6 20 9540000000 ZEW 35 6 20 9540000000
Screwdrivers
Standard SD 0.6x3.5x100 1 9008330000 SD 0.6x3.5x100 1 9008330000
Test plug
Plug dia. 2.3 mm PS 2.3 RT 20 0180400000 PS 2.3 RT 20 0180400000
Holder for cartridge fuse, 5 x 20mm
400 V ac/dc, without LED SIHA 3/G20 25 7921560000 SIHA 3/G20 25 7921560000
10-36 V ac/dc, red LED SIHA 3/G20/LD 10-36V 25 7921560000 SIHA 3/G20/LD 10-36V 25 7921560000
140-250V ac/dc, red LED SIHA 3/G20/LD 140-250V 25 7921560000 SIHA 3/G20/LD 140-250V 25 7921560000
Module connector (max. 250 V)
reversed insertion possible without fittings BEST 50 1833100000 BEST 50 1833100000
with wire jumper BEST/DRBR 50 1878570000 BEST/DRBR 50 1878570000
with 1N4007 diode BEST/D 50 1878560000 BEST/D 50 1878560000
Disconnecting plug
yellow Wemid TNST 50 1833090000 TNST 50 1833090000
Labelling systems (see large assortment in catalogue 7)
Marking tags DEK 5 / WS 10/5 DEK 5 / WS 10/5
For detailed information on other accessories and appli- If the disconnection lever is replaced by the SIHA 3, this creates a fuse ter- If the disconnection lever is replaced by the SIHA 3, this creates a fuse ter-
cations see “Accessories” minal. minal.

D.44
 Fuse terminals
Terminals, Z-Series

Z-series standard ranges provide solutions for ZSI 2.5 2.5 mm2 ZSI 2.5/5x25 2.5 mm2
conductor cross-sections from 0.05 to 35 mm2.
For metric fuses 5 x 20 For metric fuses 5 x 25

When using ATEX certified components in hazardous area ap-

plications the installation instructions and the rated data for
accessories in the technical appendix must be considered.

width x length x height with TS 35 x 7.5 mm 7.9 x 79.5 x 74 7.9 x 79.5 x 74

max. current / max. cond. cross-section A/mm2 6.3 / 4 6.3 / 4
max. clamping range mm2 0.13 ... 4 0.13 ... 4

Technical data IEC 60947-7-3 / VDE 0611-6 IEC 60947-7-3 / VDE 0611-6
Rated data IEC UL CSA EN 60079-7 IEC UL CSA EN 60079-7
D Rated voltage, adjacent terminal V 500 600 600 500 600 600
Rated current A 6.3 10 15 6.3 10 15
Rated cross-section mm2 2.5 AWG 26… 12 AWG 26… 12 2.5 AWG 26… 12 AWG 26… 12
Rated impulse withstand voltage / Pollution severity kV/- 6 / 3 6 / 3
Gauge to IEC 60947-1 / UL94 Flammability class A3 / V-0 A3 / V-0
Approvals ar#;~i? ar#
Clamped conductors (H05V/H07V) Rated connection Rated connection
Solid / stranded mm2 0.5…4 0.5…4
Flexible / Flexible with wire end ferrule mm2 0.5…4 / 0.5…2.5 0.5…4 / 0.5…2.5
Tightening torque range (clamping screw) Nm
Stripping length / Blade size mm / - 10 / 0.6 x 3.5 10 / 0.6 x 3.5
2 clamped cables with same cross-section (H05V/H07V)
Solid / stranded mm2
Flexible / Flexible with wire end ferrule mm2

Note Max. power loss (1.6 W) at the cartridge fuse limits the rated current. Max. power loss (1.6 W) at the cartridge fuse limits the rated current.

Ordering data
Version Type Qty. Order No. Type Qty. Order No.
dark beige Wemid 400 V ac/dc, without LED ZSI 2.5 50 1616400000 ZSI 2.5/5X25 50 1730900000
10-36 V ac/dc, with LED ZSI 2.5/LD 28AC 50 1616440000
30-70V ac/dc, with LED ZSI 2.5/LD 60AC 50 1616430000
60-150 V ac/dc, with LED ZSI 2.5/LD 120AC 50 1616420000
140-250V ac/dc, with LED ZSI 2.5/LD 250AC 50 1616410000
Note For fuse cartridge holders the rated voltage is 250 V and the rated impulse For fuse cartridge holders the rated voltage is 250 V and the rated impulse
withstand voltage 4 kV. withstand voltage 4 kV.

Accessories
Cross-connection, pluggable Type Current [A] Qty. Order No. Type Current [A] Qty. Order No.
2-pole ZQV 6/2 GE 41 A 60 1627850000 ZQV 6/2 GE 41 A 60 1627850000
3-pole ZQV 6/3 GE 41 A 60 1627860000 ZQV 6/3 GE 41 A 60 1627860000
4-pole ZQV 6/4 GE 41 A 60 1627870000 ZQV 6/4 GE 41 A 60 1627870000
10-pole
End plate / Partition plate (after last terminal) width [mm] width [mm]
End plate, Wemid ZAP/TW 3 2 50 1608800000 ZAP/TW 3 2 50 1608800000
Partition plate, Wemid
Screwdrivers
Standard SD 0.6x3.5x100 1 9008330000 SD 0.6x3.5x100 1 9008330000

Cartridge fuse, 5 x 20mm (IEC 60127-2)

Rated voltage 250 V 0.25 A quick-blow G 20/0.25A/F 10 0430500000
Rated breaking capacity 1500 A 0.5 A quick-blow G 20/0.5A/F 10 0430600000
(at 250V / 50Hz / cos j = 0.7) 1 A quick-blow G 20/1A/F 10 0430700000
2 A quick-blow G 20/2A/F 10 0430900000
G25 with indicator / imperial fuse
G25 (DIN 41 576 / 250 V) 0.5 A medium time-lag / 2 A G 25/0.5A/M WS 10 0510300000
Rated voltage 250 V 1 A medium time-lag / 3 A G 25/1A/M RT 10 0265800000
Imperial fuse, 1/4 x 1 1/4 2 A quick-blow / 5 A G 25/2A/F BL 10 0192700000
Rated voltage 440 V 4 A quick-blow /10 A G 25/4A/F BR 10 0192800000
Labelling systems (see large assortment in catalogue 7)
Marking tags DEK 5 / WS 10/5 DEK 5 / WS 10/5
For detailed information on other accessories and appli- Status indication via bidirectional LED. End plate for lever: ZAP TNHE/ZSI: End plate for fuse lever: ZAP TNHE/ZSI: 1610840000
cations see “Accessories” 1610840000

D.48
 Disconnect test terminals
Terminals, Z-Series

Terminal for energy supply ZTD 6 6 mm2 ZTL 6 6 mm2

Feed-through terminal Disconnect test terminal

When using ATEX certified components in hazardous area ap-

plications the installation instructions and the rated data for
accessories in the technical appendix must be considered.

width x length x height with TS 35 x 7.5 mm 8 x 106 x 47.5 8 x 106 x 47.5

max. current / max. cond. cross-section A/mm2 52 / 10 52 / 10
max. clamping range mm2 0.5 ... 10 0.5 ... 10

Technical data IEC 60947-7-1 / VDE 0100-537 IEC 60947-7-1 / VDE 0100-537
Rated data IEC UL CSA EN 60079-7 IEC UL CSA EN 60079-7
D Rated voltage V 800 300 300 800 300 300
Rated current A 41 33 33 41 33 33
Rated cross-section mm2 6 AWG 20… 8 AWG 20… 8 6 AWG 20… 8 AWG 20… 8
Rated impulse withstand voltage / Pollution severity kV/- 8 / 3 8 / 3
Gauge to IEC 60947-1 / UL94 Flammability class A5 / V-0 A5 / V-0
Approvals ar ar
Clamped conductors (H05V/H07V) Rated connection further connection Rated connection further connection
Solid / stranded mm2 0.5…10 / 1.5…6 0.5…10 / 1.5…6
Flexible / Flexible with wire end ferrule mm2 0.5…6 / 0.5…6 0.5…6 / 0.5…6
Tightening torque range (clamping screw) Nm 0.5…0.6 Nm
Tightening torque range (disconnector) Nm
Stripping length / Blade size mm / - 13 / 0.8 x 4 13 / 0.8 x 4

Note 400V when used as a disconnect terminal. Tightening torque for discon- 400V when used as a disconnect terminal. Tightening torque for discon-
nection element of ZTL 6 with screw = 0.5 - 0.6 Nm nection element of ZTL 6 with screw = 0.5 - 0.6 Nm

Ordering data
Version Type Qty. Order No. Type Qty. Order No.
dark beige Wemid with socket ZTD 6/STB 20 1771960000 ZTL 6/STB 20 1771950000
without socket ZTD 6 20 1771810000 ZTL 6 20 1771800000

Note

Accessories

Cross-connection, pluggable Type Current [A] Qty. Order No. Type Current [A] Qty. Order No.
2-pole ZQV 6/2 GE 41 60 1627850000 ZQV 6/2 GE 41 60 1627850000
3-pole ZQV 6/3 GE 41 60 1627860000 ZQV 6/3 GE 41 60 1627860000
4-pole
10-pole
24-pole
End plate / Partition plate width [mm] width [mm]
dark beige Wemid End plate ZTW ZTL6 2 20 1771870000 ZTW ZTL6 2 20 1771870000
Partition plate
Testing / Checking
Test plug PS 4 F.STB 4 20 0299600000 PS 4 F.STB 4 20 0299600000
Socket, yellow STB 21.6/IH/GE WTL6/3 50 1071010000 STB 21.6/IH/GE WTL6/3 50 1071010000
Socket, green STB 21.6/IH/GN WTL6/3 50 1071020000 STB 21.6/IH/GN WTL6/3 50 1071020000
Socket, violet STB 21.6/IH/VI WTL6/3 50 1071030000 STB 21.6/IH/VI WTL6/3 50 1071030000
Socket, blue STB 21.6/IH/BL WTL6/3 50 1071080000 STB 21.6/IH/BL WTL6/3 50 1071080000
Miscellaneous accessories
Lockout device
Shorting plug, 2-pole KSBR/2 ZTL6 20 1771820000 KSBR/2 ZTL6 20 1771820000
Shorting plug, 3-pole KSBR/3 ZTL6 20 1771830000 KSBR/3 ZTL6 20 1771830000
Shorting plug, 4-pole KSBR/4 ZTL6 20 1771840000 KSBR/4 ZTL6 20 1771840000
Marking holder
BZT ZTL6 20 1781140000 BZT ZTL6 20 1781140000

Marking systems (see large assortment in catalogue 7)

Marking tags DEK 8 / WS 12/6,5 DEK 8 / WS 12/6,5
For detailed information on other accessories and appli- Plug-in tag carrier for additional marking tags above the cross-connection Plug-in tag carrier for additional marking tags above the cross-connection
cations see “Accessories” channel (BZT ZTL 6) channel (BZT ZTL 6)

D.114
 Accessories – Electrical supply
Terminals, Z-Series

Supply with standard terminals Supply on the left Supply on the right

According to IEC 60204-1 and

IEC 60 439-1, when reducing the
conductors within distribution boards and
controllers, protective devices for cables
and conductors can be installed up to
a maximum of 3 metres away from the
supply side and need not be positioned
at the beginning of the supply side.
The conductor before the output fuse
must be routed to make it “short-circuit
proof”.

Supply options and corresponding cross-connections

D
on the right

Output terminals

ZDU 2.5/3AN

ZDU 2.5/4AN

ZTR 2.5/3AN

ZTR 2.5/4AN
ZDU 4/3AN

ZDU 4/4AN
ZDU 2.5

ZTR 2.5
ZDU 4
Supply terminals

on the left
ZDU 4 • • 2) • • • • • 2) •2 •
ZDU 4/3AN • 1) • 2) • 1) • • 2) •2 •
ZDU 4/4AN • 1) • 2) • 1) • • 2) •2 • 1)

ZDU 6 • • 2) • • • • • 2) •2 •
ZDU 6/3AN • 1) • 1) • 1)

on the left

Output terminals
ZDU 2.5/3AN

ZDU 2.5/4AN

ZTR 2.5/3AN

ZTR 2.5/4AN
ZDU 4/3AN

ZDU 4/4AN
ZDU 2.5

ZTR 2.5
ZDU 4

Supply terminals

on the right
ZDU 4 • • 2) • 1) • • 2) • 2) • 1)
ZDU 4/3AN • • 2) • 1) • • • 2) • 2) • 1)
ZDU 4/4AN • • 2) • 1) • • • • 2) • 2) • 1)

ZDU 6 • • 2) • 1) • • 2) • 2) • 1)
ZDU 6/3AN • • 2) • 1) • • • 2) • 2) •

• 1) with IEPL
• 2) with QVAR

D.122
 Accessories – Electrical supply

Terminals, Z-Series
Plug-in cross-connection ZQV

Breaking out contact elements

Breaking out one or more (max. 60%)
contact elements from cross-connections
enables certain terminals to be bypassed
to suit the application.

Fitting and changing

cross-connection
The fitting and changing of cross-connec-
tions is a trouble-free and fast operation:
– Insert the cross-connection into the
cross-conn. channel in the terminal...
The time-saving, easy-to-use cross- D
connection comb for terminals, featuring ...and press it fully home.
tension clamp technology. (The cross-connection may not project
from the channel.)
• ZQV 2.5 as 2- to 10-pole combs and
ZQV 2.5/20 – continuous (20-pole)

• ZQV 4 as 2- to 10-pole combs and

ZQV4/20 – continuous (20-pole)
– Remove a cross-connection by simply
• ZQV 6 as 2- to 4-pole combs and prising it out with a screwdriver.
ZQV6/32 – continuous (24-pole)

• ZQV 10, ZQV 16 and ZQV 35 as

2-pole combs (bridges)

• ZQV 35-10, ZQV 35-16 and ZQV 16-10 Shortening cross-connections

as reducer cross-connector distributes Cross-connections can be shortened in
current from terminals with larger cross- length using a suitable cutting tool, e.g.
sections to terminals with smaller cross- KT ZQV (order No. 900217). However,
section. three contact elements must always be
retained.
• ZQV 2.5N as 2- to 10-pole combs and
ZQV2.5N/20 – continuous (20-pole) Caution:
Contact elements must not
These versions come with complete shock be deformed!
protection.
However, please note that the rated
voltage is reduced to 400 V when using
cross- connections (e.g. for terminal types If a cross-connection is shortened, end
ZDU 2.5 to ZDU 35 and ZDU 2.5-2). plates or partition plates (ZAP/TW) must
This does not apply to terminals with a be used to maintain the rated voltage of
rated voltage below 500V. Here the rated 250 V (fitted to the bare cut edges of the
voltage of the used terminal is mandatory cross-connection).
(e.g. terminal types ZTR 2.5 and ZTR
2.5/3AN).

D.123
 Accessories – Electrical supply
Terminals, Z-Series

Possible combinations

In one cross-connection channel

single adjacent bridging

D
In two cross-connection channels

parallel/bridging parallel/lengthening chain bridge

Possible cross-connections of terminals of the same type with corresponding cross-connections

Terminal type Cross-connection single adjacent bridging chain bridge parallel parallel
Standard terminals bridging lengthening
ZDU 2.5 ZQV 2.5/… • • • • • •
ZDU 2.5 / 3 AN ZQV 2.5/… • • •
ZDU 2.5 / 4 AN ZQV 2.5/… • • •
ZTR 2.5 ... ZQV 2.5/… • • •
ZSI 2.5 ... ZQV 2.5/… • • •
ZDU 4 ... ZQV 4/… • • •
ZDU 6 ... ZQV 6/… • • •
ZDU 10, ZDU 16, ZDU 35 ZQV 10/2 • •
ZPE 2.5 ZQV 2.5/... • • •
ZPE 4 ZQV 4/... •
ZPE 6 ZQV 6/... •
ZPE 10, ZPE 16, ZPE 35 ZQV 10 • •
Roof-Style terminals
ZDU 2.5-2 ZQV 2.5/… • • • • • •
ZDU 2.5-2 / 3 AN ZQV 2.5/… • • • • • •
ZDU 4-2/... ZQV 4/… • • • • • •
ZDU 6-2/... ZQV 6/… • • •
ZPE 2.5-2 ZQV 2.5/… • •
ZPE 2.5-2 / 3 AN ZQV 42.5/… • •
ZPE 4-2/... ZQV 4/… • •
ZPE 6-2/... ZQV 6/… •

D.124
 Accessories – Electrical supply

Terminals, Z-Series
Alternative cross-connections
available
Terminals with different rated cross-section
term. type 1 req. cross-connection term. type 2 term. type 1 req. cross-connection term. type 2
ZDU 4 ZQV 2.5/... ZDU 2.5 ZDU 6 ZQV 4/... ZDU 4

Fuse terminals with same rated cross-section

It is necessary to break out the cross-connection panel in the

side wall of the fuse terminal.

ZQS 2.5/...

ZSI 2.5/2

Terminals without cross-connection channel – ZDU 2.5-2 / 4 AN

To cross connect ZDU 2.5-2/4 AN terminals, which do not have

cross-connection channels, use the ZQB 2.5 cross-connection
bridge to provide a simple cross-connection solution.

The illustration shows how to fit ZQB 2.5 correctly.

Always ensure that the conductor is placed between the

tension clamp and ZQB 2.5.
The conductor cross-sections is reduced to 1.5 mm2 “e” and
“f” as a result of using ZWB 2.5.

D.125
 Accessories – Electrical supply
Terminals, Z-Series

Tailor-made ZQV 1.5 ZQV 2.5 ZQV 4

cross-connections

ZQV 2.5/50 is a cross-connection

which can be used for connecting
up to 20 individual terminals easily
and quickly. The fitter simply cuts off
the equired number of poles from
the 20-pole cross-connection
comb. With this system, cross-
connections with the correct num-
ber of poles are always available,
and only a minimum of storage
space is required. The large number Type Qty Order No. Type Qty Order No. Type Qty Order No.
of poles in the 20-pole comb means ZQV 1.5/2 60 1776120000 ZQV 2.5/2 60 1608860000 ZQV 4/2 60 1608950000
that unused residual quantities are ZQV 1.5/3 60 1776130000 ZQV 2.5/3 60 1608870000 ZQV 4/3 60 1608960000
virtually avoided. The ends of the ZQV 1.5/4 60 1776140000 ZQV 2.5/4 60 1608880000 ZQV 4/4 60 1608970000
continuous cross-connection are ZQV 1.5/5 60 1776150000 ZQV 2.5/5 20 1608890000 ZQV 4/5 20 1608980000
bare. ZQV 1.5/10 20 1776200000 ZQV 2.5/6 20 1608900000 ZQV 4/6 20 1608990000
In the interests of stability, 2-pole ZQV 2.5/7 20 1608910000 ZQV 4/7 20 1609000000
cross-connections are not allowed. ZQV 2.5/8 20 1608920000 ZQV 4/8 20 1609010000
D An end plate must always be fitted ZQV 2.5/9 20 1608930000 ZQV 4/9 20 1609020000
to neighbouring ZQVs with bare cut ZQV 2.5/10 20 1608940000 ZQV 4/10 20 1609030000
edges. With the ZDU 2.5 and ZQV 2.5/20 10 1908960000 ZQV 4/20 20 1909010000
WDU 2.5 it is sufficient to fit the
For standard For Roof-Style For standard For Roof-Style For standard For Roof-Style
ZQV in the offset position. The rated terminal terminal terminal terminal terminal terminal
voltage is 400 V. ZDU 1.5…. ZDU 2.5… ZDU 2.5-2… ZDU 4… ZDU 4-2…
ZDK 1.5…. ZDK 2.5… ZDK 2.5-2 ZDK 4/S… ZDU 4 S
ZEI 6 ZTR 2.5… ZTR 2.5-2… ZNT 4 S
ZDTR 2.5 ZDLD 2.5-2… ZEI 16 ZEI 16-2/1 AN
ZSI 2.5… ZDKPE 2.5-2
ZRV 1.5… ZDU 2.5 S
ZIA 1.5…. ZNT 2.5 S
ZEI 16 ZEI 16-2/1 AN

ZQV 16-10 ZQV 35-10 ZQV 35-16

Reducing cross-connection Reducing cross-connection Reducing cross-connection

Type Qty Order No. Type Qty Order No. Type Qty Order No.
ZQV 16-10 10 7920080000 ZQV 35-10 10 7920100000 ZQV 35-16 10 7920120000

For standard For Roof-Style For standard For Roof-Style For standard For Roof-Style
terminal terminal terminal terminal terminal terminal
ZDU 10… ZDU 10 S ZDU 10… ZDU 10 S ZDU 16 ZDU 16 S
ZPE 10… ZNT 10 S ZPE 10… ZPE 10 S ZPE 16 ZPE 16 S
ZDU 16 ZDU 16 S ZDU 35 ZDU 35
ZPE 16 ZPE 16 S ZPE 35 ZPE 35
ZNT 16 S

D.126
 Accessories – Electrical supply

Terminals, Z-Series
ZQV 6 ZQV 10/2 ZQV 16/2 ZQV 35/2

Type Qty Order No. Type Qty Order No. Type Qty Order No. Type Qty Order No.
ZQV 6/2 60 1627850000 ZQV 10/2 25 1739680000 ZQV 16/2 25 1739690000 ZQV 35/2 10 1739700000
ZQV 6/3 60 1627860000
ZQV 6/4 60 1627870000
ZQV 6/24 20 1908990000

For standard For Roof-Style For standard For Roof-Style For standard For Roof-Style For standard For Roof-Style
terminal terminal terminal terminal terminal terminal terminal terminal
ZDU 6… ZDU 6-2… ZDU 10… ZDU 10 S ZDU 16 ZDU 16 S ZDU 35
ZDK 6/S… ZDU 6 S ZDU 10 NT ZNT 10 S ZPE 16 ZPE 16 S ZPE 35
ZTL 6… ZNT 6 S ZNT 16 S ZNT 35/S
ZEI 16 ZEI 16-2/1 AN

ZQV 2.5N ZQB 2.5 ZQS 2.5 ZVQ 2.5/1.5

Compact design Cross-connection bridge Fuse cross-connection Vertical connector

Type Qty Order No. Type Qty Order No. Type Qty Order No. Type Qty Order No.
ZQV 2.5N/2 60 1693800000 ZQB 2.5-2 50 1677120000 ZQS 2.5/2 20 1633200000 ZVQ 2.5/1.5 50 1720700000
ZQV 2.5N/3 60 1693810000 ZQS 2.5/3 20 1633210000
ZQV 2.5N/4 60 1693820000 ZQS 2.5/4 20 1633220000
ZQV 2.5N/5 20 1693830000 ZQS 2.5/5 20 1633230000
ZQV 2.5N/6 20 1693840000
ZQV 2.5N/7 20 1693850000
ZQV 2.5N/8 20 1693860000
ZQV 2.5N/9 20 1693870000
ZQV 2.5N/10 20 1693880000
ZQV 2.5N/20 10 1909000000
For standard For Roof-Style For standard For Roof-Style For standard For Roof-Style For standard For Roof-Style
terminal terminal terminal terminal terminal terminal terminal terminal
ZT 2.5…. ZDUA 2.5-2.... ZDUB 2.5-2/4 AN ZSI 2.5/2… ZDK 2.5… ZDLD 2.5-2…
ZDT 2.5…. ZDUA 2.5-2N.... ZDU 2.5-2/4 AN ZDT 2.5/2
ZP 2.5…. ZDL 2.5….
ZTTQ 2.5… ZDL 2.5S The ZQB 2.5 cross-connection bridge is
ZTC… used for connecting terminals without a
separate cross-connection channel. The
terminal points are opened using the ZBW 2
operating tool (order no. 165067000).

D.127
 Accessories – other functions and colours
Terminals, Z-Series

Cartridge fuses and gauge pieces for Weidmüller fuse terminals

Cartridge fuses
Technical data / Ordering data
For terminal type G-type cartridge fuses 5 x 20 without indicators to IEC 60127-2 (VDE 0820 pt.2 Bl 1)
Size (mm) Nom. voltage (V) Nom. current (A) Type Qty Order No.
ZSI 2.5 0.1 (F) G 20/0.10A/F 10 0430300000
ZSI 6-2 2 x 2.5/G20... 5 x 20 0.2 (F) G 20/0.20A/F 10 0430400000
ZSI 2.5 2 x 2 AN/G20... breaking capacity 1500 A 0.25 (F) G 20/0.25A/F 10 0430500000
(at 250 V, 50 Hz, cos : = 0.7) 0.5 (F) G 20/0.50A/F 10 0430600000
0.63 (F) G 20/0.63A/F 10 0439000000
1.0 (F) G 20/1.00A/F 10 0430700000
250 1.6 (F) G 20/1.60A/F 10 0430800000
2.0 (F) G 20/2.00A/F 10 0430900000
2.5 (F) G 20/2.50A/F 10 0431000000
3.15 (F) G 20/3.15A/F 10 0431100000
4.0 (F) G 20/4.00A/F 10 0431200000
5.0 (F) G 20/5.00A/F 10 0431300000
6.3 (F) G 20/6.30A/F 10 0431400000

D (M) = medium-blow (F) = fast-blow

G-type cartridge fuses 5 x 25 with indicators to DIN 415761)

ZSI 2.5/ 5 x 25 5 x 25 w. ind.1) 0.25 (M) G 25/0.25A/M 10 0546900000
ZSI 6-2 2 x 2.5/G25... breaking capacity 80 A 0.5 (M) G 25/0.50A/M 10 0510300000
ZSI 2.5 2 x 2 AN/G25... (at 250 V, 50 Hz, cos : = 1 0.8 (M) G 25/0.80A/M 10 0646400000
250 1 (M) G 25/1.00A/M 10 0265800000
10 (M)5) G 25/10.0A/M 10 0193100000
2 (F) G 25/2.00A/F 10 0192700000
4 (F) G 25/4.00A/F 10 0192800000
6.3 (F) G 25/6.30A/F 10 0192900000

(M) = medium-blow (F) = fast-blow

Cartridge fuses 11/4“ x 1/4“ without indicators to BS 88

ZSI 2.5/2 33 kA break. cap., 33 kA fast-blow 0.5 GZ 0.5A/F 10 0533800000
E 0.5 A 1 GZ 1.0A/F 10 0525500000
E 1 A 440 2 GZ 2.0A 10 0294500000
E 2 A 3 GZ 3.0A 10 0295700000
E 3 A 5 GZ 5.0A 10 0294600000
E 5 A 7 GZ 7.0A 10 0295800000
E 7 A 10 GZ 10.0A 10 0293900000
E 10 A 12.5 GZ 12.5A FF 10 0245400000

(F) = fast-blow (M) = medium-blow

1
Note: ) The SIBA company also supplies G-type cartridge fuses 5 x 25 with indicators suitable for 450 V shipbuilding
applications.

D.140
 Accessories – other functions and colours

Terminals, Z-Series
Cartridge fuses and gauge pieces for Weidmüller fuse terminals

Cartridge fuses
Technical data / Ordering data
for terminal type Blade fuses to DIN 72581-3C Average Nom.
Nom. voltage (V) voltage drop (mV) current (A) Type Qty Order No.
ZS/6-2/ FC... 300 0,5* C 0.5 A / 32 V BL 100 1814720000
130 1 C 1 A / 32 SW 100 1814730000
120 2 C 2 A / 32 V GR 100 1814740000
100 3 C 3 A / 32 V VI 100 1814750000
250 100 4 C 4 A / 32 V RS 100 1814760000
120 5 C 5 A / 32 V HBR 100 1814770000
112 7,5 C 7.5 A / 32 V BR 100 1814780000
85 10 C 10 A / 32 V RT 100 1814790000
85 15 C 15 A / 32 V HBL 100 1814800000
80 20 C 23 A / 32 V GE 100 1814810000
82 25 C 25 A / 32 V NA / WS 100 1814820000
77 30 C 30 A / 32 V HGN 100 1814830000
84 35* C 35 A / 32 V GN 100 1814840000
80 40* C 40 A / 32 V OR 100 1814850000
D
Notes: *Fuses do not comply with DIN 72581-3C
– According to DIN 72581-3C a blade fuse may The whole system must always be considered
only be operated with 80% IN as a continuous for 35/40 A fuses.
1)
load. Do not exceed the voltage range of the fuse.
2)
– Use fuses from Weidmüller with a low power Continuous current through fuse: max. 80% IN
3)
loss/voltage drop! Use the largest possible conductor cross-
– Please note the derating section in order to dissipate the very high thermal
– Do not insert or remove a fuse when the circuit losses of the fuse.
is under load.
– Max. temperature of contacts: 130°C
– Insulating material/Flammability class: Wemid/V0

Component isolating plugs

The Weidmüller philosophy is to realise a multitude An unintentional reconnection of the circuit is
of applications with just a few parts. The compo- prevented by simply removing the isolating plug.
nent and isolating plugs (BEST and TNST) repre- The BEST and the TNST have the same pin
sent a logical extension of this cost-effective and arrangement. Both plugs are also identical with
efficient approach. The component plug can the SIHA 3 fuse holder, meaning that they can
accommodate electronic components and connect be used in all the “disconnecting products” of the
them to the terminal. And once an isolating plug W-, Z-, I- and P-Series.
is removed, the clamping point is obviously
disconnected. The opening is easy to recognise.

Component plug (up to 250 V)

Ordering data
Type Fitted with… Qty Order No.

can be reversed BEST - 25 1833100000

BEST/DRBR wire jumper 25 1878570000
BEST/D diode 1N4007 25 1878560000
for terminal type
ZTR 2.5...
ZTR 2.5-2
ZDL 2.5/TR
ZDL 2.5/SI

Isolating plug
Ordering data
Trennstecker
Type Colour Qty Order No.
gelb Wemid
TNST yellow Wemid 25 1833090000
for terminal type
ZTR 2.5...
ZTR 2.5-2
ZDL 2.5/TR
ZDL 2.5/SI

D.141
Module no:0404033 LabelId:0404033 Operator:Phoenix 14:30:32, Donnerstag, 28. Juni 2001

AKG 16 / AKG 35

(IEC) rigid flexible I

2 solid stranded AWG [A]
[mm ]
AKG 16 1.5-16 1.5-16 16-6 76*
AKG 35 2.5-35 2.5-25 14-2 125 *
* Note the current carrying capacity of the busbars.

H ACEI
Pcs.
Description Type Order No. Pkt.

L/N/PE connecting terminal block,

without insulating cap AK 16 04 04 03 3 50

with insulating cap: blue (for N) AKG 16 BU 04 23 01 4 50

green-yellow (for PE) AKG 16 GNYE 04 23 02 7 50
black (for L1, L2, L3) AKG 16 BK 04 23 03 0 50
L/N/PE connecting terminal block,
without insulating cap AK 35 04 04 04 6 50

with insulating cap: blue (for N) AKG 35 BU 04 24 01 3 50

green-yellow (for PE) AKG 35 GNYE 04 24 02 6 50
black (for L1, L2, L3) AKG 35 BK 04 24 03 9 50

Accessories

(1) Neutral busbar,

NLS-CU 3/10 Imax. : 140 A 04 02 17 4 10
3 x 10 mm, 1 m long, copper,
tin-plated
(2) Support, insulating material, with
retaining screw, optionally applicable AB/SS 04 04 42 8 10
for 3 x 10 mm or 6 x 6 mm busbars
(3) Double support, insulating
material, optionally applicable for 3 x AB 2/SS 04 04 43 1 10
10 mm or
6 x 6 mm busbars, 48 mm high
(4) Double support, as above,
however only ABN 2/SS 04 04 46 0 10
36.8 mm high
(5) Support, with universal foot for
UAB 1 30 32 43 1 50
mounting on [ or 3 ; guides
busbar parallel to terminal strip

(6) Zack strip, 10-section, white ZB 8 (see info)

(7) Screwdriver SZS 1,0 x 4,0 (AK... 12 05 06 6 10

16)
SZS 1,0 x 6,5 (AK... 12 05 07 9 10
35)
Phoenix Contact Elektronischer Katalog Page 1 / 3
Module no:0404033 LabelId:0404033 Operator:Phoenix 14:30:32, Donnerstag, 28. Juni 2001
35)

Technical data

Dimensions AKG 16 AKG 35

Width / length / height [mm] see description drawing
Technical data in accordance with IEC/VDE
Maximum load current / cross section 2 76 / 16 125 / 35
[A] / [mm ]
Current carrying capacity of the neutral [A] 140 140
busbar
Connection capacity
stranded with ferrule without / with plastic 2 1.5 - 16 / 1.5 - 16 2.5 - 35 / 2.5 - 35
[mm ]
sleeve
Multi-conductor connection (2 conductors with same
cross section)
solid / stranded 2 1.5 - 4 / 1.5 - 4 1.5 - 16 / 1.5 - 16
[mm ]
stranded with ferrule without plastic sleeve 2 1.5 - 6 1.5 - 16
[mm ]
stranded with TWIN ferrule with plastic 2 1.5 - 10 1.5 - 10
[mm ]
sleeve
Stripping length [mm] 16 16
Internal cylindrical gage (IEC 947-1:1988) B6 B9
Thread M5 M6
Torque [Nm] 2.5 - 3 3.2 - 3.7
Insulation material PA PA
Inflammability class acc. to UL 94 V2 V2
Temperature indices RTI / Ti 125 / 100 125 / 100

Dimensional drawing

Phoenix Contact Elektronischer Katalog Page 2 / 3

Module no:0404033 LabelId:0404033 Operator:Phoenix 14:30:32, Donnerstag, 28. Juni 2001

Block diagram

Phoenix Contact Elektronischer Katalog Page 3 / 3

Protection Circuit breaker panorama
Circuit protection

Selection guide
Circuit breakers
Type iC60A iC60N

Standard IEC/EN 60898-1, 60947-2 IEC/EN 60947-2, 60898-1

Quality label Country approval pictogram Country approval pictogram
Number of poles 1P 2, 3, 4P – 1P, 1P+N 2, 3, 4P
Add-on residual current devices (Vigi) bb bb
Auxiliaries for remote tripping and indication bb bb
Electrical characteristics
Curves C B, C, D
Ratings (A) In 1 to 63 0.5 to 63
Maximum operational voltage (V) Ue AC (50/60 Hz) 415 440
max DC – 250
Minimum operational voltage (V) Ue AC (50/60 Hz) 220 12
min DC – 12
Insulation voltage (V AC) Ui 500 500
Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp 6 6
Breaking capacity
AC-Breaking capacity Ue (50/60 Hz) Ph / N Ph / Ph Ph / N Ph / Ph
IEC 60947-2 (kA) Icu 12...60 V – – 50 (0.5 to 4 A) –
36 (6 to 63 A)
12...133 V – – – 50 (0.5 to 4 A)
36 (6 to 63 A)
100...133 V – – 50 (0.5 to 4 A) –
20 (6 to 63 A)

220...240 V 6 10 50 (0.5 to 4 A) 50 (0.5 to 4 A)

10 (6 to 63 A) 20 (6 to 63 A)

380...415 V – 6 – 50 (0.5 to 4 A)
10 (6 to 63 A)

440 V – – – 25 (0.5 to 4 A)
6 (6 to 63 A)

Ics 100 % of Icu 100 % of Icu (0.5 to 4 A)

75 % of Icu (6 to 63 A)
EN 60898 (A) Icn 230/400 V 4500 4500 6000 6000
DC-Breaking capacity Ue DC
IEC 60947-2 (kA) Icu 12...60 V (1P) – – 15 –
100...133 V (2P) – – – 20
100...133 V (3P) – – – 30
220...250 V (4P) – – – 40
Ics 100 % of Icu 100 % of Icu
Other characteristics
Suitable for industrial isolation according to IEC/EN 60947-2 bb bb
Fault tripping indication Visi-trip window Visi-trip window
Positive contact indication bb bb
Fast closing bb bb
Dismounting with comb busbar in place Upstream connection Upstream connection
Degree of protection IP Device only IP20 IP20
Device in modular IP40 IP40
enclosure Insulation class II Insulation class II
For more detail, see module Page 32 Page 36
Accessories Pages 123 and 136 Pages 123 and 136
Auxiliaries Pages 123 and 136 Pages 155 and 168
Add-on residual current devices (Vigi) Page 82 Page 82

(1) 100 % of Icu for ratings 6 to 25 A under Ue 100 to 133 V AC Ph/Ph and Ue 12 to 60 V AC Ph/N.

28 version: 1.1 Acti9 Catalogue 2011_12.indd

 Protection iC60N circuit breakers
Circuit protection
(curve B, C, D)

IEC/EN 60947-2
DB106604

DB123398

DB116619

IEC/EN 60898-1
bb iC60N circuit breakers are multi-standard circuit breakers which combine the
following functions:
vv circuit protection against short-circuit currents,
vv circuit protection against overload currents,
vv suitable for industrial isolation according to IEC/EN 60947-2, standard.
vv fault tripping indication by a red mechanical indicator in circuit breaker front face.
PB104437-40

PB104450-40

Alternating current (AC) 50/60 Hz

Breaking capacity (Icu) according to IEC/EN 60947-2 Service
Voltage (Ue) breaking
capacity
Ph/Ph (2P, 3P, 4P) 12 to 133 V 220 to 240 V 380 to 415 V 440 V
(Ics)
Ph/N (1P, 1P+N) 12 to 60 V 100 to 133 V 220 to 240 V -
Rating (In) 0.5 to 4 A 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 25 kA 100 % of Icu
6 to 63 A 36 kA 20 kA 10 kA 6 kA 75 % of Icu
Breaking capacity (Icn) according to IEC/EN 60898-1
Voltage (Ue)
Ph/Ph 400 V
Ph/N 230 V
Rating (In) 0.5 to 63 A 6000 A

Direct current (DC)

Breaking capacity (Icu) according to IEC/EN 60947-2 Service
Voltage (Ue) breaking
capacity
Between +/- 12 to 72 V 100 to 133 V 220 to 250 V
(Ics)
Number of poles 1P 2P (in series) 3P (in series) 4P (in series)
Rating (In) 1 to 63 A 6 kA 6 kA 6 kA 6 kA 100 % of Icu

Catalogue numbers
iC60N circuit breaker
Type 1P 2P
1 1 3

2 2 4

Auxiliaries Remote tripping and indication, Remote tripping and indication,

pages 123 and 136 pages 123 and 136
Vigi iC60 Vigi iC60 add-on residual current device, page 82 Vigi iC60 add-on residual current device, page 82
Rating (In) Curve Curve
B(2) C D(1) B(2) C D(1)
0.5 A(1) A9F73170 A9F74170 A9F75170 A9F73270 A9F74270 A9F75270
1 A(1) A9F73101 A9F74101 A9F75101 A9F73201 A9F74201 A9F75201
2 A(1) A9F73102 A9F74102 A9F75102 A9F73202 A9F74202 A9F75202
3 A(1) A9F73103 A9F74103 A9F75103 A9F73203 A9F74203 A9F75203
4 A(1) A9F73104 A9F74104 A9F75104 A9F73204 A9F74204 A9F75204
6A A9F76106 A9F77106 A9F75106 A9F76206 A9F77206 A9F75206
10 A A9F76110 A9F77110 A9F75110 A9F76210 A9F77210 A9F75210
13 A(1) A9F73113 A9F74113 A9F75113 A9F73213 A9F74213 A9F75213
16 A A9F76116 A9F77116 A9F75116 A9F76216 A9F77216 A9F75216
20 A A9F76120 A9F77120 A9F75120 A9F76220 A9F77220 A9F75220
25 A A9F76125 A9F77125 A9F75125 A9F76225 A9F77225 A9F75225
32 A A9F76132 A9F77132 A9F75132 A9F76232 A9F77232 A9F75232
40 A A9F76140 A9F77140 A9F75140 A9F76240 A9F77240 A9F75240
50 A A9F76150 A9F77150 A9F75150 A9F76250 A9F77250 A9F75250
63 A A9F76163 A9F77163 A9F75163 A9F76263 A9F77263 A9F75263
Width in 9-mm modules 2 4
Accessories Pages 123 and 136 Pages 123 and 136

(1) VDE approved only. (2) only NF and VDE.

36 version: 1.1 Acti9 Catalogue 2011_12.indd

 Protection iC60N circuit breakers
Circuit protection
(curve B, C, D) (cont.)
PB104434-40

bb Insulated terminals IP20

Visi-trip window
bb Fault tripping is indicated by a red
mechanical indicator on the front face

bb Large circuit
labelling area
Positive contact indication
bb Suitable for industrial isolation according to
IEC/EN 60947-2 standard.
bb The presence of the green strip guarantees
physical opening of the contacts and allows
operations to be performed on the downstream
circuit in complete safety

bbDouble clip for

dismounting with comb
bb Increased product service life thanks to:
busbar in place
vv overvoltage resistance by high level of industrial performances conception
(pollution degree, rated impulse withstand voltage and insulation voltage),
vv high performance limitation (see limitation curves),
vv fast closing independent of the speed of actuation of the toggle.
bb Remote indication, open/closed/tripped, by optional auxiliary contacts.
bb Top or bottom electrical feeding.

3P 4P
1 3 5 1 3 5 7

2 4 6 2 4 6 8

Remote tripping and indication, Remote tripping and indication,

pages 123 and 136 pages 123 and 136
Vigi iC60 add-on residual current device, page 82 Vigi iC60 add-on residual current device, page 82
Curve Curve
B(2) C D(1) B(2) C D(1)
A9F73370 A9F74370 A9F75370 A973470 A9F74470 A9F75470
A9F73301 A9F74301 A9F75301 A9F73401 A9F74401 A9F75401
A9F73302 A9F74302 A9F75302 A9F73402 A9F74402 A9F75402
A9F73303 A9F74303 A9F75303 A9F73403 A9F74403 A9F75403
A9F73304 A9F74304 A9F75304 A9F73404 A9F74404 A9F75404
A9F76306 A9F77306 A9F75306 A9F76406 A9F77406 A9F75406
A9F76310 A9F77310 A9F75310 A9F76410 A9F77410 A9F75410
A9F73313 A9F74313 A9F75313 A9F73413 A9F74413 A9F75413
A9F76316 A9F77316 A9F75316 A9F76416 A9F77416 A9F75416
A9F76320 A9F77320 A9F75320 A9F76420 A9F77420 A9F75420
A9F76325 A9F77325 A9F75325 A9F76425 A9F77425 A9F75425
A9F76332 A9F77332 A9F75332 A9F76432 A9F77432 A9F75432
A9F76340 A9F77340 A9F75340 A9F76440 A9F77440 A9F75440
A9F76350 A9F77350 A9F75350 A9F76450 A9F77450 A9F75450
A9F76363 A9F77363 A9F75363 A9F76463 A9F77463 A9F75463
6 8
Pages 123 and 136 Pages 123 and 136

Acti9 Catalogue 2011_12.indd version: 1.1 37

 Protection iC60N circuit breakers
Circuit protection
(curve B, C, D) (cont.)

Connection Without accessory With accessories

Rating Tightening Copper cables 50 mm² Screw-on Multi-cables terminal
DB123060

torque Rigid Flexible Al connection Rigid Flexible

14 mm
6.5 mm or ferrule terminal for ring cables cables
terminal
PZ2

DB122945

DB122946

DB122935

DB118789

DB118787
0.5 to 25 A 2 N.m 1 to 25 mm2 1 to 16 mm2 - Ø 5 mm - -
32 to 63 A 3.5 N.m 1 to 35 mm2 1 to 25 mm2 50 mm2 3 x 16 mm2 3 x 10 mm2

Technical data
Main characteristics
DB123310

According to IEC/EN 60947-2

Insulation voltage (Ui) 500 V AC
Pollution degree 3
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) 6 kV
Thermal tripping Reference temperature 50 °C
Clip on DIN rail 35 mm. Temperature derating See page 233
Magnetic tripping B curve 4 In ± 20 %
C curve 8 In ± 20 %
DB123312

D curve 12 In ± 20 %
Utilization category A
According to IEC/EN 60898-1
Limitation class 3
Rated making and breaking capacity of an Icn1 = Icn
individual pole (Icn1)
Additional characteristics
Indifferent position of installation.
Degree of protection Device only IP20
(IEC 60529) Device in modular IP40
enclosure Insulation class II
IP20 IP40
DB123314

Endurance (O-C) Electrical 10,000 cycles

Mechanical 20,000 cycles
Overvoltage category (IEC 60364) IV
Operating temperature -35°C to +70°C
Storage temperature -40°C to +85°C
Tropicalization (IEC 60068-1) Treatment 2 (relative humidity 95 % to 55°C)

38 version: 1.1 Acti9 Catalogue 2011_12.indd

 Protection iC60N circuit breakers
Circuit protection
(curve B, C, D) (cont.)

Weight (g)
Circuit-breaker
Type iC60N
1P 125
2P 250
3P 375
4P 500

Dimensions (mm)
78.5
4P 72
DB123392

69.5
3P 54
50
1P+N / 2P 36
5.5
1P 18

4.4

94 85 45

64
4.6

Acti9 Catalogue 2011_12.indd version: 1.1 39

 Protection Accessorisation / Auxiliarisation
Circuit protection
Earth leakage protection iC60, iID, Vigi iC60

Connection Without accessory With accessories

Type Rating Tightening Copper cables 50 mm² Screw-on Multi-cables
DB123060

torque Al connection terminal

14 mm terminal for ring
6.5 mm Rigid Flexible Rigid Flexible
or ferrule terminal cables cables
PZ2

DB122945

DB122946

DB122935

DB118789

DB118787
iC60 0.5 to 25 A 2 N.m 1 to 25 mm2 1 to 16 mm2 - Ø 5 mm - -
32 to 63 A 3.5 N.m 1 to 35 mm2 1 to 25 mm2 50 mm2 3 x 16 mm2 3 x 10 mm2
Vigi iC60 25 A 2 N.m 1 to 25 mm2 1 to 16 mm2 - - - -
40 to 63 A 3.5 N.m 1 to 35 mm2 1 to 25 mm2
iID 16 to 100 A 3.5 N.m 1 to 35 mm2 1 to 25 mm2 50 mm2 Ø 5 mm 3 x 16 mm2 3 x 10 mm2

7 Splitter blocks Multiclip see module CA907004

DB123373

Distribloc see module CA907003

8 50 mm² Al terminal 27060
9 Screw-on connection for ring terminal 27053
10 Multi-cables terminal 4 parts 19091
3 parts 19096
11 Comb busbar see module 91906

Mounting accessories
12 Sealable terminal shields 1P (set of 2) A9A26975
for top and bottom 2P (set of 2) A9A26976
connection
3P 1P + 2P
4P 2P + 2P
13 Interpole barrier (set of 10) A9A27001
14 Screw shields 4P (set of 20) A9A26981
14' Screw shields Vigi iC60 (set of 12) A9A26982
15 Clip-on terminal markers see module CA907001
16 9 mm spacer A9A27062
17 Padlocking device (set of 10) A9A26970
18 Plug-in base A9A27003
19 Rotary handle
With handle black A9A27005
With handle red A9A27006
Adapter mechanism without handle A9A27008

Electrical auxiliaries
Indication
4 iOF/SD+OF auxiliary contact A9A26929
(OF+SD or OF+OF combination switch) Auxiliary contacts Tripping devices
5 iSD fault indicating contact A9A26927
6 iOF open/close auxiliary contact A9A26924

Tripping devices
2 iMN undervoltage release see module CA907002
or iMNs undervoltage release
delayed or iMNx
undervoltage release with
external feeding
3 Shunt release iMX, iMX+OF see module CA907002
overvoltage release iMSU

Vigi iC60
Tripping devices must be mounted first.
1 Vigi iC60 add-on residual see module CA902005 Respect specified position for SD functions.
current device

Acti9 Catalogue 2011_12.indd version: 1.1 123

Protection Electrical auxiliaries
Circuit protection
Earth leakage protection for iC60, iID, iSW-NA, RCA
and ARA (cont.)

Tripping
Auxiliaries iMN iMNs iMNx iMSU
Type Undervoltage release Overvoltage release

Instantaneous Delayed Independent of the supply

voltage
PB104477-35

PB104478-35

PB104480-35

PB104479-35
Function
bb Trips the device with which it is combined when its input voltage decreases bb Switches off the power supply
(between 70 % and 35 % Un). Prevents device closing again until its input voltage is restored by opening the breaker with
which it is combined, in the
event that the phase/neutral
voltage is exceeded (loss of
neutral). For a four-phase
network, use three iMSU tripping
auxiliaries
bb Not tripping on bb Separate input and power bb Tripping bb Tripping
transient voltage supply voltage: voltage:
dip (up to 0.2 s) 275 V AC 255 V AC
Wiring diagrams
DB118804

DB118805

DB118806

Use
bb Emergency stoppage by normally closed push button bb Emergency stoppage with bb Protection of equipment
bb Ensures the safety of power supply circuits for several machines fail-safe principle against overvoltages on the
by preventing "uncontrolled" restarting bb Insensitive to control circuit electrical network
voltage variation to increase (neutral conductor break)
service continuity bb Voltage monitoring between
phase and neutral conductors
Catalogue numbers A9A26960 A9A26961 A9A26959 A9A26963 A9A26969 A9A26971 A9A26979 A9A26479

Technical specifications
Rated voltage V AC 220…240 48 115 220…240 220…240 380…415 230 230
(Ue) V DC – 48 – – –
Operating Hz 50/60 400 50/60 50/60 50/60
frequency
Red mechanical indicator On front face On front face On front face On front face
Test function – – – –
Width in 9 mm modules 2 2 2 2
Operating current – – – –

Number of contacts – – – –
Operating °C -35…+70 -35…+70 -35…+70 -35…+70
temperature
Storage °C -40…+85 -40…+85 -40…+85 -40…+85
temperature

128 version: 1.1 Acti9 Catalogue 2011_12.indd

 Protection Electrical auxiliaries
Circuit protection for iC60, iID, iSW-NA, RCA
Earth leakage protection
and ARA (cont.)

Indication
iMX iMX+OF iOF iSD iOF/SD+OF
Shunt release Open/close Fault indicating contact Double open/close or
auxiliary contact fault indicating contact
With Open/Close auxiliary contact
PB104496-35

PB104481-35

PB104474-35

PB104476-35

PB104475-35
bb Trips the breaker when powered bb Changeover contact bb Changeover contact bb The iOF/SD+OF auxiliary
indicates "open" or "closed" indicates position of the is a 2-in-1 product: via a
position of the breaker breaker; upon: mechanical selector switch,
vv electrical fault it provides two contacts,
vv action on tripping auxiliary OF+SD or OF+OF
bb Same indication as
VISI-TRIP

bb Includes an open/close contact

(OF) to indicate the "open" or
"closed" position of the breaker
DB123012

DB118808

DB118810

DB118811

DB118812

DB118813
U>

OF position SD position

bb Emergency stoppage by bb Emergency stoppage by bb Remote indication of bb Remote indication of bb Remote indication of
normally open push button normally open push button the position of the tripping upon a fault of the position and/or tripping upon
bb Remote indication of the associated breaker associated breaker a fault of the associated
position of the associated breaker breaker

A9A26476 A9A26477 A9A26478 A9A26946 A9A26947 A9A26948 A9A26924 A9A26927 A9A26929

100…415 48 12…24 100…415 48 12…24 240…415 240…415 240…415

110…130 48 12…24 110…130 48 12…24 24…130 24…130 24…130
50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60

On front face On front face On front face On front face On front face
– – On toggle On toggle On toggle
2 2 1 1 1
– y 24 V DC 6A 24 V DC 6A
48 V DC 2A 48 V DC 2A
y 130 V DC 1A 60 V DC 1.5 A
y 240 V AC 6A 130 V DC 1A
415 V AC 3A 240 V AC 6A
415 V AC 3A
– 1 NO/NC 1 NO/NC 1 NO/NC 1 NO/NC + 1 NO/NC
-35…+70 -35…+70 -35…+70 -35…+70 -35…+70

-40…+85 -40…+85 -40…+85 -40…+85 -40…+85

Acti9 Catalogue 2011_12.indd version: 1.1 129

 Technical advice Tripping curves

t The following curves show the total fault current breaking time, depending on its
amperage. For example: based on the curve on page 3, an iC60 circuit breaker of
curve C, 20 A rating, will interrupt a current of 100 A (5 times the rated current In) in:
Thermal tripping bb 2 seconds at least
limits bb 7 seconds at most.

The circuit breakers’ tripping curves consist of two parts:

bb tripping of overload protection (thermal tripping device): the higher the current, the
shorter the tripping time
bb tripping of short-circuit protection (magnetic tripping device): if the current exceeds
Electromagnetic the threshold of this protection device, the breaking time is less than 10 milliseconds.
tripping limits For short-circuit currents exceeding 20 times the rated current, the time-current
curves do not give a sufficiently precise representation. The breaking of high
short-circuit currents is characterized by the current limiting curves, in peak current
and in energy. The total breaking time can be estimated at 5 times the value of the
ratio (I2t)/(Î)2.

min. max. Verification of the discrimination between two

circuit breakers
By superimposing the curve of a circuit breaker on that of the circuit breaker installed
In upstream, one can check whether this combination will be discriminating in cases of
overload (discrimination for all current values, up to the magnetic threshold of the
upstream circuit breaker). This verification is useful when one of the two circuit
breakers has adjustable thresholds; for fixed-threshold devices, this information is
provided directly by the discrimination tables.
To check discrimination on short circuit, the energy characteristics of the two devices
must be compared.

212 version: 1.1 Acti9 Catalogue 2011_12.indd

Technical advice Tripping curves

iC60N/H/L ratings up to 4 A
Curve B Curve C

1000 1000

100 100

10 10

t(s) t(s)

1 1

0,1 0,1

0,01 0,01

0,001 0,001
1 10 1 10
I / In I / In

Curve D

1000

100

10

t(s)

0,1

0,01

0,001
1 10
I / In

Tripping times (min, max) at an ambient temperature of 30 °C (standards IEC/

EN 60898).

Acti9 Catalogue 2011_12.indd version: 1.1 213

Acti9 technical advice Tripping curves

iC60N/H/L ratings 6 to 63 A
Curve B Curve C

1000 1000

100 100

10 10

t(s) t(s)

1 1

0,1 0,1

0,01 0,01

0,001 0,001
1 10 1 10
I / In I / In

Curve D

1000

100

10

t(s)

0,1

0,01

0,001
1 10
I / In

Tripping times (min, max) at an ambient temperature of 30 °C (standards IEC/

EN 60898).

214 version: 1.1 Acti9 Catalogue 2011_12.indd

 Preface, Contents
SIMATIC
1
General Technical Specifications
Programmable Logic 2
Power Supply Modules
Controllers S7-300
Module Data 3
Digital Modules

4
Analog Modules

Reference Manual 5
Special Signal Modules

6
The following supplements are part of this documentation: Interface Modules

No. Designation Drawing number Edition

7
RS 485 Repeater
1 Product information A5E00201782-03 12/2004
2 Product information A5E00348892-01 08/2004 SIMATIC TOP Connect and 8
3 Product information A5E00352937-01 10/2004 SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA
4 Product information A5E00400156-01 12/2004

Appendices
Parameter Sets for
Signal Modules
A
Diagnostics Data of
Signal Modules
B

Dimension Drawings
C
Spare Parts and Accessories
for S7-300 Modules
D
This manual is part of the documentation package
with the order numbers: Guidelines for Handling Electro-
Programmable Controller S7-300: static Sensitive Devices (ESD)
E
6ES7398-8FA10-8BA0

List of Abbreviations
F
ET 200M Distributed I/O Device:
6ES7153-1AA00-8BA0
Glossary, Index

Edition 02/2004
A5E00105505-03
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices intended to ensure personal safety, as well as to protect the products and
connected equipment against damage. These notices are highlighted by the symbols shown below and
graded according to severity by the following texts:
Danger
! indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions
are not taken.

Warning
! indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper
precautions are not taken.

Caution
! indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Notice
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a
particular part of the documentation.

Qualified Personnel
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are
defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground and to tag circuits, equipment, and
systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Correct Usage
Note the following:

Warning
! This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the
technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which
have been approved or recommended by Siemens.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed
correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.

Trademarks
SIMATIC, SIMATIC HMI and SIMATIC NET are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG.
Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trademarks
might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners.

Copyright W Siemens AG 2004 All rights reserved Disclaim of Liability

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement
contents is not permitted without express written authority. with the hardware and software described. Since deviations
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed
design, are reserved. regularly and any necessary corrections included in
subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are
Siemens AG welcomed.
Bereich Automation and Drives
Geschaeftsgebiet Industrial Automation Systems  Siemens AG 2004
Postfach 4848, D- 90327 Nuernberg Technical data subject to change.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft A5E00105505-03
Preface

Purpose of the manual

The information contained in this manual will enable you to look up operator
actions, function descriptions and the technical specifications of the signal
modules, power supply modules and interface modules of the S7-300.
How to configure, assemble and wire these modules in an S7-300 or ET 200M
system is described in the installation manuals for each system.

Required basic knowledge

To understand this manual, it is necessary to have a general knowledge of
automation and programmable logic controllers.

Scope of this manual

The present documentation package contains reference manuals for all the
modules current at the time the manuals were published.
We reserve the right to enclose a product information leaflet containing up-to-date
information on the module with new modules and modules with a new product
version.

Changes compared with the previous version

Compared to the previous version, of the “Module Data” reference manual, the
following chapters and appendices have been thoroughly revised and new modules
added, as necessary:
• Preface
• Chapter 1 “General Technical Specifications”
• Chapter 3 “Digital Modules”,
• Chapter 4 “Analog Modules”
• Appendix A “Signal Module Parameter Sets”
• Glossary
Note: The previous version of this “Module Data” reference manual can be
recognized by the number in the footer: A5E00105505-02.
The current number is: A5E00105505-03.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 iii
Preface

Approbations
Refer to Section 1.1 Standards and approvals.

CE Approval
Refer to Section 1.1 Standards and approvals.

Identification for Australia (C-Tick-Mark)

Refer to Section 1.1 Standards and approvals.

Standards
Refer to Section 1.1 Standards and approvals.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

iv A5E00105505-03
 Preface

How the manual fits in

S7-300

Manual Description of operation, functions and

• CPU 31xC and CPU 31x, Technical Data technical specifications of the CPU.

Reference Manual Description of operation, functions and

• CPU Data: CPU 312 IFM – 318-2 DP technical specifications of the CPU.

Operating Manual Description of configuration, installation,

• S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Installation wiring, networking and commissioning of an
S7-300.
Installation manual Description of configuration, installation,
• Automation system S7-300, installation: CPU 312 wiring, networking and commissioning of an
IFM – 318-2 DP S7-300.

Manual Description of the individual technological

• CPU 31xC: Technological Functions functions: Positioning, counting, point–to–point
coupling, control.
• Examples
The CD contains examples for the
technological functions.
Module data reference manual Descriptions of functions and technical
specifications of signal modules, power
→ • Reference Manual
You are reading this manual

supply modules and interface modules.

Instruction List The instruction set lists of the CPUs and their
• CPU 312 IFM – 318-2 DP execution times.
• CPU 31xC and CPU 31x A list of executable blocks (OBs/SFCs/SFBs)
and their execution times.
Getting Started Getting Started documents use a concrete
• CPU 31x: Commissioning example to guide you through the individual
commissioning steps until you have a
• CPU 31xC: Commissioning
functioning application.
• CPU 31xC: Positioning with analog output
• CPU 314C: Positioning with digital output
• CPU 31xC: Counting
• CPU 31xC: Rules
• CPU 31xC: Point-to-point connection
• CPU 317-2 PN/DP: Configuration of the PROFInet
interface X2

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 v
Preface

ET 200M

Distributed Peripheral manual

• Manual Description of configuration, assembly,
wiring.
Signal modules for process automation reference
manual Description of use in process automation,
• Reference Manual parameterization with SIMATIC PDM, digital
input modules, digital output modules.
Module data reference manual

→ • Reference Manual Descriptions of functions and technical

You are reading this manual

specifications of signal modules, power

supply modules and interface
modules.

Navigation
To help you find special information quickly, the manual contains the following
access aids:
• At the start of the manual you will find a complete table of contents and a list of
the diagrams and tables that appear in the manual.
• An overview of the contents of each section is provided in the left column on
each page of each chapter.
• You will find a glossary in the appendix at the end of the manual. The glossary
contains definitions of the main technical terms used in the manual.
• At the end of the manual you will find a comprehensive index which gives you
fast access to the information you need.

Recycling and disposal

Because of its low-emission equipment, it is possible to recycle the S7-300. For
ecologically harmless recycling and disposal of your old device, contact a
certificated disposal service for electronic scrap.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

vi A5E00105505-03
 Preface

Additional support
Please contact your local Siemens representative if you have any queries about
the products described in this manual.
http://www.ad.siemens.com/automation/partner

Training center
We offer a range of relevant courses to help you to get started with the SIMATIC
S7 programmable controller. Please contact your local training center or the central
training center in Nuremberg, D 90327 Germany.
Phone: +49 (911) 895-3200.
Internet: http://www.sitrain.com

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 vii
Preface

A&D Technical Support

Worldwide, available 24 hours a day:

Nuernberg

Johnson City
Beijing

Technical Support

Worldwide (Nuernberg)
Technical Support

24 hours a day, 365 days a year

Phone: +49 (180) 5050-222
Fax: +49 (180) 5050-223
E-Mail: adsupport@
siemens.com
GMT: +1:00
Europe / Africa (Nuernberg) United States (Johnson City) Asia / Australia (Beijing)
Authorization Technical Support and Technical Support and
Authorization Authorization
Local time: Mon.-Fri. Local time: Mon.-Fri. Local time: Mon.-Fri.
8:00 AM to 5:00 PM 8:00 AM to 500 PM 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM
Phone: +49 (180) 5050–222 Phone: +1 (423) 262 2522 Phone: +86 10 64 75 75 75
Fax: +49 (180) 5050-223 Fax: +1 (423) 262 2289 Fax: +86 10 64 74 74 74
E-Mail: adsupport@ E-Mail: simatic.hotline@ E-Mail: adsupport.asia@
siemens.com sea.siemens.com siemens.com
GMT: +1:00 GMT: –5:00 GMT: +8:00

The languages of the SIMATIC Hotlines and the authorization hotline are generally German and English.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

viii A5E00105505-03
 Preface

Service & Support on the Internet

In addition to our documentation, we offer our Know-how online on the internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support
where you will find the following:
• The newsletter, which constantly provides you with up–to–date information on
your products.
• The right documents via our Search function in Service & Support.
• A forum, where users and experts from all over the world exchange their
experiences.
• Your local representative for Automation & Drives.
• Information on field service, repairs, spare parts and more under “Services”.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 ix
Preface

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

x A5E00105505-03
Contents

1 General Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 Standards and Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.3 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup Batteries . . . . 1-8
1.4 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions
for Operating S7-300s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.5 Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class
and Degree of Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.6 Rated Voltages of the S7-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.7 SIPLUS S7-300 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.8 Mechanical and Climatic Ambient Conditions
for the Operation of SIPLUS S7-300 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.9 Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 potentially explosive area . . . . 1-17
2 Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 Power Supply Module PS 305; 2 A;
(6ES7305-1BA80-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A;
(6ES7307-1BA00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.3 Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A;
(6ES7307-1EAx0-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.4 Power Supply Module PS 307; 10 A;
(6ES7307-1KA00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
3 Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module 3-10
3.3 Digital Module Parameter Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.4 Diagnostics of the Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.5 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x VDC 24;
(6ES7321-1BL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.6 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x 120 VAC;
(6ES7321-1EL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.7 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24;
(6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.8 Digital Input Module SM 321;
DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed; (6ES7321-1BH10-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 xi
Contents

3.9 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V;

with Hardware and Diagnostic Interrupts, clocked;
(6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.9.1 Synchronicity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.9.2 Assigning Parameters to SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.9.3 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.9.4 Interrupts of the SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.10 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V; Source Input;
(6ES7321-1BH50-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3.11 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x UC 24/48 V
(6ES7321-1CH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3.12 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 48-125;
(6ES7321-1CH20-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3.13 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x AC 120/230 V
(6ES7321-1FH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
3.14 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 8 x VAC 120/230;
(6ES7321-1FF01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3.15 Digital Input Module SM 321;
DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL (6ES7321-1FF10-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3.16 Digital Output Module SM 322;
DO 32 x 24 VDC/ 0.5 A; (6ES7322-1BL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3.17 Digital Output Module SM 322;
DO 32 x VAC 120/230/1 A; (6ES7322-1FL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
3.18 Digital Output Module SM 322;
DO 16 x DC 24 V/ 0.5 A; (6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.19 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed;
(6ES7322-1BH10-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.20 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC;
(6ES7322-5GH00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
3.20.1 Parameters of digital output module SM 322 DO 16 x UC24/48 V . . . . . . 3-63
3.21 Digital Output Module SM 322;
DO 16 x VAC 120/230/1 A; (6ES7322-1FH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.22 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A;
(6ES7322-1BF01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
3.23 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x DC 24 V/ 0.5 A;
with diagnostic interrupt; (6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
3.23.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
3.23.2 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . 3-77
3.23.3 Interrupts of the SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
3.24 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 48-125/1,5 A;
(6ES7322-1CF00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
3.25 Digital Output Module SM 322;
DO 8 x VAC 120/230/2 A; (6ES7322-1FF01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
3.26 Digital Output Module SM 322;
DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL (6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

xii A5E00105505-03
 Contents

3.27 Relay Output Module SM 322;

DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC; (6ES7322-1HH01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
3.28 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC;
(6ES7322-1HF01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
3.29 Relay Output Module SM 322;
DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A; (6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
3.29.1 SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
3.29.2 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8 x 230 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . 3-104
3.29.3 Interrupts of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105
3.30 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. VAC 230/5 A;
(6ES7322-1HF10-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106
3.31 Digital Input/Output Module SM 323;
DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7323-1BL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
3.32 Digital Input/Output Module SM 323;
DI 8/DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A; (6ES7323-1BH01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
3.33 Digital Input/Output Module SM 327;
DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A; parameterizable (6ES7327-1BH00-0AB0) . . 3-116
3.33.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A . . . . . . 3-119
4 Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Module . . . . . . 4-8
4.3 Analog Value Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.3.1 Analog Value Representation for Analog Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.3.2 Analog Value Representation for Analog Output Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.4 Setting the Measuring Method and Measuring Ranges of Analog Input
Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.5 Behavior of the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.5.1 Effect of Supply Voltage and Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.5.2 Effect of Range of Values of the Analog Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.5.3 Effect of Operational Limit and Basic Error Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4.6 Conversion, Cycle, Setting and Response Time of Analog Modules . . . . 4-35
4.7 Analog Module Parameter Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4.7.1 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4.7.2 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.7.3 Parameters of the analog input/output modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4.8 Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4.9 Connecting Voltage Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
4.10 Connecting Current Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4.11 Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4.11.1 Connecting resistance thermometers to the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . 4-56
4.12 Connecting Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4.13 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
4.14 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Voltage Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
4.15 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Current Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 xiii
Contents

4.16 Diagnostics of the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

4.17 Interrupts of the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
4.18 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits;
(6ES7331-7NF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
4.18.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
4.18.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
4.19 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits
(6ES7331-7NF10-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
4.19.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
4.19.2 8-channel mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
4.19.3 4-channel mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
4.19.4 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x16 bits 4-94
4.20 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed; synchronous;
(6ES7331-7HF0x-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
4.20.1 Synchronicity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
4.20.2 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
4.20.3 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;
AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
4.21 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits;
(6ES7331-1KF01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
4.21.1 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
4.21.2 Measuring Methods of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
4.22 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits;
(6ES7331-7KF02-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
4.22.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
4.22.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;
AI 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
4.23 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD (6ES7331-7PF00-0AB0) . . . . 4-125
4.23.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
4.23.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . 4-135
4.24 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC (6ES7331-7PF10-0AB0) . . . . . . 4-138
4.24.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
4.24.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . 4-150
4.25 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits;
(6ES7331-7KB02-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
4.25.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
4.25.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331;
AI 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
4.26 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits;
(6ES7332-5HF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
4.26.1 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166
4.26.2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332;
AO 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
4.27 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bit; synchronous;
(6ES7332-7ND01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
4.27.1 Synchronicity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172
4.27.2 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-174
4.27.3 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits . . . 4-175

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

xiv A5E00105505-03
 Contents

4.28 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits;

(6ES7332-5HD01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-176
4.28.1 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179
4.28.2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332;
AO 4 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180
4.29 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits;
(6ES7332-5HB01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-182
4.29.1 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-185
4.29.2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332;
AO 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-186
4.30 Analog Input/Output Module SM334;
AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits; (6ES7334-0CE01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-188
4.30.1 Commissioning the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-192
4.30.2 Measuring/output Method and Measuring/output Range of the SM 334;
AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-193
4.31 Analog Input/Output Module SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits;
(6ES7334-0KE00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-194
4.31.1 Commissioning the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-198
4.31.2 Measuring/output Method and Measuring/output Range of the SM 334;
AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-198
5 Special Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 Simulator Module SM 374; IN/OUT 16;
(6ES7374-2XH01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.3 Dummy Module DM 370; (6ES7370-0AA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.4 Position Decoder Module SM 338; POS-INPUT;
(6ES7338-4BC01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.4.1 Synchronous Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.4.2 Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.4.3 Functions of the SM 338; POS INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.4.4 Encoder Value Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.4.5 Gray/Dual Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.4.6 Transferred Encoder Value and Normalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.4.7 Freeze Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.4.8 SM 338; POS-INPUT Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.4.9 SM 338; POS-INPUT Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.4.10 Diagnosis of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.4.11 Interrupts of the SM 338; POS INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.4.12 Technical Specifications of the 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 xv
Contents

6 Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Interface Module IM 360; (6ES7360-3AA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3 Interface Module IM 361; (6ES7361-3CA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.4 Interface Module IM 365; (6ES7365-0BA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
7 RS 485 Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Application and Characteristics; (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2 Appearance of the RS 485 Repeater; (6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0) . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.3 RS 485 Repeater in Ungrounded and Grounded Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.4 Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
8 SIMATIC TOP Connect and SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2 Wiring Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2.1 Cut the Connecting Cable to Length and Terminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2.2 Wiring the Front Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.2.3 Connecting the Connecting Cable to the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.2.4 Wiring Actuators/Sensors to the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.3 Wiring SIMATIC TOP Connect with Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.3.1 SIMATIC TOP connect Components and Selection Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.3.2 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for One-Conductor Connection . . 8-14
8.3.3 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for Three-Conductor Connection 8-16
8.3.4 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for 2A Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8.4 Wiring SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA with Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8.4.1 SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA Components and Selection Aid . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8.4.2 SIMATIC TOP Connect TPA Terminal Assignment
and Terminal Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
8.4.3 Connecting the Signal-Line Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
8.4.4 Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
A Parameter Sets for Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1 How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the User Program . A-1
A.2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A.5 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
A.6 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
A.7 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
A.8 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
A.9 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
A.10 Parameters of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
A.11 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

xvi A5E00105505-03
 Contents

B Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

B.1 Evaluating Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules in the User Program . B-1
B.2 Structure and Content of Diagnostic Data Bytes 0 to 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B.3 Channel-Specific Diagnostic Data from Byte 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
B.4 Diagnostic Data of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
C Dimension Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
C.1 Dimension Drawings of the Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.2 Dimension Drawings of the Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C.3 Dimension Drawings of the Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C.4 Dimension Drawings of the Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
C.5 Dimension Drawings for Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
D Spare Parts and Accessories for S7-300 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
E Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
E.1 What is ESD? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
E.2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
E.3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge Damage . E-4
F List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 xvii
Contents

Figures
2-1 Wiring Schematic of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A) . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-2 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A) . . . . . . 2-5
2-3 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A) . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-4 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A) . . . . . . 2-7
2-5 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A) . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-6 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A) . . . . . . 2-10
2-7 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A) . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-8 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A) . . . . . 2-15
3-1 Module View and Block Diagram of the Digital Input Module SM 321;
DI 32 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-2 Terminal assignment of the SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-3 ModuleView and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321;
DI 32 x 20 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3-4 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321;
DI 16 x 24VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3-5 Module view and block diagram of the SM 321;
DI 16 x 24VDC High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3-6 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321;
DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3-7 Terminal assignment for redundant supply of encoders of SM 321;
DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-8 Terminal assignment for resistive circuit of the encoder of the SM 321;
DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-9 Start Information of OB 40: Which Event Has Triggered
the Hardware Interrupt at the Limit Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3-10 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321;
DI 16 x 24 VDC (Source Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3-11 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321;
DI 16 x 24/48VUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3-12 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 321; DI 16 x 48-125 VDC . . . . . . 3-38
3-13 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 x 120/230VAC . . 3-40
3-14 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC . . . 3-42
3-15 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321;
DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3-16 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322;
DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3-17 Terminal Assignment of the SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3-18 Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 322;
D0 32 x VAC 120/230 /1 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3-19 Terminal assignment of the SM 322; DO 32 x AC 120/230 V/1 A . . . . . . 3-51
3-20 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A 3-54
3-21 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322;
DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3-22 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC . . . . . . 3-60
3-23 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322;
DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/1 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3-24 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322;
DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
3-25 Module view of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 V DC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
3-26 Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
3-27 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322;
DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
3-28 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322;
DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

xviii A5E00105505-03
 Contents

3-29 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322;

DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
3-30 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 322;
DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
3-31 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM
322; DO 8 x REL. 230 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
3-32 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322;
DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
3-33 Special Characteristic for Operation
with a Safe Electrical Extra-Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
3-34 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322;
DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
3-35 Special Characteristic for Operation with a
Safe Electrical Extra-Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
3-36 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 323;
DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111
3-37 Terminal assignment of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . 3-111
3-38 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input/Output Module SM 323;
DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
3-39 Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 327;
DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, parameterizable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117
3-40 Data record 1 of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
3-41 Re-readability of the outputs of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A 3-121
4-1 Easing Measuring Range Modules from the Analog Input Module . . . . . . 4-29
4-2 Inserting Measuring Range Modules into the Analog Input Module . . . . . 4-30
4-3 Example of the Relative Error of an Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4-4 Scan time of an analog input or output module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4-5 Example of the Influence of Smoothing on the Step Response . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4-6 Settling and Response times of the Analog Output Channels . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4-7 Connecting Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4-8 Connecting Isolated Sensors to a Non-Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4-9 Connecting Non-Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4-10 Connecting non-isolated sensors to a non-isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4-11 Connecting Voltage Sensors to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
4-12 Connecting two-wire transmitters to an isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4-13 Connecting two-wire transmitters supplied from L+ to an
isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4-14 Connecting four-wire transmitters to an isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4-15 Four-conductor connection of resistance thermometers to an isolated AI 4-54
4-16 Three-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers
to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4-17 Two-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers
to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4-18 Three-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers
to the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4-19 Two-conductor connection of resistance thermometers
to the SM 331; AI 8x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4-20 Three-conductor connection of resistance thermometers
to the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4-21 Four-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers
to the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
4-22 Design of Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4-23 Connection of Thermocouples with Internal Compensation to
an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4-24 Connection of Thermocouples with Compensation Box to an Isolated AI 4-62

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 xix
Contents

4-25 Connection of Thermocouples with Comparison Point (Order No.

M72166-xxx00) to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4-26 Connecting thermocouples via a reference junction to the
SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
4-27 Connecting thermocouples with external compensation via resistance
thermometers to the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
4-28 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated AO over
a Four-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
4-29 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of a Non-Isolated AO over a
Two-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
4-30 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of an Isolated AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
4-31 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of a Non-Isolated AO . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
4-32 Start Information of OB 40: Which Event Has Triggered
the Hardware Interrupt at the Limit Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
4-33 Module view and block diagram of the analog input module SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4-34 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . 4-87
4-35 8-channel mode cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
4-36 4-channel mode cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
4-37 Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 331;
AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
4-38 Calculation of the filter and processing time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
4-39 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331;
AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
4-40 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331;
AI 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
4-41 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
4-42 Hardware filter 8 channels scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
4-43 Software filter 8 channels scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
4-44 Hardware filter 4 channels scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
4-45 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
4-46 Hardware filter 8 channels scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
4-47 Software filter 8 channels scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
4-48 Hardware filter 4 channels scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
4-49 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331;
AI 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
4-50 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332;
AO 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
4-51 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . 4-170
4-52 Calculation of the processing time and the time for updating the output . 4-173
4-53 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332;
AO 4 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-177
4-54 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332;
AO 2 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-183
4-55 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input/Output Module SM 334;
AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-189
4-56 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits . . . 4-195
5-1 Module view of the simulator module SM 374; IN/OUT 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-2 Module view of the dummy module DM 370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-3 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . 5-9
6-1 Front View of the Interface Module IM 360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-2 Front View of the Interface Module IM 361 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-3 Front View of the Interface Module IM 365 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
7-1 RC Network with 10 MW for Configuration with
Ungrounded Reference Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

xx A5E00105505-03
 Contents

7-2 Isolation between the Bus Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

7-3 Block diagram of the RS 485 repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
8-1 SIMATIC TOP connect on a S7-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8-2 Threading the Round-Sheath Ribbon Cable into the Connector . . . . . . . . 8-5
8-3 Inserting the Connecting Cable into the Front Connector Module . . . . . . . 8-8
8-4 Front connector module for 32-channel digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8-5 Insert the connecting cable into the terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8-6 Spring-loaded terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8-7 Principle of Spring-Loaded Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8-8 Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for a
One-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8-9 Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for a
Three-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
8-10 Wiring with Terminal Block for 2A Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8-11 Terminal Assignment of Analog Module to SIMATIC TOP connect TPA . 8-22
8-12 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Terminal Block with Shielding Plate . . . . . . . 8-23
8-13 Example of Connecting SIMATIC TOP connect TPA to SM 321;
AI 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
A-1 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A-2 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A-3 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A-4 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
A-5 Data Record 128 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
A-6 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
A-7 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
A-8 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
A-9 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
A-10 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
A-11 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
A-12 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
A-13 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
A-14 Data record 128 for parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . A-32
A-17 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . A-37
A-18 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . A-40
A-19 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . A-42
B-1 Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B-2 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostics Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B-3 Bytes 4 to 7 of the Diagnostics Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
B-4 Diagnostic Byte for a Digital Input Channel of the SM 321;
DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
B-5 Diagnostic Byte for a Digital Output Channel of the SM 322;
DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
B-6 Diagnostic Byte for an Analog Input Channel of a SM 331
with Diagnostics Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
B-7 Diagnostic Byte for an Analog Output Channel of a SM 332
with Diagnostics Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
B-8 Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data for the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . B-7
B-9 Bytes 2 and 7 of the Diagnostic Data for the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . B-8
B-10 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
C-1 Dimension Drawing of the 483 mm Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C-2 Dimension Drawing of the 530 mm Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C-3 Dimension Drawing of the 830 mm Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C-4 Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C-5 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 160 mm Standard Width . . . . . . . . . . C-4
C-6 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 482.6 mm Standard Width . . . . . . . . C-4

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 xxi
Contents

C-7 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 530 mm Standard Width . . . . . . . . . . C-5
C-8 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 830 mm Standard Width . . . . . . . . . . C-5
C-9 Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
C-10 Complete Dimension Drawing of a Rail for “Insert and Remove” Function
with Active Bus Module, S7-300 Module and Explosion-proof Partition . . C-7
C-11 Dimension Drawing of the Active Bus Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C-12 Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C-13 Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
C-14 Power Supply Module PS 307; 10 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
C-15 Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A
with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP. Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
C-16 Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A
with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP. Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
C-17 Interface Module IM 360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C-18 Interface Module IM 361 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C-19 Interface Module IM 365 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
C-20 Signal Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
C-21 2 Signal Modules with Shield Connecting Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
C-22 SIMATIC TOP connect, 3-tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
C-23 SIMATIC TOP connect, 2-tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
C-24 SIMATIC TOP connect, 1-tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
C-25 RS 485 Repeater on Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
C-26 RS 485 repeater on S7-300 rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
E-1 Electrostatic Voltages which Can Build up on a Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

xxii A5E00105505-03
 Contents

Tables
1-1 Use in an Industrial Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-2 Pulse-Shaped Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-3 Sinusoidal Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-4 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-5 Mechanical Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-6 Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-7 Climatic Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-8 Test Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-9 Rated Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1-10 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-11 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test . . . . . . . . 1-16
1-12 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules Climatic Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
2-1 Reaction of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A)
to Atypical Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-2 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A)
to Atypical Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-3 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A)
to Atypical Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-4 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A)
to Atypical Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
3-1 Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-2 Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued) . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-3 Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-4 Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued) . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-5 Relay Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3-6 Digital Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3-7 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module 3-10
3-8 Parameters of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3-9 Assigning Interrupt Parameters to the Inputs of the SM 321;
DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3-10 Tolerances of the Input Delays of SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3-11 Dependencies of Input Values on the Operating Mode
of the CPU and Supply Voltage L+ of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . 3-29
3-12 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3-13 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V,
Causes of Error and Remedial Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3-14 Data record no. 0 (static parameters): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3-15 Data record no. 1 (dynamic parameters): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3-16 Structure of the data record for SM 322 DO 16 x UC 24/48 V . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
3-17 System diagnostics for SM 322 DO 16 x UC 24/48 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
3-18 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
3-19 Dependence of the output values on the operating mode of the
CPU and on the supply voltage L+ of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A. 3-77
3-20 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
3-21 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A,
Causes of Error and Remedial Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
3-22 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
3-23 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL . . 3-91
3-24 Diagnostic messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL,
error causes and remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
3-25 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
3-26 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. AC 230 VDC/0.5 A . . 3-104
3-27 Diagnostic messages of the SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A,
error causes and remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 xxiii
Contents

3-28 Parameters of the SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 VDC 24/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119

4-1 Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-2 Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued) . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-3 Analog Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-4 Analog Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-5 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module 4-8
4-6 Example: Bit pattern of a 16-bit and a 13-bit analog value . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-7 Possible analog value resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-8 Bipolar Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-9 Unipolar Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-10 Analog Value Representation in
Voltage Measuring Ranges + 10 V to + 1 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-11 Analog Value Representation in
Voltage Measuring Ranges + 500 mV to + 80 mV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-12 Analog Value Representation in
Voltage Measuring Ranges 1 to 5 V and 0 to 10 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-13 Analog Value Representation in
Current Measuring Ranges + 20 mA to + 3.2 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-14 Analog Value Representation in
Current Measuring Ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-15 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Type Transmitters
from 10 kW
and from 150 W to 600 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-16 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors
PT 100, 200, 500, 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-17 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors
PT 100, 200, 500, 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-18 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors
Ni100, 120, 200, 500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4-19 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors
Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4-20 Analog Value Representation for
RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-21 Analog Value Representation for
RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-22 Analog value representation for thermocouples type B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-23 Analog value representation for thermocouples type C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-24 Analog value representation for thermocouples type E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-25 Analog value representation for thermocouples type J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-26 Analog value representation for thermocouples type K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-27 Analog value representation for thermocouples type L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-28 Analog value representation for thermocouples type N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-29 Analog value representation for thermocouples type R, S . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-30 Analog value representation for thermocouples type T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4-31 Analog value representation for thermocouples type U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4-32 Bipolar Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4-33 Unipolar Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4-34 Analog Value Representation in Output Range +10 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4-35 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 to 10 V and 1 to 5 V . 4-26
4-36 Analog Value Representation in Output Range +20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4-37 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 and 20 mA
and 4 to 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4-38 Dependencies of the Analog Input/Output Values on the Operating State
of the CPU and the Supply Voltage L+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4-39 Behavior of the Analog Input Modules as a Function of the Position

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

xxiv A5E00105505-03
 Contents

of the Analog Value within the Range of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

4-40 Behavior of the Analog Output Modules as a Function of the Position
of the Analog Value within the Range of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4-41 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4-42 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4-43 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4-44 Options for Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature . . . . . 4-59
4-45 Ordering Data of the Comparison Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4-46 Diagnostic Messages of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
4-47 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
4-48 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules, Causes of Errors
and Remedial Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
4-49 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules, Causes of Errors
and Remedial Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
4-50 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
4-51 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits
to Channel Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
4-52 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
4-53 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
4-54 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
4-55 Assignment of the channels of the isolated analog input module SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits to channel groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
4-56 Scan times in 8-channel mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
4-57 Measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
4-58 Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from
OB40 during a hardware interrupt or an end-of-scan-cycle interrupt . . . . 4-96
4-59 Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits
High Speed using Measuring Range Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
4-60 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
4-61 Assignment of the channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed to
channel groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
4-62 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
4-63 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
4-64 Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits
Using Measuring Range Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
4-65 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
4-66 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits
to Channel Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
4-67 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
4-68 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
4-69 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD to Channel Groups 4-131
4-70 Scan Times in “Software Filter, 8 Channels” Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
4-71 Measuring ranges of the SM331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
4-72 Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from OB40
during a hardware interrupt or an end-of-scan-cycle interrupt . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
4-73 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
4-74 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC to Channel Groups . . 4-145
4-75 Scan Times in “Software Filter, 8 Channels” Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
4-76 Measuring Ranges of the SM331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
4-77 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331;
AI 8 x TC in 5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
4-78 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331;
AI 8 x TC in 5F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 xxv
Contents

4-79 Content of the 4 bytes with additional information from

OB40 during a hardware interrupt or an end-of-scan-cycle interrupt . . . . 4-152
4-80 Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits
Using Measuring Range Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
4-81 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
4-82 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
4-83 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits . . . 4-168
4-84 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits . . 4-175
4-85 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits . . . 4-181
4-86 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits . . . 4-187
4-87 Measuring ranges of the SM 334;AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-199
4-88 Output ranges of the SM 334;AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-200
5-1 Special signal modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-2 Meaning of the switch settings of the dummy module DM 370 . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-3 Parameters of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-4 SM 338; POS-INPUT: Input Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5-5 Diagnostic messages of the SM 338; POS INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5-6 Diagnostics Messages of the SM 338, Causes of Errors and Remedial
Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
6-1 Interface Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
7-1 Maximum Cable Length of a Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-2 Maximum Cable Length between Two RS 485 Repeaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-3 Description and Functions of the RS 485 Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
8-1 SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA: ConnecModules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8-2 Sequence of Steps for Wiring SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-3 Wiring Rules for Connecting the Supply Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8-4 Assignment of Connecting Cable Terminals to Address Bytes
of 32-Channel Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8-5 Components of SIMATIC TOP connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8-6 Selection for SIMATIC TOP connect Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8-7 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect
with One-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8-8 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block
for One-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8-9 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect
with Three-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8-10 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block
for Three-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8-11 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with 2A Module Connection 8-18
8-12 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for 2A Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8-13 Components for SIMATIC TOP connect TPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8-14 Terminal Assignment of the Terminal Block
of SIMATIC TOP connect TPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
A-1 SFCs for assigning Parameters to Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A-2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A-3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A-4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A-5 Codes for Interference Suppression of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . A-9
A-6 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . A-9
A-7 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
A-8 Codes of Operating Modes of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
A-9 Interference Frequency Suppression Codes for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . A-16
A-10 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . A-16
A-11 Codes of Temperature Coefficients of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . A-18
A-12 Codes Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 x RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

xxvi A5E00105505-03
 Contents

A-13 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19

A-14 Codes of Operating Modes of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
A-15 Interference Frequency Suppression Codes for SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . A-24
A-16 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
A-17 Codes of Reaction to Open Thermocouple of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . A-26
A-18 Codes Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
A-19 Codes for temperature measurement of the analog input module . . . . . . A-28
A-20 Codes for Interference Suppression of the Analog Input Module . . . . . . . A-28
A-21 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . A-28
A-22 Codes for temperature measurement of the analog input module . . . . . . A-29
A-23 Parameters for the isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . A-30
A-24 Codes for the modes of SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
A-25 Codes for interference frequency suppression of the SM 331;
AI 8 x 16 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
A-26 Codes for the measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 x16 bits . . . . . . . . . A-35
A-27 Codes for the smoothing mode settings of the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits . . A-36
A-28 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
A-29 Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . A-38
A-30 Parameters of the SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
A-31 Codes for the output ranges of the analog output module SM332;
AO 8 x 12 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
A-32 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
A-33 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . A-43
A-34 Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . A-43
B-1 Codes of the Module Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
D-1 Accessories and Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 xxvii
Contents

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

xxviii A5E00105505-03
General Technical Specifications 1
What are general technical specifications?
General technical specifications include the following:
• the standards and test values which the modules of the S7-300 programmable
logic controller maintain and satisfy
• the test criteria to which the S7-300 modules were tested.

In this chapter

Section Contents Page

1.1 Standards and Approvals 1-2
1.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility 1-6
1.3 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup 1-8
Batteries
1.4 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for Operating 1-9
S7-300s
1.5 Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of 1-12
Protection
1.6 Rated Voltages of the S7-300 1-13
1.7 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules 1-14
1.8 Mechanical and Climatic Ambient Conditions for the Operation of 1-16
SIPLUS S7-300 Modules
1.9 Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 Potentially Explosive 1-17
Area

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-1
General Technical Specifications

1.1 Standards and Approvals

CE approval
The S7-300 programmable logic controller meets the requirements and
safety-related requirements of the following EU directives and conforms with the
harmonized European standards (EN) for programmable controllers announced in
the Official Journals of the European Community:
• 73/23/EEC “Electrical Equipment Designed for Use between Certain Voltage
Limits” (Low-Voltage Directive)
• 89/336/EEC “Electromagnetic Compatibility” (EMC Directive)
• 94/9/EU “Devices and protection systems for use as prescribed in potentially
explosive areas” (Guidelines for Explosion Protection)

The declarations of conformity are held

at the disposal of the competent authorities at the address below:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik
A&D AS RD4
Postfach 1963
D-92209 Amberg

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-2 A5E00105505-03
 General Technical Specifications

UL approval
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with
• UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)

CSA approval
Canadian Standards Association in accordance with
• C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)

or
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with

UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)

CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)

or

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with

UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)

HAZ. LOC.
CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)

UL 1604 (Hazardous Location)

CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx

Note
The currently applicable approvals can be found on the nameplate of the particular
module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-3
General Technical Specifications

FM approval
Factory Mutual Research (FM) in accordance with
Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx

in accordance with EN 50021 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive

atmospheres; Type of protection “n”)

II 3 G EEx nA II T4..T5

Identification for Australia

The S7-300 programmable logic controller meets the requirements of standard
AS/NZS 2064 (Class A).

IEC 61131
The S7-300 programmable logic controller meets the requirements and criteria of
standard IEC 61131-2 (Programmable Controllers, Part 2: Equipment
Requirements and Tests).

Shipbuilding approval
Classification Societies:
• ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
• BV (Bureau Veritas)
• DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
• GL (Germanischer Lloyd)
• LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)
• Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-4 A5E00105505-03
 General Technical Specifications

Use in an industrial environment

SIMATIC products have been designed for use in an industrial environment.

Table 1-1 Use in an Industrial Environment

EMC Directive Requirements in respect of:

Emitted interference Immunity
Industry EN 61000-6-4: 2001 EN 61000-6-2: 2001

Use in residential environments

If you operate an S7-300 in a residential area, you must ensure Limit Value Class
B in accordance with EN 55011 to guard against radio interference emissions.
Suitable measures to achieve interference suppression according to Limit Value
Class B:
• installation of the S7-300 in grounded cabinets and control boxes
• use of filters in supply lines

Warning
! Personal injury or property damage can result.
In areas subject to danger of explosion, personal injury or property damage can
result if you withdraw connectors while an S7-300 is in operation.
Always isolate the S7-300 in areas subject to danger of explosion before
withdrawing connectors.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-5
General Technical Specifications

1.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility

Introduction
In this section you will find details of the noise immunity of S7-300 modules and
details of radio interference suppression.
The S7-300 modules satisfy, among other things, the requirements of the law
applicable to EMC on the European domestic market.

Definition of “EMC”
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical installation to
function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with
that environment.

Pulse-shaped interference
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of modules compared
to pulse-shaped disturbance variables. A requirement for this is that the S7-300
system complies with the specifications and directives on electric design.

Table 1-2 Pulse-Shaped Interference

Pulse-Shaped Interference Tested with Satisfies

degree of
severity
Electrostatic discharge Discharge in air:"8 kV 3
according to IEC 61000-4-2 Contact discharge: "4 kV
Bursts (fast transient bursts) to 2 kV (supply cable) 3
IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV (signal cable > 3 m)
1 kV (signal cable < 3 m)
Energy-rich single impulse (surge) according to IEC 61000-4-5
External protective circuit required (refer to the manual
S7-300 Programmable Logic Controller, Hardware and Installation,
Chapter “Lightning Protection and Overvoltage Protection”)
• Asymmetrical coupling 2 kV (supply cable)
Direct voltage with protective
elements 3
2 kV (signal/
data cable only > 3 m) possi-
bly with protection elements
• Symmetrical coupling 1 kV (supply cable)
Direct voltage with protection
elements
1 kV (signal line only > 3 m)
possibly with protection ele-
ments

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-6 A5E00105505-03
 General Technical Specifications

Additional measures
If you want to connect an S7-300 system to the public network, you must ensure
Limit Value Class B in accordance with EN 55022.

Sinusoidal interference
The table below shows the EMC behavior of the S7-300 modules with regard to
sinusoidal disturbance variables.

Table 1-3 Sinusoidal Interference

Sinusoidal Interference Test values Satisfies

degree of
severity
HF irradiation (electromagnetic fields)
according to IEC 61000-4-3
10 V/m with 80% amplitude modulation of 1 kHz
3
over the range from 80 MHz to 1000 MHz
according to IEC 61000-4-3
10 V/m with 50% pulse modulation at 900 MHz
HF conductance on cables and cable Test voltage 10 V with 80% amplitude modula-
shields according to IEC 61000-4-6 tion of 1 kHz over the range from 9 MHz to 3
80 MHz

Emission of radio interference

Interference emission of electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 55011: Limit
value class A, Group 1.

From 30 to 230 MHz < 40 dB (
V/m)Q

From 230 to 1000 MHz < 47 dB (
V/m)Q
Measured at a distance of 10 m (98.4 ft.)

Interference emission via the mains AC power supply in accordance with

EN 55011: Limit value class A, Group 1.

From 0.15 to 0.5 MHz < 79 dB (
V)Q

< 66 dB (
V)M
From 0.5 to 5 MHz < 73 dB (
V)Q
< 60 dB (
V)M
From 5 to 30 MHz < 73 dB (
V)Q
< 60 dB (
V)M

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-7
General Technical Specifications

1.3 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup

Batteries

Shipping and storage of modules

S7-300 modules surpass the requirements of IEC 61131-2, in respect of shipping
and storage requirements. The following details apply to modules shipped and/or
stored in their original packing.
Climatic conditions correspond to IEC 60721-3-3, Class 3K7 for storage and IEC
60721-3-2, Class 2K4 for transportation.
Mechanical conditions correspond to IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2M2.

Table 1-4 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules

Condition Permitted range

Free fall (in shipping packing) v 1m
Temperature from – 40 C to + 70C
Atmospheric pressure 1080 to 660 hPa (corresponding to an
altitude of –1000 to 3500 m)
Relative humidity 10 to 95 %, no condensation
Sinusoidal oscillations 5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm
to IEC 60068-2-6 9 – 150 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Shock according to IEC 60068-2-29 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks

Transporting backup batteries

Wherever possible, transport backup batteries in their original packing. Special
approval does not have to be obtained for transporting backup batteries for S7-300
systems. The lithium content of the backup battery is approximately 0.25 g.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-8 A5E00105505-03
 General Technical Specifications

Storing backup batteries

Backup batteries must be stored in a cool and dry place. The maximum shelf life is
5 years.

Warning
! Improper handling of backup batteries can result in injury and damage to property.
If backup batteries are not treated properly, they can explode and cause severe
burning.
Observe the following rules when handling backup batteries used in the S7-300
programmable logic controller:
• never charge them
• never heat them
• never throw them in the fire
• never damage them mechanically (drill, squeeze, etc.)

1.4 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for

Operating S7-300s

Operating conditions
S7-300 systems are intended for stationary use in locations protected against the
weather. The operating conditions surpass the requirements of DIN IEC 60721-3-3.
• Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements)
• Class 3K3 (climatic requirements)

Use with additional measures

The S7-300, for example, must not be used without taking additional measures:
• in locations exposed to a high degree of ionizing radiation
• in hostile environments caused, for instance, by
– dust accumulation
– corrosive vapors or gases
– strong electric or magnetic fields
• in installations requiring special monitoring, for example
– elevators
– electrical installations in particularly hazardous areas
An additional measure might be, for instance, installation of the S7-300 in a cabinet
or in a housing.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-9
General Technical Specifications

Ambient mechanical conditions

The ambient mechanical conditions for S7-300 modules are listed in the following
table in the form of sinusoidal oscillations.

Table 1-5 Mechanical Conditions

Frequency Range Continuous Occasional

in Hz
10 v f v 58 0.0375 mm amplitude 0.075 mm amplitude
58 v f v 150 0.5 g constant acceleration 1 g constant acceleration

Reducing vibrations
If your S7-300 modules are exposed to severe shock and/or vibrations, you must
take the appropriate measures to reduce the acceleration and/or amplitude,
respectively.
We recommend that you install the S7-300 on vibration-damping materials
(for example, rubber-metal antivibration mountings).

Ambient mechanical conditions test

The following table contains important information on the type and scope of tests
for ambient mechanical conditions.

Table 1-6 Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test

Test ... Test Standard Remarks

Vibrations Vibration test accor- Type of oscillation: frequency sweeps with a rate of
ding to IEC 60068 change of 1 octave/minute.
Part 2-6 (sinusoidal) 10 Hz v f v 58 Hz, constant amplitude of
0.075 mm
58 Hz v f v 150 Hz, constant acceleration of 1 g
Duration of oscillation: 10 frequency sweeps per
axis in each of three axes perpendicular to each
other
Shock Shock test to Type of shock: half-sine
IEC 60068, Part 2-29 Severity of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration
Direction of shock: 3 shocks each in the +/– direc-
tion in each of three axes perpendicular to each
other

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-10 A5E00105505-03
 General Technical Specifications

Climatic conditions
You can use S7-300s under the following climatic conditions:

Table 1-7 Climatic Conditions

Climatic Conditions Permitted range Remarks

Temperature: –
horizontal installation: from 0 to 60C
vertical installation: from 0 to 40C
Relative humidity 10 to 95 % Non-condensing, corres-
ponds to relative humi-
dity (RH) Class 2 accor-
ding to IEC 61131, Part 2
Atmospheric pressure 1080 to 795 hPa Corresponding to an alti-
tude of –1000 to 2000 m
Concentration of contami- SO2: < 0.5 ppm; Test: 10 ppm; 4 days
nants RH < 60 %, non-condensing
H2S: < 0.1 ppm; Test: 1 ppm; 4 days
RH < 60 %, non-condensing

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-11
General Technical Specifications

1.5 Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of

Protection

Test voltages
Insulation stability must be demonstrated in the type test with the following test
voltages in accordance with IEC 61131-2:

Table 1-8 Test Voltages

Circuits with rated voltage Ue to other Test Voltage

circuits or to ground
< 50 V 500 VDC
< 150 V 2500 VDC
< 250 V DC 4000 V

Protection class
Protection Class I according to IEC 60536 – in other words, protective conductor
connection to rail necessary

Protection against ingress of foreign bodies and water

Degree of protection IP 20 according to IEC 60529, that is, protection against
contact with standard probes.
There is no special protection against the ingress of water.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-12 A5E00105505-03
 General Technical Specifications

1.6 Rated Voltages of the S7-300

Rated operating voltages

The modules of the S7-300 operate with different rated voltages. The following
table contains the rated voltages and the corresponding tolerances.

Table 1-9 Rated Voltages

Rated voltage Tolerance Range

24 VDC 20.4 to 28.8 VDC
120 VAC 93 to 132 VAC
230 VAC 187 to 264 VAC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-13
General Technical Specifications

1.7 SIPLUS S7-300 modules

Definition
SIPLUS S7-300 modules are modules that can be used under extended
environmental conditions. Extended environmental conditions mean:
• operation possible at temperatures from –25°C to +60°C
• occasional, brief condensation permitted
• increased mechanical stress permissible

Comparison with “standard” modules

The functional scope and technical specifications for the SIPLUS S7-300 modules
are the same as those of the “standard” modules.
The mechanical and climatic environmental conditions as well as their test method
have changed.
The SIPLUS S7-300 modules have their own order numbers (see table 1-10)

Project engineering in STEP 7

The SIPLUS S7-300 modules are not included in the hardware catalog. Please
design your installation with the corresponding “standard” modules according to the
table 1-10.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-14 A5E00105505-03
 General Technical Specifications

SIPLUS S7-300 Modules

The following table contains all SIPLUS S7-300 modules.
The order numbers of the corresponding “standard” modules have been included
as an aid to configuration. You can refer to the description and technical
specifications in the special section on the “standard” module.

Table 1-10 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules

Module SIPLUS S7-300-SIMATIC ”Standard” modules

module for use under
extended environmental
conditions
as of order no.
IM 153-1 6AG1153-1AA03-2XB0 6ES7153-1AA03-0XB0
CPU 312C 6AG1312-5BD00-2AB0 6ES7312-5BD00-0AB0
CPU 313C 6AG1313-5BE00-2AB0 6ES7313-5BE00-0AB0
CPU 314 6AG1314-1AF10-2AB0 6ES7314-1AF10-0AB0
CPU 315-2 DP 6AG1315-2AG10-2AB0 6ES7315-2AG10-0AB0
IM 365 6AG1365-0BA01-2AA0 6ES7365-0BA01-0AA0
SM 321 digital input module;
SM 321; DI 16 x 24VDC 6AG1321-1BH02-2AA0 6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0
SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC 6AG1321-1BL00-2AA0 6ES7321-1BL00-0AA0
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC 6AG1321-7BH01-2AB0 6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0
SM 321; DI 16 x 24 V-125 VDC 6AG1321-1CH20-2AA0 6ES7321-1CH20-0AA0
SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC 6AG1321-1FF01-2AA0 6ES7321-1FF01-0AA0
SM 322 digital output module;
SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A 6AG1322-1BH01-2AA0 6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0
SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A 6AG1322-1HF10-2AA0 6ES7322-1HF10-0AA0
SM 322, DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A 6AG1322-1CF00-2AA0 6ES7322-1CF00-0AA0
SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A 6AG1322-1FF01-2AA0 6ES7322-1FF01-0AA0
SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A 6AG1322-8BF00-2AB0 6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0
Digital Input/Output Module
SM 323; DI8/DO8 x DC 24V/0.5A 6AG1323-1BH01-2AA0 6ES7323-1BH01-0AA0
Analog input module
SM 331 analog input module; AI 2 x 12 bits 6AG1331-7KB02-2AB0 6ES7331-7KB02-0AB0
Analog output module
SM 332 analog output module; AO 2 x 12 6AG1332-5HB01-2AB0 6ES7332-5HB01-0AB0
bits
SM 334 analog I/O module;
SM 334; AI4/AO 2 x 12 bits 6AG1334-0KE00-2AB0 6ES7334-0KE00-0AB0

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-15
General Technical Specifications

1.8 Mechanical and Climatic Ambient Conditions for the Operation

of SIPLUS S7-300 Modules

Ambient mechanical conditions

Operating category: according to IEC 721 3-3, Class 3M4.

Ambient mechanical conditions test

The following table contains important information on the type and scope of tests
for ambient mechanical conditions of SIPLUS S7-300 modules.

Table 1-11 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test

Test ... Test Standard Remarks

Vibrations Vibration test according to Type of oscillation: frequency sweeps with a rate of
IEC 6008 Part 2-6 (sinusoidal) change of
1 octave/minute.
5 Hz
f 
9 Hz, constant amplitude of 3.5 mm
9 Hz
f 
150 Hz, constant acceleration of 1 g
oscillation period: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in
each of three axes perpendicular to each other
Shock Shock test according to IEC 6008 Type of shock: half-sine
Part 2-27 severity of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration
Direction of shock: 3 shocks each in the +/–
direction in each of three axes perpendicular to
each other

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-16 A5E00105505-03
 General Technical Specifications

Climatic conditions
You can use SIPLUS S7-300 modules under the following climatic conditions:
Operating category: according to IEC 721 3-3, Class 3K5.

Table 1-12 SIPLUS S7-300 Modules Climatic Conditions

Ambient Condition Permitted range Remarks

Temperature: –
horizontal installation –25 °C to 60 °C
vertical installation –25 °C to 40 °C
Relative humidity From 5 to 95 % Occasional, brief condensation,
corresponds to relative humidity (RH) Class
2 according to IEC 61131, Part 2
Pollutant concentration Test:
(according to IEC 721 3-3; SO2: < 0.5 ppm; 10 ppm; 4 days
class 3C3) Relative humidity < 60%
H2S: < 0.1 ppm; 1 ppm; 4 days
Relative humidity < 60%

1.9 Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 Potentially Explosive

Area

The following sections contain important information in the following languages.

In this chapter

Section Topic
1.9.1 Using the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 potentially explosive area
1.9.2 Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area
1.9.3 Utilisation de l’ET 200M / S7-300 dans un environnement à risque d’explosion
en zone 2
1.9.4 Aplicación del ET 200M / S7-300 en áreas con peligro de explosión, zona 2
1.9.5 Impiego dell’ET 200M / S7-300 nell’area a pericolo di esplosione zona 2
1.9.6 Gebruik van de ET 200M / S7-300 in het explosieve gebied zone 2
1.9.7 Brug af ET 200M / S7-300 i det eksplosionsfarlige område zone 2
1.9.8 ET 200M / S7-300:n käyttö räjähdysvaarannetuilla alueilla, vyöhyke 2
1.9.9 Användning av ET 200M / S7-300 i explosionsriskområde zon 2
1.9.10 Uso do ET 200M / S7-300 em área exposta ao perigo de explosão, zona 2
1.9.11 p    ET 200M / S  

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-17
General Technical Specifications

1.9.2 Use of the ET 200M / S7-300 in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

Zone 2
Hazardous areas are divided up into zones. The zones are distinguished according
to the probability of the existence of an explosive atmosphere.

Zone Explosion Hazard Example

2 Explosive gas atmosphere Areas around flange joints with flat
occurs only seldom and for a gaskets in pipes in enclosed spaces
short time
Safe area No • Outside zone 2
• Standard distributed I/O applications

Below you will find important information on the installation of the ET 200M
distributed I/O device and the SIMATIC S7-300 in a hazardous area.

Further Information
You will find further information on the ET 200M and the various S7-300 modules
in the manual.

Production Location
Siemens AG, Bereich A&D
Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50
92224 Amberg
Germany

Certification
II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 to EN 50021 : 1999
Test number: KEMA 02ATEX1096 X

Note
Modules with II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 certification can only be used in
SIMATIC S7-300/ET 200M automation systems belonging to equipment
category 3.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

1-20 A5E00105505-03
General Technical Specifications

Maintenance
If repair is necessary, the affected module must be sent to the production location.
Repairs can only be carried there.

Special Conditions
1. The ET 200M distributed I/O device and the SIMATIC S7-300 must be installed
in a cabinet or metal housing. These must comply with the IP 54 degree of
protection as a minimum. The environmental conditions under which the
equipment is installed must be taken into account. There must be a
manufacturer's declaration for zone 2 available for the housing (in accordance
with EN 50021).
2. If a temperature of > 70 °C is reached in the cable or at the cable entry of this
housing under operating conditions, or if a temperature of > 80 °C can be
reached at the junction of the conductors under operating conditions, the
temperature-related properties of the cables must correspond to the
temperatures actually measured.
3. The cable entries used must comply with the required IP degree of protection
and Section 7.2 (in accordance with EN 50021).
4. All devices (including switches, etc.) that are connected to the inputs and
outputs of fail-safe signal modules must be approved for EEx nA or EEx nC
explosion protection.
5. Steps must be taken to ensure that the rated voltage through transients cannot
be exceeded by more than 40 %.
6. Ambient temperature range: 0° C to 60° C
7. A sign containing the following warning must be put up inside the housing in an
easily visible position when the housing is opened:
Warning
The housing can only be opened for a short time (e.g. for visual diagnostics). If
you do this, do not operate any switches, remove or install any modules or
disconnect any electrical cables (plug-in connections).
You can disregard this warning if you know that the atmosphere is not
hazardous (i.e. there is no risk of explosion).

List of Approved Modules

You will find the list of approved modules under the ID 13702947 on the Internet:
http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 1-21
Digital Modules 3
Structure of the chapter
The present chapter is broken down into the following subjects:
1. Chapter overview of which modules are available and described here
2. Module overview on the most important properties of the modules
3. Sequence of steps from choosing to commissioning the digital module
4. Information that is generally valid – in other words, relating to all digital modules
(for example, parameter assignment and diagnostics)
5. Information that refers to specific modules (for example, characteristics,
diagram of connections and block diagram, technical specifications and special
characteristics of the module):
a) for digital input modules
b) for digital output modules
c) for relay output modules
d) for digital input/output modules

Additional information
Appendix A describes the structure of the parameter sets (data records 0, 1 and
128) in the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to
modify the parameters of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.
Appendix B describes the structure of the diagnostic data (data records 0 and 1) in
the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to
evaluate the diagnostic data of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-1
Digital Modules

In this chapter

Section Contents Page

3.1 Module Overview 3-4
3.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital 3-10
Module
3.3 Digital Module Parameter Assignment 3-11
3.4 Diagnostics of the Digital Modules 3-12
3.5 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x VDC 24; 3-13
(6ES7321-1BL00-0AA0)
3.6 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x 120 VAC; 3-16
(6ES7321-1EL00-0AA0)
3.7 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 24; 3-18
(6ES7321-1BH02-0AA0)
3.8 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC High Speed; 3-20
(6ES7321-1BH10-0AA0)
3.9 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V; with Hardware and 3-22
Diagnostic Interrupts, clocked; (6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0)
3.10 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; Source Input; 3-34
(6ES7321-1BH50-0AA0)
3.11 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x UC 24/48 V 3-36
(6ES7321-1CH00-0AA0)
3.12 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x VDC 48-125; 3-38
(6ES7321-1CH20-0AA0)
3.13 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 x 120/230 VAC 3-40
(6ES7321-1FH00-0AA0)
3.14 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 8 x VAC 120/230; 3-42
(6ES7321-1FF01-0AA0)
3.15 Digital Input Module SM 321; 3-44
DI 8 x 120/230 VAC ISOL (6ES7321-1FF10-0AA0)
3.16 Digital Input Module SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; 3-46
(6ES7322-1BL00-0AA0)
3.17 Digital Input Module SM 322; DO 32 x VAC 120/230/1 A; 3-49
(6ES7322-1FL00-0AA0)
3.18 Digital Input Module SM 322; DO 16 x VDC 24/0.5 A; 3-53
(6ES7322-1BH01-0AA0)
3.19 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A 3-56
High Speed; (6ES7322-1BH10-0AA0)
3.20 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC 3-59
(6ES7322-5GH00-0AB0)
3.21 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/1 A 3-66
(6ES7322-1FH00-0AA0)
3.22 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/2 A; 3-69
(6ES7322-1BF01-0AA0)
3.23 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A; 3-72
with Diagnostic Interrupt; (6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0)
3.24 Digital Input Module SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 48-125/1,5 A; 3-81
(6ES7322-1CF00-0AA0)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-2 A5E00105505-03
 Digital Modules

Section Contents Page

3.25 Digital Input module SM 322; DO 8 x VAC 120/230/2 A; 3-84
(6ES7322-1FF01-0AA0)
3.26 Digital Output Module SM 322; 3-87
DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A ISOL (6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0)
3.27 Relay Output Module SM 322; 3-93
DO 16 x Rel. 120/230 VAC; (6ES7322-1HH01-0AA0)
3.28 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC; 3-96
(6ES7322-1HF01-0AA0)
3.29 Relay Output Module SM 322; 3-100
DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5A; (6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0)
3.30 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. VAC 230/5 A; 3-106
(6ES7322-1HF10-0AA0)
3.31 Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; 3-110
DI 16/DO16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7323-1BL00-0AA0)
3.32 Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; 3-113
DI 8/DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A; (6ES7 323-1BH01-0AA0)
3.33 Digital Input/Output Module SM 327; 3-116
DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A; (6ES7327-1BH00-0AB0)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-3
Digital Modules

3.1 Module Overview

Introduction
The following tables summarize the most important characteristics of the digital
modules. This overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module
for your task.

Table 3-1 Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

SM 321; SM 321; SM 321; SM 321; SM 321; SM 321;

Module DI 32 x DI 32 x DI 16 x DI 16 x DI 16 x DI 16 x
24 VDC 120 VAC 24 VDC 24 VDC High 24 VDC with 24 VDC;
Speed hardware and source input
Char- diagnostic
acter- interrupts
istics
(-1BL00-) (-1EL00-) (-1BH02-) (-7BH01-) (-1BH50-)
(-1BH10-)

Number of inputs 32 DI; 32 DI; 16 DI; 16 DI; isolated 16 DI; isolated in 16 DI,
isolated in isolated in isolated in in groups of 16 groups of 16 source input,
groups of 16 groups of 8 groups of 16 isolated in
groups of 16

Rated input 24 VDC 120 VAC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

voltage
Suitable for... Switches;
two, three, and four-wire proximity switches (BEROs)
Supports No No No Yes Yes No
clocked operation
Programmable No No No No Yes No
diagnostics
Diagnostic No No No No Yes No
interrupt
Hardware interrupt No No No No Yes No
upon edge change
Settable No No No No Yes No
input delays
Special Features – – – - 2 –
short-circuit-pro
of sensor
supplies for 8
channels each
External
redundant power
supply possible
to supply
sensors

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-4 A5E00105505-03
 Digital Modules

Table 3-2 Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued)

SM 321; SM 321; SM 321; SM 321; SM 321;

Module
DI 16 x DI 16 x DI 16 x DI 8 x DI 8 x
UC 24/48V 48-125 VDC 120/230 VAC 120/230 VAC 120/230 VAC
Char- ISOL
acter- (-1CH20-) (-1FH00-) (-1FF01-)
istics (-1CH00-) (-1FF10-)
Number of inputs 16 DI; isolated in 16 DI; isolated in 16 DI; isolated in 8 DI, isolated in 8 DI; isolated in
groups of 1 groups of 8 groups of 4 groups of 2 groups of 1
Rated input 24 to 48 VDC, 24 48 to 125 VDC 120/230 VAC 120/230 VAC 120/230 VAC
voltage to 48 VAC
Suitable for... Switches; Switches;
two, three, and four-wire proximity two and three-wire AC proximity switches
switches (BEROs)
Supports No No No No No
clocked operation
Programmable No No No No No
diagnostics
Diagnostic No No No No No
interrupt
Hardware interrupt No No No No No
upon edge change
Settable No No No No No
input delays
Special Features – –

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-5
Digital Modules

Table 3-3 Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

SM 322; SM 322; SM 322; SM 322; SM 322; SM 322;

Module DO 32 x DO 32 x DO 16 x DO 16 x DO 16 x DO 16 x
24 VDC VAC 120/230/ 24 VDC/ 24 VDC/ 24/48 VUC 120/230 VDC/
Char- 0.5 A 1A 0.5 A 0.5 A High 1A
acter- Speed
istics (-1BL00-) (-1FL00-) (-1BH01-) (-1BH10-) (-5GH00-) (-1FH00-)

Number of outputs 32 DO; 32 DO; 16 DO; 16 DO; 16 DO; 16 DO;

isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in
groups of 8 groups of 8 groups of 8 groups of 8 groups of 1 groups of 8
Output current 0.5 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A
Rated load voltage 24 VDC 120 VAC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 to 48 VDC, 120/230 VAC
24 to 48 VAC
Suitable for... Solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights
Supports No No No Yes No No
clocked operation
Programmable No No No No Yes No
diagnostics
Diagnostic No No No No Yes No
interrupt
Substitute value No No No No Yes No
output
Special Features –

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-6 A5E00105505-03
 Digital Modules

Table 3-4 Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued)

SM 322; SM 322; SM 322; SM 322; SM 322;

Module DO 8 x 24VDC/ DO 8 x DO 8 x 48-125 DO8 x DO8 x
2A 24 VDC/0.5 A VDC/ 1.5 A 120/ 230 VAC/2A 120/ 230 VAC/
Char- with diagnostic 2A ISOL
acter- interrupt
istics (-1BF01-) (-8BF00-) (-1CF00-) (-1FF01-) (-5FF00-)
Number of outputs 8 DO; isolated in 8 DO; isolated in 8 DO; isolated 8 DO; isolated in 8 DO; isolated in
groups of 4 groups of 8 and reverse groups of 4 groups of 1
polarity
protection, in
groups of 4
Output current 2A 0.5 A 1.5 A 2A 2A
Rated load voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC 48 to 125 VDC 120/230 VAC 120/230 VAC
Suitable for... Solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights AC solenoid valves, contactors, motor
starters, fractional h.p. motors and
indicator lights.
Supports No No No No No
clocked operation
Programmable No Yes No No Yes
diagnostics
Diagnostic No Yes No No Yes
interrupt
Substitute value No Yes No No Yes
output
Special Features – Redundant – Fuse blown -
driving of a load display.
possible Replaceable fuse
for each group

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-7
Digital Modules

Table 3-5 Relay Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

Module SM 322; DO 16 x SM 322; DO 8 x SM 322; DO 8 x SM 322; DO 8 x

Char- Rel. 120 VAC Rel. 230 VAC Rel. 230 VAC/ 5 A Rel. 230 VAC/ 5 A
(-1HH01-) (-1HF01-) (-5HF00-) (-1HF10-)
acter-
istics
Number of outputs 16 outputs, isolated in 8 outputs, isolated in 8 outputs, isolated in 8 outputs, isolated in
groups of 8 groups of 2 groups of 1 groups of 1
Rated load voltage 24 to 120 VDC, 24 to 120 VDC, 24 to 120 VDC, 24 to 120 VDC,
48 to 230 VAC 48 to 230 VAC 24 to 230 VAC 48 to 230 VAC
Suitable for... AC/DC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional horsepower motors and
indicator lights
Supports No No No No
clocked operation
Programmable No No Yes No
diagnostics
Diagnostic interrupt No No Yes No
Substitute value output No No Yes No
Special Features –

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-8 A5E00105505-03
 Digital Modules

Table 3-6 Digital Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

Module SM 323; SM 323; SM 327;

DI 16/DO 16x24 VDC/ DI 8/DO 8x DI 8/DX 8x
Char- 0.5 A 24 VDC/0.5 A DC 24 V/0.5 A,
acter- parameterizable
istics (-1BL00-) (-1BH01-) (-1BH00-)

Number of inputs 16 inputs, isolated in 8 inputs, isolated in 8 digital inputs and 8

groups of 16 groups of 8 individually
parameterizable inputs
Number of outputs 16 outputs, isolated in 8 outputs, isolated in or outputs, isolated in
groups of 8 groups of 8 groups of 16
Rated input voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC
Output current 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A
Rated load voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC
Inputs suitable for... Switches and two, three and four-wire proximity switches (BEROs).
Outputs suitable for... Solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights
Supports No No No
clocked operation
Programmable No No No
diagnostics
Diagnostic interrupt No No No
Hardware interrupt upon No No No
edge change
Settable input delay No No No
Substitute value output No No No
Special Features –

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-9
Digital Modules

3.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the

Digital Module

Introduction
The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other
to commission digital modules successfully.
The sequence of steps is a suggestion, but you can perform individual steps either
earlier or later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install other
modules or install, commission etc. other modules in between times.

Sequence of steps

Table 3-7 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module

Step Procedure Refer To...

1. Select the module Section 3.1 and specific module section from
Section 3.5
2. Install the module in the “Mounting” section in the Installation Manual for
SIMATIC S7 network the programmable logic controller being used:
• S7-300 Programmable Controllers, Hardware
and Installation or S7-400, M7-400
Programmable Controllers, Hardware and
Installation
or
• ET 200M Distributed I/O Device
3. Assign parameters to module Section 3.3
4. Commission configuration “Commissioning” section in the Installation
Manual for the programmable controller being
used:
• S7-300 Programmable Controllers, Hardware
and Installation or S7-400, M7-400
Programmable Controllers, Hardware and
Installation
or
• ET 200M Distributed I/O Device
5. If commissioning was not Section 3.4
successful, diagnose
configuration

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-10 A5E00105505-03
 Digital Modules

3.3 Digital Module Parameter Assignment

Introduction
Digital modules can have different characteristics. You can set the characteristics
of dome modules by means of parameter assignment.
The information contained in this section refers only to the programmable digital
modules:
• Digital input module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V with process and diagnosis
alarm, synchronous; (6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0)
• Digital input module SM 322; DO 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A with diagnostic interrupt
(6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0)
• Digital output module SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC /2A ISOL
(6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0)
• Relay output module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC /5A
(6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0)
• Digital Input/Output Module SM 327; DI 8/DX 8 x VDC 24/0.5 A
(6ES7327-1BH00-0AB0)

Tools for parameter assignment

You assign parameters to digital modules in STEP 7. You must perform parameter
assignment in STOP mode of the CPU.
When you have set all the parameters, download the parameters from the
programming device to the CPU. On a transition from STOP ³ to RUN mode, the
CPU then transfers the parameters to the individual digital modules.

Static and dynamic parameters

The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters.
Set the static parameters in STOP mode of the CPU, as described above.
You can also change the dynamic parameters in the running user program in an S7
logic control using SFC. Note, however, that after a change from RUN ³ STOP,
STOP ³ RUN of the CPU, the parameters set in STEP 7 apply again. You will find
a description of the parameter assignment of modules in the user program in
Appendix A.

Parameter Settable with CPU Operating State

Static PG (STEP 7 HW CONFIG) STOP
Dynamic PG (STEP 7 HW CONFIG) STOP
SFC 55 in the user program RUN

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-11
Digital Modules

Parameters of the digital modules

The settable parameters are listed in the special section on the module.

3.4 Diagnostics of the Digital Modules

Introduction
The information contained in this section refers only to the digital modules with
diagnostics capability. For the S7-300, these modules are as follows:
• Digital input module SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V with hardware and diagnostic
interrupts, clocked; (6ES7321-7BH01-0AB0)
• Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 x 24/48 VUC
(6ES7322-5GH00-0AB0)
• Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 x DC 24 V/0.5 A with diagnostic interrupt
(6ES7322-8BF00-0AB0)
• Digital output module SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC /2A ISOL
(6ES7322-5FF00-0AB0)
• Relay output module SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC /5A
(6ES7322-5HF00-0AB0)

Programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages

In diagnostics, we make a distinction between programmable and
non-programmable diagnostic messages.
You obtain programmable diagnostic messages only if you have enabled
diagnostics by parameter assignment. You perform parameter assignment in the
“Diagnostics” parameter field in STEP 7.
Non-programmable diagnostic messages are always made available by the digital
module irrespective of diagnostics being enabled.

Actions following diagnostic message in STEP 7

Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions:
• The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnosis of the digital module and
forwarded to the CPU.
• The SF LED on the digital module lights.
• If you have programmed “Enable Diagnostic Interrupt” in STEP 7, a diagnostic
interrupt is triggered and OB 82 is called.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-12 A5E00105505-03
 Digital Modules

Reading out diagnostic messages

You can read out detailed diagnostic messages by means of SFCs in the user
program (refer to the Appendix “Diagnostic Data of Signal Modules”).
You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7, in the module diagnosis (refer to
online Help for STEP 7).

Diagnostic message by means of SF LED

The digital modules with diagnostics capability indicate errors for you by means of
their SF LED (group error LED). The SF LED lights as soon as a diagnostic
message is triggered by the digital module. It goes out when all errors have been
rectified.
The group fault (SF) LED also lights up in case of external errors (short circuit of
sensor supply), independent of the operating status of the CPU (if power is on).

Diagnostic messages interrupt processing by the digital modules

You will find the diagnostic messages with their possible causes and remedial
action, together with a description of possible interrupts in the specific section on
the module.

3.5 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x VDC 24;

(6ES7321-1BL00-0AA0)

Order number: “Standard module”

6ES7321-1BL00-0AA0

Order number: SIPLUS S7-300 Module

6AG1321-1BL00-2AA0

Characteristics
The digital input module SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC has the following salient
features:
• 32 inputs, isolated in groups of 16
• 24 VDC rated input voltage
• Suitable for switches and two / three / four-wire BEROs (proximity switches).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-13
Digital Modules

Terminal assignment and block diagram of the SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC

Backplane bus
interface

24V 24V

Channel
number
Status display – green

Figure 3-1 Module View and Block Diagram of the Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC

Terminal assignment of the SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC

The following figure shows the assignment of the channels to the addresses.

Input byte x Input byte (x+2)

Input byte (x+1) Input byte (x+3)

Figure 3-2 Terminal assignment of the SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-14 A5E00105505-03
 Digital Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC

Dimensions and Weight Insulation tested with 500 VDC

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 120 Current consumption
(in millimeters) • From the backplane bus max. 15 mA
Weight Approx. 260 g Power dissipation of the module typ. 6.5 W
Data for Specific Module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Supports clocked No Status display Green LED per channel
operation
Interrupts None
Number of inputs 32
Diagnostic functions None
Length of cable
• Unshielded max. 600 m Data for Selecting a Sensor

• Shielded max. 1000 m Input voltage

Voltages, Currents, Potentials • Rated value 24 VDC

• For signal “1” 13 to 30 V
Number of inputs that can be
triggered simultaneously • For signal “0” –30 to + 5 V

• Horizontal configuration Input current

Up to 40 C 32 • At signal “1” typ. 7 mA
Up to 60 C 16 Input delay
• Vertical configuration • At “0” to “1” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
Up to 40 C 32 • At “1” to “0” 1.2 to 4.8 ms
Isolation Input characteristic curve According to
• Between channels and IEC 61131, type 1
backplane bus Yes
Connection of Two-Wire Possible
• Between the channels Yes BEROs max. 1.5 mA
In groups of 16
• Permitted bias current
Permitted potential difference
• Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC
circuits

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-15
Digital Modules

3.16 Digital Output Module SM 322;

DO 32 x 24 VDC/ 0.5 A; (6ES7322-1BL00-0AA0)

Order number
6ES7322-1BL00-0AA0

Characteristics
The digital output module SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A has the following salient
features:
• 32 outputs, isolated in groups of 8
• 0.5 A output current
• 24 VDC rated load voltage
• Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights

Using the module with high-speed counters

Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in
connection with high-speed counters:

Note
When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of
the SM 322; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A carry a “1” signal for approximately 50
s for
reasons associated with the circuitry.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-46 A5E00105505-03
 Digital Modules

Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/ 0.5 A

1 L+ 3 L+
24 V 24 V

M M

Backplane bus
interface
1M 3M

2L+ 4 L+
24 V 24 V

M M

2M 4M

Channel
number
Status display -green

Figure 3-16 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A

Terminal assignment
The following figure shows the assignment of the channels to the addresses.

Output byte x Output byte (x + 2)

Output byte (x + 1) Output byte (x + 3)

Figure 3-17 Terminal Assignment of the SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 3-47
Digital Modules

Terminal Assignment of the SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/ 0.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Output voltage
(in millimeters) • At signal “1” min. L + (–0.8 V)
Weight Approx. 260 g Output current
Data for Specific Module • At signal “1”
Supports clocked No Rated value 0.5 A
operation
Permitted range 5 mA to 0.6 A
Number of outputs 32 • At signal “0” max. 0.5 mA
Length of cable (leakage current)
• Unshielded max. 600 m Output delay (for resistive load)
• Shielded max. 1000 m • From “ 0” to “1” max. 100
s
Voltages, Currents, Potentials • At “1” to “0” max. 500
s
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC Load resistor range 48  to 4 k
Total current of the outputs Lamp load max. 5 W
(per group)
Parallel connection of 2
• Horizontal configuration outputs
Up to 40 C max. 4 A
• For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
Up to 60 C max. 3 A a load of the same group)
• Vertical configuration • To increase performance Not possible
Up to 40 C max. 2 A Triggering a digital input Possible
Isolation Switch rate
• Between channels and Yes
backplane bus • For resistive load max. 100 Hz

• Between the channels Yes • Inductive loads max. 0.5 Hz

according to IEC 947-5-1,
In groups of 8 DC 13
Permitted potential difference • For lamp load max. 10 Hz
• Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Limit (internal) of the inductive L + (–53 V), typ.
circuits
circuit interruption voltage up
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Short-circuit protection of the Yes, electronic
Current consumption output
• From the backplane bus max. 110 mA • Threshold on 1 A, typ.
• From load voltage L + max. 160 mA
(without load)
Power dissipation of the module typ. 6.6 W
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

3-48 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules 4
Structure of the chapter
The present chapter is broken down into the following subjects:
1. Chapter overview of which modules are available and described here
2. Module overview of the most important properties of the modules
3. Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module
4. Information that is generally available – in other words, affects all analog
modules (such as parameter assignment and diagnostics)
5. Information that refers to specific modules (for example, characteristics,
diagram of connections and block diagram, technical specifications and special
characteristics of the module):
a) for analog input modules
b) for analog output modules
c) for analog input/output modules

STEP 7 blocks for analog functions

You can use the blocks FC 105 “SCALE” (Scale Values) and FC 106 “UNSCALE”
(Unscale Values) for reading and outputting analog values in STEP 7. You will find
the FCs in the standard library of STEP 7 in the subdirectory called
“TI-S7-Converting Blocks” (for a description, refer to the STEP 7 Online Help for
the FCs).

Additional information
Appendix A describes the structure of the parameter sets (data records 0, 1 and
128) in the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to
modify the parameters of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.
Appendix B describes the structure of the diagnostic data (data records 0 and 1) in
the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to
evaluate the diagnostic data of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-1
Analog Modules

In this chapter

Section Contents Page

4.1 Module Overview 4-3
4.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning 4-8
the Analog Module
4.3 Analog Value Representation 4-9
4.4 Setting the Measuring Method and Measuring Ranges of Analog 4-28
Input Channels
4.5 Behavior of Analog Modules 4-31
4.6 Conversion, Cycle, Setting and Response Time of Analog 4-35
Modules
4.7 Analog Module Parameter Assignment 4-39
4.8 Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs 4-45
4.9 Connecting Voltage Sensors 4-50
4.10 Connecting Current Sensors 4-51
4.11 Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors 4-53
4.12 Connecting Thermocouples 4-58
4.13 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs 4-66
4.14 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Voltage Outputs 4-67
4.15 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Current Outputs 4-70
4.16 Diagnostics of the Analog Modules 4-71
4.17 Interrupts of the Analog Modules 4-75
4.18 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits; 4-77
(6ES7331-7NF00-0AB0)
4.19 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 16 bits 4-86
(6ES7331-7NF10-0AB0)
4.20 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 14 bits High Speed; 4-97
(6ES7331-7HF0x-0AB0)
4.21 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits; 4-108
(6ES7331-1KF01-0AB0)
4.22 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits; 4-115
(6ES7331-7KF02-0AB0)
4.23 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x RTD 4-125
(6ES7331-7PF00-0AB0)
4.24 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x TC (6ES7331-7PF10-0AB0) 4-138
4.25 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2 x 12 bits; 4-153
(6ES7331-7KB02-0AB0)
4.26 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 8 x 12 bits 4-163
(6ES7332-5HF00-0AB0)
4.27 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 16 bits, synchronous; 4-169
(6ES7332-7ND01-0AB0)
4.28 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits; 4-176
(6ES7332-5HD01-0AB0)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-2 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Section Contents Page

4.29 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits; 4-182
(6ES7332-5HB01-0AB0)
4.30 Analog Input/Output Module SM334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits; 4-188
(6ES7334-0CE01-0AA0)
4.31 Analog Input/Output Module SM334; AI 4/AO 2 x12 bits; 4-194
(6ES7334-0KE00-0AB0)

4.1 Module Overview

Introduction
The following tables summarize the most important characteristics of the analog
modules. This overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module
for your task.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-3
Analog Modules

Table 4-1 Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

Module SM 331; SM 331; SM 331; SM 331;

AI 8 x 16 bits AI 8 x 16 bits AI 8 x 14 bits AI 8 x 13 bits
Char- High Speed
acter- (-7NF00-) (-7NF10-) (-7HF0x-) (-1KF01-)
istics
Number of 8 inputs in 4 8 inputs in 4 8 inputs in 4 8 inputs in 8
inputs channel groups channel groups channel groups channel groups
Resolution Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each
channel group: channel group: channel group: channel group:
• 15 bits + sign • 15 bits + sign • 13 bits + sign • 12 bits+sign

Measuring Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each
Method channel group: channel group: channel group: channel:
• Voltage • Voltage • Voltage
• Current • Current • Current • Voltage
• Current
• Resistors
• Temperature
Selection of Arbitrary, per Arbitrary, per Arbitrary, per Arbitrary,
measuring channel group channel group channel group per channel
range
Supports No No Yes No
clocked
operation
Programmable Yes Yes Yes No
diagnostics
Diagnostic Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable No
interrupt
Limit value Adjustable for Adjustable for Adjustable for No
monitoring 2 channels 8 channels 2 channels
Hardware Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable No
interrupt upon
limit violation
Hardware No Yes No No
interrupt at end
of cycle
Potential Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation
relationships to: to: to: to:
• CPU • CPU • CPU • CPU
• Load voltage (not
for 2-DMU)
Permitted 50 VDC 60 VDC 11 VDC 2.0 VDC
potential
difference
between the
inputs (ECM)
Special – - – –
Features
Sign Sign
2-DMU 2-wire transmitter

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-4 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Table 4-2 Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a glance (continued)

Module SM 331; SM 331; SM 331; SM 331;
AI 8 x 12 bits AI 8 x RTD AI 8 x TC AI 2 x 12 bits
Char-
acter- (-7KF02-) (-7PF00-) (-7PF10-) (-7KB02-)
istics
Number of 8 inputs in 4 8 inputs in 4 8 inputs in 4 2 inputs in 1
inputs channel groups channel groups channel groups channel group
Resolution Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each
channel group: channel group: channel group: channel group:
• 9 bits+sign • 15 bits + sign • 15 bits + sign • 9 bits+sign
• 12 bits+sign • 12 bits+sign
• 14 bits+sign • 14 bits+sign
Measuring Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each Adjustable for each
Method channel group: channel group: channel group: channel group:
• Voltage • Resistors • Temperature • Voltage
• Current • Temperature • Current
• Resistors • Resistors
• Temperature • Temperature
Selection of Arbitrary, per Arbitrary, per Arbitrary, per Arbitrary, per
measuring channel group channel group channel group channel group
range
Programmable No Yes Yes Yes
diagnostics
Supports Yes No No No
clocked
operation
Diagnostic Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable
interrupt
Limit value Adjustable for Adjustable for Adjustable for Adjustable for
monitoring 2 channels 8 channels 8 channels 1 channel

Hardware Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable

interrupt upon
limit violation
Hardware No Adjustable Adjustable No
interrupt at end
of cycle
Potential Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation
relationships to: to: to: to:
• CPU • CPU • CPU • CPU
• Load voltage (not • Load voltage (not
for 2-DMU) for 2-DMU)
Permitted 2.5 VDC 75 VDC / 60 VAC 75 VDC / 60 VAC 2.5 VDC
potential
difference
between the
inputs (ECM)
Special – – –
Features
Sign Sign
2-DMU 2-wire transmitter

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-5
Analog Modules

Table 4-3 Analog Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

Module SM 332; SM 332; SM 332; SM 332;

AO 8 x 12 bits AO 4 x 16 bits AO 4 x 12 bits AO 2 x 12 bits
Char-
acter- (-5HF00-) (-7ND01-) (-5HD01-) (-5HB01-)
istics

Number of outputs 8 Output channels 4 outputs in 4 4 Output channels 2 Output channels

channel groups
Resolution 12 bits 16 bits 12 bits 12 bits
Output type Channel by Channel by Channel by Channel by
channel: channel: channel: channel:
• Voltage • Voltage • Voltage • Voltage
• Current • Current • Current • Current
Supports No Yes No No
clocked operation
Programmable Yes Yes Yes Yes
diagnostics
Diagnostic Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable
interrupt
Substitute value No Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable
output
Potential Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation
relationships between: between: to: to:
• CPU • CPU and • CPU • CPU
• Of the load channel • Of the load • Of the load
voltage • The channels voltage voltage
• Output and L+,
M
• CPU and L+, M
Special Features – – – –

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-6 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Table 4-4 Analog Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

Module SM 334; SM 334;

AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits AI 4/AO 2 x 12 bits
Characteristics (-0CE01-) (-0KE00-)

Number of inputs 4 inputs in 1 channel group 4 inputs in 2 channel groups

Number of outputs 2 outputs in 1 channel group 2 outputs in 1 channel group
Resolution 8 bits 12 bits + sign
Measuring Method Adjustable for each channel Adjustable for each channel
group: group:
• Voltage • Voltage
• Current • Resistors
• Temperature
Output type Channel by channel: Channel by channel:
• Voltage • Voltage
• Current
Supports clocked No No
operation
Programmable diagnostics No No
Diagnostic interrupt No No
Limit value monitoring No No
Hardware interrupt upon limit No No
violation
Hardware interrupt at end of No No
cycle
Substitute value output No No
Potential relationships • Non-isolated to CPU Galvanic isolation to:
• Galvanic isolation to load • CPU
voltage • Of the load voltage
Special Features Not parameterizable, setting of –
measurement and output type by
means of wiring

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-7
Analog Modules

4.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the

Module

Introduction
The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other
to commission analog modules successfully.
The sequence of steps is a suggestion, but you can perform individual steps either
earlier or later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install other
modules or install, commission etc. other modules in between times.

Sequence of steps

Table 4-5 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module

Step Procedure Refer To...

1. Select the module Section 4.1 and specific module section from
Section 4.22
2. With some analog input Section 4.4
modules: set the measuring
method and measuring range by
means of the measuring range
module
3. Install the module in the ”Mounting” section in the Installation Manual for
SIMATIC S7 network the programmable logic controller being used:
• S7-300 Programmable Controllers, Hardware
and Installation or S7-400, M7-400
Programmable Controllers, Hardware and
Installation
or
4. Assign parameters to module Section 4.7
5. Connect measuring sensor or Sections 4.8 to 4.15
loads to module
6. Commission configuration ”Commissioning” section in the Installation
Manual for the programmable controller being
used:
• S7-300 Programmable Controllers, Hardware
and Installation or S7-400, M7-400
Programmable Controllers, Hardware and
Installation
or
• ET 200M Distributed I/O Device
7. If commissioning was not Section 4.16
successful, diagnose
configuration

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-8 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

4.3 Analog Value Representation

Introduction
This section describes the analog values for all the measuring ranges and output
ranges which you can use with the analog modules.

Converting Analog Values

The CPU processes the analog values in binary form only.
Analog input modules convert the analog process signal into digital form.
Analog output modules convert the digital output value into an analog signal.

Analog value representation with 16-bit resolution

The digitized analog value is the same for both input and output values having the
same nominal range. The analog values are represented as a fixed-point number
in two’s complement. The resulting assignment is as follows:

Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value of bits 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

Sign
The sign of the analog value is always contained in bit number 15:
• “0” ³ )
• “1” ³ *

Resolution less than 16 bits

If the resolution of an analog module has fewer than 16 bits, the analog value is
stored left-justified on the module. The lower-order bit positions not used are
padded with zeros (”0”).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-9
Analog Modules

Example
In the following example you can see how the positions not padded with “0” are
written for low resolution.

Table 4-6 Example: Bit pattern of a 16-bit and a 13-bit analog value

Resolution Analog value

Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
16-bit analog value 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1
13-bit analog value 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

4.3.1 Analog Value Representation for Analog Input Channels

Introduction
The tables in this chapter contain the measured value representations for the
various measuring ranges of the analog input modules. The values in the tables
apply to all modules with the corresponding measuring ranges.

Notes for readers of the tables

Tables 4-8 to 4-9 contain the binary representation of the measured values.
Since the binary representation of the measured values is always the same,
starting at 4-10 these tables only contain the measured values and the units.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-10 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Measured-value resolution
The resolution of the analog values may differ, depending on the analog module
and its parameterization. With resolutions < 15 bits, the bits indicated by “x” are set
to “0”.
Note: This resolution does not apply to temperature values. The converted
temperature values are the result of a conversion in the analog module (see Tables
4-16 to 4-31).

Table 4-7 Possible analog value resolutions

Resolution Units Analog value

in bits (+ sign)
decimal hexadecimal High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte
8 128 80H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1xxxxxxx
9 64 40H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01xxxxxx
10 32 20H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 001xxxxx
11 16 10H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0001xxxx
12 8 8H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00001xxx
13 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx
14 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x
15 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-11
Analog Modules

Binary representation of the input ranges

The input ranges shown in Tables 4-8 to 4-9 are defined in two’s complement
representation:

Table 4-8 Bipolar Input Ranges

Units Measured Data Word Range

Value
in % 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

32767 u118.515 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow

32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Over
range
27649 u100.00 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
4
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rated
range
–1 –0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
–27648 –100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
–27649 v–100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Under
range
–32512 –117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
–32768 v–117.596 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Table 4-9 Unipolar Input Ranges

Units Measured Data Word Range

Value
in % 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

32767 w118.515 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow

32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Over-
range
27649 w100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
range
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Rated
range
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
–1 –0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Under-
range
–4864 –17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
range
–32768 v–17.596 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-12 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges

Table 4-10 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges ± 10 V to ± 1 V

System Voltage Measuring Range

Dec. Hex. ±10 V ±5 V ±2.5 V ±1 V
32767 7FFF 11.851 V 5.926 V 2.963 V 1.185 V Overflow
32512 7F00
32511 7EFF 11.759 V 5.879 V 2.940 V 1.176 V
Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 10 V 5V 2.5 V 1V
20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V 1.875 V 0.75 V
1 1 361.7
V 180.8
V 90.4
V 36.17
V
0 0 0V 0V 0V 0V Rated range
–1 FFFF
–20736 AF00 –7.5 V –3.75 V –1.875 V –0.75 V
–27648 9400 –10 V –5 V –2.5 V –1 V
–27649 93FF
Underrange
–32512 8100 –11.759 V –5.879 V –2.940 V –1.176 V
–32513 80FF Underflow
–32768 8000 –11.851 V –5.926 V –2.963 V –1.185 V

Table 4-11 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges ± 500 mV to ± 80 mV

System Voltage Measuring Range

Dec. Hex. ±500 mV ±250 mV ±80 mV
32767 7FFF 592.6 mV 296.3 mV 94.8 mV Overflow
32512 7F00
32511 7EFF 587.9 mV 294.0 mV 94.1 mV Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 500 mV 250 mV 80 mV
20736 5100 375 mV 187.5 mV 60 mV
1 1 18.08
V 9.04
V 2.89
V
0 0 0 mV 0 mV 0 mV Rated range
–1 FFFF
–20736 AF00 –375 mV –187.5 mV –60 mV
–27648 9400 –500 mV –250 mV –80 mV
–27649 93FF Underrange
–32512 8100 –587.9 mV –294.0 mV –94.1 mV
–32513 80FF Underflow
–32768 8000 –592.6 mV –296.3 mV –94.8 mV

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-13
Analog Modules

Table 4-12 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges 1 to 5 V and

0 to 10 V

System Voltage Measuring Range

Dec. Hex. 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V
32767 7FFF 5.741 V 11.852 V
Overflow
32512 7F00
32511 7EFF 5.704 V 11.759 V
Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 5V 10 V
20736 5100 4V 7.5 V
Rated range
1 1 1 V + 144.7
V 0 V + 361.7
V
0 0 1V 0V
–1 FFFF
Underrange
–4864 ED00 0.296 V
Negative values not
–4865 ECFF possible
Underflow
–32768 8000

Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges

Table 4-13 Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges ± 20 mA to ± 3.2 mA

System Current Measuring Range

Dec. Hex. ±20 mA ±10 mA ±3.2 mA
32767 7FFF 23.70 mA 11.85 mA 3.79 mA Overflow
32512 7F00
32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 11.76 mA 3.76 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA 10 mA 3.2 mA
20736 5100 15 mA 7.5 mA 2.4 mA
1 1 723.4 nA 361.7 nA 115.7 nA
0 0 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA Rated range
–1 FFFF
–20736 AF00 –15 mA –7.5 mA –2.4 mA
–27648 9400 –20 mA –10 mA –3.2 mA
–27649 93FF Underrange
–32512 8100 –23.52 mA –11.76 mA –3.76 mA
–32513 80FF Underflow
–32768 8000 –23.70 mA –11.85 mA –3.79 mA

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-14 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Table 4-14 Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to

20 mA

System Current Measuring Range

Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
32767 7FFF 23.70 mA 22.96 mA
Overflow
32512 7F00
32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA
Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA
20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA
Rated range
1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0 0 0 mA 4 mA
–1 FFFF
Underrange
–4864 ED00 –3.52 mA 1.185 mA
–4865 ECFF
Underflow
–32768 8000

Analog Value Representation for Resistance-Type Transmitters

Table 4-15 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Type Transmitters from 10 k
and from 150  to 600 

System Resistance-Type Transmitter Range

Dec. Hex. 10 k 150  300  600 
32767 7FFF 11.852 177.77 355.54  711.09  Overflow
k
32512 7F00 150.01 300.01  600.02 

32511 7EFF 11.759 176.38 352.77  705.53  Overrange
k 
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 10 k 150  300  600 
20736 5100 7.5 k 112.5  225  450 
1 1 361.7m 5.43 m 10.85 21.70 Rated range
m m
0 0 0 0 0 0

(negative values physically Underrange

not possible)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-15
Analog Modules

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Pt x00

standard

Table 4-16 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors PT 100, 200, 500,
1000

Pt x00 Units Pt x00 Units Pt x00 Units

standard standard standard
in 5C
C decimal hexa- in 5F
F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit decimal (1 digit decimal (1 digit = decimal
=0.15C) =0.1 5F) 0.1 K)
> 1000.0 32767 7FFFH > 1832.0 32767 7FFFH > 1273.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1000.0 10000 2710H 1832.0 18320 4790H 1273.2 12732 31BCH
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
850.1 8501 2135H 1562.1 15621 3D05H 1123.3 11233 2BE1H
850.0 8500 2134H 1562.0 15620 3D04H 1123.2 11232 2BE0H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H 73.2 732 2DCH
–200.1 –2001 F82FH –328.1 –3281 F32FH 73.1 731 2DBH
Underrang
: : : : : : : : :
e
–243.0 –2430 F682H –405.4 –4054 F02AH 30.2 302 12EH
< –243.0 –32768 8000H < –405.4 –32768 8000H < 30.2 32768 8000H Underflow

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Pt x00

climate

Table 4-17 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Pt 100, 200, 500,
1000

Pt x00 Units Pt x00 Units

climate climate
in 5C
C decimal hexa- in 5F
F decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.015C) 0.01 5F)
>155.00 32767 7FFFH >311.00 32767 7FFFH Overflow
155.00 15500 3C8CH 311.00 31100 797CH
: : : : : : Overrange
130.01 13001 32C9H 266.01 26601 67E9H
130.00 13000 32C8H 266.00 26600 67E8H
: : : : : : Rated range
–120.00 –12000 D120H –184.00 –18400 B820H
–120.01 –12001 D11FH –184.01 –18401 B81FH
: : : : : : Underrange
–145.00 –14500 C75CH –229.00 –22900 A68CH
< –145.00 –32768 8000H < –229.00 –32768 8000H Underflow

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-16 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni x00

standard

Table 4-18 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni100, 120, 200, 500,
1000, LG-Ni 1000

Ni x00 Units Ni x00 Units Ni x00 Units

standard standard standard
in 5C
C decimal hexa- in 5F
F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.15C) 0.1 5F) 0.1 K)
>295.0 32767 7FFFH >563.0 32767 7FFFH >568.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
295.0 2950 B86H 563.0 5630 15FEH 568.2 5682 1632H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
250.1 2501 9C5H 482.1 4821 12D5H 523.3 5233 1471H
250.0 2500 9C4H 482.0 4820 12D4H 523.2 5232 1470H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–60.0 –600 FDA8H –76.0 –760 FD08H 213.2 2132 854H
–60.1 –601 FDA7H –76.1 –761 FD07H 213.1 2131 853H
: : : : : : : : : Underrange
–105.0 –1050 FBE6H –157.0 –1570 F9DEH 168.2 1682 692H
< –105.0 –32768 8000H < –157.0 –32768 8000H <168.2 32768 8000H Underflow

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni x00

climate

Table 4-19 Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni 100, 120, 200,
500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000

Ni x00 Units Ni x00 Units

climate climate
in 5C
C decimal hexa- in 5F
F decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.015C) 0.01 5F)
> 295.00 32767 7FFFH >325.11 32767 7FFFH Overflow
295.00 29500 733CH 327.66 32766 7FFEH
: : : : : : Overrange
250.01 25001 61A9H 280.01 28001 6D61H
250.00 25000 61A8H 280.00 28000 6D60H
: : : : : : Rated range
–60.00 –6000 E890H –76.00 –7600 E250H
–60.01 –6001 E88FH –76.01 –7601 E24FH
: : : : : : Underrange
–105.00 –10500 D6FCH –157.00 –15700 C2ACH
< –105.00 –32768 8000H < –157.00 –32768 8000H Underflow

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-17
Analog Modules

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10

standard

Table 4-20 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10

Cu 10 Units Cu 10 Units Cu 10 Units

standard standard standard
in 5C
C decimal hexa- in 5F
F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.015C) 0.01 5F) 0.01 K)
> 312.0 32767 7FFFH >593.6 32767 7FFFH >585.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
312.0 3120 C30H 593.6 5936 1730H 585.2 5852 16DCH
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
260.1 2601 A29H 500.1 5001 12D5H 533.3 5333 14D5H
260.0 2600 A28H 500.0 5000 1389H 533.2 5332 14D4H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H 73.2 732 2DCH
–200.1 –2001 F82FH –328.1 –3281 F32FH 73.1 731 2DBH
: : : : : : : : : Underrange
–240.0 –2400 F6A0H –400.0 –4000 F060H 33.2 332 14CH
< –240.0 –32768 8000H < –400.0 –32768 8000H <33.2 32768 8000H Underflow

Analog value representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10

climate

Table 4-21 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10

Cu 10 Units Cu 10 Units
climate climate
in 5C
C decimal hexa- in 5F
F decimal hexa- Range
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.015C) 0.01 5F)
> 180.00 32767 7FFFH >325.11 32767 7FFFH Overflow
180.00 18000 4650H 327.66 32766 7FFEH
: : : : : : Overrange
150.01 15001 3A99H 280.01 28001 6D61AH
150.00 15000 3A98H 280.00 28000 6D60H
: : : : : : Rated range
–50.00 –5000 EC78H –58.00 –5800 E958H
–50.01 –5001 EC77H –58.01 –5801 E957H
: : : : : : Underrange
–60.00 –6000 E890H –76.00 –7600 E250H
< –60.00 –32768 8000H < –76.00 –32768 8000H Underflow

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-18 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Analog value representation for thermocouples type B

Table 4-22 Analog value representation for thermocouples type B

Units Units Units

Type B Type B Type B Range
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
>2070.0 32767 7FFFH >3276.6 32767 7FFFH >2343.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
2070.0 20700 50DCH 3276.6 32766 7FFEH 2343.2 23432 5B88H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1821.0 18210 4722H 2786.6 27866 6CDAH 2094.2 20942 51CEH
1820.0 18200 4718H 2786.5 27865 6CD9H 2093.2 20932 51C4H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
0.0 0 0000H 32.0 320 0140H 273.2 2732 0AACH

: : : : : : : : : Underrange
–120.0 –1200 FB50H –184.0 –1840 F8D0H 153.2 1532 05FCH
< –120.0 –32768 8000H < –184.0 –32768 8000H <153.2 32768 8000H Underflow

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type C

Table 4-23 Analog value representation for thermocouples type C

Units Units
Type C Type C Range
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa-
decimal decimal
>2500.0 32767 7FFFH >3276.6 32767 7FFFH Overflow
2500.0 25000 61A8H 3276.6 32766 7FFEH
: : : : : : Overrange
2315.1 23151 5A6FH 2786.6 27866 6CDAH
2315.0 23150 5A6EH 2786.5 27865 6CD9H
: : : : : : Rated range
0.0 0 0000H 32.0 320 0140H
0.1 –1 FFFFH 31.9 319 013FH
: : : : : : Underrange
–120.0 –1200 FB50H –184.0 –1840 F8D0H
< –120.0 –32768 8000H < –184.0 –32768 8000H Underflow

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-19
Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type E

Table 4-24 Analog value representation for thermocouples type E

Units Units Units

Type E Type E Type E Range
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
> 1200.0 32767 7FFFH > 2192,0 32767 7FFFH > 1473.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1200.0 12000 2EE0H 2192.0 21920 55A0H 1473.2 14732 398CH
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1000.1 10001 2711H 1833.8 18338 47A2H 1274.2 12742 31C6H
1000.0 10000 2710H 1832.0 18320 4790H 1273.2 12732 31BCH
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–270.0 –2700 F574H –454.0 –4540 EE44H 0 0 0000H
< –270.0 < –2700 H < –454.0 < –4540 <EE44H <0 <0 <0000H Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative
range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of FB70H and outputs 8000H. ... of E5D4H and outputs 8000H.

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type J

Table 4-25 Analog value representation for thermocouples type J

Units Units Units

Type J Type J Type J Range
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
> 1450.0 32767 7FFFH > 2642,0 32767 7FFFH > 1723.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1450.0 14500 38A4H 2642.0 26420 6734H 1723.2 17232 4350H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1201.0 12010 2EEAH 2193.8 21938 55B2H 1474.2 14742 3996H
1200.0 12000 2EE0H 2192.0 21920 55A0H 1473.2 14732 398CH
: : : : : : : : : Rated range
–210.0 –2100 F7CCH –346.0 –3460 F27CH 63.2 632 0278H
< –210.0 < –2100 < –346.0 < –3460 <63.2 < 632 < 0278H
Underflow
H H
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative
range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F31CH and outputs 8000H. ... of EA0CH and outputs 8000H. ... of FDC8H and outputs 8000H.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-20 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Analog value representation for thermocouples type K

Table 4-26 Analog value representation for thermocouples type K

Units Units Units

Type K Type K Type K Range
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
> 1622.0 32767 7FFFH >2951.6 32767 7FFFH > 1895.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1622.0 16220 3F5CH 2951.6 29516 734CH 1895.2 18952 4A08H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1373.0 13730 35A2H 2503.4 25034 61CAH 1646.2 16462 404EH
1372.0 13720 3598H 2501.6 25061 61B8H 1645.2 16452 4044H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–270.0 –2700 F574H –454.0 –4540 EE44H 0 0 0000H
< –270.0 < –2700 < F574H < –454.0 < –4540 <EE44H 0% 0% < 0000H Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative
range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of E5D4H and outputs 8000H. ... of FB70H and outputs 8000H.

Analog value representation for thermocouples type L

Table 4-27 Analog value representation for thermocouples type L

Units Units Units

Type L Type L Type L Range
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
>1150.0 32767 7FFFH >2102.0 32767 7FFFH >1423.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1150.0 11500 2CECH 2102.0 21020 521CH 1423.2 14232 3798H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
901.0 9010 2332H 1653.8 16538 409AH 1174.2 11742 2DDEH
900.0 9000 2328H 1652.0 16520 4088H 1173.2 11732 2DD4H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H 73.2 732 02DCH
< –200.0 < –2000 < F830H < –328.0 < –3280 H <73.2 < 732 <02DCH Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative
range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F380H and outputs 8000H. ... of EAC0H and outputs 8000H. ... of FE2CH and outputs 8000H.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-21
Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type N

Table 4-28 Analog value representation for thermocouples type N

Units Units Units

Type N Type N Type N Range
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
> 1550.0 32767 7FFFH >2822.0 32767 7FFFH > 1823.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1550.0 15500 3C8CH 2822.0 28220 6E3CH 1823.2 18232 4738H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1300.1 13001 32C9H 2373.8 23738 5CBAH 1574.2 15742 3D7EH
1300.0 13000 32C8H 2372.0 23720 5CA8H 1573.2 15732 3D74H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–270.0 –2700 F574H –454.0 –4540 EE44H 0 0 0000H
< –270.0 < –2700 < F574H < –454.0 < –4540 <EE44H 0% 0% < 0000H Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative
range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of E5D4H and outputs 8000H. ... of FB70H and outputs 8000H.

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type R, S

Table 4-29 Analog value representation for thermocouples type R, S

Units Units Units

Types R, S Types R, Types R,
decimal hexa- S decimal hexa- S decimal hexa- Range
in 5C decimal in 5F decimal in K decimal

>2019.0 32767 7FFFH >3276.6 32767 7FFFH >2292.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
2019.0 20190 4EDEH 3276.6 32766 7FFEH 2292.2 22922 598AH
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
1770.0 17770 4524H 3218.0 32180 7DB4H 2043.2 20432 4FD0H
1769.0 17690 451AH 3216.2 32162 7DA2H 2042.2 20422 4FC6H
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–50.0 –500 FE0CH –58.0 –580 FDBCH 223.2 2232 08B8H
–51.0 –510 FE02H –59.8 –598 FDAAH 222.2 2222 08AEH
: : : : : : : : : Underrange
–170.0 –1700 F95CH –274.0 –2740 F54CH 103.2 1032 0408H
< –170.0 –32768 8000H < –274.0 –32768 8000H < 103-2 < 1032 8000H Underflow

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-22 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type T

Table 4-30 Analog value representation for thermocouples type T

Units Units Units

Type T Type T Type T Range
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
>540.0 32767 7FFFH >1004.0 32767 7FFFH >813.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
540.0 5400 1518H 1004.0 10040 2738H 813.2 8132 1FC4H
: : : Overrange
401.0 4010 0FAAH
400.0 4000 0FA0H 752.0 7520 1D60H 673.2 6732 1AACH
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–270.0 –2700 F574H –454.0 –4540 EE44H 3.2 32 0020H
< –270.0 < –2700 H < –454.0 < –4540 <EE44H <3.2 < 32 < 0020H Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative
range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... of E5D4H and outputs 8000H. ... of FB70H and outputs 8000H.

Analog Value Representation for Thermocouples type U

Table 4-31 Analog value representation for thermocouples type U

Units Units Units

Type U Type U Type U Range
in 5C decimal hexa- in 5F decimal hexa- in K decimal hexa-
decimal decimal decimal
>850.0 32767 7FFFH >1562.0 32767 7FFFH >1123.2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
850.0 8500 2134H 1562.0 15620 2738.0H 1123.2 11232 2BE0H
: : : : : : : : : Overrange
601.0 6010 177AH 1113.8 11138 2B82H 874.2 8742 2226H
600.0 6000 1770H 1112.0 11120 2B70H 873.2 8732 221CH
Rated
: : : : : : : : :
range
–200.0 –2000 F830H –328.0 –3280 F330H 73.2 732 02DCH
< –200.0 < –2000 H < –328.0 < –3280 H <73.2 < 732 <02DCH Underflow
In the case of incorrect wiring (e. g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative
range (e. g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow ...
... of F380H and outputs 8000H. ... of EAC0H and outputs 8000H. ... of FE2CH and outputs 8000H.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-23
Analog Modules

4.3.2 Analog Value Representation for Analog Output Channels

Introduction
The tables in this chapter contain the analog value representation for output
channels of the analog output modules. The values in the tables apply to all
modules with the corresponding output ranges.

Notes for readers of the tables

Tables 4-32 to 4-33 contain the binary representation of the output values.
Since the binary representation of the output values is always the same, starting at
4-34 these tables only contain the output ranges and the units.

Output ranges for the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 8/8 bits

The analog input/output module SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits has output ranges
from 0 to 10 V and from 0 to 20 mA. Unlike the other analog modules, the SM 334
has a lower resolution, however. Please not that the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 bits
with product status 1 does not have overranges.

Binary representation of the output ranges

The output ranges shown in Tables 4-32 to 4-33 are defined in two’s complement
representation:

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-24 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Table 4-32 Bipolar Output Ranges

Units Output Data Word Range

Value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

w32512 0 % 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Over
range
27649 w100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rated
range
–1 –0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
–27648 –100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
–27649 v100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Under
range
–32512 –117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
v32513 0 % 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x Underflow

Table 4-33 Unipolar Output Ranges

Units Output Data Word Range

Value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

w32512 0 % 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x Over-
flow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Over-
range
27649 w100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Rated
range
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
–1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Limited
0.000 to rated
range
lower
–32512 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 limit 0 V
and
0 mA
v32513 0 % 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x Under-
flow

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-25
Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation in Voltage Output Ranges

Table 4-34 Analog Value Representation in Output Range ±10 V

System Voltage Output Range

Dec. hex. ±10 V
118.5149% 32767 7FFF 0.00 V Overflow, off circuit and de-energized
32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 11.76 V Overrange
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 10 V
75% 20736 5100 7.5 V
0.003617% 1 1 361.7 µV Rated range
0% 0 0 0V
–1 FFFF –361.7 µV
–75 % –20736 AF00 –7.5 V
–100 % –27648 9400 –10 V
–27649 93FF Underrange
–117.593% –32512 8100 –11.76 V
–32513 80FF Underflow, off circuit and de-energized
–118.519% –32768 8000 0.00 V

Table 4-35 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 to 10 V and 1 to 5 V

System Voltage Output Range

Dec. hex. 0 to 10 V 1 to 5 V
118.5149% 32767 7FFF 0.00 V 0.00 V Overflow, off circuit and de-
energized
32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 11.76 V 5.70 V Overrange
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 10 V 5V
75% 20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V
0.003617% 1 1 361.7µV 1V+144.7µV Rated range
0% 0 0 0V 1V
–1 FFFF Underrange
–25 % –6912 E500 0V
–6913 E4FF Not possible.
The output value is limited
–117.593% –32512 8100 to 0 V.
–32513 80FF Underflow, off circuit and
de-energized
–118.519% –32768 8000 0.00 V 0.00 V

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-26 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Analog Value Representation in Current Output Ranges

Table 4-36 Analog Value Representation in Output Range ±20 mA

System Current Output Range

Dec. hex. ±20 mA
118.5149% 32767 7FFF 0.00 mA Overflow, off circuit and de-energized
32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 20 mA
75% 20736 5100 15 mA
0.003617% 1 1 723.4 nA
0% 0 0 0 mA Rated range
–1 FFFF –723.4 nA
–75 % –20736 AF00 –15 mA
–100 % –27648 9400 –20 mA
–27649 93FF Underrange
–117.593% –32512 8100 –23.52 mA
–32513 80FF Underflow, off circuit and de-energized
–118.519% –32768 8000 0.00 mA

Table 4-37 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 and 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA

System Current Output Range

Dec. hex. 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
118.5149% 32767 7FFF 0.00 mA 0.00 mA Overflow, off circuit
and de-energized
32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA
75% 20736 5100 15 mA 15 mA Rated range
0.003617% 1 1 723.4 nA 4mA+578.7 nA
0% 0 0 0 mA 4 mA
–1 FFFF Underrange
–25 % –6912 E500 0 mA
–6913 E4FF Not possible. The
output value is limi-
–117.593% –32512 8100 ted to 0 mA.
–32513 80FF Underflow, off circuit
and de-energized
–118.519% –32768 8000 0.00 mA 0.00 mA

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-27
Analog Modules

4.4 Setting the Measuring Method and Measuring Ranges of

Analog Input Channels

Two procedures
There are two procedures for setting the measuring method and the measuring
ranges of the analog input channels of the analog modules:
• With measuring range module and STEP 7
• By means of wiring the analog input channel and STEP 7
Which of these two methods is used for the individual analog modules depends on
the module and is described in detail in the specific module sections.
The procedure for setting the measuring method and measuring range of the
module in STEP 7 is described in Section 4.7.
The following section describes how you set the measuring method and the
measuring range by means of measuring range modules.

Setting the Measuring Method and the Measuring Ranges with Measuring Range
Modules
If the analog modules haves measuring range modules, they are supplied with the
measuring range modules plugged in.
If necessary, the measuring range modules must be replugged to change the
measuring method and the measuring range.

Note
Make sure that the measuring range modules are on the side of the analog input
module.
Before installing the analog input module, therefore, check whether the measuring
range modules have to be set to another measuring method and another
measuring range.

Possible settings for the measuring range modules

The measuring range modules can be set to the following positions: “A”, “B”, “C” and
“D”.
Which measuring range module positions you must select for the individual
measuring methods and measuring ranges is described in detail in the specific
module section.
The settings for the various types of measurement and measuring ranges are also
printed on the analog module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-28 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Replugging measuring range modules

If you want to replug a measuring range module, perform the following steps:
1. Use a screwdriver to ease the measuring range module out of the analog input
module.

Figure 4-1 Easing Measuring Range Modules from the Analog Input Module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-29
Analog Modules

2. Insert the measuring range module (correctly positioned (1)) into the analog
input module.
The measuring range selected is the one that points to marker point on
module (2).

Figure 4-2 Inserting Measuring Range Modules into the Analog Input Module

Perform the same steps for all other measuring range modules.
The next step is to install the module.

Caution
! If you have not set the measuring range modules correctly, the module may be
destroyed.
Make sure that the measuring range module is in the correct position before
connecting a sensor to the module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-30 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

4.5 Behavior of the Analog Modules

Introduction
In this section, you will find information on:
• How the analog input and output values depend on the operating states of the
CPU and the supply voltage of the analog module
• The behavior of the analog modules depending on where the analog values lie
within the value range
• The effect of the operational limit of the analog module on the analog input and
output value, as illustrated by an example

4.5.1 Effect of Supply Voltage and Operating Mode

Effect of supply voltage and operating mode on the modules

The input and output values of the analog modules depend on the operating state
of the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module.

Table 4-38 Dependencies of the Analog Input/Output Values on the Operating State of the CPU and the
Supply Voltage L+

CPU Operating Supply Vol- Input Value of the Output Value of the
State tage L+ at Analog Input Module Analog Output Module
Analog Mo-
dule
POWER RUN L+ present Measured value CPU values
ON
7FFFH until first conversion Until the first conversion...
following power-up or after • after power-up has been
parameter assignment of the completed, a signal of 0 mA
module has been completed or 0 V is output.
• after parameter
assignment has been
completed, the previous
value is output.
L+ missing Overflow value 0 mA/0 V
POWER STOP L+ present Measured value Substitute value/last value
ON (default values: 0 mA/0 V)
7FFFH until first conversion
following power-up or after
parameter assignment of the
module has been completed
L+ missing Overflow value 0 mA/0 V
POWER – L+ present – 0 mA/0 V
OFF
L+ missing – 0 mA/0 V

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-31
Analog Modules

Behavior on failure of the supply voltage

Failure of the supply voltage of the analog modules is always indicated by the SF
LED on the module. Furthermore, this information is made available on the module
(entry in diagnostic buffer).
Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment (see
Section 4.7).

4.5.2 Effect of Range of Values of the Analog Values

Effect of errors on analog modules with diagnostics capability

Any errors that occur can lead to a diagnostics entry and a diagnostic interrupt with
analog modules with diagnostics capability and corresponding parameter
assignment. You will find the errors that might be involved in Section 4.16.

Effect of range of values on the analog input module

The behavior of the analog modules depends on where the input values lie within
the range of values.

Table 4-39 Behavior of the Analog Input Modules as a Function of the Position of the
Analog Value within the Range of Values

Measured Input Value SF LED Diagnostics Interrupt

Value In
Rated range Measured – – –
value
Overrange/und Measured – – –
errange value
Overflow 7FFFH Flashes1) Entered1) Diagnostic
interrupt1)
Underflow 8000H Flashes1) Entered1) Diagnostic
interrupt1)
Beyond the Measured – – Hardware
programmed value interrupt1)
limit
1) Only for modules with diagnostics capability and depending on parameter assignment

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-32 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Effect of range of values on the analog output module

The behavior of the analog modules depends on where the output values lie within
the value range.

Table 4-40 Behavior of the Analog Output Modules as a Function of the Position of the
Analog Value within the Range of Values

Process Value Output Value SF LED Diagnostics Interrupt

Lies Within
Rated range CPU value – – –
Overrange/und CPU value – – –
errange
Overflow 0 signal – – –
Underflow 0 signal – – –

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-33
Analog Modules

4.5.3 Effect of Operational Limit and Basic Error Limit

Operational limit
The operational limit is the measuring error or output error of the analog module
over the entire temperature range authorized for the module, referred to the rated
range of the module.

Basic error limit

The basic error limit is the operational limit at 25 °C, referred to the rated range of
the module.

Note
The percentage details of operational and basic error limits in the technical
specifications of the module always refer to the highest possible input and output
value in the rated range of the module.

Example of determination of the output error of a module

An analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits is being used for voltage output.
The output range from “0 to 10 V” is being used. The module is operating at an
ambient temperature of 30 °C. Thus the operational limit applies. The technical
specifications of the module state:
• Operational limit for voltage output: "0.5 %
An output error, therefore, of "0.05 V ("0.5% of 10 V) over the whole rated range
of the module must be expected.
This means that with an actual voltage of, say, 1 V, a value in the range from 0.95
V to 1.05 V is output by the module. The relative error is "5 % in this case.
The figure below shows for the example how the relative error becomes
increasingly less the more the output value approximates to the end of the rated
range of 10 V.

"0.05 V "0.05 V "0.05 V

(¢ "5 %) (¢ "0.625 %) (¢ "0.5 %*)

Output Value
–1 V 0V 1V 8V 10 V
* Operational limit
Figure 4-3 Example of the Relative Error of an Analog Output Module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-34 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

4.6 Conversion, Cycle, Setting and Response Time of Analog

Modules

Conversion time of analog input channels

The conversion time consists of a basic conversion time and additional processing
times of the module for:
• Resistance test
• Wire-break monitoring
The basic conversion time depends directly on the conversion method of the
analog input channel (integrating method, instantaneous value conversion).
In the case of integrating conversion methods, the integration time has a direct
influence on the conversion time. The integration time depends on the interference
frequency suppression that you set in STEP 7 (refer to Section 4.7.1).
For the basic conversion times and additional processing times of the different
analog modules refer to the technical specifications of the module concerned,
starting at Section 4.18.

Scan time of analog input channels

Analog-to-digital conversion and the transfer of the digitized measured values to
the memory and/or to the bus backplane are performed sequentially – in other
words, the analog input channels are converted one after the other. The scan time
– in other words, the time elapsing until an analog input value is again converted, is
the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog input channels of the
analog input module.
The following figure illustrates the components of the scan time for an n-channel
analog module.

Conversion time,
channel 1

Conversion time,
channel 2
Scan time

Conversion time,
channel n

Figure 4-4 Scan time of an analog input or output module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-35
Analog Modules

Conversion and scan times for analog input channels in channel groups
When the analog input channels are grouped in channel groups, you must take into
account the conversion time channel group by channel group.

Example
Two analog input channels of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 12 bits are
combined to form a channel group. You must therefore grade the scan time in
steps of 2.

Setting smoothing of analog values

You can set the smoothing of the analog values in STEP 7 for some analog input
modules.

Using smoothing
Smoothing of analog values ensures a stable analog signal for further processing.
It makes sense to smooth the analog values with slow variations of measured
values – for example, with temperature measurements.

Smoothing principle
The measured values are smoothed by digital filtering. Smoothing is accomplished
by the module calculating average values from a defined number of converted
(digitized) analog values.
The user assigns parameters to smoothing at not more than four levels (none, low,
average, high). The level determines the number of analog signals used for
averaging.
The higher the smoothing level chosen, the more stable is the smoothed analog
value and the longer it takes until the smoothed analog signal is applied after a
step response (refer to the following example).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-36 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Example
The following figure shows the number of module cycles for a step response after
which the smoothed analog value is approximately 100% applied, as a function of
the smoothing that has been set. The figure applies to every change of signal at
the analog input.

Signal variation Step response for any analog input signal

in percent
100

63

50

0 50 100 150 200

Smoothing: low:
Module cycles
average:
high:
Figure 4-5 Example of the Influence of Smoothing on the Step Response

Additional information on smoothing

Refer to the specific section on the analog input module (from Section 4.22) to
determine whether smoothing can be set for the specific module and for any
special features that have to be taken into account.

Conversion time of the analog output channels

The conversion time of the analog output channels comprises the transfer of the
digitized output values from the internal memory and the digital-to-analog
conversion.

Scan time of analog output channels

The analog output channels are converted sequentially – in other words, the
analog output channels are converted one after the other.
The scan time – in other words, the time elapsing until an analog output value is
again converted, is the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog output
channels (refer to 4-4).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-37
Analog Modules

Tip
You should disable any analog channels that are not being used to reduce the scan
time in STEP 7.

Overview of the settling time and response time of the analog output modules

tA

tE
tZ

t1 t2 t3

tA = Response time
tZ = Scan time corresponds to n conversion time (n = activated channels)
tE = Settling time
t1 = New digitized output value is present
t2 = Output value transferred and converted
t3 = Specified output value reached

Figure 4-6 Settling and Response times of the Analog Output Channels

Settling time
The settling time (t2 to t3) – in other words, the time elapsing from application the
converted value until the specified value is reached at the analog output – is
load-dependent. A distinction is made between resistive, capacitive and inductive
loads.
For the settling times of the different analog output modules as a function of load
refer to the technical specifications of the module concerned, starting at Section
4.28.

Response time
The response time (t1 to t3) – in other words, the time elapsing from application of
the digital output values in the internal memory until the specified value is reached
at the analog output – in a worst case scenario is the sum of the scan time and the
settling time.
You have a worst case situation, if, shortly prior to the transfer of a new output
value, the analog channel has been converted and is not converted again until all
other channels are converted (scan time).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-38 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

4.7 Analog module parameter assignment

Introduction
Analog modules can have different characteristics. You can set the characteristics
of the modules by means of parameter assignment.

Tools for parameter assignment

You assign parameters to analog modules with STEP 7. You must perform
parameter assignment in STOP mode of the CPU.
When you have set all the parameters, download the parameters from the
programming device to the CPU. On a transition from STOP to ³ RUN mode, the
CPU then transfers the parameters to the individual analog modules.
In addition, if necessary you must place the measuring range modules of the
module in the necessary position (refer to Section 4.4).

Static and dynamic parameters

The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters.
Set the static parameters in STOP mode of the CPU, as described above.
You can similarly modify the dynamic parameters in the current user program by
means of SFCs. Note, however, that after a change from RUN ³ STOP, STOP ³
RUN of the CPU, the parameters set in STEP 7 apply again. You will find a
description of the parameter assignment of modules in the user program in
Appendix A.

Parameter Settable with CPU Operating

State
Static PG (STEP 7 HW CONFIG) STOP
Dynamic PG (STEP 7 HW CONFIG) STOP
SFC 55 in the user program RUN

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-39
Analog Modules

4.7.1 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

The analog input modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values
listed in the table below, depending on the functionality. Refer to the section on the
module concerned, starting from Section 4.22, for the subset “mastered” by the
specific analog modules.
The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in
STEP 7.

Table 4-41 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
Enable
Yes/no
• Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no
No
• Hardware interrupt No
Dynamic Module
upon limit violation
• Hardware interrupt at Yes/no
end of cycle No
Trigger for hardware Constraint possible due to measuring
interrupt range Channel or
• Upper limit value 32511 to –32512 – Dynamic Channel
• Lower limit value –32512 to 32511 group

Diagnostics
• Group diagnostics Yes/no No Channel or
Static Channel
• With wire-break Yes/no No group
check

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-40 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Table 4-41 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules, continued

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
Measurement
• Measuring method Deactivated U
U Voltage
4DMU Current
(4-wire transmitter)
2DMU Current
(2-wire transmitter)
R-4L Resistance
(four-conductor
connection)
R-3L Resistance
(three-conductor
connection)
RTD-4L Bulb resistor (linear,
four-conductor
connection)
RTD-3L Bulb resistor
(linear, three-conductor
connection) Channel or
TC-I1) Thermocouple Dynamic Channel
(internal comparison) group
TC-E1) Thermocouple
(external comparison)
TC-IL2) Thermocouple
(linear, internal
comparison)
TC-EL2) Thermocouple
(linear, external
comparison)
TC-L00C2) Thermocouple (linear,
reference temp. 0 °C)
TC-L50C2) Thermocouple (linear,
reference temp. 50°C)
• Measuring range For the settable measuring ranges of "10 V
the input channels, please refer to the
individual module description.
• Reaction with open Overflow; underflow Overflow
thermocouple
• Temperature unit3) Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit; Degrees
Dynamic Module
degrees Kelvin Celsius
• Module filtering mode 8 channels hardware filter 8
8 channels software filter channels,
Dynamic Module
4 channels hardware filter hardware
filter

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-41
Analog Modules

Table 4-41 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules, continued

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
• Temperature Platinum (Pt) 0.00385 Dynamic Channel or
coefficient for 0.00385 / °C Channel
temperature 0.003916 / °C group
measurement with 0.003902 / °C
bulb resistor (RTD) 0.003920 / °C
0.003851 / °C
Nickel (Ni)
0.00618 / °C
0.00672 / °C
Copper (Cu)
0.00427 / °C
• Interference 400/60/50 Hz; 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 50 Hz Dynamic Channel or
frequency 10 Hz Channel
suppression group
• Smoothing None None Dynamic Channel or
Low Channel
Average group
High

1) The module supplies a decimal value of the measured thermal voltage to the CPU –
for example, 27648 at 80 mV (refer to Table 4-11)
2) The module supplies a temperature value to the CPU – for example, 120°C (refer to Table 4-17)
3) 1 digit =0.1 °C; 1 digit =0.1 °F

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-42 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

4.7.2 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

The analog output modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values
listed in the table below, depending on the functionality. Refer to the section on the
module concerned, starting from Section 4.28, for the subset “mastered” by the
specific analog modules.
The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in
STEP 7.

Table 4-42 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter Type
Enable
• Diagnostic Yes/no No Dynamic Module
interrupt
Diagnostics
• Group diagnostics Yes/no No Static Channel
Output
• Output type Deactivated U
Voltage
Current Dynamic Channel
• Output range For the settable measuring ranges of the "10 V
output channels, please refer to the
individual module description.
Response with ASS Outputs de-energized ASS
CPU-STOP LWH Hold last value Dynamic Channel
EWS Apply substitute value

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-43
Analog Modules

4.7.3 Parameters of the analog input/output modules

The analog input/output modules make available the parameters in the following
table. The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment
in STEP 7.

Table 4-43 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules

Parameter Value Range Default Para- Scope

Settings meter
Type
Input
Measurement
• Measuring Deactivated RTD-4L
method U Voltage
R-4L Resistance
(four-conductor connection)
Dynamic Channel
RTD-4L Bulb resistor (linear,
four-conductor connection)
• Measuring Range 0 to 10 V Pt 100
10000  climate
Pt 100 climate
• Integration time 20 ms; 16.6 ms 20 ms
Output
• Output type Deactivated U
Voltage Dynamic Channel
• Output range 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-44 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

4.8 Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs

Introduction
You can connect different sensors to the analog input modules depending on the
measuring method; voltage and current sensors, and resistors.
This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the
connection options for sensors described in the sections that follow.

Cables for analog signals

To reduce electrical interference, you should use twisted-pair shielded cables for
the analog signals. The shield of the analog signal cables should be grounded at
both cable ends.
If there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding
current can flow over the shield, which leads to an interference of the analog
signals. In such a case, you should ground the shield at one end of the cable only.

Isolated analog input modules

In the case of isolated analog input modules, there is no electrical connection
between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of
the CPU.
You must use isolated analog input modules if a potential difference UISO can
occur between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the
M terminal of the CPU. An equipotential bonding conductor between the MANA
terminal and the M terminal of the CPU ensures that UISO does not exceed the
permitted value.

Non-isolated analog input modules

In the case of the non-isolated analog input modules, you must establish a
connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M
terminal of the CPU or IM 153. To do so, connect the MANA terminal with the M
terminal of the CPU or IM 153. A potential difference between MANA and the M
terminal of the CPU or IM 153 can result in corruption of the analog signal.

Limited potential difference UCM

Only a limited potential difference UCM (common mode voltage) may occur
between the measuring lines M– of the input channels and the reference point of
the measuring circuit MANA. In order to prevent the permissible value from being
exceeded, you must take different actions, described below, depending on the
potential connection of the sensors.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-45
Analog Modules

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following
meanings:
M +: Measuring lead (positive)
M–: Measuring lead (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M: Ground terminal
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
UCM: Potential difference between inputs and reference potential of
the MANA measuring circuit
UISO: Potential difference between MANA and M terminal of CPU
I +: Measuring lead for current input
U +: Measuring lead for voltage input

Connecting isolated measuring sensors

Isolated sensors are not connected with the local ground potential (local ground).
They can be operated free of potential.
With isolated sensors, potential differences might arise between the different
sensors. These potential differences can arise as a result of interference or the
local distribution of the sensors.
To prevent the permissible value for UCM being exceeded when used in
environments with a high level of EMC interference, we advise you to connect M–
with MANA.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-46 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

You can operate the CPU in Grounded mode (refer to the figure below) or
Ungrounded mode.

L+
M

M+
M–
Isolated

Logic
M+ ADC
sensors Backplane
M–
bus
Recommended
connection MANA

CPU

UISO
Minternal
L+
M

Ground bus

Figure 4-7 Connecting Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI

L+
M

M+
Isolated M–
Logic

sensors ADC
M+
M– Backplane
bus
Recommended
connection MANA
CPU

Minternal
L+
M

Ground bus

Figure 4-8 Connecting Isolated Sensors to a Non-Isolated AI

Note
Do not connect M– to MANA when connecting 2-wire transmitters for current
measurement and resistance-type sensors. This also applies to inputs which are
not used.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-47
Analog Modules

Non-isolated sensors
The non-isolated sensors are connected with the local ground potential (local
ground). When using non-isolated sensors, you must connect MANA to the local
ground.

Connecting non-isolated sensors

Caused by local conditions or interferences, potential differences UCM (static or
dynamic) can occur between the locally distributed individual measuring points. If
the potential difference UCM exceeds the permissible value, you must provide
equipotential bonding conductors between the measuring points.
When connecting non-isolated sensors to optically isolated modules, you can
operate the CPU in Grounded mode (refer to the figure below) or Ungrounded
mode.

L+
M

M+
Non-isolat M–
ed sensors

Logic
M+ ADC
M– Backplane bus

UCM
MANA

Equipotential CPU
bonding UISO
conductor
Minterna
lL+
M

Ground bus

Figure 4-9 Connecting Non-Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-48 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

When connecting non-isolated sensors to non-isolated modules, you can operate

the CPU only in Grounded mode.

L+
M

M+
Non-isolated M–
sensors

Logic
M+ ADC
M– Backplane
bus

UCM MANA
CPU

Equipotential Minternal
bonding L+
M
conductor
Ground bus

Figure 4-10 Connecting non-isolated sensors to a non-isolated AI

Note
You must not use non-isolated two-wire transmitters and non-isolated
resistance-type sensors with a non-isolated AI!

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-49
Analog Modules

4.9 Connecting Voltage Sensors

Note
The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the
analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.8 with
its generally valid information for connecting sensors.

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figure below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figure below have the following
meanings:
M +: Measuring lead (positive)
M–: Measuring lead (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M: Ground terminal
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
U +: Measuring lead for voltage input

Connection of voltage sensors

L+
M

+ M+
U M–
–
Logic

+ M+ ADC
U M– Backplane
– bus

MANA

Figure 4-11 Connecting Voltage Sensors to an Isolated AI

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-50 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

4.10 Connecting Current Sensors

Note
The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the
analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.8 with
its generally valid information for connecting sensors.

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following
meanings:
M +: Measuring lead (positive)
M–: Measuring lead (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M: Ground terminal
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
I +: Measuring lead for current input

Supply voltage of the sensors

The 2-wire transmitter receives its short-circuit-proof power supply via the
terminals of the analog input module.
This transmitter then converts the measured variable into a current. Two-wire
transmitters must be isolated sensors.
Four-wire transmitters have separate power supplies.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-51
Analog Modules

Connecting 2-wire transmitters

L+
Sensor,
for example, M
pressure gauge
Two-wire
P transmitter + M+
– M–

Logic
M+ ADC
Two-wire + Backplane
M–
P transmitter – bus

MANA

Figure 4-12 Connecting two-wire transmitters to an isolated AI

When the supply voltage L+ is fed from the module, you must assign parameters
to the two-wire transmitter as a four-wire transmitter in STEP 7.

Sensor,
for example, L+
pressure gauge M

2-wire +
P trans M+
–
Logic
mitter ADC
M– Backplane
bus

MANA

Figure 4-13 Connecting two-wire transmitters supplied from L+ to an

isolated AI

Connecting four-wire transmitters

L+
Sensor, M
for example,
pressure gauge
M+
+
P M–
transmitter

–
Four-wire

Logic

M+ ADC
+
P M– Backplane
–
bus

MANA
L+ M

Figure 4-14 Connecting four-wire transmitters to an isolated AI

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-52 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

4.11 Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors

Note
The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the
analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.8 with
its generally valid information for connecting sensors.

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following
meanings:
IC+: Constant-current lead (positive)
IC–: Constant-current lead (negative)
M+: Measuring lead (positive)
M–: Measuring lead (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M: Ground terminal
L+: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
S–: Detector lead (negative)

Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors

The resistance thermometers/resistors are wired in a four-conductor,
three-conductor or two-conductor connection.
With four-conductor and three-conductor connections, the module supplies a
constant current via terminals IC+ and IC– so that the potential drop occurring on
the measuring cables is compensated. It is important that the connected constant
current cables are directly connected to the resistance thermometer/resistor.
Measurements with four-conductor or three-conductor connections supply a more
precise measuring result due to compensation than measurements with a
two-conductor connection.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-53
Analog Modules

Four-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer

The voltage generated at the resistance thermometer is measured via the M+ and
M– terminals. When you connect, watch out for the polarity of the connected cable
(connect IC+ and M+ as well as IC– and M– to the resistance thermometer).
When connecting, make sure that the connected cables IC+ and M+ and the
cables IC– and M– are connected directly to the resistance thermometer.

L+
M

M+
M–

Logic
ADC
IC+ Backplane
IC IC– bus

MANA

Figure 4-15 Four-conductor connection of resistance thermometers to an isolated AI

Three-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer

With a three-conductor connection on modules with four terminals, you must
normally insert a jumper between M– and IC– (refer to Figure 4-16). Take note of
the exception for the SM 331; AI 8 RTD (refer to Figure 4-18).
When connecting, make sure that the connected cables IC+ and M+ are
connected directly to the resistance thermometer.

L+
M

M+
M–
Logic

ADC
IC+ Backplane
IC IC– bus

MANA

Figure 4-16 Three-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an Isolated AI

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-54 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Two-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer

With a two-conductor connection, you must insert jumpers on the module between
M+ and IC+ and between M– and IC– .

L+
M

M+
M–

Logic
ADC
IC+ Backplane
IC– bus

MANA

Figure 4-17 Two-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an Isolated AI

Three-conductor connection to the SM 331; AI 8 RTD

With a three-conductor connection to the SM 331; AI 8 RTD you must insert a
jumper between M+ and IC+ (refer to figure4-18).
When connecting, make sure that the connected cables IC– and M– are connected
directly to the resistance thermometer.

L+
M

M+
M–
Logic

ADC
IC+ Backplane
IC IC– bus

MANA

Figure 4-18 Three-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to the SM 331;

AI 8 x RTD

Caution
! Due to incorrect wiring of the three-conductor connection, unforeseen operation of
the module and dangerous conditions can result in the system.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-55
Analog Modules

4.11.1 Connecting resistance thermometers to the SM 331;

AI 8 x 13 bits

Two-conductor connection
With a two-conductor connection, you must insert jumpers on the module between
M– and S–.

S–
Backplane

Logic
M+ ADC bus
M–

Figure 4-19 Two-conductor connection of resistance thermometers to the SM 331;

AI 8x 13 bits

Three-conductor connection

S–
Backplane
Logic

M+ ADC
bus
M–

Figure 4-20 Three-conductor connection of resistance thermometers to the SM 331;

AI 8 x 13 bits

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-56 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Four-conductor connection
With a four-conductor connection, you must not connect the fourth conductor
(the conductor is not used at all, see Figure 4-21).

4th conductor S–
Backplane

Logic
not connected M+ ADC
bus
M–

Figure 4-21 Four-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers to the SM 331;

AI 8 x 13 bits

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-57
Analog Modules

4.12 Connecting Thermocouples

Design of thermocouples
A thermocouple consists of a pair of sensors and the necessary installation and
connecting parts. The thermocouple consists of two wires of dissimilar metals or
metal alloys soldered or welded together at the ends.
There are different types of thermocouple, depending on the composition of the
material used – for example, K, J, N thermocouples. The measuring principle of all
thermocouples is the same, irrespective of their type.

Measuring junction
Thermocouple with positive or negative limbs

Connecting point
Compensating leads

Reference junction

Leads

Point at which thermo-e. m. f. is measured

°C

Figure 4-22 Design of Thermocouples

Principle of Operation of Thermocouples

If the measuring point is subjected to a temperature different from that of the free
ends of the thermocouple (point of connection), a voltage, the thermo emf, occurs
at the free ends. The magnitude of the thermo-e.m.f. generated depends on the
difference between the temperature at the measuring junction and the temperature
at the free ends, as well as on the material combination used for the thermocouple.
Since a thermocouple always measures a temperature difference, the free ends
must be kept at a known temperature at a reference junction in order to determine
the temperature of the measuring junction.
The thermocouples can be extended from their point of connection to the reference
junction by means of compensating wires. These compensating wires consist of
the same material as the thermocouple wires. The supply leads are copper wire.
Note: Make sure these wires are connected with the correct polarity, otherwise
there will be considerable measuring errors.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-58 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Compensation of the reference junction temperature

You can compensate for the effects of temperature fluctuations at the reference
junction by means of compensating leads.
There are several options for you to choose from for acquiring the reference
junction temperature in order to obtain an absolute temperature value from the
difference in temperature between the reference junction and measuring point.
You can use internal or external compensation, depending on where you want the
reference junction to be.

Table 4-44 Options for Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature

Option Explanation
No compensation If you want to acquire only the difference in temperature
between the measuring point and the reference junction.
Internal compensation If you employ internal compensation, the internal
(refer to Figure 4-23 for connection) temperature (thermocouple internal comparison) of the
module is used for comparison purposes.
External compensation with compensating You have already acquired and compensated the
box in the leads of an individual reference junction temperature (thermocouple external
thermocouple (refer to Figures 4-24 and comparison) using a compensating box, which you have
4-25 for its connection) looped into an individual thermocouple.
No further processing is necessary owing to the module.
Only for SM 331; AI 8 x TC: You can acquire the reference temperature by means of a
External compensation with resistance resistance thermometer (platinum or nickel) and have it
thermometer for acquisition of the reference calculated by the module for any thermocouple.
junction temperature
(refer to Figure 4-26 and 4-27for
connection)

Theory of operation of internal compensation

With internal compensation, you can establish the reference point across the
terminals of the analog input modules. In this case, you must run the
compensating lines right up to the analog module. The internal temperature sensor
acquires the temperature of the module and supplies a compensation voltage.
Note that internal compensation is not as accurate as external compensation.

Theory of operation of external compensation with compensating box

If you employ external compensation, the temperature of the reference junction of
the thermocouples is taken into account via a compensating box, for example.
The compensating box contains a bridge circuit calibrated for a definite reference
junction temperature. The reference junction is formed by the connections for the
ends of the thermocouple’s compensating leads.
If the actual temperature deviates from the compensating temperature, the
temperature-sensitive bridge resistance changes. This results in a positive or
negative compensating voltage, which is added to the thermo-e.m.f.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-59
Analog Modules

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following
meanings:
M +: Measuring lead (positive)
M–: Measuring lead (negative)
IC+: Positive connection of constant current output
IC-: Negative connection of constant current output
COMP+: Compensating terminal (positive)
COMP –: Compensating terminal (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
M: Ground terminal
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
P5V: Module logic power supply
KV +/KV –: Connections to the shunt comparison

Note
The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the
analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.8 with
its generally valid information for connecting sensors.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-60 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Connection of thermocouples with internal compensation

Connect the thermocouples to the inputs of the module, either directly or by means
of compensating lines. Each channel group can use a thermocouple type
supported by the analog module independently of the other channel groups.

L+
Thermocouple M

M+
K0 M–

Logic
. ADC
. Backplane
. bus
M+
K7 M–

Compensating leads
(same material as COMP+
thermocouple) COMP–/MANA

Figure 4-23 Connection of Thermocouples with Internal Compensation to an

Isolated AI

Connecting the compensating box

Connect the compensating box to the COMP terminals of the module, locating the
compensating box at the reference junction of the thermocouples. The
compensating box must have an isolated supply. The power supply must have
adequate filtering, for example by means of a grounded shielding winding.
The terminals for connecting the thermocouple to the compensating box are not
required and must therefore be shorted (refer to Figure 4-25 for an example).
The following constraints apply:
• The parameters of a channel group are general valid for all channels of that
group (for example, input voltage, integrating time etc.)
• External compensation with connection of the compensating box to the COMP
terminals of the module can be performed only for one thermocouple type. In
other words, all channels operating with external compensation must use the
same type.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-61
Analog Modules

Connecting thermocouples with compensating box

If all thermocouples connected to the inputs of the module have the same
comparison point, you compensate as follows:

Copper L+
wire M

M+
M–
Thermo-

Logic
couples M+ ADC
M– Backplane
bus
Compensating L+ M
leads (same
material as Comp. COMP+
thermocouple) Box COMP–/MANA
Ref. junction

Figure 4-24 Connection of Thermocouples with Compensation Box to an Isolated AI

Note
Use compensating boxes with a reference junction temperature of 0C for
analog input modules.

Recommended compensating box

We recommend you to use a comparison point (with integrated power supply unit)
from Siemens as a compensating box. You will find the necessary ordering data in
the table below.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-62 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Table 4-45 Ordering Data of the Comparison Point

Recommended Compensating Box Order number

Reference junction with integrated power supply M72166-
unit, for rail mounting

Auxiliary power 220 VAC B1

110 VAC B2
24 VAC B3
24 VDC B4

Connection
to thermocouple Fe-CuNi Type L 1
Fe/Cu Ni Type J 2
Ni Cr/Ni Type K 3
Pt 10% Rh/Pt Type S 4
Pt 13% Rh/Pt Type R 5
Cu/Cu Ni Type U 6
Cu/Cu Ni Type T 7

Reference temperature 0 C 00

Connecting to the comparison point (Order No. M72166-xxx00)

If all thermocouples connected to the inputs of the module have the same
comparison point, you compensate as follows:

Compensating leads Copper L+

(same material as wire M
thermocouple)

M+
M–
Thermoco
Logic

uples M+ ADC
M– Backplane
bus
Auxiliary power
+ –
3 1 COMP+
COMP–/MANA
The terminals for the SIEMENS
compensating wire M72166-
must be short-
circuited!
12 11

9 8
+ –

Output (Cu wires)

Figure 4-25 Connection of Thermocouples with Comparison Point (Order No. M72166-xxx00) to an
Isolated AI

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-63
Analog Modules

Connecting thermocouples with temperature compensation to the

SM 331; AI 8 x TC
All 8 inputs are available as measurement channels when the thermocouples are
connected via reference junctions that are controlled at 0 °C or 50 °C.

L+
Copper M
wire

M+
K0 M-
.
Reference junction

Logic
.
controlled at ADUs Backplane
.
0C or 50C bus
M+
K6 M-
M+
K7 M-

Figure 4-26 Connecting thermocouples via a reference junction to the

SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-64 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Connecting thermocouples with resistance thermometer to the

SM 331; AI 8 x TC
With this type of compensation, the reference junction terminal temperature is
determined by a bulb resistor sensor with a temperature range of -25 °C to 85 °C.

Copper L+
wire M

KV+
K0 KV–
Thermo- P5V
couples ADC

KV+

Logic
K7 KV–

Backplane
KV+ bus
Compensating KV–
leads (same Pt 100
material as IC+ M internal
thermocouple) IC–

Ref. junction

Figure 4-27 Connecting thermocouples with external compensation via resistance thermometers to the
SM 331; AI 8 x TC

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-65
Analog Modules

4.13 Connecting Loads/Actuators to analogo output

Introduction
You can use the analog output modules to supply loads and actuators with current
and voltage.
This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the
connection options for loads and actuators described in the sections that follow.

Cables for analog signals

For the analog signals, you should use shielded and twisted pair cables. The cables
QV and S+ and M and S–, respectively, are to be twisted together. This reduces the
interference. Ground the screen of the analog cables at both ends of the cables.
If there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding
current, which can flow over the shield, can cause interference of the analog
signals. In such a case, you should ground the shield at one end of the cable only.

Isolated Analog Output Modules

With the isolated analog output modules there is no electrical connection between
the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of the CPU.
You must use isolated analog output modules if a potential difference UISO can
occur between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the
M terminal of the CPU. By means of a equipotential bonding conductor between
the MANA terminal and the M terminal of the CPU, make sure that UISO does not
exceed the permitted value.

Non-Isolated Analog Output Modules

With the non-isolated analog output modules, you must establish a connection
between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of
the CPU. Therefore, connect the MANA terminal with the M terminal of the CPU. A
potential difference between MANA and the M terminal of the CPU can lead to a
corruption of the analog signal.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-66 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

4.14 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Voltage Outputs

Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output

Connecting loads to a voltage output is possible both in a four-conductor and a
two-conductor connection. However, not all analog output modules allow both
types of connection.

Note
The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the
analog output module, are not drawn in the figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.13 with
its generally valid information for connecting loads and actuators.

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following
meanings:
QV: Analog output voltage
S +: Detector lead (positive)
S–: Detector lead (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of analog circuit
RL: Load impedance
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
M: Ground terminal
UISO: Potential difference between MANA and M terminal of CPU.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-67
Analog Modules

Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated Module over a

Four-Conductor Connection
A high accuracy at the load can be achieved through the four-conductor
connection. You must therefore connect the sensor leads (S– and S+) directly to
the load. The voltage is thus measured and corrected directly at the load.
Interferences or a voltage drop can result in a potential difference between the
sensor lead S– and the reference circuit of the analog circuit MANA. This potential
difference must not exceed the permissible value. If the permissible potential
difference is exceeded, the accuracy of the analog signal is impaired.

L+
M

QV
Logic

DAC S+
Backplane
bus RL
S–

MANA

CPU
UISO

Minternal
L+
M

Ground bus

Figure 4-28 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated AO over a Four-Conductor Connection

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-68 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Connecting loads to a voltage output of a non-isolated module via a

two-conductor connection
With a two-conductor connection, the S+ and S– terminals can be left open.
However, you will not achieve the accuracy of a four-conductor connection.
Connect the load to terminals QV and the reference point of the measuring circuit,
MANA.

L+
M

QV

Logic
DAC
Backplane
bus RL

MANA

CPU

Minternal
L+
M

Ground bus

Figure 4-29 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of a Non-Isolated AO over a Two-Conductor

Connection

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-69
Analog Modules

4.15 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Current Outputs

Note
The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the
analog output module, are not drawn in the figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.13 with
its generally valid information for connecting loads and actuators.

Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below

The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following
meanings:
QI: Analog output current
MANA: Reference potential of analog circuit
RL: Load impedance
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
M: Ground terminal
UISO: Potential difference between MANA and M terminal of CPU.

Connecting Loads to a Current Output

You must connect loads to QI and the reference point of the analog circuit MANA of
a current output.

L+
M

QI
Logic

DAC
Backplane
bus RL

MANA
CPU
UISO

Minternal
L+
M

Ground bus

Figure 4-30 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of an Isolated AO

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-70 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

L+
M

QI

Logic
DAC
Backplane
bus RL

CPU
MANA

Minternal
L+
M

Ground bus

Figure 4-31 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of a Non-Isolated AO

4.16 Diagnostics of the Analog Modules

Programmable and Non-Programmable Diagnostic Messages

In diagnostics, we make a distinction between programmable and
non-programmable diagnostic messages.
You obtain programmable diagnostic messages only if you have enabled
diagnostics by parameter assignment. You perform parameter assignment in the
“Diagnostics” parameter field in STEP 7 (refer to Section 4.7).
Non-programmable diagnostic messages are always made available by the analog
module irrespective of diagnostics being enabled.

Actions following diagnostic message in STEP 7

Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions:
• The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnosis of the analog module and
forwarded to the CPU.
• The error LED on the analog module lights.
• If you have programmed “Enable Diagnostic Interrupt” with STEP 7, a
diagnostic interrupt is triggered and OB 82 is called (refer to Section 4.17).

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-71
Analog Modules

Reading out diagnostic messages

You can read out detailed diagnostic messages by means of SFCs in the user
program (refer to the Appendix “Diagnostic Data of Signal Modules”).
You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7, in the module diagnosis (refer to
online Help for STEP 7).

Diagnostic message in the measured value of analog input modules

Every analog input module supplies the measured value 7FFFH irrespective of the
parameter assignment when an error is detected. This measured value means
either Overflow, Malfunction or a channel is disabled.

Diagnostic message by means of SF LED

Every analog module indicates errors for you by means of your SF LED (group
error LED). The SF LED lights as soon as a diagnostic message is triggered by the
analog module. It goes out when all errors have been rectified.

Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules

The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the analog input
modules.

Table 4-46 Diagnostic Messages of the Analog Input Modules

Diagnostics Message LED Diagnostics Parameters can

Effective for be assigned
External auxiliary supply missing SF Module No
Configuring/parameter assignment SF
Channel Yes
error
Common-mode error SF Channel Yes
Wire-break SF Channel Yes
Underflow SF Channel Yes
Overflow SF Channel Yes

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-72 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Diagnostic messages of the analog output modules

The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the analog
output modules.

Table 4-47 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules

Diagnostics Message LED Diagnostics Ef- Parameters can

fective for be assigned
External auxiliary supply missing SF Module No
Configuring/parameter assignment SF
Channel Yes
error
Short-circuit to M SF Channel Yes
Wire-break SF Channel Yes

Note
A prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostic
messages is that you have assigned parameters to the analog module accordingly
in STEP 7.

Causes of errors and remedial measures for analog input modules

Table 4-48 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules, Causes of Errors and
Remedial Measures

Diagnostics Possible Error Cause Remedy

Message
External load voltage Load voltage L+ of module missing Feed supply L+
missing
Configuring/parameter Illegal parameters transferred to Check measuring range module
assignment error module
Reassign module parameter
Common-mode error Potential difference UCM between Connect M– with MANA
the inputs (M–) and reference
potential of measuring circuit (MANA)
too high
Wire-break Resistance too high in the sensor Use different type of sensor or
connection connection, e.g. use conductors with a
larger cross-sectional core area
Open circuit between module and Close circuit
sensor
Channel not connected (open) Disable channel group (“measuring
procedure” parameter
Connect channel

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-73
Analog Modules

Table 4-48 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules, Causes of Errors and
Remedial Measures

Diagnostics Possible Error Cause Remedy

Message
Underflow Input value underflows underrange,
error may be caused:
Wrong measuring range selected
Configure other measuring range
With the measuring ranges 4 to Check terminals
20 mA and 1 to 5 V, if necessary by
polarity reversal of sensor
connection
Overflow Input value overflows overrange Configure other measuring range

Causes of errors and remedial measures for analog output modules

Table 4-49 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules, Causes of Errors and
Remedial Measures

Diagnostics Possible Error Cause Remedy

Message
External load voltage Load voltage L+ of module Feed supply L+
missing missing
Configuring/parameter Illegal parameters transferred to Reassign module parameter
assignment error module

Short-circuit after M Overload of output Eliminate overload

Short-circuit of output QV after Eliminate short circuit
MANA
Wire-break Actuator resistance too high Use different type of actuator or connection,
e.g. use conductors with a larger
cross-sectional core area
Open circuit between module Close circuit
and actuator
Channel not used (open) Disable channel group (”output type”
parameter)

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-74 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

4.17 Interrupts of the Analog Modules

Introduction
In this Section, the interrupt behavior of the analog modules is described. The
following interrupts exist:
• Diagnostic interrupt
• Hardware interrupt
Note that not all analog modules have interrupt capability or they are only capable
of a subset of the interrupts described here Refer to the technical specifications of
the modules, starting at Section 4.18, to determine which analog modules have
interrupt capability.
The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online Help for STEP 7,
where they are described in greater detail.

Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not preset – in other words, they are inhibited without
appropriate parameter assignment. Assign parameters to the Interrupt Enable in
STEP 7 (refer to Section 4.7).

Diagnostic interrupt
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial
occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after
troubleshooting) are reported by means of an interrupt.
The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program and processes the
diagnostic interrupt block (OB 82).
In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more
detailed diagnostic information from the module.
The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When
OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

Hardware interrupt with trigger “Upper or lower limit exceeded”

Define a working range by setting parameters for an upper and lower limit value. If
the process signal (for example, the temperature) leaves this working range, the
module triggers a hardware interrupt, provided the interrupt is enabled.
The CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the hardware
interrupt block (OB 40).
In the user program of OB 40, you can set how the programmable logic controller
is required to react to a limit value being surpassed or not being reached.
When OB 40 is exited, the hardware interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-75
Analog Modules

4.21 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits;

(6ES7331-1KF01-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7331-1KF01-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits has the following characteristic
features:
• 8 inputs
• Measured-value resolution 12 bits + sign
• Measuring method selectable:
– Voltage
– Current
– Resistors
– Bulb resistor
• Isolated against the backplane bus interface

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-108 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Terminal Connection Diagram and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits

The following figure shows some examples of connections for the different types of
measurements on channels 4 to 7. Basically, these connection examples apply to
all channels (channel 0 to 7).

Connection example

1 Multiplexer 21
U+ U+
2 22
0 0 I+ I+
3 23
1 1 S– S–
Ch 0 4 24
V Ch 4
2 2 M+ M+
3 3 5 25
M– M–
4 4 6 26
U+ U+
5 5 7 27
I+ I+
6 6 8
Logic Electrical 28
S– S–
7 7 Ch 1 and isolation Ch 5
9 29
M+ back- M+ A
M– 10 plane ADC 30
M–
11 bus 31
U+ ac- U+
I+ 12 32
0 0 tiva- I+
1 1
S– 13 tion 33 S–
2 2
Ch 2 Ch 6
M+ 14 34
M+
Current mV
3 3 15 35
M– M–
4 4 source
16 36
U+ U+
5 5
I+ 17 37 I+
6 6
18 38
7 7 S– S–
Ch 3 + 5 V from Ch 7
M+ 19 39
backplane bus M+
M– 20 40
Internal supply M–

Channel
number

Figure 4-39 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 x 13
bits

Note
When connecting the voltage and current sensors, make sure that you do not
exceed the maximum permitted common-mode voltage UCM of 2 V between the
inputs. So to prevent measuring errors, interconnect the individual M– terminals.
It is not necessary to interconnect the M– terminals when measuring resistors and
resistance temperature detectors.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-109
Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 x 13 bits

Dimensions and Weight Analog value generation

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Measuring principle Integrating

(in millimeters)
Integration time/resolution
Weight Approx. 250 g (per channel)
Data for Specific Module • Programmable Yes
Supports clocked No • Noise suppression 50 60
operation for frequency f1 in Hz
Number of inputs 8 • Integration time in 60 50
• For resistance-type 8 milliseconds
sensor
• Basic conversion 66 55
Length of cable time including
Integration time in
• Shielded max. 200 m
milliseconds
max. 50 m at 50 mV
Additional conversion 66 55
Voltages, Currents, Potentials time for measuring
Constant current for resistance, in ms
resistance-type sensor • Resolution in bits (incl. 13 bits 13 bits
• Resistance ther- 0.83 mA
Overrange
mometer and Suppression of interference, Limits of Error
resistance meas-
urement 0 ... 600 Ω Noise suppression for f = n (f1 " 1 %),
(f1 = interference frequency) n = 1.2
• Resistance meas- 0.25 mA
urement 0 ... 6 kΩ • Common-mode > 86 dB
interference
Isolation (UCM < 2 V)
• Between channels and Yes • Series-mode noise > 40 dB
backplane bus (peak value of
noise < nominal
• Between the channels No
value of input
Permitted potential range)
difference
Crosstalk between the > 50 dB
• Between the inputs 2.0 VDC inputs
(ECM)

• Between the inputs 75 VDC / 60 VAC

and Minternal (UISO)

Insulation tested with 500 VDC

Current consumption
• From the backplane max. 90 mA
bus

Power dissipation of the typ. 0.4 W

module

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-110 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with Temperature error (with " 0.006 %/K / 0.006 K/K
reference to the input range) reference to the input
range)
• Voltage input " 5 " 0.6 %
V " 10 V Linearity error (with " 0.1 % / 0.1 K
1 to 5 V reference to the input
0 to 10 V range)

" 50 mV " 0.5 % Repeat accuracy (in the " 0.1 % / " 0.1 K
" 500 mV steady state at 25 C,
"1 V referred to the input range)

• Current input " 20 mA " 0.5 % Status, interrupts, diagnostics

0 to 20 mA Interrupts None
4 to 20 mA
Diagnostic functions None
• Resistors 0 to 6 kΩ " 0.5 %
0 to 600 Ω " 0.5 % Data for Selecting a Sensor

• Resistance Pt 100 " 1.2 K Input range (rated

thermometer Ni 100 values)/Input resistance
Standard
• Voltage " 50 mV 100 kΩ
Pt 100 "1K " 500 mV
Ni 100 "1 V
Climate
"5V
Ni 1000, LG-Ni " 1 K " 10 V
1000 Standard
1 to 5 V;
Ni 1000 "1K 0 to 10 V
LG-Ni 1000
Climate • Current " 20 mA 50 Ω
0 to 20 mA;
Basic error (operational limit at 25 C, referred to input
range) 4 to 20 mA:

• Voltage input " 5 " 0.4 % • Resistors 0 to 6 kΩ 100 MΩ

V " 10 V 0 to 600 Ω
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V • Resistance Pt 100 100 MΩ
thermometer Ni 100
" 50 mV " 0.3 % Ni 1000
" 500 mV "1 LG-Ni 1000
V Standard /
Climate
• Current input " 20 mA " 0.3 %
0 to 20 mA Maximum input voltage for max. 30 V continuous
4 to 20 mA voltage input U+
(destruction limit)
• Resistors 0 to 6 kΩ " 0.3 %
0 to 600 Ω " 0.3 % Maximum input voltage for max. 12 V continuous;
voltage inputs M+, M-, S– 30 V for max. 1 s
• Resistance Pt 100 "1K
(destruction limit)
thermometer Ni 100
Standard Maximum input current for 40 mA
current input I+
Pt 100 " 0.8 K
(destruction limit)
Ni 100
Climate

Ni 1000 " 0.8 K

LG-Ni 1000
Standard

Ni 1000 LG-Ni " 0.8 K

1000
Climate

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-111
Analog Modules

Connection of the Characteristic Programmable

sensor linearization

• For measuring Possible • For RTD Pt 100 Standard / Climate

voltage Ni 100 Standard / Climate
Ni 1000 Standard / Climate
• For measuring current LG-Ni 1000 Standard /
Climate
As two-wire Possible, with external
transmitter supply • Technical unit for Degrees Celsius,
temperature degrees Fahrenheit, Kelvin
As four-wire Possible
measurement
transmitter

•
For measuring
resistance

with two-conductor Possible

connection

with three-conductor Possible

connection

with four-conductor Possible

connection

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-112 A5E00105505-03
Analog Modules

4.28 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits;

(6ES7332-5HD01-0AB0)

Order number
6ES7332-5HD01-0AB0

Characteristics
The analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits has the following characteristic
features:
• 4 Output channels
• The individual output channels can be programmed as
– Voltage outputs
– Current outputs
• Resolution 12 bits
• Programmable diagnostics
• Programmable diagnostic interrupt
• Programmable substitute value output
• Isolated against backplane bus interface and load voltage

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-176 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Terminal connection and block diagram of analog output module SM 332;

AO 4 x 12 bits

Fault indicator – red Current Voltage

output outputs

L+
SF 24V
Internal DAC
supply QI0 QV0
S0 +
CH0 S0* CH0
MANA MANA
QI1 QV1
Isolation
S1 +
CH1 S1* CH1
MANA MANA

QI2 QV2
Backplane
SF S2 +
bus CH2 S2* CH2
interface MANA MANA
QI3 QV3
S3 +
CH3 S3* CH3
MANA MANA

M M

Figure 4-53 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-177
Analog Modules

Technical specifications of the SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits

Dimensions and Weight Analog value generation

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 117 Resolution including sign
(in millimeters)
• " 10 V; " 20 mA; 11 bits + sign
Weight Approx. 220 g 4 to 20 mA; 1 to 5 V
Data for Specific Module • 0 to 10 V; 0 to 20 mA 12 bits
Supports clocked No Conversion time (per channel) max. 0.8 ms
operation
Settling time
Number of outputs 4 • For resistive load 0.2 ms
Length of cable • For capacitive load 3.3 ms
• Shielded max. 200 m • For inductive load 0.5 ms (1 mH)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials 3.3 ms (10 mH)

Rated load voltage L + 24 VDC Suppression of interference, Limits of Error

• Reverse polarity protection Yes Crosstalk between the outputs > 40 dB
Isolation Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with
reference to the output range)
• Between channels and Yes
backplane bus • Voltage outputs " 0.5 %
• Between channels and Yes • Current outputs " 0.6 %
power supply of the Basic error (operational limit at 25° C, referred to output
electronics range)
• Between the channels No • Voltage outputs " 0.4 %
• Between channels and load Yes • Current outputs " 0.5 %
voltage L+
Temperature error (with " 0.002 %/K
Permitted potential difference reference to the output range)
• Between S– and MANA 3 VDC Linearity error (with reference to " 0.05 %
(UCM) the output range)
• Between MANA and 75 VDC / 60 VAC Repeatability (in steady state at " 0.05 %
Minternal (UISO) 25 C, referred to output range)
Insulation tested with 500 VDC Output ripple; range 0 to 50 kHz " 0.05 %
(referred to output range)
Current consumption
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
• From the backplane bus max. 60 mA
Interrupts
• From the load voltage L+ max. 240 mA
(no load) • Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be
assigned
Power dissipation of the module typ. 3 W
Diagnostic functions Programmable
• Group error display Red LED (SF)
• Diagnostic information Possible
readable
Substitute value can be applied Yes, programmable

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

4-178 A5E00105505-03
 Analog Modules

Data for Selecting an Actuator Destruction limit against

voltages/currents applied from
Output ranges (rated values) outside
• Voltage ±10 V • Voltage at outputs to MANA max. 18 V continuous;
0 to 10 V 75 V for max. 1 s (duty
1 to 5 V factor 1:20)
• Current ±20 mA • Current max. 50 mA DC
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA Connection of actuators

Load resistance (in the nominal • For voltage output

range of the output) – Four-conductor Possible
• For voltage outputs min. 1 kΩ connection (measuring
circuit)
– capacitive load max. 1 µF
• For current output
• For current outputs max. 500 Ω
– Two-conductor Possible
– At UCM< 1V max. 600  connection
– Inductive load max. 10 mH

Voltage outputs
• Short-circuit protection Yes
• Short-circuit current max. 25 mA

Current outputs
• No-load voltage max. 18 V

4.28.1 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 4 x 12 bits

Note
When switching on and off the rated load voltage (L+), wrong intermediate values
can occur across the output for approximately 10 ms.

Parameter
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
analog modules in Section 4.7.
You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values
in Table 4-42, on page 4-43.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 4-179
 Interface Modules

Technical specification
The following overview lists the technical specifications for the interface module
IM 361.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W x H x D 80 x 125 x 120
(in millimeters)
Weight 505 g
Data for Specific Module
Length of cable
Maximum length to next IM 10 m
Current consumption
From 24 VDC 0.5 A
Power loss typ. 5 W
Current output
To backplane bus 0.8 A
Status and fault LEDs Yes

6.4 Interface Module IM 365; (6ES7365-0BA01-0AA0)

Order number: “Standard module”

6ES7365-0BA01-0AA0

Order number: “SIPLUS S7-300-Module”

6AG1365-0BA01-2AA0

Characteristics
The interface module IM 365 has the following characteristic features:
• Pre-assembled pair of modules for rack 0 and rack 1
• Total power supply of 1.2 A, of which up to 0.8 A can be used per rack.
• Connecting cable with a length of 1 m already permanently connected
• Install only signal modules in rack 1
• IM 365 does not forward the C bus to rack 1, i.e. you cannot plug FMs with a
C bus function in rack 1.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 6-7
Interface Modules

Front View
Figure 6-3 shows the front view of the interface module IM 365.

IM 365 IM 365
RECEIVE SEND

In rack 1 In rack 0

Figure 6-3 Front View of the Interface Module IM 365

Technical specification
The following overview lists the technical specifications for the interface module
IM 365.

Dimensions and Weight Data for Specific Module

Dimensions W x H x D 40 x 125 x 120 Length of cable
per rack (in millimeters) Maximum length to next IM 1m
Total weight 580 g Current consumption
From the backplane bus 100 mA
Power loss typ. 0.5 W
Current output max. 1.2 A
Per rack 0.8 A
Status and fault LEDs No

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

6-8 A5E00105505-03
Spare Parts and Accessories for
S7-300 Modules D
Spare parts
Table D-1 lists all the parts you can order separately or later for S7-300
programmable controllers.

Table D-1 Accessories and Spare Parts

S7-300 Parts Order number

Bus connector 6ES7390-0AA00-0AA0
Power connector between power supply unit 6ES7390-7BA00-0AA0
and CPU
Labeling strip (Qty 10)
• For 8/16-channel modules 6ES7392-2XX00-0AA0
• For 32-channel modules 6ES7392-2XX10-0AA0
Labeling strips to be printed
• For 16-channel modules (petrol) 6ES7392-2AX00-0AA0
(light beige) 6ES7392-2BX00-0AA0
(yellow) 6ES7392-2CX00-0AA0
(red) 6ES7392-2DX00-0AA0
• For 32-channel modules (petrol) 6ES7392-2AX10-0AA0
(light beige) 6ES7392-2BX10-0AA0
(yellow) 6ES7392-2CX10-0AA0
(red) 6ES7392-2DX10-0AA0
• Instructions for printing labeling strips with www.siemens.de/automation/csi/
artwork product
Contribution ID No.: 11978022
Slot numbering label 6ES7912-0AA00-0AA0
Front connector 20-pin
• Screw-type Connection 6ES7392-1AJ00-0AA0
• Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7392-1BJ00-0AA0
Front connector 40-pin
• Screw-type Connection 6ES7392-1AM00-0AA0
Front connector for 2 flat ribbon terminals
• Screw-type Connection 6ES7921-3AB00-0AA0
• Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7921-3AA00-0AA0

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 D-1
 Table D-1 Accessories and Spare Parts, continued

S7-300 Parts Order number

Front connector for 4 flat ribbon terminals
• Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7921-3AA20-0AA0
SIMATIC TOP connect, 1-tier, with
• Screw-type Connection 6ES7924-0AA00-0AA0
• Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7924-0AA00-0AB0
SIMATIC TOP connect, 2-tier, with
• Screw-type Connection 6ES7924-0BB00-0AA0
• Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7924-0BB00-0AB0
SIMATIC TOP connect, 3-tier, with
• Screw-type Connection 6ES7924-0CA00-0AA0
• Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7924-0CA00-0AB0
Round-sheath ribbon cable (16-pin)
• Unshielded 30 m 6ES7923-0CD00-0AA0
• Unshielded 60 m 6ES7923-0CG00-0AA0
• Shielded 30 m 6ES7923-0CD00-0BA0
• Shielded 60 m 6ES7923-0CG00-0BA0
Plug-in connectors, 16-pin, set of 8 (insulation 6ES7921-3BE10-0AA0
displacement connectors)
Shield connecting element 6ES7390-5AA00-0AA0
Shield connection terminals for
• 2 cables, each with a shield diameter of 2 6ES7390-5AB00-0AA0
to 6 mm
• 1 cable with a shield diameter of 3 to 8 6ES7390-5BA00-0AA0
mm
• 1 cable with a shield diameter of 4 to 13 6ES7390-5CA00-0AA0
mm
Measuring range module for analog modules 6ES7974-0AA00-0AA0
Fuse set for 120/230 VAC digital output 6ES7973-1HD00-0AA0
modules (contains 10 fuses and 2 fuse
carriers)
Interconnecting cable between IM 360 and
IM 361 or IM 361 and IM 361
• 1m 6ES7368-3BB01-0AA0
• 2.5 m 6ES7368-3BC51-0AA0
• 5m 6ES7368-3BF01-0AA0
• 10 m 6ES7368-3CB01-0AA0

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

D-2 A5E00105505-03
Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic
Sensitive Devices (ESD) E
Introduction
In this appendix, we explain
• what is meant by “electrostatic sensitive devices”
• the precautions you must observe when handling and working with electrostatic
sensitive devices.

Contents
This chapter contains the following sections on electrostatic sensitive devices:

Section Contents Page

E.1 What is ESD? E-2
E.2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons E-3
E.3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge E-4
Damage

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 E-1
E.1 What is ESD?

Definition
All electronic modules are equipped with large-scale integrated ICs or components.
Due to their design, these electronic elements are very sensitive to overvoltages
and thus to any electrostatic discharge.
The abbreviation ESD has been introduced for these Electrostatic Sensitive
Devices/Modules. The designation ESD is used internationally for electrostatic
sensitive device.
Electrostatic sensitive devices are labeled with the following symbol:

Caution
! Electrostatic sensitive devices are subject to voltages that are far below the
voltage values that can still be perceived by human beings. These voltages are
present if you touch a component or the electrical connections of a module without
previously being electrostatically discharged. In most cases, the damage caused
by an overvoltage is not immediately noticeable and results in total damage only
after a prolonged period of operation.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

E-2 A5E00105505-03
 Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD)

E.2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons

Charging
Every person with a non-conductive connection to the electrical potential of its
surroundings can be charged electrostatically.
Figure E-1 shows you the maximum values for electrostatic voltages which can
build up on a person coming into contact with the materials indicated in the figure.
These values are in conformity with the specifications of IEC 801-2.

Voltage in kV
(kV)
16 1 Synthetic material
15
14 2 Wool
13
3 Antistatic material,
12 for example, wood
11 1 or concrete
10
9
8
7
6
5
4 2
3
2
3
1
5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Relative air
humidity in %

Figure E-1 Electrostatic Voltages which Can Build up on a Person

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 E-3
E.3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge
Damage

Ensure sufficient grounding

Make sure that the personnel, working surfaces and packaging are sufficiently
grounded when handling electrostatic sensitive devices. You thus avoid
electrostatic charging.

Avoid direct contact

You should touch electrostatic sensitive devices only if it is unavoidable
(for example, during maintenance work). Hold modules without touching the pins of
components or printed conductors. In this way, the discharged energy cannot
affect the sensitive devices.
If you have to carry out measurements on a module, you must discharge your
body before you start the measurement by touching grounded metallic parts. Use
grounded measuring devices only.

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

E-4 A5E00105505-03
List of Abbreviations F
Abbreviation Explanation
AC Alternating current
ADC Analog-to digital converter
AI Analog input
AO Analog output
PLC Programmable logic controller
COMP Compensating terminal
CP Communications processor
CPU Central processing unit of a PLC
DAC Digital-to-analog converter
DB Data block
DC Direct current
DI Digital input
DO Digital output
ESD Electrostatic sensitive devices
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EPROM Erasable programmable read-only memory
EWS Apply substitute value
FB Function block
FC Function
FEPROM Flash erasable programmable read only memory
ES Encoder supply
I+ Measuring lead for current input
IC Constant-current lead
KV Shunt comparison
L+ Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
LWH Hold last valid value
FOC Fiber-optic cable
M Ground terminal
M+ Measuring lead (positive)
M– Measuring lead (negative)
MANA Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
MPI Multipoint interface

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

A5E00105505-03 F-1
OB Organization block
OP Operator panel
OS Operator system
PIQ Process-image output table
PII Process-image input table
Programming Programming device
device
PS Power supply
QI Analog output current
QV Analog output voltage
RAM Random access memory
RL Load impedance
S+ Detector lead (positive)
S– Detector lead (negative)
SF ”Group error” error LED
SFB System function block
SFC System function
SM Signal module
PLC Programmable logic control
SSI Synchronous serial interface
TD Text display
U+ Measuring lead for voltage input
UCM Common mode voltage
Uiso Potential difference between MANA and local ground
Sign Sign

Programmable Logic Controllers S7-300 Module Data

F-2 A5E00105505-03
 CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical ___________________
Preface

Guide to the S7-300

specifications ___________________
documentation 1
Operator controls and
___________________
indicators 2
SIMATIC
___________________
Communication 3
S7-300
CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical ___________________
PROFINET 4
specifications
___________________
Memory concept 5
Manual
___________________
Cycle and response times 6
General technical
___________________
specifications 7
Technical specifications of
___________________
CPU 31xC 8
Technical specifications of
___________________
CPU 31x 9

This manual is part of the documentation package

with the order number: 6ES7398-8FA10-8BA0

03/2011
A5E00105475-12
Legal information
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation for the specific task, in particular its warning notices and
safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of
identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be adhered to. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

(A) .

Siemens AG A5E00105475-12 Copyright © Siemens AG 2011.

Industry Sector Ⓟ 04/2011 Technical data subject to change
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Purpose of this manual

This manual contains essential information about the following:
● Installation
● Communication
● Memory concept
● Cycle and response times
● Technical specifications of the CPUs.

Basic knowledge required

● In order to understand this manual, you require a general knowledge of automation
engineering.
● You require knowledge of STEP 7 basic software.

Scope
The name CPU 31xC summarizes all compact CPUs, as table below shows:

CPU Convention: Order number As of firmware version

CPU designations:
CPU 312C CPU 31xC 6ES7312-5BF04-0AB0 V3.3
CPU 313C 6ES7313-5BG04-0AB0 V3.3
CPU 313C-2 PtP 6ES7313-6BG04-0AB0 V3.3
CPU 313C-2 DP 6ES7313-6CG04-0AB0 V3.3
CPU 314C-2 PtP 6ES7314-6BH04-0AB0 V3.3
CPU 314C-2 DP 6ES7314-6CH04-0AB0 V3.3
CPU 314C-2 PN/DP 6ES7314-6EH04-0AB0 V3.3

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 3
Preface

The name CPU 31x summarizes all standard CPUs, as table below shows:

CPU Convention: Order number As of firmware version

CPU designations:
CPU 312 CPU 31x 6ES7312-1AE14-0AB0 V3.3
CPU 314 6ES7314-1AG14-0AB0 V3.3
CPU 315-2 DP 6ES7315-2AH14-0AB0 V3.3
CPU 315-2 PN/DP 6ES7315-2EH14-0AB0 V3.2
CPU 317-2 DP 6ES7317-2AK14-0AB0 V3.3
CPU 317-2 PN/DP 6ES7317-2EK14-0AB0 V3.2
CPU 319-3 PN/DP 6ES7318-3EL01-0AB0 V3.2

All CPUs with PROFINET properties are grouped under the designation CPU 31x PN/DP, as
the following table shows:

CPU Convention: Order number As of firmware version

CPU designations:
CPU 314C-2 PN/DP CPU 31x PN/DP 6ES7314-6EH04-0AB0 V3.3
CPU 315-2 PN/DP 6ES7315-2EH14-0AB0 V3.2
CPU 317-2 PN/DP 6ES7317-2EK14-0AB0 V3.2
CPU 319-3 PN/DP 6ES7318-3EL01-0AB0 V3.2

Note
A description of the special features of the failsafe CPUs of the S7 product range is available
in the product information at the following Internet address
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/11669702/133300).

Note
We reserve the right to include a product Information containing the latest information on
new modules or modules of a more recent version.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

4 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Preface

Changes in comparison to the previous version

The following table contains changes from the previous versions of the following
documentation from the S7-300 documentation package:
● Technical specifications manual, version 06/2010
● Operating instructions for installation, version 06/2010
The CPU- 314C-2 PN/DP has been added in delivery stage V3.3. It has the same
functionalities as the CPU 314C-2 DP and also has PROFINET functionalities such as those
of the CPU 315-2 PN/DP.
In delivery stage V3.3, the functionality and performance of all C-CPUs and the CPU 317-2
DP were improved compared to their predecessor versions.
Additional information was taken from the chapter "Information on converting to a CPU 31xC
or CPU 31x". If you required more information, however, please refer to the FAQs on the
Internet.

CPU 312 312C 313C 313C-2 313C-2 314 314C-2 314C-2 315-2 317-2
DP PtP DP PtP DP DP
Encryption of blocks X X X X X X X X X X
using S7-Block
Privacy
Integration of a X1, 2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X1, 2 X2 X2 X1, 2 X2
maintenance LED
Configurable - - - - - - - - X X
increase of control
and monitoring
performance
Improved operational - - X - - - X X - -
limits for PT100
Analog input
Data set routing - - - X - - X - X1 X
Configurable process X 1 X X X X X 1 X X X 1 X
image
Expansion of the X1 X X X X X1 X X X1 X
block number range
Number of displayed X1 X X X X X1 X X X1 X
diagnostic buffer
entries can be
configured in CPU
RUN mode
Reading out the X1 X X X X X1 X X X1 X
service data
Extension of SFC 12 - - - X - - X - X1 X
with 2 new modes to
trigger the OB 86
during
enabling/disabling
Copying of 512 bytes X 1 X X X X X1 X X X1 X
with SFC 81

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 5
Preface

CPU 312 312C 313C 313C-2 313C-2 314 314C-2 314C-2 315-2 317-2
DP PtP DP PtP DP DP
Increase
Main memory X1 X X X X X1 X X X1 X
Performance through X 1 X X X X X 1 X X X 1 X
shorter command
processing times
Status information X1 X X X X X1 X X X1 X
that can be
monitored by the
status block, in
STEP 7 V5.5 or
higher
Number of blocks X1 X X X X X1 X X X1 X
that can be
monitored by the
status block
(from 1 to 2)
Number of X1 X X X X X1 X X X1 X
breakpoints from 2 to
4
Local data stack X1 X X X X X1 X X X1 X
Number of block- X1 X X X X X1 X X X1 X
related messages
(Alarm_S) is
uniformly limited to
300
Number of the bit X1 X - - - - - - - -
memories, timers
and counters
Standardization
DB sizes: Max. X1, 3 X X X X X1 X X X1 X1
64 KB
Watchdog interrupts: X1 X X X X X1 X X X1 X1
OB 32 to OB 35
Global data X1 X X X X X1 X X X1 X1
communication of 8
GD circles
System function blocks for integrated technology functions:
SFB 41 to 43 - - X1 X1 X1 - X1 X1 - -
SFB 44 and 46 - - - - - - X1 X1 - -
SFB 47 to 49 - X 1 X 1 X 1 X 1 - X 1 X 1 - -
SFB 60 to 62 - - - - X 1 - - X 1 - -
SFB 63 to 65 - - - - - - - X1 - -
1 This function was already made available to the CPU in an earlier version
2 Available, but without function
3 Max. DB size 32 KB

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

6 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Preface

Standards and certifications

For information about standards and approvals, see the section "General technical
specifications (Page 201)".

Recycling and disposal

Because they have ecologically compatible components, the devices described in this
manual can be recycled. For environment-friendly recycling and disposal of your old
equipment, contact a certified disposal facility for electronic scrap.

Service & Support on the Internet

In addition to our documentation, we offer a comprehensive knowledge base online on the
Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
There you will find:
● Our newsletter containing up-to-date information on your products
● The latest documents in the Siemens Service & Support
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support) search engine.
● A forum for global information exchange by users and specialists.
● Your local representative for automation and drives in our contact database
● Information about on-site services, repairs, spare parts, and lots more.
● Applications and tools for the optimized use of the SIMATIC S7. For example, Siemens
also publishes DP and PN performance measurements on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/pd).

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 7
Preface

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

8 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
Table of contents

Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Guide to the S7-300 documentation ........................................................................................................ 13
1.1 Documentation classification .......................................................................................................13
1.2 Guide to the S7-300 documentation ............................................................................................18
2 Operator controls and indicators.............................................................................................................. 21
2.1 Operator controls and indicators of the compact CPUs (CPU 31xC) ..........................................21
2.1.1 Operator controls and indicators: CPU 312C ..............................................................................21
2.1.2 Operator controls and indicators: CPU 313C ..............................................................................24
2.1.3 Operator controls and indicators: CPU 313C-2 PtP ....................................................................27
2.1.4 Operator controls and indicators: CPU 313C-2 DP .....................................................................30
2.1.5 Operator controls and indicators: CPU 314C-2 PtP ....................................................................33
2.1.6 Operator controls and indicators: CPU 314C-2 DP .....................................................................37
2.1.7 Operator controls and indicators: CPU 314C-2 PN/DP ...............................................................41
2.2 Operator controls and indicators of the standard CPUs (CPU 31x) ............................................45
2.2.1 Operator controls and indicators: CPU 312 and CPU 314 ..........................................................45
2.2.2 Operator controls and indicators: CPU 315-2 DP and CPU 317-2 DP........................................47
2.2.3 Operator controls and indicators: CPU 315-2 PN/DP and CPU 317-2 PN/DP............................50
2.2.4 Operator controls and indicators: CPU 319-3 PN/DP..................................................................52
3 Communication........................................................................................................................................ 57
3.1 Interfaces .....................................................................................................................................57
3.1.1 Multi-Point Interface (MPI) ...........................................................................................................57
3.1.2 PROFIBUS DP.............................................................................................................................58
3.1.3 PROFINET ...................................................................................................................................59
3.1.3.1 Configuring the port properties ....................................................................................................63
3.1.4 Point-to-point (PtP) ......................................................................................................................64
3.2 Communication services..............................................................................................................65
3.2.1 Overview of communication services ..........................................................................................65
3.2.2 PG communication.......................................................................................................................67
3.2.3 OP communication.......................................................................................................................68
3.2.4 S7 basic communication ..............................................................................................................68
3.2.5 S7 communication .......................................................................................................................69
3.2.6 Global data communication (MPI only)........................................................................................70
3.2.7 Routing.........................................................................................................................................71
3.2.8 Data record routing ......................................................................................................................75
3.2.9 Clock synchronization ..................................................................................................................77
3.2.10 Point-to-point connection .............................................................................................................79
3.2.11 Data consistency..........................................................................................................................79
3.3 SNMP communication service .....................................................................................................80
3.4 Open communication via Industrial Ethernet ...............................................................................81

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 9
Table of contents

3.5 S7 connections............................................................................................................................ 84
3.5.1 S7 connection as communication path ....................................................................................... 84
3.5.2 Allocation of S7 connections ....................................................................................................... 85
3.5.3 Distribution and availability of S7 connection resources............................................................. 87
3.5.4 Connection resources for routing................................................................................................ 89
3.6 DPV1 ........................................................................................................................................... 91
3.7 Web server .................................................................................................................................. 93
3.7.1 Language settings....................................................................................................................... 95
3.7.2 Settings in HW Config, "Web" tab ............................................................................................... 97
3.7.3 Updating and storing information .............................................................................................. 100
3.7.4 Web pages ................................................................................................................................ 101
3.7.4.1 Start page with general CPU information.................................................................................. 101
3.7.4.2 Identification .............................................................................................................................. 103
3.7.4.3 Diagnostic buffer ....................................................................................................................... 104
3.7.4.4 Module information.................................................................................................................... 106
3.7.4.5 Messages .................................................................................................................................. 113
3.7.4.6 Communication ......................................................................................................................... 114
3.7.4.7 Topology.................................................................................................................................... 120
3.7.4.8 Status of the variables............................................................................................................... 127
3.7.4.9 Variable tables .......................................................................................................................... 128
3.7.4.10 User pages ................................................................................................................................ 131
4 PROFINET ............................................................................................................................................ 135
4.1 Communication via PROFINET ................................................................................................ 135
4.1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 135
4.1.2 PROFINET IO System .............................................................................................................. 138
4.1.3 Blocks for PROFINET IO .......................................................................................................... 140
4.2 Isochronous real-time communication ...................................................................................... 143
4.3 Prioritized startup ...................................................................................................................... 144
4.4 Device replacement without removable medium/programming device .................................... 145
4.5 IO devices changing at runtime ................................................................................................ 145
4.6 Isochronous mode..................................................................................................................... 146
4.7 I-Device ..................................................................................................................................... 146
4.8 Shared Device........................................................................................................................... 147
4.9 Media redundancy..................................................................................................................... 148
5 Memory concept .................................................................................................................................... 149
5.1 Memory areas and retentivity.................................................................................................... 149
5.1.1 CPU memory areas................................................................................................................... 149
5.1.2 Retentivity of load memory, system memory, and main memory ............................................. 150
5.1.3 Retentivity of memory objects ................................................................................................... 151
5.1.4 Address areas of the system memory ...................................................................................... 153
5.1.5 Properties of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card ....................................................................... 158

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

10 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Table of contents

5.2 Memory functions.......................................................................................................................159

5.2.1 General: Memory functions........................................................................................................159
5.2.2 Download of the user program to the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the CPU .....................160
5.2.3 Handling with blocks ..................................................................................................................161
5.2.3.1 Encryption of blocks...................................................................................................................161
5.2.3.2 Reloading or transferring blocks ................................................................................................162
5.2.3.3 Uploading blocks........................................................................................................................163
5.2.3.4 Deleting blocks...........................................................................................................................163
5.2.3.5 Compressing blocks...................................................................................................................163
5.2.3.6 Promming (RAM to ROM)..........................................................................................................163
5.2.4 Memory reset and restart...........................................................................................................164
5.2.5 Recipes ......................................................................................................................................165
5.2.6 Measured value log files ............................................................................................................167
5.2.7 Backup of project data to SIMATIC Micro Memory Card...........................................................169
6 Cycle and response times...................................................................................................................... 171
6.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................171
6.2 Cycle time ..................................................................................................................................172
6.2.1 Overview: Cycle time .................................................................................................................172
6.2.2 Calculating the cycle time ..........................................................................................................174
6.2.3 Different cycle times...................................................................................................................178
6.2.4 Communication load ..................................................................................................................180
6.2.5 Cycle time extension as a result of test and commissioning functions......................................182
6.2.6 Cycle extension through Component Based Automation (CBA) ...............................................183
6.3 Response time ...........................................................................................................................187
6.3.1 Overview: Response time ..........................................................................................................187
6.3.2 Shortest response time ..............................................................................................................189
6.3.3 Longest response time...............................................................................................................190
6.3.4 Reducing the response time using I/O accesses.......................................................................191
6.4 Calculating method for calculating the cycle/response time......................................................192
6.5 Sample calculations for the cycle and response times..............................................................193
6.6 Interrupt response time ..............................................................................................................196
6.6.1 Overview: Interrupt response time .............................................................................................196
6.6.2 Reproducibility of time-delay and watchdog interrupts ..............................................................198
6.7 Example of interrupt response time calculation .........................................................................199
7 General technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 201
7.1 Standards and certifications.......................................................................................................201
7.2 Electromagnetic compatibility ....................................................................................................206
7.3 Transportation and storage conditions for modules...................................................................208
7.4 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions for S7-300 operation..................................209
7.5 Specification of dielectric tests, protection class, degree of protection, and rated voltage
of S7-300....................................................................................................................................211
7.6 Rated voltages of S7-300 ..........................................................................................................211

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 11
Table of contents

8 Technical specifications of CPU 31xC ................................................................................................... 213

8.1 General technical specifications ............................................................................................... 213
8.1.1 Dimensions of CPU 31xC ......................................................................................................... 213
8.1.2 Technical specifications of the Micro Memory Card ................................................................. 214
8.2 CPU 312C ................................................................................................................................. 215
8.3 CPU 313C ................................................................................................................................. 224
8.4 CPU 313C-2 PtP and CPU 313C-2 DP .................................................................................... 233
8.5 CPU 314C-2 PtP and CPU 314C-2 DP .................................................................................... 245
8.6 CPU 314C-2 PN/DP.................................................................................................................. 257
8.7 Technical specifications of the onboard I/O .............................................................................. 272
8.7.1 Arrangement and usage of integrated inputs/outputs............................................................... 272
8.7.2 Analog I/O devices .................................................................................................................... 278
8.7.3 Parameterization ....................................................................................................................... 283
8.7.4 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................... 289
8.7.5 Diagnostics................................................................................................................................ 290
8.7.6 Digital inputs.............................................................................................................................. 290
8.7.7 Digital outputs ........................................................................................................................... 292
8.7.8 Analog inputs ............................................................................................................................ 294
8.7.9 Analog outputs .......................................................................................................................... 297
9 Technical specifications of CPU 31x...................................................................................................... 301
9.1 General technical specifications ............................................................................................... 301
9.1.1 Dimensions of CPU 31x ............................................................................................................ 301
9.1.2 Technical specifications of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.................................................. 302
9.2 CPU 312.................................................................................................................................... 303
9.3 CPU 314.................................................................................................................................... 311
9.4 CPU 315-2 DP .......................................................................................................................... 319
9.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP .................................................................................................................... 329
9.6 CPU 317-2 DP .......................................................................................................................... 344
9.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP .................................................................................................................... 355
9.8 CPU 319-3 PN/DP .................................................................................................................... 370
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 387
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 415

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

12 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
Guide to the S7-300 documentation 1
1.1 Documentation classification

Documentation classification
The documentation listed below is part of the S7-300 documentation package.
You can also find this on the Internet and the corresponding entry ID.

Name of the documentation Description

Manual Description of:
CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical  Operator controls and indicators
specifications
 Communication
Entry ID: 12996906
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view  Memory concept
/en/12996906)  Cycle and response times
 Technical specifications
Operating Instructions Description of:
CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Installation  Configuring
Entry ID: 13008499  Installing
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view
/en/13008499)  Wiring
 Addressing
 Commissioning
 Maintenance and the test functions
 Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Operating Instructions Description of the specific technological functions:
CPU 31xC: Technological functions  Positioning
incl. CD  Counting
Entry ID: 12429336  Point-to-point connection
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view
/en/12429336)  Rules
The CD contains examples of the technological
functions.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 13
Guide to the S7-300 documentation
1.1 Documentation classification

Name of the documentation Description

Manual Descriptions and technical specifications of the
S7-300 Automation System: Module data following modules:
Entry ID: 8859629  Signal modules
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view  Power supplies
/en/8859629)
 Interface modules
List Manual  List of the instruction set of the CPUs and
Instruction List of the S7-300 CPUs and ET- 200 their execution times.
CPUs  List of the executable blocks
Entry ID: 31977679 (OBs/SFCs/SFBs) and their execution times.
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view
/en/31977679)

Additional information
You also require information from the following descriptions:

Name of the documentation Description

Getting Started Description of examples showing the various
S7-300 Automation System: Getting Started CPU commissioning phases leading to a functional
31x: Commissioning application.
Entry ID: 15390497
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view
/en/15390497)
Getting Started Description of examples showing the various
S7-300 Automation System: Getting Started CPU commissioning phases leading to a functional
31xC: Commissioning application.
Entry ID: 48077635
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view
/en/48077635)
Getting Started Description of examples showing the various
First steps in commissioning CPU 31xC: commissioning phases leading to a functional
Positioning with analog output application.
Entry ID: 48070939
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view
/en/48070939)
Getting Started Description of examples showing the various
First steps in commissioning CPU 31xC: commissioning phases leading to a functional
Positioning with digital output application.
Entry ID: 48077520
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view
/en/48077520)

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

14 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Guide to the S7-300 documentation
1.1 Documentation classification

Name of the documentation Description

Getting Started Description of examples showing the various
First steps in commissioning CPU 31xC: commissioning phases leading to a functional
Counting application.
Entry ID: 48064324
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view
/en/48064324)
Getting Started Description of examples showing the various
First steps in commissioning CPU 31xC: Point-to- commissioning phases leading to a functional
point connection application.
Entry ID: 48064280
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view
/en/48064280)
Getting Started Description of examples showing the various
First steps in commissioning CPU 31xC: Rules commissioning phases leading to a functional
application.
Entry ID: 48077500
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view
/en/48077500)
Getting Started Description of examples showing the various
CPU315-2 PN/DP, 317-2 PN/DP, 319-3 PN/DP: commissioning phases leading to a functional
Configuring the PROFINET interface application.
Entry ID: 48080216
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view
/en/48080216)
Getting Started Description of examples showing the various
CPU 317-2 PN/DP: Configuring an ET 200S as commissioning phases leading to a functional
PROFINET IO device application.
Entry ID: 19290251
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view
/en/19290251)
Reference Manual Overview of objects included in the operating
System and standard functions for S7-300/400, systems for S7-300 and S7-400 CPUs:
volume 1/2  OBs
Entry ID: 1214574  SFCs
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view
/en/1214574)  SFBs
 IEC functions
 Diagnostics data
 System status list (SSL)
 Events
This manual is part of the STEP 7 reference
information.
You can also find the description in the STEP 7
Online Help.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 15
Guide to the S7-300 documentation
1.1 Documentation classification

Name of the documentation Description

Manual This manual provides a complete overview of
Programming with STEP 7 programming with the STEP 7 Standard
Package.
Entry ID: 18652056
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view This manual is part of the STEP 7 Standard
/en/18652056) Package basic information. You can also find a
description in the STEP 7 Online Help.
System Manual Basic description of PROFINET:
PROFINET System Description  Network components
Entry ID: 19292127  Data exchange and communication
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view
/en/19292127)  PROFINET IO
 Component Based Automation
 Application example of PROFINET IO and
Component Based Automation
Programming manual Guideline for the migration from PROFIBUS DP
From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO to PROFINET I/O.
Entry ID: 19289930
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view
/en/19289930)
Manual Description of:
SIMATIC NET: Twisted Pair and Fiber-Optic  Industrial Ethernet networks
Networks
 Network configuration
Entry ID: 8763736
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view  Components
/en/8763736)  Guidelines for setting up networked
automation systems in buildings, etc.
Configuring Manual Description of the SIMATIC iMap configuration
Configure SIMATIC iMap plants software
Entry ID: 22762190
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view
/en/22762190)
Configuring Manual Descriptions and instructions for creating
SIMATIC iMap STEP 7 AddOn, create PROFINET components with STEP 7 and for
PROFINET components using SIMATIC devices in Component Based
Automation
Entry ID: 22762278
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view
/en/22762278)

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

16 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Guide to the S7-300 documentation
1.1 Documentation classification

Name of the documentation Description

Function Manual Description of the system property "Isochronous
Isochronous mode mode"
Entry ID: 15218045
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view
/en/15218045)
System Manual Description of:
Communication with SIMATIC  Basics
Entry ID: 1254686  Services
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view
/en/1254686)  Networks
 Communication functions
 Connecting PGs/OPs
 Engineering and configuring in STEP 7

Service & support on the Internet

Information on the following topics can be found on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/service):
● Contacts for SIMATIC (http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner)
● Contacts for SIMATIC NET (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net)
● Training (http://www.sitrain.com)

See also
Documentation package S7-300
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10805159/133300)

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 17
Guide to the S7-300 documentation
1.2 Guide to the S7-300 documentation

1.2 Guide to the S7-300 documentation

Overview
The following tables contain a guide through the S7-300 documentation.

Ambient influence on the automation system

Information about ... is available in the manual ... In Section ...

What provisions do I have to make for automation  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Configuring – Component
system installation space? Installation dimensions
Mounting – Installing the
mounting rail
How do environmental conditions influence the  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Appendix
automation system? Installation

Isolation

Information about ... is available in the manual ... In Section ...

Which modules can I use if electrical isolation is  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Configuring – Electrical
required between sensors/actuators? Installation assembly, protective measures
and grounding
 Module data
Under what conditions do I have to isolate the  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Configuring – Electrical
modules electrically? Installation assembly, protective measures
How do I wire that? and grounding
Wiring
Under which conditions do I have to isolate stations  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Configuring – Configuring
electrically? Installation subnets
How do I wire that?

Communication between sensors/actuators and the PLC

Information about ... is available in the manual ... In Section ...

Which module is suitable for my sensor/actuator?  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications
Technical specifications
 For your signal module
How many sensors/actuators can I connect to the  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications
module? Technical specifications
 For your signal module
How do I connect my sensors/actuators to the  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Wiring – Wiring the front
automation system, using the front connector? Installation connector

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

18 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Guide to the S7-300 documentation
1.2 Guide to the S7-300 documentation

Information about ... is available in the manual ... In Section ...

When do I need expansion modules (EM) and how  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Configuring – Distribution of
do I connect them? Installation modules across multiple racks

How do I mount modules on racks / mounting rails?  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Assembly – Installing modules on
Installation the mounting rail

The use of local and distributed IOs

Information about ... is available in the manual ... In Section ...

Which range of modules do I want to use?  Module data –
(for centralized IOs/
expansion devices)
 of the respective peripheral
(for distributed IOs/
PROFIBUS DP)

Configuration consisting of the central controller and expansion units

Information about ... is available in the manual ... In Section ...

Which rack / mounting rail is most suitable for my  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Configuring
application? Installation
Which interface modules (IM) do I need to connect  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Configuring – Distribution of
the expansion units to the central controller? Installation modules across multiple racks

What is the right power supply (PS) for my  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Configuring
application? Installation

CPU performance

Information about ... is available in the manual ... In Section ...

Which memory concept is best suited to my  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Memory concept
application? Technical specifications
How do I insert and remove Micro Memory Cards?  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Commissioning – Commissioning
Installation modules – Removing / inserting a
Micro Memory Card (MMC)
Which CPU meets my demands on performance?  S7-300 instruction list: –
CPU 31xC and CPU 31x
Length of the CPU response / execution times  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: –
Technical specifications
Which technological functions are implemented?  Technological functions –

How can I use these technological functions?  Technological functions –

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 19
Guide to the S7-300 documentation
1.2 Guide to the S7-300 documentation

Communication

Information about ... is available in the manual ... In Section ...

Which principles do I have to take into account?  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Communication
Technical specifications
 Communication with SIMATIC
 PROFINET System Description
Options and resources of the CPU  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications
Technical specifications
How to use communication processors (CPs) to  CP Manual –
optimize communication
Which type of communication network is best  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Configuring – Configuring
suited to my application? Installation subnets

How do I network the various components?  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Configuring – Configuring
Installation subnets

What to take into account when configuring  SIMATC NET, twisted-pair and Network configuration
PROFINET networks fiber-optic networks
(6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0)

 PROFINET System Description Installation and commissioning

Software

Information about ... is available in the manual ... In Section ...

Software requirements of my S7-300 system  CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications
Technical specifications

Supplementary features

Information about ... is available in ...

How can I implement operation and monitoring The relevant manual:
functions?
 For text-based displays
(Human Machine Interface)
 For Operator Panels
 For WinCC
How to integrate process control modules  Respective PCS7 manual
What options are offered by redundant and fail-  S7-400H – Fault-Tolerant Systems
safe systems?
 Failsafe systems
Information to be observed when migrating from  From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO
PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

20 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
Operator controls and indicators
2.2 Operator controls and indicators of the standard CPUs (CPU 31x)

2.2.3 Operator controls and indicators: CPU 315-2 PN/DP and CPU 317-2 PN/DP

Operator controls and indicators of CPU 315-2 PN/DP and CPU 317-2 PN/DP

1 2

6)

%)

6,(0(16
6,0$7,&
%)

0HPRU\
0LFUR

&DUG
0$,17
'&9
)5&(
581
386+
3
6723

581
6723
05(6
9
4
8 ; 35 ;;;
; 35 ;;;

3
5
7
3
; 31 /$1

6
; 03,'3
'&9

/
;
0

Number Description
① Status and error indicators
② Slot for the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card incl. the ejector
③ Mode selector
④ MAC address and 2D bar code
⑤ 1. interface X1 (MPI/DP)
⑥ Power supply connection
⑦ 2. Interface X2 (PN), with dual-port switch
⑧ PROFINET Port 2
The Port 2 status is signaled using a dual-color LED (green/yellow):
 LED lit green: LINK to a partner is active
 LED changes to yellow: active data traffic (RX/TX)
R: Ring port for setting up a ring topology with media redundancy
⑨ PROFINET Port 1
The Port 1 status is signaled using a dual-color LED (green/yellow):
 LED lit green: LINK to a partner is active
 LED changes to yellow: active data traffic (RX/TX)
R: Ring port for setting up a ring topology with media redundancy

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

50 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Operator controls and indicators
2.2 Operator controls and indicators of the standard CPUs (CPU 31x)

Status and error indicators

LED designation Color Meaning

SF red Hardware fault or software error
BF1 red Bus error at the first interface (X1)
BF2 red Bus error at the second interface (X2)
LINK/RX/TX green Connection is active at the relevant port
yellow Receiving/transmitting data at the relevant port
MAINT yellow Maintenance demanded
DC5V green 5 V power supply for the CPU and S7-300 bus
FRCE yellow LED is lit: Active force job
LED flashes at 2 Hz: Node flash test function
RUN green CPU in RUN
The LED flashes during start-up at a rate of 2 Hz, and in stop mode at
0.5 Hz
STOP yellow CPU in STOP or HOLD, or STARTUP mode
The LED flashes at a rate of 0.5 Hz when a memory reset is
requested, and at 2 Hz during the reset.

Slot for the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card

A SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is used as memory module. You can use an MMC as a load
memory and as a portable data carrier.

Note
Since these CPUs do not have an integrated load memory, they require a SIMATIC Micro
Memory Card for operation.

Mode selector
You can use the mode selector switch to set the current operating mode of the CPU.

Table 2- 17 Mode selector settings

Setting Meaning Explanations

RUN RUN mode The CPU executes the user program.
STOP STOP mode The CPU does not execute a user program.
MRES Memory reset Mode selector setting with pushbutton function for CPU memory
reset. A CPU memory reset by means of the mode selector
requires a specific sequence of operation.

Power supply connection

All CPUs are equipped with a 2-pin socket for power supply connection. For delivery, the
connector with screw terminals is plugged into this inlet at the factory.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 51
Communication 3
3.1 Interfaces

3.1.1 Multi-Point Interface (MPI)

Availability
All the CPUs described here are equipped with an MPI interface
A CPU equipped with an MPI/DP interface is configured and supplied as
MPI interface.

Properties
The MPI (Multi-Point Interface) represents the CPU interface for PG/OP connections, or for
communication on an MPI subnet.
The default baud rate of all CPUs is 187.5 kbps. You can also set 19.2 kbps for
communication with an S7-200. Baud rates up to max. 12 Mbps are possible with the
CPU 314C-2 PN/DP, CPU 315-2 PN/DP, CPU 317-2 and with the CPU 319-3 PN/DP.
The CPU automatically broadcasts its bus configuration via the MPI interface (the
transmission rate, for example). A PG, for example, can thus receive the correct parameters
and automatically connect to a MPI subnet.

Devices capable of MPI communication

● PG/PC
● OP/TP
● S7-300 / S7-400 with MPI interface
● S7-200 (only at 19.2 kbps)

NOTICE

You may only connect PGs to an MPI subnet which is in RUN.

Do not connect other stations (for example, OP, TP) to the MPI subnet while the system
is running. Otherwise, transferred data might be corrupted as a result of interference, or
global data packages may be lost.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 57
Communication
3.1 Interfaces

Clock synchronization
The CPU's MPI interface supports clock synchronization. Detailed information is available in
theManual CPU 31x and CPU 31x, Technical specifications, section Clock synchronization.

3.1.2 PROFIBUS DP

Availability
CPUs with the "DP" have at least one DP interface.
The CPU 314C-2 PN/DP, CPU 315-2 PN/DP and the CPU 317-2 PN/DP feature one MPI/DP
interface. The 317-2 DP and 319-3 PN/DP CPUs feature an MPI/DP interface plus an
additional DP interface. The factory setting of the CPU's MPI/DP interface is MPI mode. You
need to set DP mode in STEP 7 if you want to use the DP interface.

Operating modes for CPUs with two DP interfaces

Table 3- 1 Operating modes for CPUs with two DP interfaces

MPI/DP interface PROFIBUS DP interface

 MPI  not configured
 DP master  DP master
 DP slave 1  DP slave 1

1 simultaneous operation of the DP slave on both interfaces is excluded

Properties
The PROFIBUS DP interface is mainly used to connect distributed I/O. PROFIBUS DP
allows you to create large subnets, for example.
The PROFIBUS DP interface can be configured for operation in master or slave mode, and
supports transmission rates up to 12 Mbps
The CPU broadcasts its bus parameters (transmission rate, for example) via the PROFIBUS
DP interface when master mode is set. This functionality automatically provides the correct
parameters for online operation of a programming device, for example. In your configuration
you can specify to disable bus parameter broadcasting.

Note
(for DP interface in slave mode only)
When you disable the "Test, Commissioning, Routing" check box in the DP interface
properties dialog box in STEP 7, the transmission rate settings of the master automatically
override corresponding user-specific settings. This disables the routing function at this
interface.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

58 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Communication
3.1 Interfaces

Devices capable of PROFIBUS DP communication

● PG/PC
● OP/TP
● DP slaves
● DP master
● Actuators/Sensors
● S7-300/S7-400 with PROFIBUS DP interface

Clock synchronization
Clock synchronization is possible via the CPU's PROFIBUS DP interface. Detailed
information is available in the manual CPU 31x and CPU 31x Manual, Technical
specifications, Clock synchronization section.

Reference
Additional information on the PROFIBUS can be found on the Internet
(http://www.profibus.com).

3.1.3 PROFINET
CPUs with name suffix "PN" are equipped with a PROFINET interface.
The PROFINET interface on CPU31x PN/DP V3.1 or higher is equipped with an integrated
dual-port switch.
Special features of PROFINET devices with integrated switch:
● System configuration in line topology is possible
● You can set up a ring topology using Ports 1 and 2 which are identified as ring ports
(P1 R, P2 R)
● Connecting a programming device or an HMI device without additional switch

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 59
Communication
3.1 Interfaces

Compatibility with CPUs < V3.1

You can continue to use your existing CPU configuration even after replacing a CPU < V3.1
with a dual-port CPU.
The following rules apply:
● The Ethernet cable to the RJ45 connector must be inserted in Port 1 of the new CPU.
Port 1 handles the port configuration of the PROFINET interface within the CPU
configuration. Assuming you set up a fixed transmission mode and disabled
Autonegotiation in the existing CPU configuration, then Port 1 continues to be used as
terminal device port instead of being operated as switch port. The CPU interface
continues to function, but as a switch, i.e. the forwarding of the Ethernet frames from one
port to the other is ensured
● Port 2 starts up with default parameters
Special features for migration with unchanged CPU configuration:
● Port 2 cannot be analyzed because it starts up with default parameters without being
assigned a separate diagnostics address

Note
To enable diagnostics and reconfiguration of Port 2 as well (e.g. configuration of
interrelations, or of the transmission medium/duplex mode), you must replace the old with
the new CPU in HW Config.

Connecting to Industrial Ethernet

You can use the integrated PROFINET interface of the CPU to establish a connection to
Industrial Ethernet.
The integrated PROFINET interface of the CPU can be configured via an MPI or the
PROFINET interface.

Devices which can be connected via PROFINET (PN)

● PROFINET IO Controller
● PROFINET IO Devices (e.g. IM 151-3 PN interface module in an ET 200S)
● PROFINET CBA components
● S7-300/S7-400 with PROFINET interface (e.g. CPU 317-2 PN/DP or CP 343-1)
● Active network components (a switch, for example)
● PG/PC with Ethernet card
● IE/PB link

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

60 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Communication
3.1 Interfaces

Properties of the PROFINET interface

Properties
IEEE standard 802.3
Connector design 2 X RJ45
Dual-port switch (CPUs V3.1 or higher)
Transmission rate Max. 100 Mbps
Media Twisted Pair Cat5 (100 BASE-TX)
Media redundancy in accordance with IEC 61158

Note
Networking PROFINET components
The use of switches, rather than hubs, for networking PROFINET components brings about
a substantial improvement in decoupling bus traffic and improves runtime performance
especially under higher bus load. PROFINET CBA with cyclic PROFINET interconnections
requires the use of switches in order to maintain compliance with performance specifications.
Full-duplex mode at 100 Mbit is mandatory for cyclic PROFINET interconnections.
PROFINET IO also requires the use of switches and 100 Mbit full-duplex mode. In the case
of a PROFINET IO in IRT mode, all the PROFINET devices, including the switches, must be
IRT-capable in the synchronization domain.

Addressing the ports

To diagnose the individual ports of a PROFINET interface, these ports must each have a
separate diagnostics address. Addressing takes place in HW-Config.
For additional information, refer to the PROFINET System Description system manual.
To diagnose any detected problems in the user program, diagnostics messages (error and
maintenance information) can be enabled using OB 82 (enable set in HW-Config) and then
evaluated, for example, by means of SFB 54. There are also various data records (read-out
using SFB 52) and system status lists (read-out using SFC 51) provided for more detailed
diagnostics.
Diagnostics is also possible in STEP 7 (e.g. communication diagnostics, network connection,
Ethernet statistics, IP parameters).

Send clock and update time

Controllers and devices can be operated on a PROFINET IO subnet with a uniform send
clock. If a device does not support the faster send clock times of a controller, the send clock
is adapted to the possible send clock of the device. This means, for example, that devices
operating with a send clock of 250 µs as well as 1 ms can operate on a CPU 319-3 PN/DP
(IO controller), which operates with a send clock of 250 µs.
You can parameterize the update time of devices within a relatively wide range. This again
depends on the send clock.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 61
Communication
3.1 Interfaces

Update times for CPU 31x PN/DP

The following update times can be parameterized:

Real-time communication Send clock Update time

For RT: 250 μs ⇒ 250 μs to 128 ms
500 μs ⇒ 500 μs to 256 ms
1 ms ⇒ 1 ms to 512 ms
2 ms ⇒ 2 ms to 512 ms
4 ms ⇒ 4 ms to 512 ms

For IRT with "high flexibility" option: 250 µs ⇒ 250 µs to 128 ms

500 µs ⇒ 500 µs to 256 ms
1 ms ⇒ 1 ms to 512 ms

For IRT with "high performance" option: 250 µs ⇒ 250 µs to 4 ms

500 µs ⇒ 500 µs to 8 ms
1 ms ⇒ 1 ms to 16 ms
2 ms ⇒ 2 ms to 32 ms
4 ms ⇒ 4 ms to 64 ms

The minimum update time is determined by the number of devices used, by the volume of
configured user data, and by the time slice for PROFINET IO communication. STEP 7
automatically makes allowances for these dependencies in your system configuration.

Odd number of send clocks for IRT with "high performance" option:
In addition to the "even-numbered" send clocks (250 µs,
500 µs, 1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms), you can set any multiple of 125 ms as "odd-numbered" send
clock in the range from 250 µs and 4 ms for IRT with "high performance" option: 375 μs, 625
μs ... 3.875 ms
For "odd-numbered" send clocks, the following rule applies to all PROFINET IO devices:
● Update time = send clock
● IRT with "high performance" cannot be supplemented by means of RT devices

NOTICE
On CPUs with an integrated switch, memory resets/firmware updates/power-offs cause an
interruption of communication.
Note that the PROFINET interface and integrated switch are shut down during CPU
memory reset and firmware updates, or after POWER OFF. At a CPU configured for
operation in a line topology, communication is shut down to the following devices.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

62 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Communication
3.1 Interfaces

Reference
● For instructions on how to configure the integrated PROFINET interface, refer to the
S7-300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x Setup operating instructions.
● For more information about PROFINET functionality, refer to the PROFINET System
Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127).
● For detailed information on Ethernet networks, network configuration and network
components, refer to the SIMATIC NET Manual: Twisted-pair and fiber-optic networks, on
the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8763736).
● For detailed information on CBA, refer to the Tutorial Component Based Automation,
Commissioning Systems on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/18403908).
● Additional information about PROFINET can be found on the Internet
(http://www.profibus.com).

3.1.3.1 Configuring the port properties

Configuring the port properties of the PROFINET interface in STEP 7

The PROFINET interfaces in our devices are preset to "automatic setting" (Autonegotiation).
Verify that all devices connected to the PROFINET interface of CPU 31x PN/DP are also set
to the "Autonegotiation" mode. This is the default setting of standard PROFINET/Ethernet
components.
If you connect a device that does not support the "automatic setting" (Autonegotiation) mode
to the PROFINET interface of CPU 31x PN/DP, or select a setting in addition to the
"automatic setting" (Autonegotiation) mode, note the following:
● PROFINET IO and PROFINET CBA require operation at 100 Mbps full-duplex, i.e. if the
PROFINET interface of CPU 31x PN/DP is used simultaneously for communication on
PROFINET IO / CBA and Ethernet, the interface must be set to 100 Mbps full-duplex
mode in addition to the "automatic setting" (Autonegotiation).
● If the PROFINET interface of CPU 31x PN/DP is used only for Ethernet communication,
10 Mbps or 100 Mbps full-duplex mode can be set in addition to the "automatic setting"
(Autonegotiation). Setting half-duplex mode is not permitted in any situation.
Reason: If "Autonegotiation" is set and a switch that is permanently set to "10 Mbps half-
duplex" is connected to the PROFINET interface of CPU 31x PN/DP, the CPU adapts its
settings to the partner device settings, that is, communication is actually handled in "10 Mbps
half-duplex" mode. However, since PROFINET IO and PROFINET CBA require operation
with 100 Mbps full-duplex, this operating mode is not allowed.

Note
For additional information about configuring the ports of IO devices that are to carry out a
prioritized startup, refer to the special notes in the PROFINET System Description.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 63
Communication
3.1 Interfaces

Disabling the port of a PROFINET interface

You can disable a port of the PROFINET interface in HW Config of STEP 7. By default it is
activated.
The CPU cannot be addressed at a disabled port of the PROFINET interface.
Take into account that no communication functions such as programming device/OP
functions, open IE communication, or S7 communication are possible via a deactivated port.

Addressing the ports

To diagnose the individual ports of a PROFINET interface, these ports must each have a
separate diagnostics address. The addressing is done in HW-Config.
For additional information, refer to the PROFINET System Description.
To diagnose any detected problems in the user program, diagnostics messages (error and
maintenance information) can be enabled using OB 82 (enable set in HW-Config) and then
evaluated, for example, by means of SFB 54. There are also various data records (read-out
using SFB 52) and system status lists (read-out using SFC 51) provided for more detailed
diagnostics.
Diagnostics is also possible in STEP 7 (e.g. communication diagnostics, network connection,
Ethernet statistics, IP parameters).

3.1.4 Point-to-point (PtP)

Availability
CPUs with the "PtP" name suffix have at least one PtP interface.

Properties
Using the PtP interface of your CPU, you can connect external devices with serial interface.
You can operate such a system at transmission rates up to 19.2 kbps in full duplex mode
(RS 422), and up to 38.4 kbps in half duplex mode (RS 485).

Baud rate
● Half duplex: 38,4 kbps
● Full duplex: 19,2 kbps

Drivers
PtP communication drivers installed in those CPUs:
● ASCII drivers
● 3964(R) Protocol
● RK 512 (CPU 314C-2 PtP only)

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

64 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Communication
3.2 Communication services

Devices capable of PtP communication

Devices equipped with a serial port, for example, barcode readers, printers, etc.

Reference
CPU 31xC: Technological functions manual

3.2 Communication services

3.2.1 Overview of communication services

Selecting the communication service

You need to decide on a communication service based on the required functionality. Your
choice of communication service determines
● the available functionality
● whether an S7 connection is required or not
● the time of connecting
The user interfaces can vary considerably (SFC, SFB, etc.) and is also determined by the
hardware used (SIMATIC CPU, PC, etc.).

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 65
Communication
3.2 Communication services

Overview of communication services

The table below provides an overview of communication services offered by the CPUs.

Table 3- 2 Communication services of the CPUs

Communication service Functionality Time at which the S7 via MPI via DP via via
connection is established ... PtP PN
PG communication Commissioning, test, From the PG, starting when X X – X
diagnostics the service is being used
OP communication Operator control and From the OP at POWER ON X X – X
monitoring
S7 basic communication Data exchange Programmed to take place via X X – –
blocks (SFC parameters)
S7 communication Data exchange in server Via active peer at POWER ON Only as Only as – X
and client mode: server server
Configuration of connection
required
Global data Cyclic data exchange (e.g. Does not require an S7 X – – –
communication bit memories) connection
Routing of PG functions E.g. testing, diagnostics From the PG, starting when X X – X
(only for CPUs with across network boundaries the service is being used
DP or PROFINET
interface)
Point-to-point connection Data exchange via serial Does not require an S7 – – X –
interface connection
PROFIBUS DP Data exchange between Does not require an S7 – X – –
master and slave connection
PROFINET CBA Data exchange by means Does not require an S7 – – – X
of component-based connection
communication
PROFINET IO Data exchange between IO Does not require an S7 – – – X
controllers and the IO connection
devices
Web server Diagnostics Does not require an S7 – – – X
connection
SNMP Standard protocol for Does not require an S7 – – – X
(Simple Network network diagnostics and connection
Management Protocol) parameterization
Open communication by Data exchange via Does not require an S7 – – – X
means of TCP/IP Industrial Ethernet with connection, is programmed to
TCP/IP protocol (by means take place via loadable FBs
of loadable FBs)
Open communication by Data exchange via Does not require an S7 – – – X
means of ISO-on-TCP Industrial Ethernet with connection, is programmed to
ISO-on-TCP protocol (by take place via loadable FBs
means of loadable FBs)
Open communication by Data exchange via Does not require an S7 – – – X
means of UDP Industrial Ethernet with connection, is programmed to
UDP protocol (by means of take place via loadable FBs
loadable FBs)

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

66 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Communication
3.2 Communication services

Communication service Functionality Time at which the S7 via MPI via DP via via
connection is established ... PtP PN
Data record routing for example, Takes place when the X X – X
parameterization and parameterization tool
diagnostics of field devices accesses the field device
on the PROFIBUS DP by
an engineering system
operated on an MPI or
PROFINET interface (e.g.
PDM)
Broadcast frames Does not require an S7 X X – –
Clock synchronization connection
NTP protocol Does not require an S7 – – – X
connection

See also
Distribution and availability of S7 connection resources (Page 87)
Connection resources for routing (Page 89)

3.2.2 PG communication

Properties
PG communication is used to exchange data between engineering stations (e.g. PG, PC)
and SIMATIC modules with communications capability. This service is possible via MPI,
PROFIBUS, and Industrial Ethernet subnets. Transition between subnets is also supported.
PG communication provides the functions needed to load programs and configuration data,
run tests, and evaluate diagnostic information. These functions are integrated in the
operating system of
SIMATIC S7 modules.
A CPU can maintain several simultaneous online connections to one or multiple PGs.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 67
Communication
3.2 Communication services

3.2.3 OP communication

Properties
Using OP communication, you can exchange data between operator stations (e.g. OP, TP,
WinCC) and SIMATIC modules which have communication functionality. This service is
possible via MPI, PROFIBUS, and Industrial Ethernet subnets.
OP communication provides functions you require for operator control and monitoring. These
functions are integrated in the operating system of SIMATIC S7 modules. A CPU can
maintain several simultaneous connections to one or several OPs.
OP communication can be accelerated enormously by activating "prioritized OCM
communication" in the CPU's properties dialog. The CPU must support this function (consult
the technical specifications of the relevant CPU).

Note
Effects of "prioritized OCM communication"
 Consistency with user program data will be lost. Consistency must be ensured by means
of the user program (refer to the "Data consistency (Page 79)" chapter).
 The cycle time increases.

3.2.4 S7 basic communication

Properties
S7 basic communication is used to exchange data between S7 CPUs and the
communication-capable SIMATIC modules within an S7 station (acknowledged data
exchange). Data is exchanged via non-configured S7 connections. The service is available
via the MPI subnet, or within the station to function modules (FM).
S7 basic communication provides the functions you require for data exchange. These
functions are integrated into the CPU operating system. The user can utilize this service via
the "System function" (SFC) user interface.

Reference
Additional information
● on SFCs can be found in the instruction list.
A detailed description is available in the STEP 7 Online Help or System and Standard
Functions Reference Manual
● on communication is found in the Communication with SIMATIC manual

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

68 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Communication
3.2 Communication services

3.2.5 S7 communication

Properties
A CPU can always operate in server or client mode in S7 communication: We distinguish
between
● connections configured at one end (for PUT/GET only)
● connections configured at both ends (for USEND, URCV, BSEND, BRCV, PUT, GET)
However, the available functionality depends on the CPU. A CP is therefore required in
certain situations.

Table 3- 3 Client and server in S7 communication using connections configured at one end/both
ends

CPU Use in server mode for Use in server mode for Use as client
connections configured at connections configured at
one end both ends
31xC ≥ V1.0.0 Generally possible on Only possible with CP and Only possible with CP and
MPI/DP interface without loadable FBs loadable FBs
programming of user
interface
31x ≥ V2.0.0 Generally possible on Only possible with CP and Only possible with CP and
MPI/DP interface without loadable FBs loadable FBs
programming of user
interface
31x ≥ V2.2.0 Generally possible on  Possible on  Possible on
MPI/DP/PN interface PROFINET interface PROFINET interface
without programming of with loadable FBs with loadable FBs
user interface
or or
 with CP and loadable  with CP and loadable
FBs FBs

The user interface is implemented using standard function blocks (FBs) from the standard
library of STEP 7, under communication blocks.

Reference
For additional information on communication, refer to the Communication with SIMATIC
manual.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 69
Memory concept 5
5.1 Memory areas and retentivity

5.1.1 CPU memory areas

The three memory areas of your CPU

/RDGPHPRU\

6,(0(16
6,0$7,&

0HPRU\
&38 ORFDWHGRQ6,0$7,&

0LFUR

&DUG
0LFUR0HPRU\&DUG

6\VWHPPHPRU\

0DLQPHPRU\

Load memory
The load memory is located on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card. The size of the load
memory corresponds exactly to the size of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card. It is used to
store code blocks, data blocks, and system data (configuration, connections, module
parameters, etc.). Blocks that are identified as not relevant for execution are stored
exclusively in the load memory. You can also store all the configuration data for your project
on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.

Note
You must insert a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card into the CPU to enable loading of user
programs and operation of the CPU.

System memory
The system memory is integrated in the CPU and cannot be expanded.
It contains
● the address areas for bit memories, timers, and counters
● the process images of the inputs and outputs
● local data

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 149
Memory concept
5.1 Memory areas and retentivity

Main memory
The main memory is integrated in the CPU and cannot be extended. It is used to execute the
code and process user program data. Programs only run in the main memory and system
memory.

5.1.2 Retentivity of load memory, system memory, and main memory

Your CPU is equipped with a maintenance-free retentive memory, i.e. no back-up battery is
required for its operation. Due to the retentivity, the content of the retentive memory is
retained even during a POWER OFF and restart (warm restart).

Retentive data in the load memory

Your program in the load memory is always retentive: It is stored on the SIMATIC Micro
Memory Card, where it is protected against power failures or memory resets

Retentive data in the system memory

In your configuration (Properties of CPU, Retentivity tab), specify which part of memory bits,
timers and counters should be kept retentive and which of them are to be initialized with "0"
on restart (warm restart).
The diagnostic buffer, MPI address (and baud rate), and runtime meter data are generally
stored in the retentive memory area on the CPU. Retentivity of the MPI address and baud
rate ensures that your CPU can continue to communicate, even after a power loss, memory
reset, or loss of communication parameters (e.g. due to removal of the SIMATIC Micro
Memory Card or deletion of communication parameters).

Retentive data in the main memory

The contents of retentive DBs are always retentive at restart and POWER ON/OFF.
Retentive data blocks can be uploaded to the main memory in accordance with the
maximum limit allowed by the main memory.
In the case of CPU versions V2.0.12 and higher, non-retentive DBs are also supported.
Non-retentive DBs are initialized from the load memory with their initial values at restart or
POWER ON/OFF. Non-retentive data blocks and code blocks can be loaded in accordance
with the maximum main memory limit.
The size of the retentive main memory (for retentive data blocks) of the CPU can be found in
the chapters "Technical specifications of CPU 31x (Page 301)" and "Technical specifications
of CPU 31xC (Page 213)".

See also
Properties of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (Page 158)

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

150 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Memory concept
5.1 Memory areas and retentivity

5.1.3 Retentivity of memory objects

Retentive behavior of the memory objects

The table below shows the retentive behavior of memory objects during specific operating
state transitions.

Table 5- 1 Retentive behavior of the memory objects

Memory object Operating state transition

POWER OFF / STOP → RUN Memory reset
POWER ON
User program/data (load memory) X X X
 Retentive behavior of DBs on CPUs with firmware X X –
< V2.0.12

 Retentive behavior of DBs on CPUs with firmware Can be set in the properties of the DBs in –
≥ V2.0.12 STEP 7 V5.2 + SP1 or higher.

Bit memories, timers, and counters configured as X X –

retentive objects
Diagnostic buffer, runtime meter X1 X X
MPI address, baud rate of an MPI interface X X X
DP address, baud rate of an MPI/DP interface, if set
as DP note in the parameter
Note: After POWER OFF/ON and CPU memory reset,
the parameters of a pure DP interface are not retained
unless the parameter assignment (SDBs) was loaded
 IP suite/device name of the PROFINET interface Depends on the type X Depends on the type
of assignment of the of assignment of the
IP address IP address
parameters and of parameters and of
the device name the device name
x = retentive; – = not retentive
1Only the last 100 entries in the diagnostics buffer are retained after POWER OFF / POWER
ON.

Reference
For more information about the assignment of IP address parameters and device names,
refer to the S7-300 - Installation Operating Instructions, chapter: IP address parameters and
device name.

Retentive behavior of a DB for CPUs with firmware < V2.0.12

For these CPUs, the contents of the DBs are always retentive at POWER ON/OFF or STOP-
RUN.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 151
Memory concept
5.1 Memory areas and retentivity

Retentive behavior of a DB for CPUs with firmware ≥ V2.0.12

These CPUs support the generation of data blocks with "NON-Retain" (not retentive)
property.
Data blocks assigned the "NON-Retain" property are reset to their initial values after every
POWER OFF/ON and every STOP-RUN transition of the CPU.
You have two options of assigning the "NON-Retain" property to a data block:
● STEP 7 (V5.2 + SP1 or higher): Activate the NON-Retain function in the DB properties
● SFC 82 " Crea_DBL" (generation of a DB in load memory): ATTRIB parameter, set bit 2
to "1"

Table 5- 2 Retentive behavior of DBs for CPUs with firmware ≥ V2.0.12

At POWER ON/OFF or restart of the CPU, the DB should

be reset to the initial values retain the actual values (retentive DB)
(non-retentive DB)
Reason: Reason:
At POWER ON/OFF and restart (STOP-RUN) of At POWER OFF/ON and restart (STOP-RUN) of
the CPU, the actual values of the DB are non- the CPU, the actual values of the DB are retained.
retentive. The DB receives the initial values
from the load memory.
Requirement in STEP 7: Requirement in STEP 7:
 The "Non-Retain" checkbox is activated in  The "Non-Retain" checkbox is deactivated in
the DB properties. the DB properties.

or or
 A non-retentive DB was generated using  a retentive DB was generated using SFC 82
SFC 82 "CREA_DBL" and the associated "CREA_DBL".
block attribute (ATTRIB → Bit
NON_RETAIN).

The size of the retentive main memory (for retentive data blocks) of the CPU can be found in
the chapters "Technical specifications of CPU 31x (Page 301)" and "Technical specifications
of CPU 31xC (Page 213)".

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

152 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Memory concept
5.1 Memory areas and retentivity

5.1.4 Address areas of the system memory

The system memory of the S7-CPUs is divided into address areas. By using corresponding
instructions in your program, you can address the data directly in the relevant address area.

Address areas of the system memory

Table 5- 3 Address areas of the system memory

Address areas Description

Process input image At every start of an OB 1 cycle, the CPU reads the input values
from the input modules and saves them in the process input
image.
Process output image During the cycle, the program calculates the values for the
outputs and stores them in the process output image. At the end
of the OB 1 cycle, the CPU writes the calculated output values to
the output modules.
Bit memory This area provides memory for saving the intermediate results of
a program calculation.
Timers Timers are available in this area.
Counters Counters are available in this area.
Local data Temporary data of a code block (OB, FB, FC) is saved to this
memory area while the block is being processed.
Data blocks See Recipes and measured value archives

Reference
To find out which address areas are possible for your CPU, refer to the S7-300 instruction
lists and the chapters Technical specifications of the CPU 31x (Page 301) and Technical
specifications of the CPU 31xC (Page 213).

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 153
Memory concept
5.1 Memory areas and retentivity

Process input/output image

When the input (I) and output (O) address areas are addressed in the user program, the
signal states of digital signal modules are not queried. Instead, a memory area in the CPU
system memory is accessed. This memory area is the process image.
The process image has two sections: the process image of inputs, and the process image of
outputs.
Advantages of the process image
Access to the process image, compared to direct access to the input/output modules, offers
the advantage that a consistent image of process signals is made available to the CPU
during cyclic program processing. If the signal state at an input module changes during
program execution, the signal status in the process image is maintained until the process
image is updated in the next cycle. Moreover, since the process image is stored in the CPU's
system memory, access to the process image is significantly faster than direct access to the
signal modules.
Process image update
The operating system updates the process image periodically. The figure below shows the
sequence of this operation within a cycle.

6WDUWXS 6WDUWXSSURJUDP

:ULWHSURFHVVLPDJHRIRXWSXWVWRPRGXOHV
3,2
&\FOHWLPH

3,, 5HDGLQSXWVIURPPRGXOHVDQGUHIUHVKGDWD
LQSURFHVVLPDJHRILQSXWV

8VHUSURJUDP
([HFXWHXVHUSURJUDP 2%DQGDOOEORFNVFDOOHG
WKHUHLQ 
=.3 %H6\

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

154 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Memory concept
5.1 Memory areas and retentivity

Configurable process image of the CPUs

STEP 7 lets you define a user-specific size of the process image of the inputs/outputs for the
following CPUs.

CPU Firmware
CPU 312 V3.0 or higher
CPU 312C V3.3 or higher
CPU 313C V3.3 or higher
CPU 313C-2 DP V3.3 or higher
CPU 313C-2 PtP V3.3 or higher
CPU 314 V3.0 or higher
CPU 314C-2 DP V3.3 or higher
CPU 314C-2 PtP V3.3 or higher
CPU 314C-2 PN/DP V3.3 or higher
CPU 315-2 DP V3.0 or higher
CPU 315-2 PN/DP V2.5 or higher
CPU 317-2 DP V2.5 or higher
CPU 317-2 PN/DP V2.3 or higher
CPU 319-3 PN/DP V2.4 or higher

For information on the size of the process image of your CPU please refer to the technical
specifications.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 155
Memory concept
5.1 Memory areas and retentivity

Please observe the following::

Note
Currently, the variable setting of the process image only affects its update at the cycle
control point. This means that the process input image is updated up to the set PII size with
the corresponding values of the input modules existing within this address area, or the
values of the process output image up to the set POI limit are written to the output modules
existing within this address area.
This set size of the process image is ignored with respect to STEP 7 commands used to
access the process image (e.g.
A I100.0, L IW200, = Q20.0, T QD150, or also corresponding indirect addressing
commands).
These commands output up to the maximum size of the process image, however they do not
output any synchronous access errors (see technical specifications for size). Instead, they
only access the permanently existing internal memory area of the process image. The same
applies for the use of actual parameters of block call commands from the I/O area (area of
the process image).
Particularly if these process image limits were changed, you should check to which extent
your user program continues to access the process image in the area between the set and
the maximum process image size. If access to this area continues, this may mean that
changing inputs at the I/O module are no longer detected in the user program or that outputs
actually are not written to the output module and no alarm is generated.
You should also note that certain CPs may only be addressed outside of the process image.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

156 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Memory concept
5.1 Memory areas and retentivity

Local data
Local data store the following:
● The temporary variables of code blocks
● The start information of the organization blocks
● Transfer parameters
● Intermediate results
Temporary variables
When you create blocks, you can declare temporary variables (TEMP) which are only
available during processing of the block and are then overwritten. These local data have a
fixed length in each OB. Local data must be initialized prior to the first read access.
Furthermore, each organization block requires 20 bytes of local data for its start information.
The CPU is equipped with a memory for storing temporary variables (local data) of blocks
which are being processed. The size of this memory area depends on the CPU. It is
distributed among the priority classes in partitions of equal size. Each priority class has its
own local data area.

CAUTION

All temporary variables (TEMP) of an OB and its subordinate blocks are stored in local
data. If you use complex nesting levels for block processing, this may cause an overflow of
the local data area.
The CPUs will change to STOP mode if you exceed the permissible size of local data for a
priority class.
Make allowances for local data required for synchronous error OBs. This is assigned to the
respective triggering priority class.

See also
Retentivity of load memory, system memory, and main memory (Page 150)

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 157
Memory concept
5.1 Memory areas and retentivity

5.1.5 Properties of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card

The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card as memory module for the CPU
The memory module used on your CPU is a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card. You can use
MMCs as load memory or as portable data carrier.

Note
The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card must be inserted in the CPU to permit operation.

What is stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card?

The following data can be stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card:
● User program, i.e. all blocks (OBs, FCs, FCs, DBs) and system data
● Archives and recipes
● Configuration data (STEP 7 projects)
● Data for operating system update and backup

Note
You can either store user and configuration data or the operating system on the SIMATIC
Micro Memory Card.

Properties of a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card

The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card ensures maintenance-free operation and retentivity for
these CPUs.

CAUTION

Data on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be corrupted if you remove the card while it is
being accessed for writing. In this case, you may have to delete the SIMATIC Micro
Memory Card on your PG, or format the card in the CPU. Never remove a SIMATIC Micro
Memory Card in RUN mode. Always remove it when power is off, or when the CPU is in
STOP state, and when the PG is not writing to the card. When the CPU is in STOP mode
and you cannot not determine whether or not a PG is writing to the card (e.g. load/delete
block), disconnect the communication lines.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

158 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Memory concept
5.2 Memory functions

SIMATIC Micro Memory Card copy protection

Your SIMATIC Micro Memory Card has an internal serial number that implements an MMC
copy protection on the user level. You can read this serial number from the SSL partial list
011CH index 8 using SFC 51 RDSYSST. Program a STOP command in a know-how-
protected block, for example, if the reference and actual serial number of your SIMATIC
Micro Memory Card are not the same

Service life of a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card

The service life of a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card depends mainly on the following factors:
1. The number of delete or programming operations
2. External influences such as ambient temperature
At ambient temperatures up to 60 °C, a maximum of 100,000 delete/write operations can be
performed on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.

CAUTION

To prevent loss of data, do not exceed the maximum number of delete/write operations.

Reference
Additional information:
● on the SSL partial list can be found in the CPU 31xC and CPU 31x instruction list, or in
the Reference Manual System Software S7-300/400 System and Standard Functions
● on resetting the CPU can be found in the Operating Instructions CPU 31xC and CPU31x,
Commissioning, Commissioning Modules, CPU Memory Reset by means of Mode
Selector

See also
Operator controls and indicators: CPU 313C-2 DP (Page 30)
Operator controls and indicators: CPU 312 and CPU 314 (Page 45)
Operator controls and indicators: CPU 315-2 DP and CPU 317-2 DP (Page 47)
Operator controls and indicators: CPU 315-2 PN/DP and CPU 317-2 PN/DP (Page 50)
Operator controls and indicators: CPU 319-3 PN/DP (Page 52)

5.2 Memory functions

5.2.1 General: Memory functions

Memory functions
Memory functions are used to generate, modify or delete entire user programs or specific
blocks. You can also ensure that your project data is retained by archiving it. If you created a
new user program, use a PG/PC to download the complete program to the SIMATIC Micro
Memory Card

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 159
Memory concept
5.2 Memory functions

5.2.2 Download of the user program to the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the CPU

Load user program

The entire user program is downloaded by means of the PG/PC to the CPU via the SIMATIC
Micro Memory Card. The previous content of the Micro Memory Card is deleted in the
process. Blocks use the load memory area as specified under "Load memory requirements"
in "General block properties".
The figure shows the load and main memory of the CPU:

3URJUDPPLQJGHYLFH

&DUG
0HPRU\
0LFUR
6,0$7,&
6,(0(16

6DYHGRQWKHKDUG /RDGPHPRU\ 0DLQPHPRU\

GLVN

&RGHEORFNV &RGHEORFNV
5XQWLPHUHOHYDQW
3DUWVRIWKHFRGH
DQGGDWDEORFNV
'DWDEORFNV 'DWDEORFNV DVZHOODV
FRQILJXUDWLRQ
6\VWHPGDWDEORFNV 6\VWHPGDWDEORFNV GDWD

&RPPHQWV

,IDOORIWKHPDLQPHPRU\DUHDLVQRWUHWHQWLYHWKHUHWHQWLYHDUHDLV
LQGLFDWHGLQ67(3PRGXOHVWDWXVDVUHWHQWLYHPHPRU\<RXFDQQRW
UXQWKHSURJUDPXQWLODOOWKHEORFNVDUHGRZQORDGHG
6\PEROV

Note
This function is only permitted when the CPU is in STOP mode. The load memory is empty if
the load operation could not be completed due to power loss or impermissible blocks.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

160 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Memory concept
5.2 Memory functions

5.2.3 Handling with blocks

5.2.3.1 Encryption of blocks

Important notes

Note
Supported blocks
S7-Block Privacy can only be used to encrypt function blocks (FBs) and functions (FCs).

Once encrypted, the blocks can no longer be edited or monitored in STEP 7. The encryption
also prevents execution of all test and commissioning functions, e.g. block status, or
breakpoints.

Requirements
You can download encrypted blocks to the following CPUs: CPU31x V3.2.1 or higher
The "S7-Block Privacy" add-on packages supplied with STEP 7 must be installed. This is the
only tool that you can use for strong encryption of the blocks.

General procedure
To encrypt the blocks, proceed as follows:
1. In STEP 7, right-click the block container and select "Block Privacy ...".
2. The S7BLP tool is launched.
3. Select the block (multiple selection is possible).
4. Right-click the block to be encoded and select "Encrypt Block...". The "Encrypt Block"
dialog opens.
5. Select whether to include decompilation data in the encryption.

Note
All attempts to decompile the block will fail if you deactivate the check box!

6. Enter a key string with a length of at least 12 characters in both fields. Make sure you
keep the key in a safe place. Click "OK" to launch the encryption.
Result: The block is encrypted. The following icons identify this status:

Decompilable encrypted block

Encrypted block that cannot be decompiled

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 161
Memory concept
5.2 Memory functions

Note
Command execution time
Usually, the command execution time is prolonged because encrypted blocks cannot be
processed in fully optimized state. The final cycle time can only be determined with
encrypted blocks.

Note
Prolonged runtimes during POWER ON/CPU memory reset/download
The CPU startup time, the time required for CPU memory reset, and the block download
time can be prolonged significantly.

Additional information
For more information, refer to the STEP 7 Online Help, "S7-Block Privacy" section.

5.2.3.2 Reloading or transferring blocks

There are two ways to reload or overwrite user blocks:

● Reloading blocks: You have already created a user program and downloaded it to the
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the CPU. You then want to add new blocks to the user
program. In this case you do not need to download the entire user program to the
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card again. Instead you only need to download the new blocks
to the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (this reduces the download times for highly complex
programs).
● Overwrite: In this case, you make changes to blocks of your user program. In the next
step you then overwrite the user program or only the changed blocks to the SIMATIC
Micro Memory Card using the PG/PC.

WARNING

When transferring blocks/a user program, all data stored under the same name on the
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is overwritten.

After loading runtime-relevant blocks, their content is transferred to the main memory and
activated.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

162 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Memory concept
5.2 Memory functions

5.2.3.3 Uploading blocks

Uploading blocks
Unlike download operations, an upload operation is the transfer of specific blocks or a
complete user program from the CPU to the PG/PC. The block content is here identical with
that of the last download to the CPU. Runtime-relevant DBs are an exception, because their
actual values are transferred. An upload of blocks or of the user program from the CPU in
STEP 7 does not influence the assignment of CPU memory space.

5.2.3.4 Deleting blocks

Deleting blocks
When you delete a block, it is deleted from the load memory. In STEP 7, you can also delete
blocks in the user program (DBs also with SFC 23 "DEL_DB"). Main memory used by this
block is released.

5.2.3.5 Compressing blocks

Compressing blocks
When blocks are compressed, gaps between memory objects in the load memory/main
memory as a result of load/delete operations are eliminated. The free memory space is
made available as one block. Compressing is possible when the CPU is in RUN or in STOP
mode.

5.2.3.6 Promming (RAM to ROM)

Promming (RAM to ROM)

Promming means that the actual values of the data blocks are transferred from the main
memory to the load memory as new initial values of the DBs.

Note
This function is only permitted when the CPU is in STOP mode. The load memory will be
empty if the function cannot be completed due to a power failure.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 163
Memory concept
5.2 Memory functions

5.2.4 Memory reset and restart

Memory reset
After the insertion/removal of a Micro Memory Card, a memory reset restores defined
conditions to permit a CPU restart (warm restart). A memory reset restructures the CPU's
memory management. All blocks in the load memory are retained. All runtime-relevant
blocks are transferred once again from the load memory to the main memory, in particular to
initialize the data blocks in the main memory (restore initial values).

Restart (warm restart)

● All retentive DBs retain their actual value (non-retentive DBs are also supported by CPUs
with firmware ≥ V2.0.12. Non-retentive DBs receive their initial values).
● The values of all retentive M, C, T are retained.
● All non-retentive user data is initialized:
– M, C, T, I, O with "0"
● All execution levels are initialized.
● The process images are deleted.

Reference
Also refer to Memory reset using the CPU's mode selector in the section Commissioning in
the CPU 31xC and CPU 31x Operating Instructions.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

164 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Memory concept
5.2 Memory functions

5.2.5 Recipes

Introduction
A recipe represents a collection of user data. You can implement a simple recipe concept
using non-runtime-relevant DBs. In this case, the recipes should have the same structure
(length). One DB should exist per recipe.

Processing sequence
Recipe is to be stored in the load memory:
● The various data records of recipes are created as non-runtime-relevant DBs in STEP 7
and then downloaded to the CPU. Therefore, recipes only occupy load memory space
and no main memory space.
Working with recipe data:
● With SFC83 "READ_DBL", the user programs reads the data record of the current recipe
from the DB in the load memory to a runtime-relevant DB in the main memory. As a
result, the main memory only has to accommodate the data of one record. The user
program can now access data of the current recipe. The figure below shows how to
handle recipe data:
/RDGPHPRU\
6,0$7,&0LFUR0HPRU\&DUG 
0DLQPHPRU\
&38 
5HFLSH 6)&5($'B'%/

&XUUHQW
5HFLSH UHFLSH

 6)&:5,7B'%/

5HFLSHQ

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 165
Memory concept
5.2 Memory functions

Saving a modified recipe:

● With SFC 84 "WRIT_DBL", the user program can write new or modified recipe data
records generated during program execution to the load memory. This data written to the
load memory is portable and is retained in case of a memory reset. You can backup
modified data records (recipes) on the PG/PC by uploading and saving them as a single
block.

Note
The active system functions SFC 82 to 84 (active access to the SIMATIC Micro Memory
Card) have a strong influence on PG functions (e.g. block status, variable status, load,
upload, open block). This typically reduces performance (compared to passive system
functions) by the factor 10.

Note
To prevent loss of data, do not exceed the maximum number of delete/write operations.
Also refer to the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC) section in the "Structure and
Connections of a CPU" chapter.

CAUTION

Data on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be corrupted if you remove the card while it
is being accessed for writing. In this case, you may have to delete the SIMATIC Micro
Memory Card on your PG, or format the card in the CPU. Never remove a SIMATIC
Micro Memory Card in RUN mode. Always remove it when power is off, or when the
CPU is in STOP state, and when the PG is not writing to the card. When the CPU is in
STOP mode and you cannot not determine whether or not a PG is writing to the card
(e.g. load/delete block), disconnect the communication lines.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

166 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Memory concept
5.2 Memory functions

5.2.6 Measured value log files

Introduction
Measured values are generated when the CPU executes the user program. These values
are to be logged and analyzed.

Processing sequence
Acquisition of measured values:
● The CPU writes all measured values to a DB (for alternating backup mode in several
DBs) which is located in main memory.
Measured value logging:
● Before the data volume can exceed the main memory capacity, you can call
SFC 84 "WRIT_DBL" in the user program to swap measured values from the DB to load
memory. The figure below shows how to handle measured value log files:

/RDGPHPRU\
6,0$7,&0LFUR0HPRU\&DUG 

0DLQPHPRU\
0HDVXUHGYDOXH 6)&&5($B'%/  &38

&XUUHQW
0HDVXUHGYDOXH PHDVXUHG
6)&:5,7B'%/ YDOXHV


0HDVXUHGYDOXHQ

● You can call SFC 82 "CREA_DBL" in the user program to generate new (additional) non-
runtime-relevant DBs in load memory which do not require main memory space.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 167
Memory concept
5.2 Memory functions

Reference
For detailed information on SFC 82, refer to the System Software for S7-300/400, System
and Standard Functions Reference Manual, or directly to the STEP 7 Online Help.

Note
SFC 82 is terminated and an error message is generated if a DB already exists under the
same number in load memory and/or main memory.

This data written to the load memory is portable and is retained in case of a memory reset.
Evaluation of measured values:
● Measured value DBs saved to the load memory can be uploaded and evaluated by other
communication peers (e.g. PG, PC, etc.).

Note
The active system functions SFC 82 to 84 (active access to the SIMATIC Micro Memory
Card) have a strong influence on PG functions (e.g. block status, variable status, load,
upload, open block). This typically reduces performance (compared to passive system
functions) by the factor 10.

Note
For CPUs with firmware V2.0.12 or higher, you can also generate non-retentive DBs
using SFC 82 (parameter ATTRIB → NON_RETAIN bit.)

Note
To prevent loss of data, do not exceed the maximum number of delete/write operations.
For additional information, refer to the technical specifications of the SIMATIC Micro
Memory Card in the "General Technical Specifications" of your CPU.

CAUTION

Data on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be corrupted if you remove the card while it
is being accessed for writing. In this case, you may have to delete the SIMATIC Micro
Memory Card on your PG, or format the card in the CPU. Never remove a SIMATIC
Micro Memory Card in RUN mode. Always remove it when power is off, or when the
CPU is in STOP state, and when the PG is not writing to the card. When the CPU is in
STOP mode and you cannot not determine whether or not a PG is writing to the card
(e.g. load/delete block), disconnect the communication lines.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

168 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Memory concept
5.2 Memory functions

5.2.7 Backup of project data to SIMATIC Micro Memory Card

Functional principles
Using the Save project to Memory Card and Fetch project from Memory Card functions, you
can save all project data to a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card, and retrieve these at a later
time. For this operation, the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be located in a CPU or in the
MMC programming unit of a PG or PC.
Project data is compressed before it is saved to a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card, and
uncompressed on retrieval.

Note
In addition to project data, you may also have to store your user data on the MMC. You
should therefore select a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with sufficient memory space.
A message warns you of insufficient memory capacity on your SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.

The volume of project data to be saved corresponds with the size of the project's archive file.

Note
For technical reasons, you can only transfer the entire contents (user program and project
data) using the Save project to memory card function.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 169
General technical specifications 7
7.1 Standards and certifications

Introduction
Contents of general technical specifications:
● standards and test values satisfied by modules of the S7-300 automation system
● test criteria of S7-300 modules.

Note
Information about the nameplate
You will find the current identifiers and approvals on the rating plate of the respective
product.

Safety information

WARNING

Personal injury and damage to property may occur.

In potentially explosive environments, there is a risk of personal injury and damage to
property if you remove S7-300 connectors in runtime.
In potentially explosive environments, always isolate the S7-300 before you remove any
connectors.

WARNING
Explosion hazard
If you replace components, compliance with Class I, DIV. 2 could be compromised.

WARNING

This device is only appropriate for use in Class I, Div. 2, Group A, B, C, D, or in non-
hazardous areas.

Test logos and their meaning

The section below describes the test logos attached to the module and explains their
meaning.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 201
General technical specifications
7.1 Standards and certifications

CE Label

The S7-300 automation system satisfies requirements and safety-related

objectives according to EC Directives listed below, and conforms with the
harmonized European standards (EN) for programmable controllers
announced in the Official Journals of the European Community:
 2006/95/EC "Electrical Equipment Designed for Use within Certain
Voltage Limits" (Low-Voltage Directive)
 2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive)
 94/9/EC "Equipment and protective systems intended for use in
potentially explosive atmospheres" (Explosion Protection Directive)
The EC declaration of conformity is held on file available to competent
authorities at:
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
I IA AS R&D DH A
P.O. Box 1963
D-92209 Amberg
These files are also available for download on the Customer Support
Internet pages, keyword "Declaration of Conformity".

UL approval

Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with

 UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)

CSA approval

Canadian Standards Association to

 C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
or

cULus approval

Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with

 UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
 CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
or

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

202 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 General technical specifications
7.1 Standards and certifications

cULus HAZ. LOC approval

Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with

 UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
 CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
 UL 1604 (Hazardous Location)
+$=/2&
 CSA C22.2 No. 213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx

FM approval

Factory Mutual Research (FM) to

Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810
APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx

ATEX approval

In accordance with EN 60079-15 (Electrical Apparatus for Potentially

Explosive Atmospheres; Type of Protection "n") and EN 60079-0
(Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive gas atmospheres - Part 0:
General Requirements)

,,*([Q$,,77

WARNING

Personal injury and damage to property may occur.

In potentially explosive environments, there is a risk of personal injury and damage to
property if you remove S7-300 connectors in runtime.
In potentially explosive environments, always isolate the S7-300 before you remove any
connectors.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 203
General technical specifications
7.1 Standards and certifications

Tick mark for Australia and New Zealand

The S7-300 automation system meets requirements of standards to

AS/NZS CISPR 16.

Note
The UL/CSA or cULus approvals for your product are specified by the identifiers on the
rating plate.

IEC 61131
The S7-300 automation system satisfies requirements and criteria to
IEC 61131-2 (Programmable Controllers, Part 2: Equipment requirements and tests).

Marine approval
Classification societies:
● ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
● BV (Bureau Veritas)
● DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
● GL (Germanischer Lloyd)
● LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)
● Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)

Use in industrial environments

SIMATIC products are designed for industrial applications.

Table 7- 1 Use in industrial environments

Field of Noise emission requirements Noise immunity requirements

application
Industry EN 61000-6-4: 2007 EN 61000-6-2: 2005

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

204 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 General technical specifications
7.1 Standards and certifications

Use in residential areas

Note
The S7-300 is intended for use in industrial environments and can cause interference on
radio/television reception if operated in residential areas.

To operate an S7-300 in a residential area, it's RF emission must comply with Limit Value
Class B to EN 55011.
Suitable measures for achieving RF interference level Class B include, for example:
● S7-300 installation in grounded switch cabinets / cubicles
● Use of noise filters in the supply lines

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 205
General technical specifications
7.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

7.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

Definition
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical installation to function
satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with that environment.
The S7-300 modules also satisfy requirements of EMC legislation for the European domestic
market. Compliance of the S7-300 system with specifications and directives on electric
design is prerequisite.

Pulse-shaped disturbance
The table below shows the electromagnetic compatibility of S7 modules in areas subject to
pulse-shaped interference.

Pulse-shaped disturbance Test voltage corresponds

with degree of
severity
Electrostatic discharge according to Air discharge: ± 8 kV 3
IEC 61000-4-2. Contact discharge: ± 4 kV 2
Bursts (fast transient interference in 2 kV (power supply lines) 3
accordance with IEC 61000-4-4) 2 kV (signal lines > 3 m) 3
1 kV (signal lines < 3 m)
High-energy single pulse (surge) to IEC 61000-4-5
External protective circuit required (see
Lightning and overvoltage protection)
 asymmetric coupling 2 kV (power supply lines)
DC with protective elements
3
2 kV (signal / data line only > 3 m), with
protective elements as required
 symmetric coupling 1 kV (power supply lines) DC with protective
elements
1 kV (signal / data line only > 3 m), with
protective elements as required

Additional measures
When connecting an S7-300 system to the public network, always ensure compliance with
Limit Value Class B to EN 55022.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

206 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 General technical specifications
7.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

Sinusoidal disturbance
The table below shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the S7-300 modules in areas
subject to sinusoidal interference.
● RF radiation

RF radiation to IEC 61000-4-3 corresponds with degree

Electromagnetic RF field, amplitude-modulated of severity
80 to 1000 MHz; 1.4 to 2 GHz 2.0 GHz to 2.7 GHz 3, 2, 1
10 V/m 1 V/m
80 % AM (1 kHz)

● RF coupling

RF coupling to IEC 61000-4-6 corresponds with degree

of severity
0.15 to 80 MHz 3
10 Vrms unmodulated
80 % AM (1 kHz)
150 Ω source impedance

Emission of radio interference

Electromagnetic interference emission to EN 55016: Limit value class A (measured at a
distance of 10 m).

Frequency Emitted interference

30 MHz to 230 MHz < 40 dB (µV/m)Q
230 MHz to 1000 MHz < 47 dB (µV/m)Q

Noise emission via AC mains to EN 55016: Limit value class A, Group 1.

Frequency Emitted interference

0.15 to 0.5 MHz < 79 dB (µV/m)Q
< 66 dB (µV/m)M
0.5 MHz to 5 MHz < 73 dB (µV/m)Q
< 60 dB (µV/m)M
5 MHz to 30 MHz < 73 dB (µV/m)Q
< 60 dB (µV/m)M

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 207
General technical specifications
7.3 Transportation and storage conditions for modules

7.3 Transportation and storage conditions for modules

Introduction
The shipping and storage conditions of S7-300 modules surpass requirements to IEC 61131-
2. The data below apply to modules shipped or put on shelf in their original packing.
The modules are compliant with climatic conditions to IEC 60721-3-3, Class 3K7 (storage),
and with IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2K4 (shipping.)
Mechanical conditions are compliant with IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2M2.

Shipping and storage conditions for modules

Type of condition Permissible range

Free fall (in shipping package) ≤1 m
Temperature From -40 °C to +70 °C
Barometric pressure 1080 hPa to 660 hPa (corresponds with an altitude
of -1000 m to 3500 m)
Relative humidity 10% to 95%, no condensation
Sinusoidal oscillation to 5 - 9 Hz: 3.5 mm
IEC 60068-2-6 9 - 150 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Shock to IEC 60068-2-29 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

208 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 General technical specifications
7.4 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions for S7-300 operation

7.4 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions for S7-300

operation

Operating conditions
S7-300 systems are designed for stationary use in weather-proof locations. The operating
conditions surpass requirements to DIN IEC 60721-3-3.
● Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements)
● Class 3K3 (climatic requirements)

Use with additional measures

The S7-300 may not be used under the conditions outlined below without taking additional
measures:
● At locations with a high degree of ionizing radiation
● In aggressive environments caused, for example, by
– The development of dust
– Corrosive vapors or gases
– Strong electric or magnetic fields
● In installations requiring special monitoring, for example
– Elevators
– Electrical plants in potentially hazardous areas
An additional measure could be an installation of the S7-300 in a cabinet or housing.

Mechanical environmental conditions

The table below shows the mechanical environmental conditions in the form of sinusoidal
oscillations.

Frequency band Continuous Infrequently

10 ≤ f ≤ 58 Hz 0,0375 mm amplitude 0.75 mm amplitude
58 ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz 0,5 g constant acceleration 1 g constant acceleration

Reducing vibrations
If your S7-300 modules are exposed to severe shock or vibration, take appropriate measures
to reduce acceleration or the amplitude.
We recommend the installation of the S7-300 on damping materials (for example, rubber-
bonded-to-metal mounting.)

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 209
General technical specifications
7.4 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions for S7-300 operation

Test of mechanical environmental conditions

The table below provides important information with respect to the type and scope of the test
of ambient mechanical conditions.

Condition tested Test Standard Comment

Vibration Vibration test to IEC Type of oscillation: Frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1
60068-2-6 (sinusoidal) octave/minute.
5 Hz ≤ f ≤ 9 Hz, 3.5 mm constant amplitude
9 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz, 1 g constant acceleration
Duration of oscillation: 10 frequency sweeps per axis at each of three
vertically aligned axes
Shock Shock, tested to Type of shock: Half-sine
IEC 60068-2-27 Shock intensity: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration
Direction of shock: 3 shocks in each direction (+/-) at each of three
vertically aligned axes

Climatic environmental conditions

The S7-300 may be operated on following environmental conditions:

Environmental conditions Permissible range Comments

Temperature: -
horizontal mounting 0°C to 60 °C
position: 0°C to 40 °C
vertical mounting position:
Relative humidity from 10 to 95% No condensation, corresponds to relative
humidity (RH) Class 2 to IEC 61131, Part 2
Barometric pressure 1080 hPa to 795 hPa Corresponds with an altitude of -1000 m to
2000 m
Concentration of pollutants SO2: < 0.5 ppm; Test: 10 ppm; 4 days
RH < 60 %, no condensation
H2S: < 0.1 ppm; Test: 1 ppm; 4 days
RH < 60 %, no condensation
ISA-S71.04 severity level G1; G2; G3 -

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

210 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 General technical specifications
7.5 Specification of dielectric tests, protection class, degree of protection, and rated voltage of S7-300

7.5 Specification of dielectric tests, protection class, degree of

protection, and rated voltage of S7-300

Test voltage
Proof of dielectric strength must be provided in the type test at a test voltage to IEC 61131-2:

Circuits with rated voltage Ve to other circuits Test voltage

or ground.
< 50 V 500 VDC
< 150 V 2500 V DC
< 250 V 4000 V DC

Protection class
Protection class I to IEC 60536, i.e., a protective conductor must be connected to the
mounting rail!

Protection against the ingress of foreign matter and water

● Degree of protection IP 20 to IEC 60529, i.e., protection against contact with standard
probes.
No protection against the ingress of water.

7.6 Rated voltages of S7-300

Rated operating voltages

The S7-300 modules operate at different rated voltages. The table shows the rated voltages
and corresponding tolerances.

Rated voltages Tolerance

24 V DC 19.2 V DC to 28.8 V DC
120 VAC 93 VAC to 132 VAC
230 VAC 187 VAC to 264 VAC

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 211
Technical specifications of CPU 31x 9
9.1 General technical specifications

9.1.1 Dimensions of CPU 31x

Each CPU features the same height and depth, only the width differs.
● Height: 125 mm
● Depth: 115 mm, or 180 mm with opened front cover.
[  


Figure 9-1 Dimensions of CPU 31x

Width of CPU

CPU Width (x)

CPU 312 40 mm
CPU 314 40 mm
CPU 315-2 DP 40 mm
CPU 315-2 PN/DP 40 mm
CPU 317-2 DP 40 mm
CPU 317-2 PN/DP 40 mm
CPU 319 120 mm

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 301
Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.1 General technical specifications

9.1.2 Technical specifications of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card

Compatible SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards

The following memory modules are available:

Table 9- 1 Available SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards

Type Order number Required for a firmware update via

SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
Micro Memory Card 64 KB 6ES7953-8LFxx-0AA0 –
Micro Memory Card 128 KB 6ES7953-8LGxx-0AA0 –
Micro Memory Card 512 KB 6ES7953-8LJxx-0AA0 –
Micro Memory Card 2 MB 6ES7953-8LLxx-0AA0 Minimum requirement for CPUs
without DP interface
Micro Memory Card 4 MB 6ES7953-8LMxx-0AA0 Minimum requirements for CPUs with
DP interface, but without PN interface
Micro Memory Card 8 MB 6ES7953-8LPxx-0AA0 Minimum requirements for CPUs with
DP and PN interface

Maximum number of loadable blocks on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card

The number of blocks that can be stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card depends on
the capacity of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card being used The maximum number of
blocks that can be loaded is therefore limited by the capacity of your SIMATIC Micro Memory
Card (including blocks generated with the "CREATE DB" SFC)

Table 9- 2 Maximum number of loadable blocks on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card

Size of SIMATIC Micro Memory Card ... Maximum number of blocks that can be loaded
64 KB 768
128 KB 1024
512 KB 2560
2 MB The maximum number of blocks that can be loaded on a
4 MB specific CPU is less than the number of blocks that can
be stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.
8 MB For information about the maximum number of blocks
that can be loaded on a specific CPU, refer to the
corresponding technical specification.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

302 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP

9.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications

Table 9- 6 Technical specifications of the CPU 315-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
CPU and version
 MLFB 6ES7315-2EH14-0AB0

 Hardware version 01

 Firmware version V3.2.1

 Associated programming package STEP 7 as of V5.5 + HSP 199

Memory
Main memory
 Integrated 384 KB

 Expandable No

 Maximum size of non-volatile memory for 128 KB

retentive data blocks,
Load memory
 Pluggable (MMC) Yes

 Pluggable (MMC), max. 8 MB

 Data retention on the Micro Memory Card 10 years

(after the last programming action), min.
Backup
 Available Yes (ensured with Micro Memory Card -
maintenance-free)
 Without battery Yes (program and data)

Execution times
 for bit operation, min. 0.05 μs

 for word operations, min. 0.09 μs

 For fixed-point arithmetic, min. 0.12 μs

 For floating-point arithmetic, min. 0.45 μs

Timers/counters and their retentivity

S7 counters
 Number 256

Retentivity
 Configurable Yes

 Default Z 0 to Z 7

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 329
Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
Counting range
 Low limit 0

 High limit 999

IEC counter
 Available Yes

 Type SFB

 Number Unlimited
(limited only by main memory size)
S7 timers
 Number 256

Retentivity
 Configurable Yes

 Default No retentivity

Time setting range

 Low limit 10 ms

 High limit 9990 s

IEC timer
 Available Yes

 Type SFB

 Number Unlimited
(limited only by main memory size)
Data areas and their retentivity
Bit memory
 Number, max. 2048 bytes

 Retentivity, available Yes (from MB 0 to MB 2047)

 Retentivity, default MB 0 to MB 15

 Number of clock memories 8 (1 memory byte)

Data blocks
 Number, max. 1024
(in the number range 1 to 16000)
 Size, max. 64 KB

 Retentivity, configurable Yes, via non-retain feature on the DB

 Retentivity, default Yes

Local data
 Per priority class, max. 32 KB per execution level,
2 KB per block

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

330 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
Blocks
 Number of blocks (total) 1024 (DBs, FCs, FBs)
The maximum number of blocks that can be
loaded may be reduced due to the Micro Memory
Card you are using.
OB See instruction list
 Size, max. 64 KB

 Number of free cycle OBs 1 (OB 1)

 Number of time-of-day interrupt OBs 1 (OB 10)

 Number of time-delay interrupt OBs 2 (OB 20, 21)

 Number of cyclic interrupt OBs 4 (OB 32, 33, 34, 35)

 Number of hardware interrupt OBs 1 (OB 40)

 Number of DPV1 interrupt OBs 3 (OB 55, 56, 57)

 Number of isochronous interrupt OBs 1 (OB 61)

 Number of restart OBs 1 (OB 100)

 Number of asynchronous error OBs 6 (OB 80, 82, 83, 85, 86, 87)
(OB83 for PROFINET IO)
 Number of synchronous error OBs 2 (OB 121, 122)

Nesting depth
 Per priority class 16

 Additionally within an error OB 4

FB See instruction list

 Number, max. 1024
(in the number range 0 to 7999)
 Size 64 KB

FC See instruction list

 Number, max. 1024
(in the number range 0 to 7999)
 Size 64 KB

Address ranges (inputs/outputs)

I/O address area
 Inputs 2048 bytes

 Outputs 2048 bytes

Distributed
 Inputs 2048 bytes

 Outputs 2048 bytes

I/O process image

 Inputs 2048 bytes

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 331
Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
 Outputs 2048 bytes

 Inputs, adjustable 2048 bytes

 Outputs, adjustable 2048 bytes

 Inputs, preset 128 bytes

 Outputs, preset 128 bytes

Process image partitions

 Number of partial process images, max. 1

 Amount of user data in the process image 1600 bytes

partition for isochronous PROFINET IO, max.
Digital channels
 Inputs 16384

 Outputs 16384

 Inputs, of those central 1024

 Outputs, of those central 1024

Analog channels
 Inputs 1024

 Outputs 1024

 Inputs, of those central 256

 Outputs, of those central 256

Hardware configuration
 Racks, max. 4

 Modules per rack, max. 8

Number of DP masters
 Integrated 1

 Via CP 4

Number of usable FMs and CPs (recommended)

 FM 8

 CP, point-to-point 8

 CP, LAN 10

Time
Clock
 Hardware clock (real-time) Yes

 Buffered, can be synchronized Yes

 Factory setting DT#1994-01-01-00:00:00

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

332 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
 Buffered period Typically 6 weeks
(at an ambient temperature of 40 °C)
 Behavior of the clock on expiration of the The clock continues at the time of day it had
buffered period when power was switched off.

 Behavior of the real-time clock after POWER The clock continues running after POWER OFF.
ON

 Deviation per day, max. 10 s, typ. 2 s

Runtime meter
 Number 1

 Number/number range 0

 Range of values 0 to 231 hours

(using the SFC 101)
 Granularity 1 hour

 Retentive Yes; must be manually restarted after every

restart
Clock synchronization
 supported Yes

 On MPI, master Yes

 On MPI, slave Yes

 On DP, master Yes (DP slave must be time slave)

 On DP, slave Yes

 On the AS, master Yes

 On the AS, slave Yes

 On Ethernet via NTP Yes (as client)

S7 signaling functions
 Number of stations that can be logged on for 16
signaling functions, max. (depends on the number of connections
configured for PG/OP and S7 basic
communication)
 Process error diagnostic messages Yes

 Simultaneously enabled interrupt S blocks, 300

max.
Test and startup functions
Status/modify
 Status/modify variable Yes

 Variables Inputs, outputs, bit memories, DBs, timers,

counters
 Maximum number of variables 30

 of those status variables, max. 30

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 333
Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
 Modify variables, max. 14

Forcing
 Forcing Yes

 Variables Inputs, outputs

 Maximum number of tags 10

Status block Yes (max. 2 blocks simultaneously)

Single step Yes
 Number of breakpoints 4

Diagnostic buffer
 Available Yes

 No. of entries, max. 500

 Configurable No

 of which are power-failure-proof 100, only the last 100 entries are retentive

 Maximum number of entries that can be read 499

in RUN

 Number of entries that can be set in RUN Yes (from 10 to 499)

 Number of preset entries in RUN 10

Service data
 Can be read out Yes

Monitoring function
 Status LEDs Yes

Communication functions
PG/OP communication Yes
Prioritized OCM communication
 Supported Yes

Routing Yes
 Number of routing connections X1 as MPI max. 10;
X1 as DP master max. 24
X1 as DP slave (active) max. 14
X2 as PROFINET max. 24
 Data record routing Yes

Global data communication

 Supported Yes

 Number of GD circles, max. 8

 Number of GD packets, max. 8

 Number of GD packets, sender, max. 8

 Number of GD packets, receiver, max. 8

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

334 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
 Size of GD packets, max. 22 bytes

 Size of GD packets, of those consistent, max. 22 bytes

S7 basic communication
 Supported Yes

 User data per job, max. 76 bytes

 User data per job, consistent, max. 76 Bytes (for X-SEND/REC),

64 bytes (for X-PUT/GET as server)
S7 communication
 Supported Yes

 As server Yes

 As client Yes (via integrated PN interface and loadable

FBs, or via CP and loadable FBs)
 User data per job See the STEP 7 Online Help, Common
parameters of SFBs/FBs and SFC/FC of the S7
communication)
S5-compatible communication
 Supported Yes (via CP and loadable FCs)

Web server
 Supported Yes

 Number of HTTP clients 5

 User-defined web pages Yes

Open IE communication
 Supported Yes

 Maximum number of connections/access 8

points

 Local port number used at the system end 0, 20, 21, 23, 25, 102, 135, 161, 8080, 34962,
34963, 34964, 65532, 65533, 65534, 65535
TCP/IP Yes (via integrated PROFINET interface and
loadable FBs)
 Maximum number of connections 8

 Data length for connection type 01H, max. 1460 bytes

 Data length for connection type 11H, max. 32768 bytes

 Multiple passive connections per port Yes

(multiport), supported
ISO on TCP Yes (via integrated PROFINET interface and
loadable FBs)
 Maximum number of connections 8

 Data length, max. 32768 bytes

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 335
Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
UDP Yes (via integrated PROFINET interface and
loadable FBs)
 Maximum number of connections 8

 Data length, max. 1472 bytes

iPAR server
 Supported Yes

Number of connections
 Total 16

Suitable for PG communication 15

 PG communication, reserved 1

 PG communication, configurable, min. 1

 PG communication, configurable, max. 15

Suitable for OP communication 15

 OP communication, reserved 1

 OP communication, configurable, min. 1

 OP communication, configurable, max. 15

Suitable for S7 basic communication 14

 S7 basic communication, reserved 0

 S7 basic communication, configurable, min. 0

 S7 basic communication, configurable, max. 14

Suitable for S7 communication 14

 S7 communication, reserved 0

 S7 communication, configurable, min. 0

 S7 communication, configurable, max. 14

Total number of instances, max. 32

PROFINET CBA (with communication load setpoint)
 Reference setting for CPU communication 50 %

 Number of remote interconnecting partners 32

 Number of master/slave functions 30

 Total of all master/slave connections 1000

 Data length of all incoming 4000 bytes

master/slave connections, max.

 Data length of all outgoing 4000 bytes

master/slave connections, max.

 Number of device-internal and PROFIBUS 500

interconnections

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

336 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
 Data length of the device-internal and 4000 bytes
PROFIBUS interconnections, max.

 Data length per connection, max. 1400 bytes

Remote interconnections with acyclic transmission

 Sampling rate: Sampling time, min. 500 ms

 Number of incoming interconnections 100

 Number of outgoing interconnections 100

 Data length of all incoming interconnections, 2000 bytes

max.

 Data length of all outgoing interconnections, 2000 bytes

max.

 Data length per connection (acyclic 1400 bytes

interconnections), max.
Remote interconnections with cyclic transmission
 Transmission frequency: Minimum 10 ms
transmission interval

 Number of incoming interconnections 200

 Number of outgoing interconnections 200

 Data length of all incoming interconnections, 2000 bytes

max.

 Data length of all outgoing interconnections, 2000 bytes

max.

 Data length per connection (acyclic 450 bytes

interconnections), max.
HMI variables via PROFINET (acyclic)
 HMI variables update 500 ms

 Number of stations that can be logged on for 3, 2xPN OPC/1x iMAP

HMI variables (PN OPC/iMAP)

 Number of HMI variables 200

 Data length of all HMI variables, max. 2000 bytes

PROFIBUS proxy functionality

 Supported Yes

 Number of coupled PROFIBUS devices 16

 Data length per connection, max. 240 bytes (slave dependent)

Interfaces
1st interface
Interface designation X1
Type of interface Integrated RS 485 interface

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 337
Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
Hardware RS 485
 electrically disconnected Yes

 Interface power supply 200 mA

(15 V DC to 30 V DC), max.
Functionality
 MPI Yes

 DP master Yes

 DP slave Yes

 Point-to-point connection No

MPI
Services
 PG/OP communication Yes

 Routing Yes

 Global data communication Yes

 S7 basic communication Yes

 S7 communication Yes (server only; connection configured at one

end)
 S7 communication, as client No (but via CP and loadable FBs)

 S7 communication, as server Yes

Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps

DP master
Services
 PG/OP communication Yes

 Routing Yes

 Global data communication No

 S7 basic communication Yes (intelligent blocks only)

 S7 communication Yes (server only; connection configured at one

end)
 Constant bus cycle time supported Yes

 Isochronous mode Yes, OB 61 (isochronous mode can be used only

alternatively on PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO)
 SYNC/FREEZE Yes

 Activation/deactivation of DP slaves Yes

– Max. number of DP slaves that can be 8
enabled / disabled simultaneously

 Direct data exchange (cross-traffic) Yes (as subscriber)

 DPV1 Yes

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

338 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps
Number of DP slaves, max. 124
Address range
 Inputs, max. 2 KB

 Outputs, max. 2 KB

User data per DP slave

 Inputs, max. 244 bytes

 Outputs, max. 244 bytes

DP slave
Services
 PG/OP communication Yes

 Routing Yes (only if interface is active)

 Global data communication No

 S7 basic communication No

 S7 communication Yes (server only; connection configured at one

end)
 Direct data exchange (cross-traffic) Yes

 DPV1 No

Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps

Automatic baud rate detection Yes (only if interface is passive)
Transfer memory
 Inputs 244 bytes

 Outputs 244 bytes

 Address range, max. 32

 User data per address range, max. 32 bytes

GSD file The current GSD file is available for download

from the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/profibus-gsd).
2nd interface
Interface designation X2
Type of interface PROFINET
Hardware Ethernet RJ 45
 electrically disconnected Yes

 Integrated switch Yes

 Number of ports 2

 Automatic determination of the transmission Yes (10/100 Mbps)

rate

 Autonegotiation Yes

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 339
Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
 Autocrossing Yes

Media redundancy
 Supported Yes

 Changeover time on line break, typically 200 ms (PROFINET MRP)

 Number of nodes on the ring, max. 50

Change of the IP address at runtime, supported Yes

Keep-alive function, supported Yes
Functionality
 MPI No

 DP master No

 DP slave No

 PROFINET IO controller Yes, even simultaneously with IO device

functionality
 PROFINET IO device Yes, even simultaneously with IO controller
functionality
 PROFINET CBA Yes (acyclic and cyclic transmission)

 Open IE communication Yes; via TCP/IP, ISO on TCP, UDP

 Web server Yes

– Number of HTTP clients 5

PROFINET IO controller
Services
 PG/OP communication Yes

 Routing Yes

 S7 communication Yes (with loadable FBs, max. configurable

connections: 14; maximum number of instances:
32)
 Open IE communication Yes; via TCP/IP, ISO on TCP, UDP

Number of integrated PROFINET IO controllers 1

RT, supported Yes
IRT, supported Yes
Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbps
Maximum number of connectable IO devices 128
Number of connectable IO devices, for RT, max. 128
 of which in line, max. 128

Number of IO devices with IRT and "high 128

flexibility" option
 of which in line, max. 61

Number of IO devices with IRT and "high 64

performance" option, max.

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

340 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
 of which in line, max. 64

Shared Device, supported Yes

Isochronous mode Yes (OB 61 - operation in isochronous mode is
possible either on DP, or on PROFINET IO (not
concurrently))
Prioritized startup, supported Yes
 Maximum number of IO devices with 32
prioritized startup
Activating/deactivating of PROFINET IO Devices Yes
 Number of IO devices that can be enabled / 8
disabled simultaneously, max.
IO devices changing during runtime (partner Yes
ports), supported
 Number of IO devices per tool, max. 8

Device replacement without removable medium Yes

Send clocks 250 μs, 500 μs,1 ms
2 ms, 4 ms
(not for IRT with "high flexibility" option)
Update time
 Update times The minimum update time also depends on the
time slice set for PROFINET IO communication,
the number of IO Devices used, and on the
amount of configured user data.
With RT
 for send clock of 250 μs 250 μs to 128 ms

 for send clock of 500 μs 500 μs to 256 ms

 for send clock of 1 ms 1 ms to 512 ms

 for send clock of 2 ms 2 ms to 512 ms

 for send clock of 4 ms 4 ms to 512 ms

For IRT with "high flexibility" option

 for send clock of 250 μs 250 μs to 128 ms

 for send clock of 500 μs 500 μs to 256 ms

 for send clock of 1 ms 1 ms to 512 ms

For IRT with "high performance" option

 for send clock of 250 μs 250 μs to 4 ms

 for send clock of 500 μs 500 μs to 8 ms

 for send clock of 1 ms 1 ms to 16 ms

 for send clock of 2 ms 2 ms to 32 ms

 for send clock of 4 ms 4 ms to 64 ms

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 341
Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
For IRT with "high performance" option and Update time = "odd-numbered" send clock set
parameter assignment for "odd-numbered" send (any multiple of 125 μs: 375 μs, 625 μs to 3.875
clocks ms
Address range
 Inputs, max. 2 KB

 Outputs, max. 2 KB

User data per address range, max.

 User data consistency, max. 1024 bytes

PROFINET intelligent IO device

Services
 PG/OP communication Yes

 S7 routing Yes

 S7 communication Yes (with loadable FBs, max. configurable

connections: 14, maximum number of instances:
32
 Open IE communication Yes; via TCP/IP, ISO on TCP, UDP

RT, supported Yes

IRT, supported Yes
PROFIenergy, supported Prepared with SFB 73 / 74 for loadable
PROFIenergy standard FBs for intelligent IO
devices
Shared Device, supported Yes
 Number of IO controllers for shared devices, 2
max.
Isochronous mode No
Application transfer areas Yes
IO devices transfer area No
Transfer memory
 Inputs, max. 1440 bytes, per controller for shared devices

 Outputs, max. 1440 bytes, per controller for shared devices

Submodules
 Number, max. 64

 User data per submodule, max. 1024 bytes

Programming
Programming language
 LAD Yes

 FBD Yes

 STL Yes

 SCL Yes

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

342 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.5 CPU 315-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
 CFC Yes

 GRAPH Yes

 HiGraph® Yes

Instruction set See instruction list

 Nesting levels 8

Know-how protection
 User program/password security Yes

 Block encryption Yes, using S7-Block Privacy

System functions (SFC) See instruction list

System function blocks (SFB) See instruction list
Dimensions
 Mounting dimensions W x H x D (mm) 40 x 125 x 130

 Weight 340 g

Voltages and currents

 Power supply (rated value) 24 V DC

 Low limit of admissible range (DC) 19.2 V

 High limit of admissible range (DC) 28.8 V

 Current consumption (open-circuit), typically 150 mA

 Current consumption (rated value) 750 mA

 Inrush current, typ. 4A

 I2 t 1 A2s

 External protection of power supply lines 2A

(recommended), min.

 Power loss, typically 4.65 W

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 343
 Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
 Current consumption (rated value) 870 mA

 Inrush current, typ. 4A

 I2 t 1 A2s

 External protection of power supply lines 2A

(recommended), min.

 Power loss, typically 4.5 W

9.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications

Table 9- 8 Technical specifications of the CPU 317-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
CPU and version
 MLFB 6ES7317-2EK14-0AB0

 Hardware version 01

 Firmware version V3.2.1

 Associated programming package STEP 7 as of V5.5 + HSP 199

Memory
Main memory
 Integrated 1 MB

 Expandable No

 Maximum size of non-volatile memory for 256 KB

retentive data blocks
Load memory
 Pluggable (MMC) Yes

 Pluggable (MMC), max. 8 MB

 Data retention on the Micro Memory Card 10 years

(after the last programming action), min.
Backup
 Available Yes (ensured with Micro Memory Card -
maintenance-free)
 Without battery Yes (program and data)

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 355
Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
Execution times
 For bit operation, min. 0.025 μs

 For word operations, min. 0.03 μs

 For fixed-point arithmetic, min. 0.04 μs

 For floating-point arithmetic, min. 0.16 μs

Timers/counters and their retentivity

S7 counters
 Number 512

Retentivity
 Configurable Yes

 Default Z 0 to Z 7

Counting range
 Low limit 0

 High limit 999

IEC counter
 Available Yes

 Type SFB

 Number Unlimited
(limited only by main memory size)
S7 timers
 Number 512

Retentivity
 Configurable Yes

 Default No retentivity

Time setting range

 Low limit 10 ms

 High limit 9990 s

IEC timer
 Available Yes

 Type SFB

 Number Unlimited
(limited only by main memory size)
Data areas and their retentivity
Bit memory
 Number, max. 4096 bytes

 Retentivity, available Yes (from MB 0 to MB 4095)

 Retentivity, default MB 0 to MB 15

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

356 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
 Number of clock memories 8 (1 memory byte)

Data blocks
 Number, max. 2048
(in the number range 1 to 16000)
 Size, max. 64 KB

 Retentivity, configurable Yes, via non-retain feature on the DB

 Retentivity, default Yes

Local data
 Per priority class, max. 32 KB per execution level,
2 KB per block
Blocks
 Number of blocks (total) 2048 (DBs, FCs, FBs)
The maximum number of blocks that can be
loaded may be reduced due to the Micro Memory
Card you are using.
OB See instruction list
 Size, max. 64 KB

 Number of free cycle OBs 1 (OB 1)

 Number of time-of-day interrupt OBs 1 (OB 10)

 Number of time-delay interrupt OBs 2 (OB 20, 21)

 Number of cyclic interrupt OBs 4 (OB 32, 33, 34, 35)

 Number of hardware interrupt OBs 1 (OB 40)

 Number of DPV1 interrupt OBs 3 (OB 55, 56, 57)

 Number of isochronous interrupt OBs 1 (OB 61)

 Number of restart OBs 1 (OB100)

 Number of asynchronous error OBs 6 (OB 80, 82, 83, 85, 86, 87)
(OB83 for PROFINET IO)
 Number of synchronous error OBs 2 (OB 121, 122)

Nesting depth
 Per priority class 16

 Additionally within an error OB 4

FB See instruction list

 Number, max. 2048
(in the number range 0 to 7999)
 Size 64 KB

FC See instruction list

 Number, max. 2048
(in the number range 0 to 7999)

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 357
Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
 Size 64 KB

Address ranges (inputs/outputs)

I/O address area
 Inputs 8192 bytes

 Outputs 8192 bytes

Distributed
 Inputs 8192 bytes

 Outputs 8192 bytes

I/O process image

 Inputs 8192 bytes

 Outputs 8192 bytes

 Inputs, adjustable 8192 bytes

 Outputs, adjustable 8192 bytes

 Inputs, preset 256 bytes

 Outputs, preset 256 bytes

Process image partitions

 Number of partial process images, max. 1

 Amount of user data in the process image 1600 bytes

partition for isochronous PROFINET IO, max.
Digital channels
 Inputs 65536

 Outputs 65536

 Inputs, of those central 1024

 Outputs, of those central 1024

Analog channels
 Inputs 4096

 Outputs 4096

 Inputs, of those central 256

 Outputs, of those central 256

Hardware configuration
 Racks, max. 4

 Modules per rack, max. 8

Number of DP masters
 Integrated 1

 Via CP 4

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

358 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
Number of usable FMs and CPs (recommended)
 FM 8

 CP, point-to-point 8

 CP, LAN 10

Time-of-day
Clock
 Hardware clock (real-time) Yes

 Buffered, can be synchronized Yes

 Factory setting DT#1994-01-01-00:00:00

 Buffered period Typically 6 weeks

(at an ambient temperature of 40 °C)
 Behavior of the clock on expiration of the The clock continues at the time of day it had
buffered period when power was switched off.

 Behavior of the real-time clock after POWER The clock continues running after POWER OFF.
ON

 Deviation per day, max. 10 s, typ. 2 s

Runtime meter
 Number 4

 Number/number range 0 to 3

 Range of values 0 to 231 hours

(using the SFC 101)
 Granularity 1 hour

 Retentive Yes; must be manually restarted after every

restart
Clock synchronization
 Supported Yes

 On MPI, master Yes

 On MPI, slave Yes

 On DP, master Yes (DP slave must be time slave)

 On DP, slave Yes

 On the AS, master Yes

 On the AS, slave Yes

 On Ethernet via NTP Yes (as client)

S7 signaling functions
 Number of stations that can be logged on for 32
signaling functions, max. (depends on the number of connections
configured for PG/OP and S7 basic
communication)

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 359
Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
 Process error diagnostic messages Yes

 Simultaneously enabled interrupt S blocks, 300

max.
Test and startup functions
Status/modify
 Status/modify variable Yes

 Variables Inputs, outputs, bit memories, DBs, timers,

counters
 Maximum number of variables 30

 Status variables, max. 30

 Modify variables, max. 14

Forcing
 Forcing Yes

 Variables Inputs, outputs

 Maximum number of tags 10

Status block Yes (max. 2 blocks simultaneously)

Single step Yes
 Number of breakpoints 4

Diagnostic buffer
 Available Yes

 No. of entries, max. 500

 Configurable No

 Of which are power-failure-proof 100, only the last 100 entries are retentive

 Maximum number of entries that can be read 499

in RUN

 Number of entries that can be set in RUN Yes (from 10 to 499)

 Number of preset entries in RUN 10

Service data
 Can be read out Yes

Monitoring function
 Status LEDs Yes

Communication functions
PG/OP communication Yes
Prioritized OCM communication
 Supported Yes

Routing Yes

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

360 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
 Number of routing connections X1 as MPI max. 10;
X1 as DP master max. 24
X1 as DP slave (active) max. 24
X2 as PROFINET max. 24
 Data record routing Yes

Global data communication

 Supported Yes

 Number of GD circles, max. 8

 Number of GD packets, max. 8

 Number of GD packets, sender, max. 8

 Number of GD packets, receiver, max. 8

 Size of GD packets, max. 22 bytes

 Size of GD packets, of those consistent, max. 22 bytes

S7 basic communication
 Supported Yes

 User data per job, max. 76 bytes

 User data per job, consistent, max. 76 bytes (for X-SEND/REC);

64 bytes (for X-PUT/GET as server)
S7 communication
 Supported Yes

 As server Yes

 As client Yes (via integrated PN interface and loadable

FBs, or via CP and loadable FBs)
 User data per job See the STEP 7 Online Help, Common
parameters of SFBs/FBs and SFC/FC of the S7
communication)
S5-compatible communication
 Supported Yes (via CP and loadable FCs)

Web server
 Supported Yes

 Number of HTTP clients 5

 User-defined web pages Yes

Open IE communication
 Supported Yes

 Maximum number of connections/access 16

points

 Local port number used at the system end 0, 20, 21, 23, 25, 80, 102, 135, 161, 8080, 34962,
34963, 34964, 65532, 65533, 65534, 65535

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 361
Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
TCP/IP Yes (via integrated PROFINET interface and
loadable FBs)
 Maximum number of connections 16

 Data length for connection type 01H, max. 1460 bytes

 Data length for connection type 11H, max. 32768 bytes

 Multiple passive connections per port Yes

(multiport), Supported
ISO on TCP Yes (via integrated PROFINET interface and
loadable FBs)
 Maximum number of connections 16

 Data length, max. 32768 bytes

UDP Yes (via integrated PROFINET interface and

loadable FBs)
 Maximum number of connections 16

 Data length, max. 1472 bytes

iPAR server
 Supported Yes

Number of connections
 Total 32

Suitable for PG communication 31

 PG communication, reserved 1

 PG communication, configurable, min. 1

 PG communication, configurable, max. 31

Suitable for OP communication 31

 OP communication, reserved 1

 OP communication, configurable, min. 1

 OP communication, configurable, max. 31

Suitable for S7 basic communication 30

 S7 basic communication, reserved 0

 S7 basic communication, configurable, min. 0

 S7 basic communication, configurable, max. 30

Suitable for S7 communication 16

 S7 communication, reserved 0

 S7 communication, configurable, min. 0

 S7 communication, configurable, max. 16

Total number of instances, max. 32

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

362 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
PROFINET CBA (with communication load setpoint)
 Reference setting for CPU communication 50 %

 Number of remote interconnecting partners 32

 Number of master/slave functions 30

 Total of all master/slave connections 1000

 Data length of all incoming 4000 bytes

master/slave connections, max.

 Data length of all outgoing 4000 bytes

master/slave connections, max.

 Number of device-internal and PROFIBUS 500

interconnections

 Data length of the device-internal and 4000 bytes

PROFIBUS interconnections, max.

 Data length per connection, max. 1400 bytes

Remote interconnections with acyclic transmission

 Sampling rate: Sampling time, min. 500 ms

 Number of incoming interconnections 100

 Number of outgoing interconnections 100

 Data length of all incoming interconnections, 2000 bytes

max.

 Data length of all outgoing interconnections, 2000 bytes

max.

 Data length per connection (acyclic 1400 bytes

interconnections), max.
Remote interconnections with cyclic transmission
 Transmission frequency: Minimum 10 ms
transmission interval

 Number of incoming interconnections 200

 Number of outgoing interconnections 200

 Data length of all incoming interconnections, 2000 bytes

max.

 Data length of all outgoing interconnections, 2000 bytes

max.

 Data length per connection (acyclic 450 bytes

interconnections), max.
HMI variables via PROFINET (acyclic)
 HMI variables update 500 ms

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 363
Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
 Number of stations that can be logged on for 3 (2 x PN OPC/1 x iMAP)
HMI variables (PN OPC/iMAP)

 Number of HMI variables 200

 Data length of all HMI variables, max. 2000 bytes

PROFIBUS proxy functionality

 Supported Yes

 Number of coupled PROFIBUS devices 16

 Data length per connection, max. 240 bytes (slave dependent)

Interfaces
1st interface
Interface designation X1
Type of interface Integrated RS 485 interface
Hardware RS 485
 electrically disconnected Yes

 Interface power supply 200 mA

(15 V DC to 30 V DC), max.
Functionality
 MPI Yes

 DP master Yes

 DP slave Yes

 Point-to-point connection No

 PROFINET No

MPI
Services
 PG/OP communication Yes

 Routing Yes

 Global data communication Yes

 S7 basic communication Yes

 S7 communication Yes (server only, connections configured at one

end)
 S7 communication, as client No (but via CP and loadable FBs)

 S7 communication, as server Yes

Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps

DP master
Services
 PG/OP communication Yes

 Routing Yes

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

364 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
 Global data communication No

 S7 basic communication Yes (intelligent blocks only)

 S7 communication Yes (server only; connection configured at one

end)
 Constant bus cycle time supported Yes

 Isochronous mode Yes (OB 61 - operation in isochronous mode is

possible either on DP, or on PROFINET IO (not
concurrently))
 SYNC/FREEZE Yes

 Activate/deactivate DP slaves Yes

 Max. number of DP slaves that can be 8

enabled / disabled simultaneously

 Direct data exchange (cross-traffic) Yes (as subscriber)

 DPV1 Yes

Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps

Number of DP slaves, max. 124
Address range
 Inputs, max. 8 KB

 Outputs, max. 8 KB

User data per DP slave

 Inputs, max. 244 bytes

 Outputs, max. 244 bytes

DP slave
Services
 PG/OP communication Yes

 Routing Yes (only if interface is active)

 Global data communication No

 S7 basic communication No

 S7 communication Yes (server only; connection configured at one

end)
 Direct data exchange (cross-traffic) Yes

 DPV1 No

Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps

Automatic baud rate detection Yes (only if interface is passive)
Transfer memory
 Inputs 244 bytes

 Outputs 244 bytes

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 365
Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
 Address areas, max. 32

 User data per address range, max. 32 bytes

GSD file The current GSD file is available for download

from the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/profibus-gsd).
2nd interface
Interface designation X2
Type of interface PROFINET
Hardware Ethernet RJ 45
 electrically disconnected Yes

 Integrated switch Yes

 Number of ports 2

 Automatic determination of the transmission Yes (10/100 Mbps)

rate

 Autonegotiation Yes

 Autocrossing Yes

Media redundancy
 Supported Yes

 Changeover time on line break, typically 200 ms (PROFINET MRP)

 Number of nodes on the ring, max. 50

Change of the IP address at runtime, supported Yes

Keep-alive function, supported Yes
Functionality
 MPI No

 DP master No

 DP slave No

 PROFINET IO controller Yes, even simultaneously with IO device

functionality
 PROFINET IO device Yes, even simultaneously with IO controller
functionality
 PROFINET CBA Yes (acyclic and cyclic transmission)

 Open IE communication Yes; via TCP/IP, ISO on TCP, UDP

 Web server Yes

– Number of HTTP clients 5

PROFINET IO controller
Services
 PG/OP communication Yes

 Routing Yes

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

366 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
 S7 communication Yes (with loadable FBs, max. configurable
connections: 16; maximum number of instances:
32)
 Open IE communication Yes; via TCP/IP, ISO on TCP, UDP

Number of integrated PROFINET IO controllers 1

RT, supported Yes
IRT, supported Yes
Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbps
Maximum number of connectable IO devices 128
Number of connectable IO devices, for RT, max. 128
 of which in line, max. 128

Number of IO devices with IRT and "high 128

flexibility" option
 of which in line, max. 61

Number of IO devices with IRT and "high 64

performance" option, max.
 of which in line, max. 64

Shared Device, supported Yes

Isochronous mode Yes (OB 61, isochronous mode can be used only
alternatively on PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO)
Prioritized startup, supported Yes
 Maximum number of IO devices with 32
prioritized startup
Activating/deactivating PROFINET IO devices Yes
 Number of IO devices that can be enabled / 8
disabled simultaneously, max.
IO devices changing during runtime (partner Yes
ports), supported
 Number of IO devices per tool, max. 8

Device replacement without removable medium Yes

Send clocks 250 μs, 500 μs,1 ms
2 ms, 4 ms
(not for IRT with "high flexibility" option)
Update time
 Update times The minimum update time also depends on the
time slice set for PROFINET IO communication,
the number of IO Devices used, and on the
amount of configured user data.
With RT
 for send clock of 250 μs 250 μs to 128 ms

 for send clock of 500 μs 500 μs to 256 ms

 for send clock of 1 ms 1 ms to 512 ms

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 367
Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
 for send clock of 2 ms 2 ms to 512 ms

 for send clock of 4 ms 4 ms to 512 ms

For IRT with "high flexibility" option

 For send clock of 250 μs 250 μs to 128 ms

 For send clock of 500 μs 500 μs to 256 ms

 For send clock of 1 ms 1 ms to 512 ms

For IRT with "high performance" option

 for send clock of 250 μs 250 μs to 4 ms

 for send clock of 500 μs 500 μs to 8 ms

 for send clock of 1 ms 1 ms to 16 ms

 for send clock of 2 ms 2 ms to 32 ms

 for send clock of 4 ms 4 ms to 64 ms

For IRT with "high performance" option and Update time = "odd-numbered" send clock set
parameter assignment for "odd-numbered" send (any multiple of 125 μs: 375 μs, 625 μs to 3.875
clocks ms
Address range
 Inputs, max. 8 KB

 Outputs, max. 8 KB

User data per address range, max.

 User data consistency, max. 1024 bytes

PROFINET intelligent IO device

Services
 PG/OP communication Yes

 S7 routing Yes

 S7 communication Yes (with loadable FBs, max. configurable

connections: 16, maximum number of instances:
32
 Open IE communication Yes; via TCP/IP, ISO on TCP, UDP

RT, supported Yes

IRT, supported Yes
PROFIenergy, supported Prepared with SFB 73 / 74 for loadable
PROFIenergy standard FBs for intelligent IO
devices
Shared Device, supported Yes
 Number of IO controllers for shared devices, 2
max.
Isochronous mode No
Application transfer areas Yes
IO devices transfer area No

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

368 Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12
 Technical specifications of CPU 31x
9.7 CPU 317-2 PN/DP

Technical specifications
Transfer memory
 Inputs, max. 1440 bytes; per controller for shared devices

 Outputs, max. 1440 bytes; per controller for shared devices

Submodules
 Number, max. 64

 User data per submodule, max. 1024 bytes

Programming
Programming language
 LAD Yes

 FBD Yes

 STL Yes

 SCL Yes

 CFC Yes

 GRAPH Yes

 HiGraph® Yes
Instruction set See instruction list
 Nesting levels 8
Know-how protection
 User program/password security Yes

 Block encryption Yes, using S7-Block Privacy

System functions (SFC) See instruction list
System function blocks (SFB) See instruction list
Dimensions
 Mounting dimensions W x H x D (mm) 40 x 125 x 130

 Weight 340 g
Voltages and currents
 Power supply (rated value) 24 V DC

 Low limit of admissible range (DC) 19.2 V

 High limit of admissible range (DC) 28.8 V

 Current consumption (open-circuit), typically 150 mA

 Current consumption (rated value) 750 mA

 Inrush current, typ. 4A

 I2 t 1 A2s

 External protection of power supply lines 2A

(recommended), min.

 Power loss, typically 4.65 W

CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Technical specifications

Manual, 03/2011, A5E00105475-12 369
 E1101
Installation manual
MA00779 2005-01
English
 Foreword

Installation manual for the E1000 series operator terminals

Foreword
The E1000 operator terminal is developed to satisfy the demands of human-
machine communication. Built-in functions such as displaying and controlling
text, dynamic indication, time channels, alarm and recipe handling are
included.

The operator terminal work, for the most part, in an object-oriented way,
making it easy to understand and use. The configuration operation of the
terminal is made in a personal computer, using the configuration tool E-
Designer. The project is then transferred and stored in the operator terminal.

The operator terminal can be connected to many types of automation

equipment, such as PLCs, servos or drives. In this manual the expression “the
controller“ is used as a general term for the connected equipment.

This manual explains how to install the operator terminal. Please refer to the
reference manual for further information.

 Mitsubishi Electric AB, MA00779, 2005-01

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and is provided as available at the time
of printing. The manufacturer reserves the right to change any information without updating this publication.
The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
Read the entire installation manual prior to installing and using this equipment.
Only qualified personnel may install, operate or repair this equipment. The manufacturer is not responsible
for modified, altered or renovated equipment.
Because the equipment has a wide range of applications, users must acquire the appropriate knowledge to use
the equipment properly in their specific applications.
Persons responsible for the application and the equipment must themselves ensure that each application is in
compliance with all relevant requirements, standards and legislation in respect to configuration and safety.
Only parts and accessories manufactured according to specifications set by The manufacturer may be used.
THE MANUFACTURER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE
INSTALLATION, USE OR REPAIR OF THIS EQUIPMENT, WHETHER ARISING IN TORT,
CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE. BUYER’S SOLE REMEDY SHALL BE THE REPAIR,
REPLACEMENT, OR REFUND OF PURCHASE PRICE, AND THE CHOICE OF THE APPLICABLE
REMEDY SHALL BE AT THE SOLE DISCRETION OF THE MANUFACTURER.

Mitsubishi Electric, MA00779

Foreword

Mitsubishi Electric, MA00779

 Table of Contents

Table of Contents
1 Safety Precautions............................................................................. 1-1
1.1 UL Installation............................................................................... 1-1
1.2 General .......................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 During Use .................................................................................... 1-1
1.4 Service and Maintenance................................................................ 1-2
1.5 Dismantling and Scrapping............................................................ 1-2
2 Installation ....................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Space Requirements ....................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Installation Process......................................................................... 2-1
2.2.1 Mode Switches ............................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.2 Connections to the Controller ........................................................................ 2-3
2.2.3 Other Connections and Peripherals ................................................................ 2-3
3 Technical Data ................................................................................. 3-1
4 Chemical Resistance ......................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Metal Casing.................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Keyboard and Display.................................................................... 4-1
4.2.1 Autotex F250.................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2.2 Touch Screen Surface ..................................................................................... 4-2
5 Operator Terminal Drawings ........................................................... 5-1
5.1 Communication Ports.................................................................... 5-1
5.2 E1101 Outline ............................................................................... 5-2

Mitsubishi Electric, MA00779

Table of Contents

Mitsubishi Electric, MA00779

 Safety Precautions

1 Safety Precautions
Both the installer and the owner and/or operator of the operator terminal must read
and understand this installation manual.

1.1 UL Installation
Power, input and output (I/O) wiring must be in accordance with Class 1, Division
2 wiring methods (Article 501-4 (b) of the National Electric Code, NFPA 70) and
in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction.

1.2 General
– Only qualified personnel may install or operate the operator terminal.
– The operator terminal must be installed according to the installation instructions.
– The operator terminal is designed for stationary installation on a plane surface,
where the following conditions are fulfilled:
• no high explosive risks
• no strong magnetic fields
• no direct sunlight
• no large, sudden temperature changes
– Never allow fluids, metal filings or wiring debris to enter any openings in the
operator terminal. This may cause fire or electrical shock.
– The operator terminal fulfills the requirements of article 4 of EMC directive
89/336/EEC.
– Storing the operator terminal where the temperature is lower/higher than
recommended in this manual can cause the LCD display liquid to congeal/become
isotopic.
– The LCD display liquid contains a powerful irritant. In case of skin contact, wash
immediately with plenty of water. In case of eye contact, hold the eye open, flush
with plenty of water and get medical attention.
– The supplier is not responsible for modified, altered or reconstructed equipment.
– Use only parts and accessories manufactured according to specifications of the
supplier.
– Peripheral equipment must be appropriate for the application and location.
– The figures in this manual serves an illustrative purpose. Because of the many
variables associated with any particular installation, the supplier cannot assume
responsibility for actual use based on the figures.
– The supplier neither guarantees that the operator terminal is suitable for your
particular application, nor assumes responsibility for your product design,
installation or operation.

1.3 During Use

– Keep the operator terminal clean.
– Emergency stop and other safety functions may not be controlled from the
operator terminal.
– Do not use too much force or sharp objects when touching the keys, display etc.

Mitsubishi Electric, MA00779 1-1

 Safety Precautions

1.4 Service and Maintenance

– Only qualified personnel should carry out repairs.
– The agreed warranty applies.
– Before carrying out any cleaning or maintenance operations, disconnect the
equipment from the electrical supply.
– Clean the display and surrounding front cover with a soft cloth and mild
detergent.
– Replacing the battery incorrectly may result in explosion. Only use batteries
recommended by the supplier.

1.5 Dismantling and Scrapping

– The operator terminal or parts thereof shall be recycled according to local
regulations.
– The following components contain substances that might be hazardous to health
and the environment: lithium battery, electrolytic capacitor and display.

1-2 Mitsubishi Electric, MA00779

 Installation

2 Installation
2.1 Space Requirements
– Installation plate thickness: 1.5 - 9.0 mm (0.06 - 0.35 inch)
– Space requirements when installing the operator terminal:

100 mm
(4.0 inch)

228 mm
(8.98 inch)
100 mm
(4.0 inch)
50 mm 50 mm
(2.0 inch) (2.0 inch)

100 mm
(4.0 inch)
58 mm
(2.28 inch)
302 mm
(11.89 inch)

Caution
The openings on the enclosure are for air convection. Do not cover these openings.

2.2 Installation Process

1. Unpack and check the delivery. If damage is found, notify the supplier.

Panel cut out 264.5 x 206.0 mm

(10.41 x 8.11 inch)

x 13

Note:
Place the operator terminal on a stable surface during installation.
Dropping it or letting it fall may cause damage.

2. Place the panel cut out where the operator terminal is to be situated, draw along
the outer sides of the holes and cut according to the markings.

Mitsubishi Electric, MA00779 2-1

 Installation

3. Secure the operator terminal in position, using all the fastening holes and the
provided brackets and screws:

x 13

0.5 - 1.0 Nm

4. Connect the cables in the specified order.

A Caution
Ensure that the operator terminal and the controller system have the
same electrical grounding (reference voltage level), otherwise errors
in communication may occur.

B Use an M5 screw and a grounding conductor (as short as possible)

with a cross-section of minimum 2.5 mm2.
C
Caution
- Use only shielded communication cables.
- Separate high voltage cables from signal and supply cables.

D Caution
- The operator terminal must be brought to ambient temperature
before it is started up. If condensation forms, ensure that the
operator terminal is dry before connecting it to the power outlet.
- Ensure that the voltage and polarity of the power source is correct.

Power

Controller
CF CARD

B
1

RS422/RS485 24V DC
RS232 24V DC
C

Ethernet

5. Carefully remove the laminated film over the operator terminal display, to avoid
static electricity that could damage the terminal.

2-2 Mitsubishi Electric, MA00779

 Installation

2.2.1 Mode Switches

All mode switches must be in OFF position during operator terminal use.
The mode switches should not be touched unless by qualified personell.

MODE
1 2 3 4

ON DIP

EXPANSION
MODE
1 2 3 4

ON DIP
CF CARD
BUSY

24V DC
RS485
RS422
COM 1

10/100

RS232
COM 2

1
2.2.2 Connections to the Controller
For information about the cables to be used when connecting the operator terminal
to the controller, please refer to the help file for the driver in question.

2.2.3 Other Connections and Peripherals

Cables, peripheral equipment and accessories must be suitable for the application
and its environment. For further details or recommendations, please refer to the
supplier.

Caution
When using a compact flash card, do not remove the card when the busy indicator is
illuminated.

Mitsubishi Electric, MA00779 2-3

 Installation

2-4 Mitsubishi Electric, MA00779

 Technical Data

3 Technical Data
Parameter E1101
Front panel, W x H x D 302 x 228 x 6 mm
Mounting depth 58 mm (158 mm including clearance)
Front panel seal IP 66
Rear panel seal IP 20
Keyboard material/ Touch screen: Polyester on glass *, 1 million finger touch
Front panel operations.
Overlay: Autotex F250 *.
Reverse side material Powder-coated aluminum
Weight 2.0 kg
Serial port RS422/ 25-pin D-sub contact, chassis-mounted female with
RS485 standard locking screws 4-40 UNC.
Serial port RS232C 9-pin D-sub contact, male with standard locking screws 4-40
UNC.
Ethernet Shielded RJ 45
USB Host type A, power consumption max. 500mA
Device type B
CF-slot Compact flash, type I and II
Flash memory for 4 MB
application
Real time clock ±20 PPM + error because of ambient temperature and supply
voltage.
Total max error: 1 min/month at 25 °C
Minimum life of the real time clock battery: 3 years
Temperature coefficient: 0.004 ppm/°C2
Power consumption at Normal: 0.5 A
rated voltage Maximum: 1.0 A
Display TFT-LCD. 800 x 600 pixels, 64K color.
CCFL backlight lifetime at the ambient temperature of
+25 °C: 50,000 h.
Active area of display, 211.2 x 158.4 mm
WxH
Fuse Internal DC fuse, 3.15 AT, 5 x 20 mm
Power supply +24V DC (20 - 30V DC). 3-pin jack connection block.
CE: The power supply must conform with the requirements
for SELV or PELV according to IEC 950 or IEC 742.
UL: The power supply must conform with the requirements
for class II power supplies.
Ambient temperature Vertical installation: 0 ° to +50 °C
Horizontal installation: 0 ° to +40 °C
Storage temperature -20 ° to +70 °C
Relative humidity 5 - 85 % non-condensed
EMC tests on the The operator terminal conforms with the essential protection
operator terminal requirements in article 4 of the directive 89/336/EEC. Noise
tested according to EN6100-6-4 emission and EN61000-6-2
immunity.
UL, cUL approvals Certification in progress
* See section Chemical Resistance for keyboard and display

Mitsubishi Electric, MA00779 3-1

 Technical Data

3-2 Mitsubishi Electric, MA00779

 Chemical Resistance

4 Chemical Resistance
4.1 Metal Casing
The frame and casing material is powder-coated aluminum. This powder paint
withstands exposure of up to 24 hours duration to the following chemicals without
visible change:

Ammonia 25% Isopropyl alcohol Nitric acid 3%

De-ionized water Tap water Chlorhydric acid 10%
Butanol Cooling liquid 50% Washer fluid 33%
Citric acid 10% Ligroin Sulphuric acid 20%
Diesel Cooking oil Turpentine
Ethanol 99.5% denaturated Lactic acid 10% Urea saturated
FAM-Normal petrol Sodium di-chromate Hydroperoxide 3%
saturated
Alcohol 95% Caustic soda 5% Acetic acid 10%
Phosphoric acid 43% Sodium hypochlorite Alu-cleaner
solution
Glycol Sodium carbonate 10% -
Industrial petrol Sodium chloride 20% -

4.2 Keyboard and Display

4.2.1 Autotex F250
Autotex F250 covers the overlay surrounding the touch screen.

Solvent Resistance
Autotex F250 withstands exposure of more than 24 hours duration under DIN 42
115 Part 2 to the following chemicals without visible change:

Potassium ferrocyanide/ Sodium hypchlorite <20% 1.1.1. Trichloroethane

ferricyanide (bleach) (Genklene)
Cyclohexanol Acetaldehyde Ethylacetate
Diacetone alcohol Aliphatic hydrocarbons Diethyl ether
Glycol Toluene N-Butyl acetate
Isopropanol Xylene Amylacetate
Glycerine White spirit Butycellosolve
Methanol Fromic acid <50% Ether
Triacetin Acetic acid <50% MIBK
Dowanol DRM/PM Phosphoric acid <30% Cutting oil
Acetone Hydrochloric acid <36% Potassium carbonate
Metyl ethyl ketone Nitric acid <10% Washing powders
Dioxan Trichloracetic acid <50% Fabric conditioner
Cyclohexanone Sulphuric acid <10% Ferric chloride
Ethanol Formaldehyde 37% - 42% Ferrous chlorid
Isophorone Potassium hydroxide <30% Dibutyl Phthalate

Mitsubishi Electric, MA00779 4-1

 Chemical Resistance

Ammonia <40% Linseed oil Dioctyl Phthalate

Caustic soda <40% Paraffin oil Sodium carbonate
Hydrogen peroxide <25% Blown castor oil Petrol
Alkalicarbonate Silicone oil Teepol
Bichromate Turpentine substitute Water
Diesel oil Univeral brake fluid Sea water
Acetonitrile Decon -
Sodium bisulphate Aviation fuel -

Autotex withstands DIN 42 115 Part 2 exposure of up to 1 hour duration to glacial

acetic acid without visible change.

Autotex is not resistant to high pressure steam at over 100 °C or the following
chemicals:

Concentrated mineral acids Benzyl alcohol

Concentrated caustic solution Mehylene chloride

Autotex withstands 24 hours exposure to the following reagents at 50 °C without

visible staining:

Top Job Grape Juice Ariel Ajax

Jet Dry Milk Persil Vim
Gumption Coffee Wisk Domestos
Fantastic - Lenor Vortex
Formula 409 - Downey Windex

Very slight discoloration was noted under critical viewing conditions with the
following materials:

Tomato juice Tomato ketchup Lemon juice Mustard

Outdoor Use
In common with all polyester based films Autotex F250 is not suitable for use in
conditoins of long term exposure to direct sunlight.

4.2.2 Touch Screen Surface

The touch screen surface on the operator terminal withstands exposure to the
following solvents without visible change:

Solvents Time
Acetone 10 minutes
Isopropanol 10 minutes
Toulene 5 hours

Protection Film
It is recommended to use the Autoflex EB touch display protection film, supplied by
Beijer Electronics AB.

4-2 Mitsubishi Electric, MA00779

 Operator Terminal Drawings

5 Operator Terminal Drawings

5.1 Communication Ports

RS-232

RS-422 RS-485
RS-422/485

USB

Ethernet

Drawing No. 5005S, Date 2004-10-27

Mitsubishi Electric, MA00779 5-1

 Operator Terminal Drawings

5.2 E1101 Outline

Drawing No. 5113S, Date 2004-10-26

5-2 Mitsubishi Electric, MA00779

Mitsubishi Electric Automation, Inc.
500 Corporate Woods Parkway
Vernon Hills, IL 60061, USA

Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.

Gothaer Strasse 8
D-40880 Ratingen, Germany
 Extract from the online
catalog

PLC-RSP- 24UC/21
Order No.: 2966485

The illustration shows the version PLC-RSC-24DC/21

http://eshop.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2966485

PLC relay, consisting of base terminal block PLC-BSP.../21 with

spring-cage connection and pluggable miniature relay with power
contact, for assembly on DIN rail NS 35/7.5, 1 PDT, input voltage 24 V
AC/DC

Product notes
WEEE/RoHS-compliant since:
Commercial data 02/09/2006
EAN
4 017918 165338

Pack 10 pcs.
Customs tariff 85364190
Gross weight in pieces 0.03243 KG http://
www.download.phoenixcontact.com
Net weight per piece (exclusive packing) 0.03059 KG Please note that the data given
Catalog page information Page 322 (C-7-2013) here has been taken from the
online catalog. For comprehensive
information and data, please refer
to the user documentation. The
General Terms and Conditions of
Use apply to Internet downloads.

Technical data

Dimensions
Width 6.2 mm
Height 80 mm
Depth 94 mm

PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 1 / 7

http://www.phoenixcontact.com Jul 8, 2014
PLC-RSP- 24UC/21 Order No.: 2966485
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2966485

Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature (operation) -40 °C ... 60 °C
Ambient temperature (storage/transport) -40 °C ... 85 °C

Coil side
Nominal input voltage UN 24 V AC/DC
Typical input current at UN 11 mA (at UN = 24 V AC)
8.5 mA (at UN = 24 V DC)
Typical response time 6 ms
Typical release time 15 ms
Operating voltage display Yellow LED
Protective circuit Bridge rectifier Bridge rectifier

Contact side
Contact type 1 PDT
Contact material AgSnO
Maximum switching voltage 250 V AC/DC (The separating plate PLC-ATP should be installed
for voltages larger than 250 V (L1, L2, L3) between identical
terminal blocks in adjacent modules. Potential bridging is then
carried out with FBST 8-PLC... or ...FBST 500...)
Minimum switching voltage 5 V (at 100 mA)
Maximum inrush current on request
Min. switching current 10 mA (at 12 V)
Limiting continuous current 6A
Interrupting rating (ohmic load) max. 140 W (at 24 V DC)
20 W (at 48 V DC)
18 W (at 60 V DC)
23 W (at 110 V DC)
40 W (at 220 V DC)
1500 VA (for 250 V AC)
Switching capacity in acc. with DIN VDE 0660/IEC 2 A (at 24 V, DC13)
60947
0.2 A (at 110 V, DC13)
0.1 A (at 220 V, DC13)
3 A (at 24 V, AC15)
3 A (at 120 V, AC15)
3 A (at 230 V, AC15)

PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 2 / 7

http://www.phoenixcontact.com Jul 8, 2014
PLC-RSP- 24UC/21 Order No.: 2966485
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2966485

General
Test voltage relay winding/relay contact 4 kV AC (50 Hz, 1 min.)
Operating mode 100% operating factor
Mechanical service life 7
2 x 10 cycles
Inflammability class according to UL 94 V0
Designation Standards/regulations
Standards/regulations IEC 60664
EN 50178
IEC 62103
Pollution degree 3
Surge voltage category III
Mounting position any
Assembly instructions In rows with zero spacing

Connection data
Connection method Spring-cage connection
Stripping length 8 mm
Conductor cross section stranded min. 0.14 mm²
Conductor cross section stranded max. 2.5 mm²
Conductor cross section solid min. 0.14 mm²
Conductor cross section solid max. 2.5 mm²
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max 14
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min. 26

Certificates / Approvals

Certification cULus Listed, cULus Recognized, GOST, GL

Certifications applied for:

Certification Ex:

PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 3 / 7

http://www.phoenixcontact.com Jul 8, 2014
PLC-RSP- 24UC/21 Order No.: 2966485
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2966485

Accessories

Item Designation Description

Assembly
0801762 NS 35/ 7,5 CU UNPERF DIN rail, material: Copper, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35
2000MM mm, length: 2 m
0801733 NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: steel galvanized and passivated with a thick
layer, perforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2000 mm
0801681 NS 35/ 7,5 UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35
mm, length: 2 m
0801377 NS 35/ 7,5 V2A UNPERF DIN rail, unperforated, Width: 35 mm, Height: 7.5 mm,
2000MM Length: 2000 mm, Color: silver
1201756 NS 35/15 AL UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, deep drawn, high profile, unperforated, 1.5 mm thick,
material: aluminum, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length 2000 mm
1201895 NS 35/15 CU UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Copper, unperforated, 1.5 mm thick, height 15
mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
1201730 NS 35/15 PERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: steel galvanized and passivated with a thick
layer, perforated, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2000 mm
1201714 NS 35/15 UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, height 15 mm, width 35
mm, length: 2 m
1201798 NS 35/15-2,3 UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, 2.3 mm thick, height 15
mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
2966841 PLC-ATP BK Separating plate, 2 mm thick, required at the start and end of a
PLC terminal strip. Furthermore, it is used for: visual separation
of groups, safe isolation of different voltages of neighboring PLC
relays in acc. with DIN VDE 0106-101, isolation

Bridges
2966812 FBST 6-PLC BU Single plug-in bridge, Length: 6 mm, Number of positions: 2,
Color: blue
2966825 FBST 6-PLC GY Single plug-in bridge, Length: 6 mm, Number of positions: 2,
Color: gray
2966236 FBST 6-PLC RD Single plug-in bridge, Length: 6 mm, Number of positions: 2,
Color: red
2967688 FBST 8-PLC GY Single plug-in bridge, Length: 8 mm, Number of positions: 2,
Color: gray
2966692 FBST 500-PLC BU Continuous plug-in bridge, Length: 500 mm, Color: blue
2966838 FBST 500-PLC GY Continuous plug-in bridge, Length: 500 mm, Color: gray
2966786 FBST 500-PLC RD Continuous plug-in bridge, Length: 500 mm, Color: red

PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 4 / 7

http://www.phoenixcontact.com Jul 8, 2014
PLC-RSP- 24UC/21 Order No.: 2966485
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2966485

Marking
1051016 ZB 6,LGS:FORTL.ZAHLEN Zack marker strip, Strip, white, labeled, can be labeled with:
Plotter, Printed horizontally: Consecutive numbers 1 - 10, 11 - 20,
etc. up to 491 - 500, Mounting type: Snap into tall marker groove,
for terminal block width: 6.2 mm, Lettering field: 6.15 x 10.5 mm
5060935 ZB 6/WH-100:UNBEDRUCKT Zack marker strip, Strip, white, unlabeled, can be labeled with:
Plotter, Mounting type: Snap into tall marker groove, for terminal
block width: 6.2 mm, Lettering field: 6.15 x 10.5 mm
1051003 ZB 6:UNBEDRUCKT Zack marker strip, Strip, white, unlabeled, can be labeled with:
Plotter, Mounting type: Snap into tall marker groove, for terminal
block width: 6.2 mm, Lettering field: 6.15 x 10.5 mm

Power terminal block

2966508 PLC-ESK GY Power terminal block, for the input of up to four potentials, for
mounting on NS 35/7.5

Tools
1204517 SZF 1-0,6X3,5 Actuation tool, for ST terminal blocks, also suitable for use as a
bladed screwdriver, size: 0.6 x 3.5 x 100 mm, 2-component grip,
with non-slip grip

Diagrams/Drawings

Diagram

Interrupting rating
Curve A
Maximum permissible continuous voltage
Umax with limiting continuous current on the
contact side (see relevant technical data)
Curve B
Minimum permissible operate voltage Uop
after pre-excitation (see relevant technical
data)

PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 5 / 7

http://www.phoenixcontact.com Jul 8, 2014
PLC-RSP- 24UC/21 Order No.: 2966485
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2966485

Circuit diagram

PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 6 / 7

http://www.phoenixcontact.com Jul 8, 2014
PLC-RSP- 24UC/21 Order No.: 2966485
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.net/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2966485

Address

PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG

Flachsmarktstr. 8
32825 Blomberg,Germany
Phone +49 5235 3 00
Fax +49 5235 3 41200
http://www.phoenixcontact.com

© 2014 Phoenix Contact

Technical modifications reserved;

PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 7 / 7

http://www.phoenixcontact.com Jul 8, 2014
 TS
Rittal
C Technische
Dokumentation
TS 8

Rittal
Technical
documentation
TS 8

Montage-
Anleitung TS 8

Assembly
guide TS 8
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
Seite/Page
Dach Roof 3
Boden Base 4-5
Rückwand Rear wall 6
Tür Door 7
Tür, 180° drehen Rotate door through 180° 8-9
Verschlußsystem Lock system 10-11
Tür, 180°-Scharnier Door, 180° hinge 12
Seitenwände Side panels 13
Montageplatte, versetzen Mounting plate, relocate 14
Montageplatte, hinterste Einbauposition Mounting plate, rearmost position 15
Montageplatten Zwischenstück Mounting plate infill 16
Anreihverbinder – Transport Baying connector – transport 17
Anreihverbinder – Abdichtung Baying connector – seal 18-19
Schienensysteme Rail systems 20-21
Erdungskonzept Earthing concept 22
Kabelrangierraum Cable shunting area 23

3 4-5 6 7 8-9

10-11 12 13 14 15 16

17 18-19 20 21 22 23

2
 Mmin = 10 Nm
Mmax = 35 Nm
Torx 25

M 12

M 12

M 12
A

m
0m
80
0 0/
6
0/
40

BZ 5,5 x 13 mm

m
00m
/ 12
00
10
A

Dach · Roof

3
 22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
3 14
21
11
01
91
7 8
34
56 Torx 25 Mmin = 1,5 Nm
1 2
mm Torx 30 Mmax = 2,5 Nm

IP

IP

IP

M 8 x 12 mm

IP
IP

IP

IP
IP

IP
m
m
00
IP IP /8
0
/ 60
IP 0
40
IP

IP

IP IP

IP
IP

IP
IP IP

IP m
m
0
IP 20
/1
00 BZ 5,5 x 13 mm
10
IP

Boden · Base

4
 SW 13

M 6 x 12 mm

B
1

Tür · Door

7
 Torx 30

Tür, 180° drehen · Rotate door through 180°

8
A L

R
M 6 x 12 mm

A
M 6 x 12 mm

9
 Torx 25

900

TS 8611 . 100 TS 8611 . 160

TS 8611 . 110

TS 8611 . 220

TS 8611 . 120

TS 8611 . 130

TS 8611 . 140

TS 8611 . 150
A
TS 8611 . 170

Verschlußsystem · Lock system

10
A

11
 22
21
20
19
18
17
16
4 15
31
SW 8 91
01
11
21

7 8
56
34
1 2
Torx 30 mm ø 8,5 mm

1
1

M 6 x 12 mm

1
180o

ø 8,5 mm

3 4 5

M 5 x 8 mm

Tür, 180°-Scharnier · Door, 180° hinge

12
 Preface 1

Introduction 2

Network Topologies 3
SIMATIC NET
Product Characteristics 4
SCALANCE
Industrial Ethernet 5
Installation and Maintenance
SCALANCE X-100 and
SCALANCE X-200 Product Line Configuration / Diagnostics
using Remote Mechanisms 6
Commissioning Manual

PROFINET IO Functionality 7

Notes on the CE Mark 8

References 9

Dimension Drawings 10

12/2004
A5E00349864 Release 2
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring to property damage only have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

Danger
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

Warning
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Attention
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.

Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and
operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes
in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and
label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

Prescribed Usage
Note the following:

Warning
This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in
connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended
by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and
assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.

Copyright Siemens AG 2004. All rights reserved. Disclaimer of Liability

The distribution and duplication of this document or the utilization and transmission of its We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the
contents are not permitted without express written permission. Offenders will be liable for hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot
damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed
model or design, are reserved. regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG
Automation and Drives Siemens AG 2004
Postfach 4848, 90327 Nuremberg, Germany Technical data subject to change

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft A5E00349864 Release 2

Table of contents
1 Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Preface....................................................................................................................................... 1-1
2 Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 2-1
3 Network Topologies ................................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1 Network Topologies ................................................................................................................... 3-1
4 Product Characteristics........................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 SCALANCE X108 ...................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Components of the SCALANCE X108 Product ......................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Unpacking and Checking ........................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.3 SCALANCE X108 Product Characteristics................................................................................ 4-2
4.1.4 SCALANCE X108 TP Ports ....................................................................................................... 4-3
4.1.5 SCALANCE X108 Power Supply and Signaling Contact .......................................................... 4-4
4.1.6 SCALANCE X108 Button........................................................................................................... 4-5
4.1.7 SCALANCE X108 LEDs ............................................................................................................ 4-6
4.1.8 SCALANCE X108 Technical Specifications .............................................................................. 4-6
4.2 SCALANCE X104-2 ................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.2.1 SCALANCE X104-2 Components Supplied .............................................................................. 4-8
4.2.2 Unpacking and Checking ........................................................................................................... 4-9
4.2.3 SCALANCE X104-2 Product Properties .................................................................................... 4-9
4.2.4 SCALANCE X104-2 TP Ports .................................................................................................. 4-10
4.2.5 SCALANCE X104-2 FO Ports.................................................................................................. 4-11
4.2.6 SCALANCE X104-2 Power Supply and Signaling Contact ..................................................... 4-12
4.2.7 SCALANCE X104-2 Button...................................................................................................... 4-13
4.2.8 SCALANCE X104-2 Displays .................................................................................................. 4-14
4.2.9 SCALANCE X104-2 Technical Specifications ......................................................................... 4-15
4.3 SCALANCE X106-1 ................................................................................................................. 4-17
4.3.1 SCALANCE X106-1 Components Supplied ............................................................................ 4-17
4.3.2 Unpacking and Checking ......................................................................................................... 4-17
4.3.3 SCALANCE X106-1 Product Properties .................................................................................. 4-18
4.3.4 SCALANCE X106-1 TP Ports .................................................................................................. 4-18
4.3.5 SCALANCE X106-1 FO Port ................................................................................................... 4-20
4.3.6 SCALANCE X106-1 Power Supply and Signaling Contact ..................................................... 4-20
4.3.7 SCALANCE X106-1 Button...................................................................................................... 4-21
4.3.8 SCALANCE X106-1 Displays .................................................................................................. 4-22
4.3.9 SCALANCE X106-1 Technical Specifications ......................................................................... 4-23
4.4 SCALANCE X208 .................................................................................................................... 4-25
4.4.1 Components of the SCALANCE X208..................................................................................... 4-25
4.4.2 Unpacking and Checking ......................................................................................................... 4-25
4.4.3 SCALANCE X208 Product Properties ..................................................................................... 4-26
4.4.4 SCALANCE X208 TP Ports ..................................................................................................... 4-27
4.4.5 SCALANCE X208 Power Supply and Signaling Contact ........................................................ 4-28

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2 iii
Table of contents

4.4.6 SCALANCE X208 Button ......................................................................................................... 4-29

4.4.7 C-PLUG (Configuration Plug) .................................................................................................. 4-30
4.4.8 SCALANCE X208 Displays...................................................................................................... 4-32
4.4.9 SCALANCE X208 Technical Specifications............................................................................. 4-33
4.5 SCALANCE X204-2 ................................................................................................................. 4-35
4.5.1 Components of the SCALANCE X204-2.................................................................................. 4-35
4.5.2 Unpacking and Checking ......................................................................................................... 4-35
4.5.3 SCALANCE X204-2 Product Properties .................................................................................. 4-36
4.5.4 SCALANCE X204-2 TP Ports .................................................................................................. 4-37
4.5.5 SCALANCE X204-2 FO Ports.................................................................................................. 4-38
4.5.6 SCALANCE X204-2 Power Supply and Signaling Contact ..................................................... 4-38
4.5.7 SCALANCE X204-2 Button...................................................................................................... 4-40
4.5.8 C-PLUG (Configuration Plug) .................................................................................................. 4-40
4.5.9 SCALANCE X204-2 Displays................................................................................................... 4-42
4.5.10 SCALANCE X204-2 Technical Specifications ......................................................................... 4-43
4.6 SCALANCE X206-1 ................................................................................................................. 4-46
4.6.1 Components of the SCALANCE X206-1.................................................................................. 4-46
4.6.2 Unpacking and Checking ......................................................................................................... 4-46
4.6.3 SCALANCE X206-1 Product Properties .................................................................................. 4-46
4.6.4 SCALANCE X206-1 TP Ports .................................................................................................. 4-47
4.6.5 SCALANCE X206-1 FO Ports.................................................................................................. 4-48
4.6.6 SCALANCE X206-1 Power Supply and Signaling Contact ..................................................... 4-49
4.6.7 SCALANCE X206-1 Button...................................................................................................... 4-50
4.6.8 C-PLUG (Configuration Plug) .................................................................................................. 4-51
4.6.9 SCALANCE X206-1 Displays................................................................................................... 4-53
4.6.10 SCALANCE X206-1 Technical Specifications ......................................................................... 4-54
5 Installation and Maintenance .................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1 Installation .................................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2 Installation on a DIN Rail............................................................................................................ 5-1
5.3 Installation on a Standard Rail ................................................................................................... 5-3
5.4 Wall Mounting ............................................................................................................................ 5-4
5.5 Grounding................................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.6 Fitting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 ............................................................................................... 5-5
5.7 Maintenance............................................................................................................................... 5-8
6 Configuration / Diagnostics using Remote Mechanisms ......................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Assignment of an IP Address..................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.1.2 Configuration with the Primary Setup Tool ................................................................................ 6-2
6.1.2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 6-2
6.1.2.2 Installing the Primary Setup Tool ............................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.2.3 The DLC Protocol....................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.1.2.4 Installing the DLC Protocol......................................................................................................... 6-4
6.1.2.5 Working with the Primary Setup Tool......................................................................................... 6-4
6.1.2.6 Configuring a Module ................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.1.3 Configuration with DHCP ........................................................................................................... 6-8
6.1.3.1 DHCP ......................................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.2 Configuration with Web Based Management (WBM) ................................................................ 6-9
6.2.1 Principle...................................................................................................................................... 6-9
6.2.2 Requirements for Web Based Management.............................................................................. 6-9
6.2.3 Menu Structure of the WBM....................................................................................................... 6-9

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

iv Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2
 Table of contents

6.2.4 LED Simulation ........................................................................................................................ 6-10

6.2.5 Working with WBM................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.2.6 WBM Menus............................................................................................................................. 6-12
6.2.6.1 Management Menus - The Start Menu .................................................................................... 6-12
6.2.6.2 The "System Configuration" WBM Menu................................................................................. 6-12
6.2.6.3 The "System Restart & Defaults" WBM Menu ......................................................................... 6-14
6.2.6.4 The "System Save & Load HTTP" WBM Menu ....................................................................... 6-15
6.2.6.5 The "System Save & Load TFTP" WBM Menu........................................................................ 6-16
6.2.6.6 The "System Version Numbers" WBM Menu .......................................................................... 6-18
6.2.6.7 The "System Passwords" WBM Menu..................................................................................... 6-19
6.2.6.8 The "Status" WBM Menu ......................................................................................................... 6-20
6.2.6.9 The "Fault Mask" WBM Menu.................................................................................................. 6-20
6.2.6.10 The "Ring Redundancy" WBM Menu....................................................................................... 6-21
6.2.6.11 The "C-PLUG Information" WBM Menu................................................................................... 6-23
6.2.6.12 The "Agent Configuration" WBM Menu.................................................................................... 6-25
6.2.6.13 The "Agent Event Configuration" WBM Menu ......................................................................... 6-27
6.2.6.14 The "Agent E-Mail Configuration" WBM Menu ........................................................................ 6-29
6.2.6.15 The "Agent SNMP Configuration" WBM Menu ........................................................................ 6-30
6.2.6.16 The "Agent Trap Configuration" WBM Menu ........................................................................... 6-31
6.2.6.17 The "Switch Configuration (Port Mirroring)" WBM Menu ......................................................... 6-32
6.2.6.18 The "Switch Ports Status" WBM Menu .................................................................................... 6-33
6.2.6.19 The "Switch Port Diagnostics" WBM Menu ............................................................................. 6-34
6.2.6.20 The "Statistics" WBM Menu ..................................................................................................... 6-35
6.2.6.21 The "Statistics Packet Size" WBM Menu................................................................................. 6-37
6.2.6.22 The "Statistics Packet Type" WBM Menu ................................................................................ 6-38
6.2.6.23 The "Statistics Packet Error" WBM Menu ................................................................................ 6-40
6.2.7 SNMP....................................................................................................................................... 6-42
6.2.7.1 Configuration and Diagnostics over SNMP ............................................................................. 6-42
6.3 Configuration over Command Line Interface (CLI) .................................................................. 6-43
6.3.1 Command Line Interface (CLI)................................................................................................. 6-43
7 PROFINET IO Functionality.................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Configuring with PROFINET IO ................................................................................................. 7-1
7.2 Settings in HW Config................................................................................................................ 7-7
8 Notes on the CE Mark ............................................................................................................................ 8-1
8.1 Notes on the CE Mark................................................................................................................ 8-1
9 References ............................................................................................................................................. 9-1
9.1 References................................................................................................................................. 9-1
10 Dimension Drawings............................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1 Dimension Drawing.................................................................................................................. 10-1
Glossary ..................................................................................................................................... Glossary-1
Index

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2 v
Preface 1
1.1 Preface

Purpose of the Commissioning Manual

This commissioning manual supports you when commissioning networks with the devices of
the product line SCALANCE X-100 and X-200.

Validity of this Commissioning Manual

This commissioning manual is valid for the following devices:
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE X108 6GK5108-0BA00-2AA3
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE X104-2 6GK5104-2BB00-2AA3
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE X106-1 6GK5106-1BB00-2AA3
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE X208 6GK5208-0BA00-2AA3
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE X204-2 6GK5204-2BB00-2AA3
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE X206-1 6GK5206-1BB00-2AA3

Further Documentation
The "SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks“ manual
contains additional information on other SIMATIC NET products that you can operate along
with the devices of the SCALANCE X-100 and X-200 product lines in an Industrial Ethernet
network.

Finding Information
To help you to find the information you require more quickly, the manual includes not only
the table of contents but also the following sections in the Appendix:
• Index
• Glossary

Audience
This commissioning manual is intended for persons involved in commissioning networks with
the devices of the SCALANCE X-100 and X-200 product lines.

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2 1-1
Preface
1.1 Preface

Standards and Approvals

The devices of the SCALANCE X-100 and X-200 product lines meet the requirements for the
CE mark. You will find detailed information in the section "Notes on CE Marking" in this
commissioning manual.

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

1-2 Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2
Introduction 2
2.1 Introduction
This chapter provides you with an overview of the functions of the Industrial Ethernet
switches of the SCALANCE X-100 and X-200 product lines.
The devices of the SCALANCE X-100 are unmanaged Industrial Ethernet switches with up
to eight ports and on-site diagnostics for applications in the vicinity of the machinery.
The devices of the SCALANCE X-200 are managed Industrial Ethernet switches that can be
used universally for applications ranging from those in the vicinity of the machinery to
networked units. Configuration engineering and remote diagnostics are integrated in the
SIMATIC STEP 7 engineering tool increasing the plant availability.

What Is Possible?
The devices of the SCALANCE X-100 or SCALANCE X-200 product lines, allow the cost-
effective installation of Industrial Ethernet bus, star, or ring structures with switching
functionality.

Note
It is not possible to use devices of the SCALANCE X-100 product line in a redundant ring
because they do not support redundancy.

Note
The requirements of EN61000-4-5, surge test on power supply lines are met only when a
Blitzductor VT AD 24V type no. 918 402 is used
Manufacturer:
DEHN+SÖHNE GmbH+Co.KG Hans Dehn Str.1 Postfach 1640 D-92306 Neumarkt,
Germany

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2 2-1
Introduction
2.1 Introduction

Warning
When used under hazardous conditions (zone 2), the devices of the SCALANCE X-100 and
SCALANCE X-200 product lines must be installed in an enclosure.
To comply with ATEX100a (EN 50021), this enclosure must meet the requirements of at
least IP54 in compliance with EN 60529.
WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD: DO NOT CONNECT OR DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT
UNLESS AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NONHAZARDOUS.

Note
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

2-2 Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2
Network Topologies 3
3.1 Network Topologies
Switching technology allows extensive networks to be set up with numerous nodes and
simplifies network expansion.

Which topologies can be implemented?

Bus, ring, or star topologies can be implemented with the devices of the SCALANCE X-100
or SCALANCE X-200 product lines.

Bus Topology

Figure 3-1 Electrical / Optical Linear Topology with SCALANCE X-100

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2 3-1
Network Topologies
3.1 Network Topologies

Star Topology

Figure 3-2 Electrical Star Topology, Example with SCALANCE X108

Figure 3-3 Optical Star Topology, Example with SCALANCE X-400 and SCALANCE X206-1

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

3-2 Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2
 Network Topologies
3.1 Network Topologies

Ring Topology

Figure 3-4 Optical Ring Topology, Example with SCALANCE X204-2 and SCALANCE X-400 as
Redundancy Manager

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2 3-3
Network Topologies
3.1 Network Topologies

Figure 3-5 Electrical Ring Topology, Example with SCALANCE X204-2 and SCALANCE X-400 as
Redundancy Manager

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

3-4 Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2
 Network Topologies
3.1 Network Topologies

Figure 3-6 Ring Topology with Electrical and Optical Ring Links, Example with SCALANCE X206-1,
SCALANCE X208, and SCALANCE X-400 as Redundancy Manager

To increase availability, optical or electrical bus topologies made up of SCALANCE X-200

switches with a SCALANCE X414-3E, OSM version 2, or ESM version 2 configured as a
redundancy manager can be closed to form a ring. The SCALANCE X-200 switches are first
connected over their ring ports to form a bus. The two ends of the bus are closed to form a
ring by a SCALANCE X414-3E or OSM / ESM operating in the redundancy manager mode.
In contrast to the ring ports of the SCALANCE X-200 switches, the ring ports of the
redundancy manager are disconnected from each other during problem-free network
operation.
The SCALANCE X414-3E or OSM / ESM operating in the redundancy manager mode
monitors the connected bus over its ring ports and switches the ring ports through if there is
an interruption on the connected bus; in other words, it restores a functioning bus over this
substitute path. Reconfiguration takes place within 0.3 s.
As soon as the problem has been eliminated, the original topology is restored; in other
words, the ring ports in the redundancy manager are once again disconnected from each
other.

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2 3-5
Product Characteristics
4.6 SCALANCE X206-1

4.6 SCALANCE X206-1

4.6.1 Components of the SCALANCE X206-1

What ships with the SCALANCE X206-1?

• SCALANCE X206-1 device
• 2-pin plug-in terminal block
• 4-pin plug-in terminal block
• Product information
• CD
– Commissioning Manual
– PST tool
– GSD file
– SNMP OPC profile

4.6.2 Unpacking and Checking

Unpacking, Checking
1. Make sure that the package is complete.
2. Check all the parts for transport damage.

Warning
Do not use any parts that show evidence of damage!

4.6.3 SCALANCE X206-1 Product Properties

Possible Attachments
The SCALANCE X206-1 has six RJ-45 jacks and a BFOC port for the connection of end
devices or other network segments.

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

4-46 Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2
 Product Characteristics
4.6 SCALANCE X206-1

Note
The BFOC socket (Bayonet Fiber Optic Connector) corresponds to the ST socket.

Figure 4-18 SCALANCE X206-1

4.6.4 SCALANCE X206-1 TP Ports

Connector Pinout
On the SCALANCE X206-1, the TP ports are implemented as RJ-45 sockets with MDI-X
assignment (Medium Dependent Interface–Autocrossover) of a network component.

Notice
TP cords or TP-XP cords with a maximum length of 10 m can be connected to the RJ-45 TP
port.
With the IE FC cables and IE FC RJ-45 plug 180, an overall cable length of a maximum of
100 m is permitted between two devices depending on the cable type.

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2 4-47
Product Characteristics
4.6 SCALANCE X206-1

Autonegotiation
Autonegotiation means the automatic detection of the functionality of the port at the opposite
end. Using autonegotiation, repeaters or DTEs can detect the functionality available at the
port of a partner device allowing automatic configuration of different types of device. With
autonegotiation, two components connected to a link segment can exchange parameters
and set themselves to match the supported communication functionality.

Note
Devices not supporting autonegotiation must be set to 100 Mbps/ half duplex or 10 Mbps
half duplex.

Note
The SCALANCE X206-1 is a plug-and-play device that does not require settings to be made
for commissioning.

MDI /MDIX Autocrossover Function

The advantage of the MDI /MDIX autocrossover function is that straight-through cables can
be used throughout and crossover Ethernet cables are unnecessary. This prevents
malfunctions resulting from mismatching send and receive wires. This makes installation
much easier for the user.
The devices of the SCALANCE X-100 and X-200 product lines all support the MDI / MDIX
autocrossover function.

Notice
Please note that the direct connection of two ports on the switch or accidental connection
over several switches causes an illegal loop. Such a loop can lead to network overload and
network failures.

4.6.5 SCALANCE X206-1 FO Ports

Transmission speed
The transmission rate of the optical Fast Ethernet ports is 100 Mbps.

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

4-48 Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2
 Product Characteristics
4.6 SCALANCE X206-1

Transmission Mode
The transmission mode for 100Base-FX is specified in the IEEE 802.3u standard.
Since the full duplex mode and the transmission rate cannot be modified for optical
transmission, autonegotiation cannot be selected.

Transmission Medium
Data transmission is over multimode fiber-optic cable (FOC). The wavelength is 1310 nm.
Multimode fiber-optic cables are used with a core of 50 or 62.5 µm; the light source is an
LED.
The outer diameter of the FOC is 125 µm.

Range
The maximum transmission range (segment length) is 3 km.

Connectors
The cables are connected over BFOC sockets.

4.6.6 SCALANCE X206-1 Power Supply and Signaling Contact

Power Supply
The power supply is connected using a 4-pin plug-in terminal block. The power supply can
be connected redundantly. Both inputs are isolated. There is no distribution of load. When a
redundant power supply is used, the power supply unit with the higher output voltage
supplies the SCALANCE X206-1 alone. The power supply is connected over a high
resistance with the enclosure to allow an ungrounded set up.

Figure 4-19 SCALANCE X206-1 Power Supply

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2 4-49
Product Characteristics
4.6 SCALANCE X206-1

Warning
The SCALANCE X206-1 is designed for operation with safety extra-low voltage. This means
that only safety extra-low voltages (SELV) complying with IEC950/EN60950/ VDE0805 can
be connected to the power supply terminals.
The power supply unit to supply the SCALANCE X206-1 must comply with NEC Class 2
(voltage range 18 - 32 V, current requirement 350 mA)
The signaling contact can be subjected to a maximum load of 100 mA (safety extra-low
voltage (SELV), DC 24 V).
Never operate the SCALANCE X206-1 with AC voltage or DC voltage higher than 32 V DC.

Signaling Contact
The signaling contact is connected to a 2-pin plug-in terminal block. The signaling contact
(relay contact) is a floating switch with which error/fault states can be signaled by breaking
the contact.

Figure 4-20 SCALANCE X206-1 Signaling Contact

The following errors/faults can be signaled by the signaling contact:

• The failure of a link at a monitored port.
• The failure of one of the two redundant power supplies.
• The C-PLUG is also monitored. If a C-PLUG is in the device when you press the button,
this is also stored and monitored
The connection or disconnection of a communication node on an unmonitored port does not
lead to an error message.
The signaling contact remains activated until the error/fault is eliminated or until the current
status is applied as the new desired status using the button.
When the device is turned off, the signaling contact is always activated (open).

4.6.7 SCALANCE X206-1 Button

What does the button do?

Using the button, you can display and modify the set fault mask.

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

4-50 Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2
 Product Characteristics
4.6 SCALANCE X206-1

After pressing the button, the currently valid fault mask is displayed for approximately 3
seconds. The monitored ports flash at a frequency of 5 Hz.
After 3 seconds the new fault mask is displayed. The flashing frequency is reduced to 2.5
Hz. After a further 3 seconds, the new fault mask is adopted and saved. The monitored ports
are indicated by permanently lit LEDs until the button is released.
As long as the LEDs are still flashing, the saving of the mask can be interrupted by releasing
the button.
If an empty fault mask is set (no port is monitored) or you want to set an empty mask, four 4
LEDs flash on and off alternating with their neighboring LEDs.
At the same time, you can also set the monitoring of the redundant power supply with the
fault mask. Monitoring of the power supply is activated only when both power supplies are
connected when the fault mask is saved.
The factory default is no port monitoring.
If the button is pressed longer (15 seconds), the device is reset to "factory defaults". This is
indicated by all the Port LEDs (green) flashing. During this activity, the device must not be
turned off.

4.6.8 C-PLUG (Configuration Plug)

Area of Application
The C-PLUG is an exchangeable medium for storage of the configuration and project
engineering data of the basic device. This means that the configuration data remains
available if the basic device is replaced.

How It Works
Power is supplied by the end device. The C-PLUG retains all data permanently when the
power is turned off.
If an empty C-PLUG (factory settings) is inserted, all configuration data of the SCALANCE X-
200 is saved to it when the device starts up. Changes to the configuration during operation
are also saved on the C-PLUG without any operator intervention being necessary.
A basic device with an inserted C-PLUG automatically uses the configuration data of the C-
PLUG when it starts up. This is, however, only possible when the data was written by a
compatible device type.
This allows fast and simple replacement of the basic device. If a device is replaced, the C-
PLUG is taken from the failed component and inserted in the replacement. The first time it is
started up, the replacement device has the same configuration as the failed device except
for the MAC address set by the vendor.

Using a Previously Written C-PLUG

If you want to insert a C-PLUG that has already been used and has been written to into a
basic device with a different configuration, the existing C-PLUG data must first be deleted.

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2 4-51
Product Characteristics
4.6 SCALANCE X206-1

Note
The device normally starts up with the configuration of the C-PLUG, assuming this was
written to by a compatible device type.
The C-PLUG must now be deleted in "C-PLUG Information" menu of Web Based
Management or the configuration of the device must be copied to the C-PLUG. The device
starts up with the new configuration of the device only after the device has restarted.

If the C-PLUG was written by an incompatible device type, the basic device will not start up
fully and signals an error. The delete function can nevertheless be used. When the device
next starts up, the current configuration data of the basic device is written to the C-PLUG.

Diagnostics
Inserting a C-PLUG that does not contain the configuration of a compatible device type,
inadvertently removing the C-PLUG, or general malfunctions of the C-PLUG are indicated by
the diagnostic mechanisms of the switch (LEDs, PROFINET, SNMP, WBM, etc.).

Inserting in the C-PLUG Slot

The C-PLUG is not supplied with the devices of the SCALANCE X-200 product line. It is
available as an optional accessory.
The slot for the C-PLUG is located on the back of the device.
To insert the C-PLUG, remove the screw cover. The C-PLUG is inserted in the receptacle.
The screw cover must then be closed correctly.

Notice
The C-PLUG may only be inserted or removed when the power is off!

Removing the C-PLUG

It is only necessary to remove the C-PLUG if the basic device develops a fault.
The C-PLUG can be removed from the slot using flat pliers, tweezers, or a small screwdriver.

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

4-52 Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2
 Product Characteristics
4.6 SCALANCE X206-1

Figure 4-21 Removing the C-PLUG from the Receptacle

4.6.9 SCALANCE X206-1 Displays

Fault indicator (red LED)

Status Meaning
lit red The SCALANCE X206-1 detects an error. At the same time, the
signaling contact opens.
The following faults are detected:
1. Link down event on a monitored port
2. Failure of one of the two redundant power supplies.
3. C-PLUG
4. Device startup, the LED is lit for approx. 20s.
flashes red An internal fault was detected.
Notify the maintenance personnel and, if necessary, send the
device in for repair.
not lit No fault detected by the SCALANCE X206-1.

Power indicator (green LED)

The status of the power supply is indicated by two green LEDs:

Status Meaning
lit green Power supply L1 or L2 is connected.
not lit Power supply L1 and/or L2 not connected or <14 V.

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2 4-53
Product Characteristics
4.6 SCALANCE X206-1

Port status indicator (green/yellow LEDs)

The status of the ports is indicated by seven two-color LEDs:

Status Meaning
Port 1 through 7 LED lit green TP link exists, no data reception
Port 1 through 7 LED lit yellow TP link exists, data received at TP port
Device startup, the LED is lit for approx. 6s.
Ports 1 through 7 LED flash yellow Setting or display of the fault mask
Port 1 through 7 LED flashes green The "Show Location" function was activated over Ethernet (e.g.
PST tool).
PROFINET IO operation was started with the PN IO controller,
the attempt to change the fault mask with the button was
rejected by all the port LEDs flashing once.
The button was pressed for longer than 15 s to reset the
configuration.

LED Display during Startup

When the device starts up, the following LEDs light up in the following order:
• Power LEDs (green) light up immediately after turning on the power.
• Port LEDs (yellow) light up for approx. 6 s, the red LED is off.
• Port LEDs go off, the red error LED is lit for approx. 20 s.
After the port LEDs go off, the correct link status is displayed after approx. 2 s.
The device is now ready for operation.

4.6.10 SCALANCE X206-1 Technical Specifications

Technical Specifications of the SCALANCE X206-1

Ports
Attachment of DTEs or network components over 6 x RJ-45 sockets with MDI-X pinning 10/100
twisted pair Mbps (half/ full duplex)
Connection of further network components over 2 x BFOC sockets
FOC. (100 Mbps, full duplex to 100 BaseFX)
Connector for power supply 1 x 4-pin plug-in terminal block
Connector for signaling contact 1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal block
Electrical Data
Power supply 2 x 24 V DC
(18 - 32 V DC)
safety extra-low voltage (SELV)
Power loss at DC 24 V 4.8 W
Current consumption at rated voltage 200 mA

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

4-54 Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2
 Product Characteristics
4.6 SCALANCE X206-1

Ports
Overvoltage protection at input PTC resetable fuse (0.6 A / 60 V)
Permitted Cable Lengths
Network span parameter/TP cable length
0 – 100 m IE FC TP standard cable with IE FC RJ-45 plug
180
or
IE FC outlet RJ-45 with IE FC TP standard cable
0 – 85 m (0 - 90 m) + 10 m TP cord
IE FC TP marine/trailing/flexible with IE FC RJ-45
plug 180
or
IE FC TP marine/trailing/flexible (0 - 75 m) + 10
0 -3,000 m m TP cord over IE FC outlet RJ-45
Glass FOC
62.5/125 µm or 50/125 µm glass fiber;
≤ 1 dB/km at 1300 nm;
600 MHz x km;
6 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation with 3
dB link power margin
Aging time
Aging time 30 seconds

Permitted Environmental Conditions / EMC

Operating temperature 0° C through +60° C
Storage/transport temperature -40° C through +80° C
Relative humidity in operation ‹ 95% (no condensation)
Operating altitude 2000 m at max 56 °C ambient temperature
3000 m at max. 50 °C ambient temperature
RF interference level EN 50081-2 Class A
Noise immunity EN 50082-2
Degree of protection Tested to IP30
Approvals
c-UL-us UL 60950
CSA C22.2 No. 60950
c-Ul-us for hazardous locations UL 1604, UL 2279Pt.15
FM FM 3611
C-TICK AS/NZS 2064 (Class A).
CE EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2
ATEX Zone 2 EN50021

MTBF
MTBF 42.56 years
Construction

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2 4-55
Product Characteristics
4.6 SCALANCE X206-1

MTBF
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 60 x 125 x 124
Weight in g 780
Installation options Standard rail
S7-300 standard rail
Wall Mounting
Order Numbers
SCALANCE X206-1 6GK5206-1BB00-2AA3
"Industrial Ethernet TP and Fiber Optic Networks" 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
manual
IE FC Stripping Tool 6GK1901-1GA00
IE FC blade cassettes 6GK1901-1GB00
IE FC TP standard cable 6XV1840 2AH10
IE FC TP trailing cable 6XV1840-3AH10
IE FC TP marine cable 6XV1840-4AH10
IE FC TP trailing cable GP 6XV1870-2D
IE FC TP flexible cable 6XV1870-2B
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 pack of 1 6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 pack of 10 6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 pack of 50 6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0
C-PLUG 6GK1 900-0AB00

Note
The number of SCALANCE X Industrial Ethernet Switches connected in a line influences the
frame propagation time.
When a frame passes through the devices of the SCALANCE X-100 and/or SCALANCE X-
200 product lines, it is delayed by the store and forward function of the switch:
- with a 64 byte frame length by approx. 10 µs (at 100 Mbps)
- with a 1500 byte frame length by approx. 130 µs (at 100 Mbps)
This means that the more devices of the SCALANCE X-100 and/or SCALANCE X-200
product lines that a frame passes through, the higher the frame propagation time will be.

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

4-56 Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2
Installation and Maintenance 5
5.1 Installation

Types of Installation
The Industrial Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE X-100 and X-200 product lines can be
mounted in different ways:
• Installation on a 35 mm DIN rail
• Installation on a SIMATIC S7-300 Standard Rail
• Wall Mounting

Note
When installing and operating the device, keep to the installation instructions and safety-
related notices as described here and in the manual SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet
Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks /1/.
Unless stated otherwise, the mounting options listed below apply to all Industrial Ethernet
Switches of the SCALANCE X-100 and X-200 product lines.

Note
Provide suitable shade to protect the device against direct sunlight. This avoids unwanted
warming of the device and prevents premature aging of the device and cabling.

5.2 Installation on a DIN Rail

Installation
Install the Industrial Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE X-100 and X-200 product lines on
a 35 mm standard rail according to DIN EN 50022.

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2 5-1
Installation and Maintenance
5.2 Installation on a DIN Rail

1. Place the upper catch of the device over the top of the rail and then push in the lower part
of the device against the rail until it clips into place.
2. Fit the connectors for the power supply to the terminal block.
3. Fit the connectors for the signaling contact to the terminal block.
4. Insert the two terminal blocks into the sockets on the device.

Figure 5-1 Installation of a SCALANCE X-100 and/or X-200 on a 35 mm Standard Rail

Uninstalling
To remove the Industrial Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE X-100 and X-200 product
lines from the standard rail:
1. First disconnect the TP/FO cables and pull out the terminal blocks for the power supply
and the signaling contact.
2. Use a screwdriver to release the lower rail catch of the device and pull the lower part of
the device away from the rail.

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

5-2 Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2
 Installation and Maintenance
5.3 Installation on a Standard Rail

Figure 5-2 Removing a SCALANCE X-100 and/or X-200 from a 35 mm Standard Rail

5.3 Installation on a Standard Rail

Installation on a SIMATIC S7-300 Standard Rail

1. Place the upper guide at the top of the SCALANCE housing in the S7 standard rail.
2. Screw the Industrial Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE X-100 and X-200 product lines
to the underside of the standard rail.
3. Fit the connectors for the power supply to the terminal block.
4. Fit the connectors for the signaling contact to the terminal block.
5. Insert the two terminal blocks into the sockets on the device.

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2 5-3
Installation and Maintenance
5.4 Wall Mounting

Figure 5-3 Installation of a SCALANCE X-100 and/or X-200 on a SIMATIC S7-300 Standard Rail

Uninstalling
To remove the Industrial Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE X-100 and X-200 product
lines from the SIMATIC S7-300 standard rail:
1. First disconnect the TP/FO cables and pull out the terminal blocks for the power supply
and the signaling contact.
2. Loosen the screws on the underside of the standard rail and lift the device away from the
standard rail.

5.4 Wall Mounting

Wall Mounting
1. For wall mounting, use suitable mounting fittings for the wall
(for example, for a concrete wall, four plugs 6 mm diameter and 30 mm long, 4 screws
3.5 mm diameter and 40 mm long).
2. Connect the electrical wiring to the terminal block.
3. Fit the connectors for the signaling contact to the terminal block.
4. Insert the two terminal blocks into the sockets on the device.
For more exact dimensions, please refer to the section "Dimension Drawings".

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

5-4 Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2
 Installation and Maintenance
5.5 Grounding

Note
The wall mounting must be capable of supporting at least four times the weight of the device.

5.5 Grounding

Installation on a DIN Rail

The device is grounded over the DIN rail.

S7 Standard Rail
The device is grounded over its rear panel and the neck of the screw.

Wall Mounting
The device is grounded by the securing screw in the unpainted hole.
Please note that the SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 must be grounded over one
securing screw with minimum resistance.
If a device of the SCALANCE X100 and SCALANCE X-200 product line is mounted on a
non-conducting base, a grounding cable must be installed. The grounding cable is not
supplied with the device. Connect the paint-free surface of the device to the nearest
grounding point using the grounding cable.

5.6 Fitting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180

Assembly of the IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 on an IE FC Standard Cable

For information on assembling an IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 on a SIMATIC NET Industrial
Ethernet FastConnect cable, please refer to the instructions supplied with the IE FC RJ-45
Plug.

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2 5-5
Installation and Maintenance
5.6 Fitting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180

Figure 5-4 IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180

Inserting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180

1. Insert the IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 into the devices of the SCALANCE X-100 or X-200
product line until it locks in place.

Figure 5-5 Inserting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180

The flush fit and locking mechanism of the PROFINET-compliant IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
along with the securing collar on the TP port of the SCALANCE X-100 and X-200 guarantee
a robust node connection suitable for industrial conditions providing tensile and bending
strain relief for the twisted pair socket.

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

5-6 Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2
 Installation and Maintenance
5.6 Fitting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180

Note
This does not apply to the SCALANCE X208PRO device

Removing the IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180

1. Press on the locking mechanism of the IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 gently to remove the plug.

Figure 5-6 Releasing the RJ-45 Plug

If there is not enough space to release the lock with your hand, you can also use a 2.5 mm
screwdriver. You can then remove the IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 from the twisted pair socket.

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2 5-7
Installation and Maintenance
5.7 Maintenance

Figure 5-7 Releasing the RJ-45 Plug with a Screwdriver

5.7 Maintenance

Maintenance
If a fault develops, please send the device to your SIEMENS service center for repair.
Repairs on-site are not possible.

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

5-8 Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2
Notes on the CE Mark 8
8.1 Notes on the CE Mark

Product Name:

SIMATIC NET SCALANCE X108 6GK5 108-0BA00-2AA3

SIMATIC NET SCALANCE X104-2 6GK5 104-2BB00-2AA3
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE X106-1 6GK5 106-1BB00-2AA3
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE X208 6GK5 208-0BA00-2AA3
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE X204-2 6GK5 204-2BB00-2AA3
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE X206-1 6GK5 206-1BB00-2AA3

EMC Directive
89/336/EEC "Electromagnetic Compatibility"

Area of Application
The products are designed for use in an industrial environment:

Area of Application Requirements

Noise emission Noise immunity
Industrial operation EN 50081-2 : 1993 EN 50082-2 : 1995

Installation Guidelines
The products meet the requirements if you keep to the installation instructions and safety-
related notices as described here and in the manual SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet
Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks /1/ when installing and operating the device.

Conformity Certificates
The EU declaration of conformity is available for the responsible authorities according to the
above-mentioned EU directive at the following address:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2 8-1
Notes on the CE Mark
8.1 Notes on the CE Mark

Industrielle Kommunikation (A&D PT2)

Postfach 4848
D-90327 Nürnberg

Notes for the Manufacturers of Machines

The products are not machines in the sense of the EU directive on machines. There is
therefore no declaration of conformity relating to the EU directive on machines 89/392/EEC
for these products.
If the products are part of the equipment of a machine, they must be included in the
procedure for the declaration of conformity by the manufacturer of the machine.

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

8-2 Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2
References 9
9.1 References

Sources of Information and Other Documentation

1. SIMATIC NET Industrial Twisted Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks,
Order numbers:
6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0 German
6GK1970-1BA10-0AA1 English
6GK1970-1BA10-0AA2 French
6GK1970-1BA10-0AA4 Italian
2. PROFINET Installation Guide
Can be ordered from the PROFIBUS User Organization (PNO)

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2 9-1
Dimension Drawings 10
10.1 Dimension Drawing

Figure 10-1 Dimension Drawing SCALANCE X104-2, X106-1, X108, X208, X206-1, X204-2

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2 10-1
Dimension Drawings
10.1 Dimension Drawing

Figure 10-2 SCALANCE X200 Side View

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-100 and SCALANCE X-200 Product Line

10-2 Commissioning Manual, 12/2004, A5E00349864 Release 2
 DATASHEET

MSR 4800W
Multi purpose Power System for Telecom and Industrial Applications

4800 W modular system Flexible connections

All voltages available 0…144VDC per module Parallel n+1 connection, up to 180A
U and I adjustable from 0 to max value Series connection, up to 500VDC
Hot-swap plug-in modules Multi outputs, ± outputs
Power supply or battery charging applications
Module alarm for remote monitoring Connection examples
Solid construction for heavy duty applications

19” SUB-RACK UNITS

Type Modules per rack Power Mechanics (w x h x d)
MSR7650 1…6 pcs 800W…4800W 19” (482mm) / 3U (133mm) / 330mm (+handle 40mm)
81718710 Covering plate set for empty module place 14TE 3U
70130753 IEC320 power cord 2.5m, rubber cable

RECTIFIER MODULES
Type Input voltage
Nominal Voltage Max Current Max Mechanics
*) Output Setting Output Limit Power (w x h x d)
Voltage Range Current Setting
ADC7181/24 50…260 VAC 24 VDC 0-36VDC 30 A 0-30A 800W 14TE / 3U / 230mm
ADC7181/36 50…260 VAC 36 VDC 0-54VDC 20 A 0-20A 800W 14TE / 3U / 230mm
ADC7181/48 50…260 VAC 48 VDC 0-72VDC 15 A 0-15A 800W 14TE / 3U / 230mm
ADC7181/72 50…260 VAC 72 VDC 0-108VDC 10 A 0-10A 800W 14TE / 3U / 230mm
ADC7181/96 50…260 VAC 96 VDC 0-144VDC 7.5A 0-7.5A 800W 14TE / 3U / 230mm
*) Also DC input 50…260VDC, max power 600W
Reduced power 50…200VAC or 50…200VDC

Sales & R&D: Mäkituvantie 3 H, FIN-01510 VANTAA, Tel. +358 9 8362 830, Fax +358 9 8362 8362
Production and Service: Rautatienkatu 52, FIN-44150 ÄÄNEKOSKI, Tel. +358 14 3396 400, Fax +358 14 3396 410
E-mail: marketing@powernet.fi, Internet: www.powernet.fi
©We reserve the right to change the specification without notice Created: 12.10.2005 File: MSR4800W_UK_121005
 DATASHEET

INPUT
Input voltage 50…260 VAC 50…200VAC reduced power
50…260 VDC / max 600W 50…200VDC reduced power
Frequency 45...65Hz
Input current Max 4.5A
Inrush current Soft start max 7A 10ms peak, otherwise less than 4.5A
Safety According to EN60950, Class I
Isolation Input / ground 1500VAC
Input / outputs 3750VAC
Output / ground 500VDC
Mains input connector 2 pcs of IEC320 sockets 3 rectifiers per group

OUTPUT
Voltage Nominal voltages 0…144VDC / max 800W per module
Current Nominal current per module 0…30A / max 800W per module
Short circuit protection The modules are short circuit protected
Output connector 10mm2 screw terminal for each rectifier
6 x positive and 6 x negative output group
short-circuit contact for parallel operation
Hot swap Serial diode in each rectifier Hot-swap allowed
Serial/parallel operations All modules can be connected in serial or in parallel

ALARMS

Output failure Module failure Relay contact

Alarm connector Rear panel Removable 12-pole 2.5mm2 screw terminal
Pin configurations

1 Output alarm PSU1 COMMON

2 Output alarm PSU1 NO *)
3 Output alarm PSU2 COMMON *) NO = Normally Open
4 Output alarm PSU2 NO *) Normally = Mains / PSU OK
5 Output alarm PSU3 COMMON
6 Output alarm PSU3 NO *) NC contacts also available, type MSR7651
7 Output alarm PSU4 COMMON
8 Output alarm PSU4 NO *)
9 Output alarm PSU5 COMMON
10 Output alarm PSU5 NO *)
11 Output alarm PSU6 COMMON
12 Output alarm PSU6 NO *)

MECHANICAL
Power Rack 19” sub-rack Positions for 6 pcs of ADC7181 euro modules
Dimensions Height 3U (88mm)
Width 19” (482mm)
Depth 330mm (+ handle 40mm)
Weight Rack without rectifiers 4.0 kg
Rectifier 1.35kg/unit
Enclosure Steel IP20

ENVIRONMENTAL
Temperature range Operating -25°C...+50 °C (full power typically)
+50°C...+70 °C (derating)
Storage -40°C...+85 °C
Cooling Temperature controlled fan Front panel
Grounding M6 screw On the rear panel

©We reserve the right to change the specification without notice Created: 12.10.2005 File: MSR4800W_UK_121005
     
  
V V
 !
   

         !"#$%  

V V
&'()"# *$$ + $# ' ,-.
,  /$. ,,  /$01.-2345+
,6 -7  -(.,-' ,,+$# 
"*108

& , 

>999? @2 '
   "  0 0 :
91
4 046356 481885

& 0
, ' :;//:
< - 0 :: - & -+
6  '
 ,(  -   - 3  '+
 -- '  &-0:51*= 07  ' .
 , ,'  
        '
*<*'  
"( #  

 "# "$ % 

*)"# * /01$$ + +$+ - 0:   A,6.-,.

(  / ,,+ - # -,6 /$+ -+6 ,( .$
$ +,A,'  /   ',-,$+ -.A,6 ,,+ - 
0:   ;-

&  ( &-08

      T,. 0
)"# *&2 /$ /$0    
         !"#$%  

  " 

 $ $
> /:''
@- 0''
$ 0 ;''
>+'6( 0 ''
@-+'6( 0''
$+'6( ;0''

%#" 
',+ - /$
',+ -- 0:$  $
0/$ 0:$5 -,-  7
#,+ --$ 0:$  $
0/$ 0:$5 -,-  7
, ,'  0/15 /.#42*7
#,,-, B0;15(7
& ,6( C0 '5 /$7
#,, ;155+  77
  ,6, 0=1  154..$.D7
*(    *,-  
& +, '   

&#%#" 
' ,,+ - /$E0F
2--  ,,+ - 0:$   ;$5C / (7
,,, 015 ;G =G7
0 ;15&>9?42*. ;G /G'(.""*%
/$7
=15234  -(.0 '7
H-,- 4
4/
4=

/
$- =G 8G5 ;FD7

&  ( &- 8

      T,. 0
)"# *&2 /$ /$0    
         !"#$%  

   I. ,((

   I
H +  "'
,'  1  0:1
  +  B0F5- .0F F7
B F5- .('0F F7
B 0F5-,+ -E0F7
?, &&
& -+ - '  &&5 H@J7
H','   K  0 =>
&   ' ' />

' " 
-   -
9( C F
#, + -, ,, 0 ; 5(7
0 5 ,7
$-    #& 
&   ###
H*435#9=08.2  ;7 C8=51 - 9  ;7
1'6',5  7  ;G 8G5C=G-7
1'6',5 - 7 /G :;G
H '6+,'(5  7 L;F5 ;G.   7
H ,-    J $#  2;.9 =80;
1'6(,  1-6 ;'' J (.0;'' + ' .
;''+(
9 '- '6(   '9H$+ /0:9
'',( 9 =0= ;
2M9N,' ' 9 = /
29( 9 =;0$9:;529K7
26,- + <'K (59H07
2M9 N,' , 9 ;08:$90=5&9K7
  '6(
   
2M2( + - 9 =;0529K7
9 = /5&9K7
22   $# $90/0

&  ( &-8

      T,. 0
)"# *&2 /$ /$0    
         !"#$%  

"K + "K"K"K;:

"K"K? -J"K=;
"K1 2##210 0 0#.$+  .< ,1.4..$
5@J ,K  7

   "  (%#

  '  &,--6  
 ,    '  ''O
 ,    ' ;''O
 ,   '  ''O
 ,   ' ;''O
 ,   1>< '' /
 ,   1>< '' 0
2-- :''
2 H

   "  ( #%#

  '  &,--6  
 ,    '  ''O
 ,    ' ;''O
 ,   '  ''O
 ,   ' ;''O
 ,   1>< '' /
 ,   1>< '' 0
2-- 8''

 
,,' $D+
,,  ""*C " @--
H',',, B '15 ,7
2,( P$DPK9$-
 ,    '  ''O
 ,    ' ;''O
 ,   '  ''O
 ,   ' ;''O
 ,   1>< '' /
 ,   1>< '' 0

&  ( &-/8

      T,. 0
)"# *&2 /$ /$0    
         !"#$%  

*-- N,.'  ; '

*-- N,'  = '
2 H
,,' &>9?42*.+
,,  #"* @--
H',',, B '15 ,7
2,( P42*PK9$( #"*C#  VK9$ 
,,' "# D.+
,,  "# C0  @--
H',',, L '15 ,7
2,( K9$QN, R"# # QR0 $ K9$ 
,,' $D -
,,  ?(
,,+ - L1$
H',',, L0'1
 ,( ""*C "   

  $

   

  "K,K."K,? -J.142.4.<K.K?. D.?# 1.

#99942'

 9 "K,K

  

) $$ $

#' $-  $ 

' 
::// 4*H00 1234& *' '-+,6 .0  .-
234.0&$* .,- 6'
::/; 4*H00=1234& *' '-+,6 .0  .-
234.0&$* .,- 6'

&  ( &-;8

      T,. 0
)"# *&2 /$ /$0    
         !"#$%  

::= 4*H001234& *' '-+,6 .0  .-

234.0&$* .,- 6'
::8 4*H0 1234& *' '-+,6 .0  .-
234.0&$* .,- 6'
::: 4*H01234& *' '-+,6 .0  .-
234.0&$* .,- 6'
:: 4*H0/1234& *' '-+,6 .0  .-
234.0&$* .,- 6'
::/ 4*H0;1234& *' '-+,6 .0  .-
234.0&$* .,- 6'
 0:= )"# * 1+)"# *,(' , $# ' ,-
?# < /$ S 0S/ -2345+,6 -7  -(
'  -, .,  /$. ,,  /$  1
0/1.,-' ,,+$# "*1
08
:0= )"# *&21$1&*9?280 1'6( )"# *&2  ,( 28
:==88= )"# *&201 /$  &'()"# * ,( $# ' ,-.
, 0. ,,  /$ 1.-234
5+,6 -7  -(.,-' ,,+
$# "*108
:==8 )"# *&21 /$  &'()"# * ,( $# ' ,-.
, . ,,  /$ 1.-234
5+,6 -7  -(.,-' ,,+
$# "*108
 : "*108 "+$# 
: ; ">10: ; "+

 *$

4  -'

&  ( &-=8

      T,. 0
)"# *&2 /$ /$0    
         !"#$%  

)""$$

&  (

(00
0.3
& U;:57; 
3U;:57;0/
     

&  (

*'  +R

&  ( &-88

      T,. 0
MCR-C-...-DC

MCR 3-Way Isolation Amplifier

INTERFACE

Data Sheet © PHOENIX CONTACT - 12/2005

Description Method of Operation

MCR 3-way isolation amplifiers are used to electrically The analog signal is first modulated and then electrically
isolate and convert analog signals. isolated using a transformer.
The blocks provide electrical isolation of analog standard The electrically isolated signal is then provided at the
signals. The module input and output are supplied via output, demodulated, filtered, and amplified.
integrated DC/DC converters, which are electrically isolated
The space-saving 12.5 mm wide ME housing, with plug-in
from the mains (3-way isolation, see Figure 1).
connection technology, enables the 20 V DC ... 30 V DC
The MCR modules ensure the safe decoupling of a sensor supply to be quickly looped through using pre-assembled
circuit from the evaluation circuit and also prevent the wire jumpers.
negative effects of several sensor circuits connected with
MCR 3-way isolation amplifiers can be snapped onto
one another. 3-way isolation enables the universal use of
symmetrical DIN rails according to EN 60715.
modules both locally and close to the control system for
signal conversion and electrical isolation as well as on the
transmission path for jumpering high load resistors. U, I
U, I
Vc

Vc

Figure 1 3-way isolation

Make sure you always use the latest documentation.

It can be downloaded at www.download.phoenixcontact.com.
A conversion table is available on the Internet at
http://www.download.phoenixcontact.com/general/7000_en_00.pdf.

This data sheet is valid for all products listed on the following page:

100237_02_en PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG • 32823 Blomberg • Germany 1

Phone: +49 - 52 35 - 30 0 • Fax: +49 - 52 35 - 34 12 00 • www.phoenixcontact.com
www.phoenixcontact.com/salesnetwork
 MCR-C-...-DC

Ordering Data
Description Type Order No. Pcs./Pkt.
MCR 3-way isolation amplifier, for electrical isolation of analog signals, MCR-C-U-I-0-DC 28 14 47 2 5
input signal: 0 V ... 10 V, output signal: 0 mA ... 20 mA
MCR 3-way isolation amplifier, for electrical isolation of analog signals, MCR-C-I-I-00-DC 28 14 50 8 5
input signal: 0(4) mA ... 20 mA, output signal: 0(4) mA ... 20 mA
MCR 3-way isolation amplifier, for electrical isolation of analog signals, MCR-C-I-U-0-DC 28 14 49 8 5
input signal: 0 mA ... 20 mA/(±)20 mA, output signal: 0 V ... 10 V/(±)10 V
MCR 3-way isolation amplifier, for electrical isolation of analog signals, MCR-C-U-U-DC 28 14 46 9 5
input signal: 0 V ... 10 V/(±)10 V, output signal: 0 V ... 10 V/(±)10 V
MCR 3-way isolation amplifier, for electrical isolation of analog signals, MCR-C-I-U-4-DC 28 14 51 1 5
input signal: 4 mA ... 20 mA, output signal: 0 V ... 10 V
MCR 3-way isolation amplifier, for electrical isolation of analog signals, MCR-C-U-I-4-DC 28 14 53 7 5
input signal: 0 V ... 10 V, output signal: 4 mA ... 20 mA
MCR 3-way isolation amplifier, for electrical isolation of analog signals, MCR-C-I-I-04-DC 28 14 54 0 5
input signal: 0 mA ... 20 mA, output signal: 4 mA ... 20 mA
MCR 3-way isolation amplifier, for electrical isolation of analog signals, MCR-C-I-I-40-DC 28 14 52 4 5
input signal: 4 mA ... 20 mA, output signal: 0 mA ... 20 mA

Technical Data
Input (Measuring Input)
Input signal
MCR-C-U-I-0-DC 0 V ... 10 V
MCR-C-I-I-00-DC 0(4) mA ... 20 mA
MCR-C-I-U-0-DC 0 mA ... 20 mA/(±)20 mA
MCR-C-U-U-DC 0 V ... 10 V/(±)10 V
MCR-C-I-U-4-DC 4 mA ... 20 mA
MCR-C-U-I-4-DC 0 V ... 10 V
MCR-C-I-I-04-DC 0 mA ... 20 mA
MCR-C-I-I-40-DC 4 mA ... 20 mA
Input resistance

50 Ω
MCR-C-U-I-0-DC 200 kΩ
MCR-C-I-I-00-DC
MCR-C-I-U-0-DC 50 Ω
MCR-C-U-U-DC 100 kΩ
MCR-C-I-U-4-DC 50 Ω
MCR-C-U-I-4-DC 100 kΩ
50 Ω
50 Ω
MCR-C-I-I-04-DC
MCR-C-I-I-40-DC

Output (Measuring Output)

Output signal
MCR-C-U-I-0-DC 0 mA ... 20 mA
MCR-C-I-I-00-DC 0(4) mA ... 20 mA
MCR-C-I-U-0-DC 0 V ... 10 V/(±)10 V
MCR-C-U-U-DC 0 V ... 10 V/(±)10 V
MCR-C-I-U-4-DC 0 V ... 10 V
MCR-C-U-I-4-DC 4 mA ... 20 mA
MCR-C-I-I-04-DC 4 mA ... 20 mA
MCR-C-I-I-40-DC 0 mA ... 20 mA
Load
< 500 Ω
< 500 Ω
MCR-C-U-I-0-DC
MCR-C-I-I-00-DC
MCR-C-I-U-0-DC > 10 kΩ
MCR-C-U-U-DC > 10 kΩ

< 500 Ω
MCR-C-I-U-4-DC > 10 kΩ
MCR-C-U-I-4-DC

100237_02_en PHOENIX CONTACT 2

 MCR-C-...-DC

Output (Measuring Output) (Continued)

< 500 Ω
< 500 Ω
MCR-C-I-I-04-DC
MCR-C-I-I-40-DC
Linear transmission range (in reference to the final value)
MCR-C-U-I-0-DC -5% … 105%
MCR-C-I-I-00-DC 0% … 105%
MCR-C-I-U-0-DC -110% … 110%
MCR-C-U-U-DC -110% … 110%
MCR-C-I-U-4-DC -10% … 110%
MCR-C-U-I-4-DC -5% … 105%
MCR-C-I-I-04-DC -5% … 105%
MCR-C-I-I-40-DC -5% … 105%

General Data
Supply voltage 20 V DC ... 30 V DC
Operating current (without load current) < 15 mA
Transmission error
MCR-C-U-I-0-DC < 0.2% of final value
MCR-C-I-I-00-DC < 0.2% of final value
MCR-C-I-U-0-DC < 0.2% of final value
MCR-C-U-U-DC < 0.2% of final value
MCR-C-I-U-4-DC < 0.3% of final value
MCR-C-U-I-4-DC < 0.3% of final value
MCR-C-I-I-04-DC < 0.3% of final value
MCR-C-I-I-40-DC < 0.3% of final value
Temperature coefficient < 0.015%/K
Limit frequency (3 dB) 30 Hz, approximately
Test voltage
Input/output 1 kV AC/50 Hz/1 min.
Input/supply 1 kV AC/50 Hz/1 min.
Output/supply 1 kV AC/50 Hz/1 min.
Ambient operating temperature range -25°C ... 60°C
Approvals N U
Connection type Screw/plug-in connection
Mounting position Any
Assembly Any

100237_02_en PHOENIX CONTACT 3

 MCR-C-...-DC

Conformance With EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
Noise Immunity Test According to EN 61000-6-21
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) EN 61000-4-2 Criterion B2
8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic HF field EN 61000-4-3 Criterion A3
Amplitude modulation 10 V/m
Pulse modulation 10 V/m
Fast transients (burst) EN 61000-4-4 Criterion B2
I/O/S4: 2 kV/5 kHz
Surge current load (surge) EN 61000-4-5 Criterion B2
V4: 0.5 kV/2 Ω
Conducted interference EN 61000-4-6 Criterion A3
I/O/S4: 10 V
Noise Emission Test According to EN 61000-6-4
Noise emission of housing EN 550115 Class A6
1 EN 61000 corresponds to IEC 61000
2
Criterion B: Temporary adverse effects on the operating behavior, which the device corrects automatically.
3 Criterion A: Normal operating characteristics within the specified limits.
4 I = Input/O = Output/S = Supply
5
EN 55011 corresponds to CISPR11
6 Class A: Industrial application, without special installation measures.

Dimensions
99 12,5
114,5

Figure 2 Dimensions (in mm)

100237_02_en PHOENIX CONTACT 4

 MCR-C-...-DC

Structure Block Diagram

2
IN OUT
1

P UB UT ND
O G
+

WN
E D3
O
1 5

R
Ι
G
IN I/U ,U O UT I/U

2
- D
00 2 6
/I-
GND 1 U GND 2
-I
-C
R
C
M

3
IN G N
Ι

D
1

1
-D
00 50
I/I- 14
C 8 7 20...30V
2 C-
R- 28
MC-Nr .: T 8 GND 3
OU 5
t.
Ar

6
IN 7 Figure 5 Block diagram
34 8
1 Ι
U

2 5
T
Ι
OU 2
6
GN
D
7
Ι 4V
DC 8
1 IN
GN
D
1
+2
GN
D
3 © PHOENIX CONTACT 12/2005
2
S
AL
OV
PR
AP
/
N
NE
TIO
A
OB
PR
AP

Figure 3 Structure

1 Supply voltage
2 Signal output
3 Signal input
4 Metal lock for fastening on the DIN rail

Transmission Characteristic Curve

OUT U
[%] 110%
100
105%

-100 100 IN [%]

U
-110% -100

Figure 4 Transmission characteristic curve

100237_02_en PHOENIX CONTACT 5

     
  
P P
 ! !
   

        !"  #$%&'  

P P
&% ! ( )!  *&   + *+ $ (
),)  )(

. ) 
6---7 89 (!
   "   / :
-+
4 046356 524766

." 
) ( /**/
0 1  "1 .! 1;
<" (
 ),  1 !! 1 =  (;
! 11 (  .1 2 +34 5  ( >!
 ) )(  
  !      (
30!3(  
$!, % ! 

  " 

 # #
6 ((
81 ((
&  ((

.  , .1

      M)!> 
L$% 3&%&-  *&  G G*    
        !"  #$%&'  

$%" 
(!); !11  &   *&
&  &
(!))%  +2 ?  4? 5
*+2 ?  4? 5
@()()%( +2 ?  *? 5
4+2 ?  *? 5
(!))%  +2 ?  4? 5
*+2 ?  4? 5
@()()%( +2 ?  *? 5
4+2 ?  *? 5

%$%" 
))) *+2%1 5
+27),5
&1 4?  ? 2 AB5
. !  (!! ( 62%$3' +5

& " 
1  "1
-, C:A
C:A
&1    %. 
.  ! %%%
+(<()2  5 *?  ? 2C4? 15
+(<()2 1 5 *?  /?
@ (<!!;)(,2  5 D:A2 ? >   5
@ )1    E !&% ! 9>- 4
+(<!,)  +!1<! (( E !!,>(( ; ( >
((;!!,
-! (1 (<!,  (-@ &; */-
F  !1&;  (F  !1&; 4:-
+3-G -%%0-+%% 3*0
B-@++3-G4G
%- - -+%% 3*0
%- -B-@ :
9-!!, - 4:&-/29-F5

.  , .1 

      M)!> 
L$% 3&%&-  *&  G G*    
        !"  #$%&'  

9H-! I)( ) - /&-42.-F5

!! !! (<!,
 !! !! 
9H9,! ; !1 %- 4:29-F5- 4 *2.-F5
99 !  &% &-*
&% &-4
9H.  1! " &% *
9H.  1 ")> &% &-4
<I)(  ; 
!!I)(
$F ;! $F $F!$F/
$F $F7 1E$F4:
$F+ 9%%9+   !%>&;  >0 )+>J> >&
28E )F  5

   "  '$%

 (  9  
)    !(  ((K
)    !( 4((K
)   (  ((K
)   ( *((K
)   +60"(!( 
)   +60"(!( 
91!1 ((
9 @

   "  ' %$%

 (  9  
)    !(  ((K
)    !( 4((K
)   (  ((K
)   ( 4((K
)   +60"(!( 
)   +60"(!( 4
91!1 ((

.  , .1

      M)!> 
L$% 3&%&-  *&  G G*    
        !"  #$%&'  

  #

  

  $F)F>$F)7 1E>0F>7% +

 - +3-G>$F)F>%- -

 ! 

( ## #

%( &1  & 

& 
:/:4 L$% 3.9+&+.3-79 +(<!, L$% 3.9  )!, 9!
 /: $3+ $;!&% !
:/  $6+/  $;!!!

 )#

J! "1(

.  , .1*

      M)!> 
L$% 3&%&-  *&  G G*    
        !"  #$%&'  

(""##

.  ,
,
>=!
. N/25:: 
=N/25:*
     

.  ,
3!(  ;O

.  , .1

      M)!> 
 Product information
Configurable Industrial Security-Router -
EagleOne-0200T1T1SDDZ90000HHE05.3.

Industrial Ethernet:Industrial Firewall System:EAGLE One:Configurable Industrial Security-Router

http://www.e-catalog.beldensolutions.com/link/57078-24455-49853-401129-400975/en/EagleOne-0200T1T1SDDZ90000HHE05.3./uistate

Name Configurable Industrial Security-Router

Industrial firewall and security router with extensive Layer 2 and Layer 3 redundancy features, DIN rail mounted, fanless design.
Delivery informations
Availability available
Product description
Description Industrial firewall and security router with extensive Layer 2 and Layer 3 redundancy features, DIN rail mounted, fanless design.
Port type and quantity 2 ports in total, Ports Fast Ethernet: 2 x 10/100 Mbit/s
Type EagleOne-0200T1T1SDDZ90000HHE05.3.
Order No. EagleOne-0200T1T1SDDZ90000HHE05.3.
More Interfaces
Power supply/signaling contact 1 x plug-in terminal block, 6-pin
Digital Input 1 x plug-in terminal block, 2-pin
V.24 interface 1 x RJ11 socket
USB interface 1 x USB to connect the AutoConfiguration Adapter ACA21-USB EEC
Network size - length of cable
Twisted pair (TP) 0 m ... 100 m
Network size - cascadibility
Line - / star topology any
Power requirements
Operating voltage 12/24/48 VDC/24 VAC (redundant)
Power consumption 5.0 W
Software
Stateful inspection firewall Firewall rules (incoming/outgoing, management), DoS prevention, MAC filter, user firewall for external activation of FW rules
Management SNMPv3, SSH2/SFTP, HTTPS, V.24 CLI, central user manegement (RADIUS), SSH1, SNMPv1/2, HiDiscovery, Industrial HiVision, HiView
Multipoint VPN Point to point, point to multipoint, remote enable/disable or via digital input, IPSec, IKEv1/v2, 3DES, AES (-128, -192, -256), Pre-Shared Key, X.509v3
certificates, MD5, SHA-1, NAT-T
Diagnostics LLDP, LEDs (status, VPN, redundancy, link status, data, ACA), signal contact, logfile, syslog, configuration check
Configuration Web based GUI, SNMPv3, CLI, Automatic configuration roll-back, text based configuration file, offline configuration, HiView
Security HTTPS, SSHv2, SFTP, SNMPv3, Management VLAN, Role based Access
Routing Static routing, multinetting, IP masquerading, 1-to-1 NAT, port forwarding.
Redundancy functions Use in redundant networks/ring coupling, firewall redundancy (layer 4)
Time synchronisation NTP/SNTP
Miscellaneous DHCP Server/Client, DHCP Relay/Option 82, DynDNS, PPP, PPPoE, VLAN-Support , packet capture (pcap Format)
Ambient conditions
Operating temperature 0 ºC ... 60 ºC
Storage/transport temperature -40 ºC ... 85 ºC
Relative humidity (non-condensing) 10 % ... 95 %
Mechanical construction
Dimensions (W x H x D) 60 mm x 145 mm x 125 mm
Mounting DIN Rail
Weight 660 g
Protection class IP20
Approvals
Basis Standard CE, FCC, C-Tick, EN61131, EN 60950-1 ,

23-09-2015
Hirschmann Automation and Control GmbH www.beldensolutions.com Page 1 of 2
Industrial Ethernet:Industrial Firewall System:EAGLE One:Configurable Industrial Security-Router
http://www.e-catalog.beldensolutions.com/link/57078-24455-49853-401129-400975/en/EagleOne-0200T1T1SDDZ90000HHE05.3./uistate

Scope of delivery and accessories

Scope of delivery Device, terminal blocks, operating instructions, manual on CD
Accessories to order separately Rail power supply RPS 30, RPS 80 EEC, RPS 120 EEC, terminal cable, network management Industrial HiVision, auto-configuration adpater ACA21-USB EEC,
19" installation frame

For more information please contact:

Hirschmann Automation and Control GmbH
Stuttgarter Strasse 45-51
72654 Neckartenzlingen
Germany
Phone: +49 7127/14-1809
E-Mail: inet-sales@belden.com

The information published in the websites has been compiled as carefully as possible. It is subject to alteration without notice in technical as well as in price-related/commercial respect.
The complete information and data were available on user documentation. Mandatory information can only be obtained by a concrete query.

23-09-2015
Hirschmann Automation and Control GmbH www.beldensolutions.com Page 2 of 2
Data sheet

Insulation monitoring relay CM-IWS.1

For unearthed AC, DC and mixed AC/DC systems up to
Un = 250 V AC and 300 V DC

The CM-IWS.1 serves to monitor insulation

resistance in accordance with IEC 61557-8 in
unearthed IT AC systems, IT AC systems with
galvanically connected DC circuits, or unearthed
IT DC systems with a voltage up to 250 V AC
and 300 V DC. It can be configured to the
requirements of the applications and therefore
used multi-functional.

2CDC 251 009 V0012

All devices are available with two different terminal
versions. You can choose between the proven
screw connection technology (double-chamber
cage connection terminals) and the completely
tool-free Easy Connect Technology (push-in
terminals).

Characteristics Approvals
– For monitoring the insulation resistance of unearthed IT A UL 508, CAN/CSA C22.2 No.14
systems up to Un = 250 V AC and 300 V DC
C GL
– According to IEC/EN 61557-8 “Electrical safety in low
voltage distribution systems up to 1000 V a.c. and 1500 V K IEC/EN 60947-5-1, CB scheme
d.c. – Equipment for testing, measuring or monitoring E GB14048.5 - 2001, CCC
of protective measures – Part 8: Insulation monitoring D GOST
devices for IT systems"
– Rated control supply voltage 24-240 V AC/DC L RMRS

– Prognostic measuring principle with superimposed square

wave signal
– One measuring range 1-100 kȍ Marks
– Precise adjustment of the threshold value in 1 kȍ steps a CE
– Interrupted wire detection b C-Tick
– Fault storage / latching configurable by control input
– Precise adjustment by front-face operating controls
– Screw connection technology or
Easy Connect Technology available
– Housing material for highest fire protection classification
UL 94 V-0
– Tool-free mounting on DIN rail as well as demounting
– 1 c/o (SPDT) contact, closed-circuit principle
– 22.5 mm (0.89 in) width
– 3 LEDs for the indication of operational states
 Order data
Insulation monitoring relay
Type Nominal voltage Un of the Rated control supply voltage Connection technology Order code
distribution system to be monitored
CM-IWS.1P 0-250 V AC / 0-300 V DC 24-240 V AC/DC Push-in terminals 1SVR 740 660 R0100
CM-IWS.1S Screw type terminals 1SVR 730 660 R0100

Accessories
Type Description Order code
ADP.01 Adapter for screw mounting 1SVR 430 029 R0100
MAR.01 Marker label for devices without DIP switches 1SVR 366 017 R0100
COV.11 Sealable transparent cover 1SVR 730 005 R0100

2 - Insulation monitoring relay CM-IWS.1 | Data sheet

 Connection technology
Maintenance free Easy Connect Technology with Approved screw connection technology with
push-in terminals double-chamber cage connection terminals
Type designation CM-xxS.yyP Type designation CM-xxS.yyS
2CDC 253 026 F0011

2CDC 253 025 F0011

Push-in terminals Double-chamber cage connection terminals

– Tool-free connection of rigid and flexible wires with – Terminal spaces for different wire sizes:
wire end ferrule according to DIN 46228-1-A, fine-strand with/without wire end ferrule:
DIN 46228-4-E 1 x 0.5-2.5 mm² (2 x 20 - 14 AWG),
Wire size: 2 x 0.5-1.5 mm², (2 x 20 - 16 AWG) 2 x 0.5-1.5 mm² (2 x 20 - 16 AWG)
– Easy connection of flexible wires without wire end rigid:
ferrule by opening the terminals 1 x 0.5-4 mm² (1 x 20 - 12 AWG),
– No retightening necessary 2 x 0.5-2.5 mm² (2 x 20 - 14 AWG)
– One operation lever for opening both connection – One screw for opening and closing of both cages
terminals – Pozidrive screws for pan- or crosshead screwdrivers
– For triggering the lever and disconnecting of wires according to DIN ISO 2380-1 Form A 0.8 x 4 mm
you can use the same tool (Screwdriver according to (0.0315 x 0.157 in), DIN ISO 8764-1 PZ1 ø 4.5 mm
DIN ISO 2380-1 Form A 0.8 x 4 mm (0.0315 x 0.157 (0.177 in)
in), DIN ISO 8764-1 PZ1 ø 4.5 mm (0.177 in))
– Constant spring force on terminal point independent
of the applied wire type, wire size or ambient
conditions (e. g. vibrations or temperature changes)
– Opening for testing the electrical contacting
– Gas-tight

Both the Easy Connect Technology with push-in terminals and screw connection technology with double-chamber cage
connection terminals have the same connection geometry as well as terminal position.

Data sheet | Insulation monitoring relay CM-IWS.1 - 3

 Functions

Operating controls

1 Test and reset button

2 Indication of operational states

U: green LED - control supply voltage

F: red LED - fault message

R: yellow LED - relay status

3 Configuration and setting

Front-face rotary switches for threshold value adjustment:

1 R.1 for R1 tens figures:

0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 k in ten k steps
2CDC 251 009 V0012

2 R.2 for R1 units figures:

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 k in one k steps
3
4 Marker label for devices without DIP switches
4

Application / monitoring function

The CM-IWS.1 serves to monitor insulation resistance in accordance with IEC 61557-8 in unearthed IT AC systems,
IT AC systems with galvanically connected DC circuits, or IT DC systems.
The insulation resistance between system lines and system earth is measured. If this falls below the adjustable threshold
values, the output relay de-energizes.
The device can monitor control circuits (single-phase) and main circuits (3-phase).
Supply systems with voltages Un = 0-250 V AC (15-400 Hz) or 0-300 V DC can be directly connected to the measuring
inputs and their insulation resistance being monitored. For systems with voltages above 250 V AC and 300 V DC the
insulation monitoring relay CM-IWN.x with or without the coupling unit CM-IVN can be used.

Measuring principle
A pulsating measuring signal is fed into the system to be monitored and the insulation resistance calculated.
This pulsating measuring signal alters its form depending on the insulation resistance and system leakage capacitance.
From this altered form the change in the insulation resistance is forecast.
When the forecast insulation resistance corresponds to the insulation resistance calculated in the next measurement cycle
and is smaller than the set threshold value, the output relay de-energizes. This measuring principle is also suitable for the
detection of symmetrical insulation faults.

Additional monitoring functions

The CM-IWS.1 cyclically monitors the measuring circuit connections w and KE for wire interruption. In case of a wire
interruption in one of the connections, the output relay de-engergizes.
In addition, the unearthed AC-, DC- or AC/DC system is monitored for inadmissible system leakage capacitance. If the
system leakage capacitance is too high, the output relay de-energizes.

4 - Insulation monitoring relay CM-IWS.1 | Data sheet

Operating mode
The system to be monitored is connected to terminals L+ and L-. The earth potential is connected to terminals w and KE.
The device operates according to the closed-circuit principle (fault state: relay de-energized).
Once the control supply voltage has been applied the insulation monitoring relay runs through a system test routine.
The system is diagnosed and the settings are tested. If no internal or external faults are found after this test routine is
completed, the output relay energizes.
If the measured value drops below the set threshold value, the output relay de-energizes. If the measured value exceeds
the threshold value plus hysteresis, the output relay re-energizes.
All operating states are signalled by the front-face LEDs. See table "LEDs, status information and fault messages" on
page 8.

Test function
The test function is only possible when there is no fault.
By pressing the front-face combined test/reset button a system test routine is executed. The output relay remains de-
energized as long as the test/reset button is pressed, the control contact S1-S3 is closed or the test functions are
processed.
The test function can be activated either with the front-face combined test/reset button or with a remote test button
connected as shown in the picture.
2CDC 252 109 F0009

S1 S2 S3

Fault storage, reset function and remote reset

The output relay remains de-energized and only energizes after the combined test/reset button is pressed or after the
remote reset (terminals S2-S3) is activated, and when the insulation resistance is higher than the set threshold value plus
hysteresis.

1.) Front
2.) Remote
S1 S2 S3 3.) A1-A2

1.) Front
S1 S2 S3 2.) A1-A2
2CDC 252 111 F0009

1.) Auto-
S1 S2 S3 Reset

Data sheet | Insulation monitoring relay CM-IWS.1 - 5

 Function descriptions/diagrams
G Control supply voltage not applied / Output contact open / LED OFF
B Control supply voltage applied / Output contact closed / LED ON

A1-A2
S1-S3
S2-S3
Measured value
Hysteresis
Threshold value
ts
Closed-circuit principle
11-14
11-12

2CDC 252 006 F0211

U: green LED
F: red LED
R: yellow LED
ts = Start-up time, fixed, min. 15 s

Insulation resistance monitoring w/o fault storage, auto reset

A1-A2
S1-S3
S2-S3
Measured value
Hysteresis
Threshold value
ts
Closed-circuit principle
11-14
11-12
U: green LED 2CDC 252 004 F0211

F: red LED
R: yellow LED
ts = Start-up time, fixed, min. 15 s

Insulation resistance monitoring with fault storage, manual reset

6 - Insulation monitoring relay CM-IWS.1 | Data sheet

Connection and wiring

Connection diagram
A1-A2 Control supply voltage
A1 11 KE
S1 S2 S3
S1-S3 Remote test
L+ L- KE w 11

2CDC 252 103 F0009

S2-S3 Remote reset
R<w
L+, L– Measuring circuit/input, system connection
A1 A2 12 14
L+ L- w w, KE Measuring circuit/input, earth connections
14 12 A2
11-12/14 Output relay, closed-circuit principle

Wiring diagrams
Always connect L+ and L- to different conductors. L+ and L- can be connected to any of the conductors.
Un ” 250 V AC; 300 V DC

A1 11 KE A1 11 KE
S1 S2 S3 S1 S2 S3

L+ L- w L+ L- w
14 12 A2 14 12 A2
2CDC 252 082 F0009

2CDC 252 085 F0009

2CDC 252 088 F0009

2CDC 252 085 F0009

L PWM L+

N DC L-
PE PE

2-wire AC system 2-wire DC system

A1 11 KE A1 11 KE
S1 S2 S3 S1 S2 S3

PWM L+
L+ L- w L+ L- w
14 12 A2 14 12 A2
DC L-
2CDC 252 089 F0009

2CDC 252 092 F0009

2CDC 252 095 F0009

L1 PWM L+ L+ 2CDC 252 092 F0009

L2 M
L3 DC L- L-
PE PE

3-wire AC system 3-wire DC system

A1 11 KE
S1 S2 S3

L+ L- w
14 12 A2

L1
2CDC 252 096 F0009

2CDC 252 099 F0009

L2
L3
N
PE

4-wire AC system

Data sheet | Insulation monitoring relay CM-IWS.1 - 7

 Configuration and settings

Rotary switches R.1 and R.2 (treshold value)

By means of two separate 10 position rotary switches with direct reading scales, the threshold value for the insulation
resistance RF of the systems to be monitored can be adjusted.
With the R.1 rotary switch the tens figure is set and with the R.2 rotary switch the units figure is set. The set threshold value is
then the addition of the two values. For example, R1.1 set to 70 and R1.2 set to 8 leads to a threshold value for R1 of 78 kȍ.

Indication of operational states

LEDs, status information and fault messages

Operational state LED U (green) LED F (red) LED R (yellow)

Start-up
W OFF OFF

No fault
V OFF
V
Insulation fault
V V OFF
(below threshold value)

KE/ w wire interruption V U OFF

System leakage capacitance too

V T OFF
high / invalid measurement result
Internal system fault OFF
X OFF

Test function
X OFF OFF

No fault after fault storage1)

V X
2)

1) The device has triggered after an insulation fault. The fault has been stored and the insulation resistance has returned to a higher value than the threshold value
plus hysteresis.
2) Depending on the fault.

Application examples

Feeder 1 Other consumers / feeders

L1
L2
L3
N
PE
A1 11 KE A1 11 KE
S1 S2 S3 S1 S2 S3

CM- CM-
IWS.1 IWS.1
L+ L- w L+ L- w
14 12 A2 14 12 A2

M
3~ Consumer
2CDC 252 014 F0210

The power source in this case is The insulation resistance of this feeder is monitored This insulation monitoring relay is continously monitoring the
the secondary side of an incoming always when the motor is switched off. The two n/c insulation resistance of the supply system with the connected
transformer which isolates contacts are connecting the measuring circuit to the consumers.
the system for the application. motor lines when the motor contactor is de-energized.

Earth fault / insulation resistance monitoring of different feeder circuits with fault localization

8 - Insulation monitoring relay CM-IWS.1 | Data sheet

Technical data
Data at Ta = 25 °C and rated values, unless otherwise indicated

Input circuits

Input circuit - Supply circuit A1 - A2

Rated control supply voltage Us 24-240 V AC/DC
Rated control supply voltage tolerance -15...+10 %
Typical current / power consumption 24 V DC 35 mA / 0.9 VA
115 V AC 17 mA / 2.0 VA
230 V AC 14 mA / 3.2 VA
Rated frequency f s DC or 15-400 Hz
Frequency range AC 13.5-440 Hz
Power failure buffering time min. 20 ms
Start-up time t s, fixed min. 15 s

Input circuit - Measuring circuit L+, L-, w, KE

Monitoring function insulation resistance monitoring of IT systems
(IEC/EN 61557-8)
Measuring principle prognostic measuring principle with superimposed
square wave signal
Nominal voltage Un of the distribution system to be monitored 0-250 V AC / 0-300 V DC
Voltage range of the distribution system to be monitored 0-287.5 V AC / 0-345 V DC (tolerance +15 %)
Rated frequency f N of the distribution system to be monitored DC or 15-400 Hz
Tolerance of the rated frequency fN 13.5-440 Hz
System leakage capacitance C e max. 10 μF
Extraneous DC voltage Ufg (when connected to an AC system) max. 290 V DC
Number of possible response / threshold values 1
Adjustment range of the specified response value Ran min.-max. 1-100 k
(threshold)
Adjustment resolution 1 kȍ
Tolerance of the adjusted threshold value / Relative percentage at 1-10 kȍ RF ±0.5 kȍ
uncertainty A at 10-100 kȍ RF ±6 %
at -5...+45 °C, Un = 0-115 %, Us = 85-110 %, fN, fs, Ce = 1μF
Hysteresis related to the threshold value 25 %; min. 2 kȍ
Internal impedance Z i at 50 Hz 100 k
Internal DC resistance Ri 115 kȍ
Measuring voltage U m 22 V
Tolerance of measuring voltage U m +10 %
Measuring current I m max. 0.3 mA
Response time tan
pure AC system 0.5 x Ran and Ce = 1 μF max. 10 s
DC system or AC system with connected rectifiers max. 15 s
Repeat accuracy (constant parameters) < 0.1 % of full scale
Accuracy of R a (measured value) within the rated control supply voltage tolerance < 0.05 % of full scale
Accuracy of R a (measured value) within the operation at 1-10 kȍ RF 5ȍ/K
temperature range at 10-100 kȍ RF 0.05 % / K

Transient overvoltage protection ( w - terminal) avalanche diode

Data sheet | Insulation monitoring relay CM-IWS.1 - 9

 Input circuit - Control circuits S1 - S2 - S3
Control inputs - volt free S1-S3 remote test
S2-S3 remote reset
Maximum switching current in the control circuit 1 mA
Maximum cable length to the control inputs 50 m - 100 pF/m (164 ft - 30.5 pF/ft)
Minimum control pulse length 150 ms
No-load voltage at the control input 24 V DC

User interface

Indication of operational states

Control supply voltage U green LED
Fault message F red LED
Relay status R yellow LED

Details see table "LEDs, status information and fault messages" on page 8 and "Function descriptions/diagrams" on page 6.

Operating elements and controls

Adjustment of threshold value Ran R.1 rotary switch, 10 kȍ steps for the tens figure
R.2 rotary switch, 1 kȍ steps for the units figure

Output circuits

Kind of output relay, 1 c/o (SPDT) contact

Operating principle closed-circuit principle1)
Contact material AgNi alloy, Cd free
Rated operational voltage (IEC/EN 60947-1) 250 V AC / 300 V DC
Min. switching voltage / Min. switching current 24 V / 10 mA
Max. switching voltage / Max. switching current see "Load limits curves" on page 13
Rated operational current Ie AC12 (resistive) at 230 V 4A
(IEC/EN 60947-5-1) AC15 (inductive) at 230 V 3A
DC12 (resistive) at 24 V 4A
DC13 (inductive) at 24 V 2A
AC rating (UL 508) Utilization category (Control Circuit Rating Code) B 300, pilot duty general purpose
(250 V, 4 A, cos ij 0.75)
max. rated operational voltage 250 V AC
max. continuous thermal current at B 300 4 A
max. making/breaking apparent power at B 300 3600/360 VA

Mechanical lifetime 30 x 10 6 switching cycles

Electrical lifetime AC12, 230 V, 4 A 0.1 x 106 switching cycles
Max. fuse rating to achieve short-circuit protection n/c contact 6 A fast-acting
n/o contact 10 A fast-acting
Conventional thermal current Ith (IEC/EN 60947-1) 4A

1) Closed-circuit principle: Output relay(s) de-energize(s) if measured value falls below the adjusted threshold value Ran

10 - Insulation monitoring relay CM-IWS.1 | Data sheet

General data
MTBF on request
Duty time 100 %
Dimensions (W x H x D) product dimensions 22.5 x 85.6 x 103.7 mm (0.89 x 3.37 x 4.08 in)
packaging dimensions 97 x 109 x 30 mm (3.82 x 4.29 x 1.18 in)
Weight Screw connection Easy Connect Technology
technology (push-in)
net weight 0.148 kg (0.326 lb) 0.137 kg (0.302 lb)
gross weight 0.173 kg (0.382 lb) 0.162 kg (0.357 lb)
Mounting DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715),
snap-on mounting without any tool
Mounting position any
Minimum distance to other units not necessary
Material of housing UL 94 V-0
Degree of protection housing IP50
terminals IP20

Electrical connection
Screw connection Easy Connect
technology Technology (Push-in)
Wire size fine-strand with(out) 1 x 0.5-2.5 mm² 2 x 0.5-1.5 mm²
wire end ferrule (1 x 20-14 AWG) (2 x 20-16 AWG)
2 x 0.5-1.5 mm²
(2 x 20-16 AWG)
rigid 1 x 0.5-4 mm² 2 x 0.5-1.5 mm²
(1 x 20-12 AWG) (2 x 20-16 AWG)
2 x 0.5-2.5 mm²
(2 x 20-14 AWG)
Stripping length 8 mm (0.32 in)
Tightening torque 0.6 - 0.8 Nm -
(5.31 - 7.08 lb.in)

Environmental data

Ambient temperature ranges operation -25...+60 °C

storage -40...+85 °C
transport -40...+85 °C
Climatic category IEC/EN 60721-3-3 3K5 (no condensation, no ice formation)
Damp heat, cyclic IEC/EN 60068-2-30 6 x 24 h cycle, 55 °C, 95 % RH
Vibration, sinusoidal IEC/EN 60255-21-1 Class 2
Shock, half-sine IEC/EN 60255-21-2 Class 2

Data sheet | Insulation monitoring relay CM-IWS.1 - 11

 Isolation data

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp supply circuit / measuring circuit 6 kV

(IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60664-1) supply circuit / output circuit 6 kV
measuring circuit / output circuit 6 kV
Pollution degree (IEC/EN 60664-1) 3
Overvoltage category (IEC/EN 60664-1) III
Rated insulation voltage U i supply circuit / measuring circuit 300 V
(IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60664-1) supply circuit / output circuit 300 V
measuring circuit / output circuit 300 V
Basic insulation for rated control supply supply circuit / measuring circuit 250 V AC / 300 V DC
voltage (IEC/EN 60664-1) supply circuit / output circuit 250 V AC / 300 V DC
measuring circuit / output circuit 250 V AC / 300 V DC
Protective separation supply circuit / output circuit 250 V AC / 250 V DC
(IEC/EN 61140, EN 50178) supply circuit / measuring circuit 250 V AC / 250 V DC
measuring circuit / output circuit 250 V AC / 250 V DC
Test voltage, routine test supply circuit / output circuit 2.32 kV, 50 Hz, 2 s
(IEC/EN 60255-5, IEC/EN 61010-1) supply circuit / measuring circuit 2.32 kV, 50 Hz, 2 s
measuring circuit / output circuit 2.2 kV, 50 Hz, 1 s

Standards

Product standard IEC/EN 61557-8, IEC/EN 60255-6

Other standards EN 50178
Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
RoHS Directive 2002/95/EC

Electromagnetic compatibility

Interference immunity to IEC/EN 61000-6-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61326-2-4

electrostatic discharge IEC/EN 61000-4-2 Level 3, 6 kV / 8 kV
radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field IEC/EN 61000-4-3 Level 3, 10 V/m (1 GHz) / 3 V/m (2 GHz) / 1 V/m (2.7 GHz)
electrical fast transient/burst IEC/EN 61000-4-4 Level 3, 2 kV / 5 kHz
surge IEC/EN 61000-4-5 Level 3, installation class 3, supply circuit and
measuring circuit 1 kV L-L, 2 kV L-earth
conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency IEC/EN 61000-4-6 Level 3, 10 V
fields
voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations IEC/EN 61000-4-11 Class 3
harmonics and interharmonics IEC/EN 61000-4-13 Class 3
Interference emission IEC/EN 61000-6-3, IEC/EN 61000-6-4
high-frequency radiated IEC/CISPR 22, EN 55022 Class B
high-frequency conducted IEC/CISPR 22, EN 55022 Class B

12 - Insulation monitoring relay CM-IWS.1 | Data sheet

Technical diagrams

Load limits curves

V V
300 300
V 200 V 200

100 100
80 80
60 60
50 50
40 40
30 30
20 20

2CDC 252 194 F0205

2CDC 252 193 F0205

10 10
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 4 6 10 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 4 6 10
I A I A

AC load (resistive) DC load (resistive)

1.0

Switching cycles
0.9

0.8
F
0.7

0.6
250 V
2CDC 252 192 F0205

0.5 resistive load

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
cos ϕ

2CDC 252 148 F0206

Derating factor F at inductive AC load

Switching current [A]

Contact lifetime

Data sheet | Insulation monitoring relay CM-IWS.1 - 13

 Dimensions
in mm and inches

113.4 4.47”
105.9 4.17” 22.5 0.89”

85.6 3.37”

2CDC 252 009 F0011

103.7 4.08”

CM-IWS.1 - Insulation monitoring relay

Accessories

8 0.32”
22.5 0.89” 4.8 0.19”

68 2.68”
0.453”
11.5
0.256”

62.5 2.461”
6.5

0.315”
2CDC 252 008 F0010

2CDC 252 186 F0005

2CDC 252 010 F0011

0.394”

0.787”

3A11
8
10

20

60 2.362” 20 front to back

110.5 4.31”
70 2.756” 0.787”
ADP.01 - Adapter for screw mounting MAR.01 - Marker label for devices COV.11 - Sealable transparent cover
without DIP switches

Further documentation

Document title Document type Document number

Electronic products and relays Catalog 2CDC 110 004 C020x
CM-IWS.1, CM-IWS.2 Instruction sheet 1SVC 730 550 M0000

You can find the documentation on the internet at www.abb.com/lowvoltage -> Control Products ->
Electronic Relays and Controls -> Insulation monitors.

14 - Insulation monitoring relay CM-IWS.1 | Data sheet

Contact us

ABB STOTZ-KONTAKT GmbH

Document number 2CDC 112 195 D0201 (08.2012)

P. O. Box 10 16 80
69006 Heidelberg, Germany
Phone: +49 (0) 6221 7 01-0
Fax: +49 (0) 6221 7 01-13 25
E-mail: info.desto@de.abb.com

You can find the address of your

local sales organisation on the
ABB home page
http://www.abb.com/contacts
-> Low Voltage Products and Systems

Note:
We reserve the right to make technical changes
or modify the contents of this document without
prior notice. With regard to purchase orders, the
agreed particulars shall prevail. ABB AG does
not accept any responsibility whatsoever for
potential errors or possible lack of information in
this document.

We reserve all rights in this document and in

the subject matter and illustrations contained
therein. Any reproduction, disclosure to third
parties or utilization of its contents – in whole
or in parts – is forbidden without prior written
consent of ABB AG.

Copyright© 2012 ABB

All rights reserved
 Technical data KFD2-SR2-Ex2.2S

Input/power supply safe electrical isolation acc. to IEC/EN 60079-11, voltage peak value 375 V
Directive conformity
Directive 94/9/EC EN 60079-0: 2009 , EN 60079-11:2007 , EN 60079-15:2005 , EN 61241-11:2006
International approvals
FM approval
Control drawing 116-0035
CSA approval
Control drawing 116-0047
General information
Supplementary information EC-Type Examination Certificate, Statement of Conformity, Declaration of Conformity, Attestation of
Conformity and instructions have to be observed where applicable. For information see www.pepperl-
fuchs.com.
181284_eng.xml
Date of issue 2013-04-10
Release date 2013-03-14 13:26

Refer to General Notes on the Information in the Pepperl+Fuchs Product Documentation Copyright Pepperl+Fuchs
Pepperl+Fuchs Group
www.pepperl-fuchs.com
USA: +1 330 486 0002
pa-info@us.pepperl-fuchs.com
Germany: +49 621 776 2222
pa-info@de.pepperl-fuchs.com
Singapore: +65 6779 9091
pa-info@sg.pepperl-fuchs.com
3
 Technical data KFD2-SR2-Ex2.2S

Configuration

Switch position
S Function Position
1 Mode of operation with high input current I
Channel I (relay) with low input current II
energized
2 Mode of operation with high input current I
1
4
2
5
3
6
Channel II (relay) with low input current II
energized
1 3 Line fault detection ON I
OFF II
OUT CHK PWR
2
S1
1
S1
1

S2 S2
2
2

S3
Operating status
3

S3
3

7 8 9

Control circuit Input signal

10 11 12
13 14 15
I II
Initiator high impedance/ low input current
contact opened
Initiator low impedance/ high input current
contact closed
Lead breakage, Line fault
lead short-circuit

Factory settings: switch 1, 2 and 3 in position I

Accessories

Power feed module KFD2-EB2

The power feed module is used to supply the devices with 24 V DC via the Power Rail. The fuse-protected power feed module
can supply up to 150 individual devices depending on the power consumption of the devices. A galvanically isolated mechanical
contact uses the Power Rail to transmit collective error messages.

Power Rail UPR-03

The Power Rail UPR-03 is a complete unit consisting of the electrical inset and an aluminium profile rail 35 mm x 15 mm. To make
electrical contact, the devices are simply engaged.

Profile Rail K-DUCT with Power Rail

The profile rail K-DUCT is an aluminum profile rail with Power Rail insert and two integral cable ducts for system and field cables.
Due to this assembly no additional cable guides are necessary.

Power Rail and Profile Rail must not be fed via the device terminals of the individual devices!
181284_eng.xml
Date of issue 2013-04-10
Release date 2013-03-14 13:26

Refer to General Notes on the Information in the Pepperl+Fuchs Product Documentation Copyright Pepperl+Fuchs
Pepperl+Fuchs Group
www.pepperl-fuchs.com
USA: +1 330 486 0002
pa-info@us.pepperl-fuchs.com
Germany: +49 621 776 2222
pa-info@de.pepperl-fuchs.com
Singapore: +65 6779 9091
pa-info@sg.pepperl-fuchs.com
4